Garmin | GMA™ 35 | Garmin GMA™ 35 GTN 725/750 Pilot's Guide

Garmin GMA™ 35 GTN 725/750 Pilot's Guide
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
GTN 725/750
Pilot’s Guide
Charts
Flight Plan
Procedures
Nearest
Waypoint Info
Services
Utilities
System
© 2011-2017 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software v6.30 or later. Some differences in operation may be observed
when comparing the information in this manual to later software versions.
At Garmin, we value your opinion. For comments about this guide, please e-mail:
Techpubs.Salem@garmin.com
www.flyGarmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated,
downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin.
Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a
hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for personal use, provided that such electronic or printed
copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any
unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
This part shall comply with Garmin Banned and Restricted Substances document, 001-00211-00.
Garmin®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. Garmin SVT™,
Telligence™, and Smart Airspace™ are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be
used without the express permission of Garmin.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; StormScope® and SkyWatch® are registered trademarks of L-3
Communications; Sirius and XM are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.; Iridium® is a registered trademark of Iridium
Communications Inc.; United States radar data provided by NOAA; European radar data collected and provided by
Meteo France. SD and SDHC Logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC; the Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license.
August 2017
Printed in the U.S.A.
LIMITED WARRANTY
All Garmin avionics products are warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for:
two years from the date of purchase for new Remote-Mount and Panel-Mount products; one year
from the date of purchase for new portable products and any purchased newly-overhauled products;
six months for newly-overhauled products exchanged through a Garmin Authorized Service Center;
and 90 days for factory repaired or newly-overhauled products exchanged at Garmin in lieu of repair.
Within the applicable period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that
fail in normal use. Such repairs or replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts
or labor, provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost. This warranty
does not apply to: (i) cosmetic damage, such as scratches, nicks and dents; (ii) consumable parts,
such as batteries, unless product damage has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship;
(iii) damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, water, flood, fire, or other acts of nature or external
causes; (iv) damage caused by service performed by anyone who is not an authorized service
provider of Garmin; or (v) damage to a product that has been modified or altered without the written
permission of Garmin. In addition, Garmin reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against
products or services that are obtained and/or used in contravention of the laws of any country.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING
UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY
VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace (with a new or newly-overhauled replacement
product) the product or software or offer a full refund of the purchase price at its sole discretion.
SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.
Online Auction Purchases: Products purchased through online auctions are not eligible for
warranty coverage. Online auction confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification. To obtain
warranty service, an original or copy of the sales receipt from the original retailer is required. Garmin
will not replace missing components from any package purchased through an online auction.
International Purchases: A separate warranty may be provided by international distributors for
devices purchased outside the United States depending on the country. If applicable, this warranty is
provided by the local in-country distributor and this distributor provides local service for your device.
Distributor warranties are only valid in the area of intended distribution. Devices purchased in the
United States or Canada must be returned to the Garmin service center in the United Kingdom, the
United States, Canada, or Taiwan for service.
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in
locating a Service Center near you, visit www.flyGarmin.com.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
i
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated
upon the use of the terrain function. The GTN 7XX Terrain Proximity feature
is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of
surroundings during flight. Terrain Proximity is only to be used as an aid
for terrain avoidance and is not certified for use in applications requiring
a certified terrain awareness system. Terrain data is obtained from third
party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of
the terrain data.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory
in nature and should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and
terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical charts
for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
WARNING: The GTN 7XX has a very high degree of functional integrity.
However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or
self-test capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical.
Although unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur
without a fault indication shown by the GTN 7XX. It is thus the responsibility
of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of cross-checking with
all redundant or correlated information available in the cockpit.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
WARNING: The altitude calculated by GPS receivers is geometric height
above Mean Sea Level and could vary significantly from the altitude
displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the output from the GDC 74A/B
Air Data Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never
be used for vertical navigation. Always use pressure altitude displayed by
pressure altimeters in the aircraft.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used
in the GTN 7XX system must be updated regularly in order to ensure that
the information remains current. Pilots using an outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
Utilities
System
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for
primary navigation. Basemap data is intended only to supplement other
approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
ii
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
WARNING: Traffic information shown on the GTN 7XX is provided as an
aid in visually acquiring traffic. Pilots must maneuver the aircraft based
only upon ATC guidance or positive visual acquisition of conflicting traffic.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather
conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
WARNING: Never use datalinked weather to attempt to penetrate a
thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms,
and the Airman's Information Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding "by at
least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an intense
radar echo."
WARNING: For safety reasons, GTN 7XX operational procedures must be
learned on the ground.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and
understand all aspects of the GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide. Thoroughly
practice basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations,
carefully compare indications from the GTN 7XX to all available navigation
sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings,
charts, etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before
continuing navigation.
CAUTION: The United States government operates the Global Positioning
System and is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The
GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the GTN 7XX utilize GPS
as a precision electronic NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with
all NAVAIDs, information presented by the GTN 7XX can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
iii
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
CAUTION: The GTN 7XX does not contain any user-serviceable parts.
Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center.
Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and
the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
CAUTION: The display lens has a special anti-reflective coating that is very
sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING
AMMONIA WILL HARM THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important
to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner
that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
CAUTION: TFRs provided by datalink weather sources (i.e., FIS-B and
SiriusXM) are only advisory and do not replace a thorough preflight briefing
on TFR times and locations. Not all TFRs may be shown. To determine
accurate TFR information, verify with official sources, i.e., preflight planning
or flight service center.
Proc
Charts
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including
screen images of the GTN bezel and displays, are subject to change and
may not reflect the most current GTN software. Depictions of equipment
may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Terrain
Weather
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive
harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with California’s Proposition
65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please
refer to our website at www.garmin.com/prop65.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
NOTE: Canadian installations: In accordance with Canadian Radio
Specifications Standard 102 (RSS 102), RF field strength exposure to
persons from an antenna connected to this device should be limited to
60 V/m for controlled environment and 28 V/m for uncontrolled
environment.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
iv
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for
ground maneuvering. SafeTaxi and Chartview functions have not
been qualified to be used as an airport moving map display (AMMD).
SafeTaxi and Chartview should only be used by the flight crew to orient
themselves on the airport surface.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin
database-dependent avionics of the following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory
and advisory guidance and information related to the use of databases in
the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases obtained from Garmin
or Jeppesen are assured compliance with all data quality requirements
(DQRs) by virtue of a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA.
A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each database at
www.flyGarmin.com.
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment
is required for compliance with established FAA regulatory guidance, but
does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to
operate in accordance with established AFM(S) and regulatory guidance
or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed
equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s
database exclusion list as discussed in SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what
data may be incomplete. To see if an exclusions report exists for a specific
database, visit www.flyGarmin.com.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen
database alerts and consider their impact on the intended aircraft operation.
For a current list of aviation database alerts, visit www.flyGarmin.com.
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, visit
www.flyGarmin.com.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
v
Index
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies
related to database information. These discrepancies could come in the
form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles and
fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication
in the air or on the ground. To report an aviation database error, visit
www.flyGarmin.com.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
NOTE: The GTN touchscreen may not respond to touch commands if
condensation or moisture accumulate on the touchscreen.
FPL
NOTE: Depending on software version and configuration, GTN features
and screen images may differ from those shown in this manual.
Direct-To
Proc
NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC limits for Class B digital devices. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Furthermore, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
If this equipment does cause harmful
interference, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by relocating the
equipment or connecting the equipment to a
different circuit than the affected equipment.
Consult an authorized dealer or other qualified
avionics technician for additional help if these
remedies do not correct the problem.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
To obtain accessories for your unit, please
contact your Garmin dealer.
The display surface is coated with a special
anti-reflective coating which is very sensitive to
skin oils, waxes and abrasive cleaners. It is very
important to clean the lens using an eyeglass
lens cleaner which is specified as safe for antireflective coatings and a clean, lint-free cloth.
AC 90-100A Statement of Compliance.
The Garmin navigational unit meets the
performance and functional requirements of
FAA Advisory Circular (AC) 90-100A,
U.S. Terminal and En Route Area Navigation
(RNAV) Operations.
Operation of this device is subject to the
following conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
vi
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Product Registration and Support
Foreword
Help us better support you by completing your online registration today!
Have the serial number of your product handy and visit www.flyGarmin.com.
Getting
Started
Record of Revisions
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Part Number
190-01007-03
Revision
1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
Date
01/24/11
02/04/11
03/16/11
11/29/12
02/28/13
03/25/13
08/26/13
08/01/14
10/17/14
07/2015
01/2016
02/2016
03/2016
Description
Initial Release.
Production Release.
Update information.
Updates for software v3.0.
Updates for software v4.0.
Updates for software v4.10.
Updates for software v5.0.
Updates for software v5.11.
Updates for software v5.12.
Updates for software v6.00.
Updates for software v6.10.
Minor edits.
No content change. Updated file for
printer.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
09/2016 Updates for software v6.20.
08/2017 Updates for software v6.30.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
vii
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
This page intentionally left blank
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
viii
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Table of Contents
Foreword
Limited Warranty................................................................................................ i
Product Registration and Support.....................................................................vii
Welcome...................................................................................................... xxvii
About This Guide.......................................................................................... xxvii
Electronic Document Features....................................................................... xxvii
Conventions................................................................................................ xxviii
1
Getting Started.................................................................................... 1-1
1.1
Model Descriptions...............................................................................1-1
1.1.1
GTN 725............................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2
GTN 750............................................................................... 1-2
About This Pilot’s Guide........................................................................1-2
1.2.1
Conventions.......................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2
Using the Touchscreen........................................................... 1-2
Product Description...............................................................................1-3
1.3.1
Datacard .............................................................................. 1-4
1.3.1.1 Inserting a Datacard.......................................................... 1-4
1.3.2
Pilot Controls........................................................................ 1-4
1.3.2.1 Volume/Squelch Knob............................................................ 1-4
1.3.2.2 Large/Small Concentric Knobs................................................ 1-5
1.3.2.3 HOME Key............................................................................. 1-5
1.3.2.4 Direct-To Key......................................................................... 1-5
1.3.2.5 Touchscreen Keys.................................................................. 1-6
Unit Power Up......................................................................................1-6
1.4.1
Start-Up Screens.................................................................... 1-6
1.4.2
Database Verification and Fuel Settings.................................. 1-7
System Operation...............................................................................1-11
1.5.1
Using the Touchscreen Key Controls..................................... 1-11
1.5.2
System Page........................................................................ 1-11
1.5.2.1 System Setup Values............................................................ 1-12
1.5.2.2 Units Settings Values........................................................... 1-13
1.5.2.3 Alerts Settings Values.......................................................... 1-13
1.5.2.4 Audio Values....................................................................... 1-13
1.5.2.5 Backlight Values.................................................................. 1-13
1.5.2.6 Connext Setup.................................................................... 1-14
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
ix
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
1.5.2.7 Voice Commands................................................................ 1-14
1.5.3
Dual GTN Installations......................................................... 1-15
1.6 Direct-To Navigation...........................................................................1-16
1.6.1
Direct-To a Waypoint........................................................... 1-16
1.6.2
Direct-To a Flight Plan Waypoint.......................................... 1-16
1.6.3
Direct-To a Nearest Airport.................................................. 1-16
1.7 Selecting Com/Nav Frequencies...........................................................1-17
1.8 Flight Planning...................................................................................1-19
1.8.1
Creating a Flight Plan.......................................................... 1-19
1.9 VFR and IFR Procedures......................................................................1-20
1.10 Dead Reckoning..................................................................................1-21
1.11 FastFind Predictive Waypoint Entry......................................................1-22
1.11.1
FastFind With Waypoint Info.........................................................1-22
1.11.2
FastFind With A Flight Plan.................................................. 1-23
2
Audio and Transponder Controls (Optional)........................................ 2-1
2.1
Transponder Operation..........................................................................2-1
2.1.1
Select Transponder................................................................. 2-2
2.1.2
IDENT................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.3
Standby................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.4
Ground................................................................................. 2-3
2.1.5
On........................................................................................ 2-3
2.1.6
Altitude Reporting................................................................. 2-3
2.1.7
VFR....................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.8
Selecting a Squawk Code...................................................... 2-4
2.1.9
Flight ID................................................................................ 2-5
2.1.10
GDL 88 ADS-B Reporting....................................................... 2-5
2.1.11
Extended Squitter Transmission.............................................. 2-7
2.1.12
TCAS II Transponder Mode Controls....................................... 2-8
2.2 Audio Panel Operation..........................................................................2-9
2.2.1
Mic Selection....................................................................... 2-11
2.2.1.1 Mic Window Mic Selection................................................... 2-11
2.2.1.2 Audio Panel Page Mic Selection........................................... 2-11
2.2.2
Monitor............................................................................... 2-12
2.2.3
Passenger Address............................................................... 2-12
2.2.4
3D Audio............................................................................. 2-12
2.2.5
Cabin Speaker Selection and Volume.................................... 2-13
2.2.6
Marker Audio and Volume................................................... 2-14
x
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2.2.7
Marker Hi Sense.................................................................. 2-15
2.2.8
Marker Beacon Annunciations............................................. 2-15
2.2.9
Audio Split Mode................................................................ 2-16
2.2.10
Playback Controls................................................................ 2-17
2.3 Intercom Setup...................................................................................2-18
2.3.1
Set Pilot, Co-Pilot, & Passenger Volume and Squelch............ 2-21
2.3.2
Co-Pilot is Passenger........................................................... 2-22
2.3.3
Music 1 and Music 2 Setup.................................................. 2-23
2.3.4
Telephone Setup.................................................................. 2-24
2.3.5
Bluetooth Setup.................................................................. 2-25
2.4 Telligence™ Voice Command..............................................................2-26
3
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
NAV/COM (GTN 750 NAV/COM)........................................................... 3-1
3.1
3.2
3.3
Volume.................................................................................................3-2
Squelch................................................................................................3-2
Com Window and Tuning......................................................................3-3
3.3.1
Com Frequency Finding......................................................... 3-5
3.3.1.1 Find Recent Frequencies........................................................ 3-6
3.3.1.2 Find Nearest Frequencies....................................................... 3-6
3.3.1.3 Find Flight Plan Frequencies................................................... 3-9
3.3.1.4 Find User Frequencies............................................................ 3-9
3.3.2
Simple Frequency Entry........................................................ 3-10
3.3.3
Adding a New User Frequency............................................. 3-11
3.3.4
Emergency Frequency.......................................................... 3-13
3.3.5
Stuck Microphone............................................................... 3-14
3.3.6
Remote Frequency Selection Control.................................... 3-14
3.3.7
Reverse Frequency Look-Up................................................. 3-14
3.4 Com Frequency Monitoring.................................................................3-15
3.5 NAV (VOR/Localizer/Glideslope) Receiver Operations...........................3-16
3.5.1
Ident Audio and Volume...................................................... 3-16
3.5.2
Nav Tuning Window............................................................. 3-17
3.5.3
Nav Frequency Finding........................................................ 3-18
4
Foreword
Flight Plans.......................................................................................... 4-1
4.1
Creating a New Flight Plan...................................................................4-2
4.1.1
Creating a New Flight Plan in the Catalog.............................. 4-2
4.1.2
Creating a New Flight Plan from the Active Flight Plan........... 4-3
4.2 Active Flight Plan Page.........................................................................4-4
4.2.1
Waypoint Options.................................................................. 4-5
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
xi
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4.2.1.1 Activate Leg.......................................................................... 4-6
4.2.1.2 Insert Before......................................................................... 4-7
4.2.1.3 Insert After............................................................................ 4-9
4.2.1.4 Remove................................................................................. 4-9
4.2.1.5 Load Procedures.................................................................. 4-10
4.2.1.6 Waypoint Info..................................................................... 4-11
4.2.2
Airways............................................................................... 4-12
4.2.3
Load Hold at Waypoint ....................................................... 4-16
4.2.3.1 Hold at Waypoint................................................................. 4-16
4.2.3.2 Removing a Hold................................................................. 4-17
4.2.4
Load Search and Rescue Patterns (Optional)......................... 4-18
4.2.4.1 Creating a Parallel Track Pattern........................................... 4-20
4.2.4.2 Creating a Sector Search Pattern.......................................... 4-22
4.2.4.3 Creating an Expanding Square Pattern................................. 4-23
4.2.4.4 Creating an Orbit Pattern..................................................... 4-24
4.3 Flight Plan Menu................................................................................4-25
4.3.1
Store Flight Plan.................................................................. 4-26
4.3.2
Invert Flight Plan................................................................. 4-26
4.3.3
Parallel Track....................................................................... 4-27
4.3.4
Edit Data Fields................................................................... 4-30
4.3.5
Flight Plan Catalog Route Options....................................... 4-32
4.3.5.1 Catalog Route Option - Activate.......................................... 4-33
4.3.5.2 Catalog Route Option - Invert & Activate.............................. 4-33
4.3.5.3 Catalog Route Option - Preview........................................... 4-34
4.3.5.4 Catalog Route Option - Edit................................................. 4-34
4.3.5.5 Catalog Route Option - Copy............................................... 4-35
4.3.5.6 Catalog Route Option - Delete............................................. 4-36
4.3.6
Delete Flight Plan................................................................ 4-37
4.3.6.1 Delete Flight Plan from Catalog........................................... 4-37
4.3.6.2 Delete All Flight Plans from Catalog..................................... 4-38
4.3.6.3 Delete Active Flight Plan...................................................... 4-39
4.3.7
Preview Flight Plan.............................................................. 4-39
4.3.7.1 Previewing the Active Flight Plan......................................... 4-40
4.3.7.2 Previewing a Flight Plan in the Catalog................................ 4-40
4.4 Graphically Editing a Flight Plan..........................................................4-41
4.5 Import Flight Plans with Connext........................................................4-41
4.5.1
Operation............................................................................ 4-42
4.5.2
Potential Errors.................................................................... 4-43
xii
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4.6
Import Flight Plans with a Datacard....................................................4-45
4.6.1
Potential Errors.................................................................... 4-47
5
Direct-To............................................................................................... 5-1
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
6
Direct-To Navigation.............................................................................5-1
Direct-To a Flight Plan Waypoint............................................................5-3
Direct-To a Nearest Airport....................................................................5-5
Removing a Direct-To Course................................................................5-7
Direct-To Map Waypoint........................................................................5-8
Off-Route Direct-To Course...................................................................5-9
Graphically Editing a Direct-To Route....................................................5-9
Direct-To a User-Defined Hold...............................................................5-9
Direct-To a Search and Rescue Pattern................................................5-12
Procedures........................................................................................... 6-1
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
Basic Approach Operations...................................................................6-2
Selecting a Departure............................................................................6-4
Selecting an Arrival...............................................................................6-7
Selecting an Approach........................................................................6-10
Approaches with Procedure Turns........................................................6-14
Flying the Missed Approach................................................................6-14
Flying an Approach with a Hold...........................................................6-15
Flying a DME Arc Approach.................................................................6-16
Radius-to-Fix (RF) Approaches.............................................................6-16
Vectors to Final...................................................................................6-17
ILS Approaches (GTN 750 Only)..........................................................6-18
RNAV Approach Procedures................................................................6-19
6.12.1
Flying the LPV Approach...................................................... 6-20
6.12.2
Flying the LP Approach........................................................ 6-21
6.13 Visual Approach Procedures................................................................6-23
6.14 Points to Remember for All Procedures................................................6-26
6.15 Points to Remember for Localizer or VOR-based Approaches................6-27
6.16 Enabling Autopilot Outputs for the King KAP140/KFC225....................6-29
7
Charts................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1
Chart Page...........................................................................................7-3
7.1.1
Airport Selection.................................................................... 7-4
7.1.2
Info....................................................................................... 7-5
7.1.3
Information........................................................................... 7-5
7.1.4
Approaches........................................................................... 7-6
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
xiii
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
7.1.5
Departures............................................................................ 7-7
7.1.6
Arrivals................................................................................. 7-8
7.1.7
Airport Info........................................................................... 7-9
7.1.8
Full/Split Screen................................................................... 7-10
7.2 Chart Menu Options...........................................................................7-11
7.2.1
Chart Layers - All................................................................. 7-12
7.2.2
Chart Layers - Header.......................................................... 7-12
7.2.3
Chart Layers - Plan.............................................................. 7-12
7.2.4
Chart Layers - Profile........................................................... 7-13
7.2.5
Chart Layers - Minimums..................................................... 7-13
7.2.6
Invert Colors....................................................................... 7-14
7.2.7
Geo-Referenced Aircraft Position.......................................... 7-14
7.3 ChartView Cycle Number and Revision................................................7-15
7.4 FliteCharts® .......................................................................................7-16
7.5
SafeTaxi® ..........................................................................................7-17
7.5.1
Using SafeTaxi® .................................................................. 7-18
7.5.2
Hot Spot Information........................................................... 7-18
7.5.3
SafeTaxi® Cycle Number and Revision.................................. 7-19
8
Waypoint Info...................................................................................... 8-1
8.1
8.2
Waypoint Selection...............................................................................8-3
Airport..................................................................................................8-4
8.2.1
Info....................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.2
Preview................................................................................. 8-5
8.2.3
Procedures............................................................................ 8-6
8.2.4
Runways............................................................................... 8-7
8.2.5
Frequencies........................................................................... 8-8
8.2.6
Weather (WX) Data............................................................... 8-9
8.2.7
NOTAM Pages..................................................................... 8-10
8.2.8
Helipads.............................................................................. 8-10
8.2.9
Nearest VRPs....................................................................... 8-11
Intersection (INT)................................................................................8-12
VOR...................................................................................................8-13
VRP....................................................................................................8-14
NDB...................................................................................................8-15
User Waypoints (User).........................................................................8-16
8.7.1
Select User Waypoint by Name............................................ 8-17
8.7.2
Select User Waypoint from a List.......................................... 8-17
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
Appendix
Index
xiv
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
8.7.3
Edit User Waypoint.............................................................. 8-17
8.7.4
Delete User Waypoint.......................................................... 8-17
8.7.5
Delete All User Waypoints.................................................... 8-18
8.8 Create Waypoint.................................................................................8-19
8.8.1
Mark On Target................................................................... 8-20
8.8.2
Waypoint Location Based on LAT/LON................................. 8-21
8.8.3
Waypoint Location Based on Two Radials........................................8-22
8.8.4
Waypoint Location Based on Radial and Distance............................8-23
8.9 Import User Waypoints (Datacard).......................................................8-24
9
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Map...................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1
Map Menu...........................................................................................9-3
9.1.1
Map Overlays........................................................................ 9-4
9.1.1.1 Overlay Priority...................................................................... 9-4
9.1.1.2 Topo..................................................................................... 9-5
9.1.1.3 Airways................................................................................. 9-6
9.1.1.4 Terrain.................................................................................. 9-7
9.1.1.5 NEXRAD (Optional)............................................................... 9-8
9.1.1.6 Charts (Optional)................................................................... 9-9
9.1.1.7 StormScope® (Optional)....................................................... 9-11
9.1.1.8 Radar (Optional).................................................................. 9-12
9.1.1.9 Traffic (Optional).................................................................. 9-12
9.1.2
Map Setup.......................................................................... 9-13
9.1.2.1 Map.................................................................................... 9-15
9.1.2.2 Aviation.............................................................................. 9-25
9.1.2.3 Land................................................................................... 9-27
9.1.2.4 Airspace.............................................................................. 9-27
9.1.2.5 Airway Range...................................................................... 9-30
9.1.2.6 Traffic (Optional).................................................................. 9-31
9.1.2.7 Weather (Optional).............................................................. 9-32
9.1.3
Change User Fields.............................................................. 9-33
9.1.4
Map Detail.......................................................................... 9-37
9.2 Map Panning......................................................................................9-39
9.3 Map Controls......................................................................................9-42
9.3.1
Pan Map Mode................................................................... 9-42
9.3.2
Create Waypoint.................................................................. 9-42
9.3.3
Graphically Edit Flight Plan Mode........................................ 9-43
9.3.3.1 Adding a Waypoint Within an Existing Flight Plan................. 9-43
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
xv
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.3.3.2 Adding a Waypoint to the End of an Existing Flight Plan....... 9-45
9.3.3.3 Removing a Waypoint from an Existing Flight Plan............... 9-45
9.3.3.4 Creating a Flight Plan Without an Existing Flight Plan........... 9-46
CDI (GTN 750 only)............................................................................9-48
OBS....................................................................................................9-49
Map Symbols......................................................................................9-50
Flight Plan Depiction...........................................................................9-51
10 Traffic................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1 Traffic Pop-Up.....................................................................................10-1
10.2 Traffic Test..........................................................................................10-2
10.3 TIS (Optional).....................................................................................10-3
10.3.1
TIS Symbology..................................................................... 10-4
10.3.2
Traffic Page......................................................................... 10-5
10.3.3
Displaying Traffic on the Traffic Page..................................... 10-6
10.3.4
Altitude Display................................................................... 10-6
10.3.5
TIS Limitations..................................................................... 10-7
10.3.6
TIS Alerts............................................................................. 10-9
10.3.7
TIS System Status.............................................................. 10-10
10.4 TAS (Optional)..................................................................................10-12
10.4.1
TAS Symbology.................................................................. 10-13
10.4.2
Displaying and Operating Traffic (TAS Systems).....................10-14
10.4.2.1 Switching from Standby Mode to Operating Mode............. 10-14
10.4.2.2 Range Ring....................................................................... 10-15
10.4.3
Altitude Display................................................................. 10-15
10.4.4
Traffic System Status.......................................................... 10-16
10.5 ADS-B Traffic.....................................................................................10-17
10.5.1
Traffic Applications - SURF, AIRB, etc................................... 10-19
10.5.2
ADS-B Traffic Menu........................................................... 10-19
10.5.2.1 ADS-B Status..................................................................... 10-19
10.5.2.2 TCAS Status...................................................................... 10-20
10.5.2.3 Test................................................................................... 10-20
10.5.2.4 Motion Vector................................................................... 10-20
10.5.2.5 Vector Duration................................................................. 10-23
10.5.2.6 Altitude Filter.................................................................... 10-23
10.5.2.7 On Scene Mode................................................................. 10-24
10.5.3
Rotorcraft Traffic Page Orientation...................................... 10-24
10.6 RYAN TCAD 9900BX with the GDL 88...............................................10-25
xvi
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.6.1
Ryan TCAD Description...................................................... 10-25
10.6.2
Altitude Mode................................................................... 10-26
10.6.3
TCAD Control Menu.......................................................... 10-27
10.6.3.1 Traffic Audio...................................................................... 10-28
10.6.3.2 Field Elevation................................................................... 10-28
10.6.3.3 Baro.................................................................................. 10-29
10.6.3.4 Operate............................................................................. 10-29
10.6.3.5 Ground Mode.................................................................... 10-29
10.6.3.6 Approach Mode................................................................ 10-29
10.7 TCAD 9900B Operation....................................................................10-30
10.7.1
Select Local Barometric Pressure........................................ 10-30
10.7.2
Select Active Shield............................................................ 10-31
10.7.3
TCAD 9900B Traffic Menu................................................. 10-31
10.7.3.1 Traffic Audio...................................................................... 10-31
10.7.3.2 Shield Setup...................................................................... 10-32
10.7.3.3 Approach Mode................................................................ 10-33
10.8 TCAD 9900BX Operation..................................................................10-34
10.8.1
Select Local Barometric Pressure........................................ 10-34
10.8.2
Select Altitude Filter........................................................... 10-35
10.8.3
TCAD 9900BX Traffic Menu............................................... 10-35
10.8.3.1 Traffic Audio...................................................................... 10-36
10.8.3.2 Shield Setup...................................................................... 10-36
10.8.3.3 Approach Mode................................................................ 10-37
10.8.3.4 Ground Mode.................................................................... 10-37
10.9 TCAS II ............................................................................................10-38
10.9.1
TCAS II Theory of Operation............................................... 10-38
10.9.2
TCAS II with ADS-B............................................................ 10-40
10.9.3
TCAS II Alerts.................................................................... 10-41
10.9.3.1 Resolution Advisories......................................................... 10-43
10.9.4
TCAS II System Test........................................................... 10-45
10.9.5
TCAS II Operation.............................................................. 10-46
10.9.5.1 Altitude Display................................................................. 10-47
10.9.5.2 Traffic System Status.......................................................... 10-47
10.9.5.3 External Display................................................................. 10-47
11 Terrain................................................................................................ 11-1
11.1 Terrain Configurations.........................................................................11-1
11.2 General Database Information............................................................11-2
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
xvii
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11.2.1
Database Versions............................................................... 11-2
11.2.2
HTAWS Database Requirements........................................... 11-2
11.2.3
Database Updates............................................................... 11-2
11.2.4
Terrain Database Areas of Coverage..................................... 11-3
11.2.5
Obstacle Database Areas of Coverage.................................. 11-4
11.3 Terrain Proximity.................................................................................11-5
11.3.1
Displaying Terrain Proximity................................................. 11-6
11.3.1.1 Terrain Page 120° Arc or 360° Rings.................................... 11-7
11.3.1.2 Display Flight Plan on Terrain Page....................................... 11-7
11.3.1.3 Display Terrain and Obstacle Legend.................................... 11-7
11.3.2
Terrain Limitations............................................................... 11-8
11.4 TAWS-B (Optional)..............................................................................11-9
11.4.1
TAWS-B Requirements......................................................... 11-9
11.4.2
TAWS-B Limitations............................................................. 11-9
11.4.3
Computing GPS Altitude for TAWS..................................... 11-10
11.4.4
Baro-Corrected Altitude Versus GSL Altitude....................... 11-10
11.4.5
Using TAWS-B................................................................... 11-11
11.4.6
Displaying TAWS-B Data.................................................... 11-11
11.4.7
TAWS-B Page.................................................................... 11-13
11.4.7.1 Terrain Page Layers............................................................ 11-13
11.4.7.2 Terrain Page View.............................................................. 11-14
11.4.7.3 Terrain Page TAWS-B Selections......................................... 11-14
11.4.8
TAWS-B Alerts................................................................... 11-15
11.4.8.1 TAWS-B Alerting Colors and Symbology............................. 11-16
11.4.8.2 Excessive Descent Rate Alert.............................................. 11-18
11.4.8.3 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance.................................... 11-18
11.4.8.4 Premature Descent Alerting............................................... 11-19
11.4.8.5 Inhibiting/Enabling TAWS-B PDA/FLTA Alerting................... 11-20
11.4.8.6 Negative Climb Rate After Take-Off Alert (NCR).................. 11-20
11.4.8.7 Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO)............................................ 11-22
11.4.8.8 TAWS-B Not Available Alert............................................... 11-22
11.4.8.9 TAWS-B Failure Alert......................................................... 11-22
11.4.9
TAWS-B System Status....................................................... 11-22
11.5 HTAWS (Optional).............................................................................11-23
11.5.1
Introduction...................................................................... 11-23
11.5.1.1 Overview........................................................................... 11-23
11.5.1.2 Operating Criteria.............................................................. 11-23
11.5.1.3 Limitations........................................................................ 11-24
xviii
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.5.2
HTAWS Operation............................................................. 11-24
11.5.2.1 HTAWS Alerting................................................................. 11-24
11.5.2.2 Power Up.......................................................................... 11-25
11.5.3
HTAWS Page..................................................................... 11-25
11.5.3.1 View Selection................................................................... 11-26
11.5.3.2 HTAWS Inhibit................................................................... 11-27
11.5.3.3 External HTAWS Inhibit Control.......................................... 11-28
11.5.3.4 Reduced Protection Mode.................................................. 11-28
11.5.3.5 HTAWS Manual Test.......................................................... 11-29
11.5.3.6 HTAWS Legend.................................................................. 11-29
11.5.3.7 Flight Plan Overlay............................................................ 11-30
11.5.4
HTAWS Symbols................................................................ 11-31
11.5.5
HTAWS Alerts.................................................................... 11-33
11.5.5.1 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance.................................... 11-33
11.5.5.2 HTAWS Voice Call Out Aural Alert...................................... 11-34
11.5.5.3 HTAWS Voice Call Out Selection......................................... 11-35
11.5.5.4 HTAWS Not Available Alert................................................ 11-37
11.5.5.5 HTAWS Failure Alert.......................................................... 11-37
11.5.5.6 HTAWS Alert Summary...................................................... 11-37
11.5.6
Pilot Actions...................................................................... 11-39
11.6 TAWS-A (Optional)...........................................................................11-40
11.6.1
Introduction...................................................................... 11-40
11.6.1.1 Displaying TAWS-A Data.................................................... 11-42
11.6.2
TAWS-A Display................................................................ 11-43
11.6.3
TAWS-A Alerts................................................................... 11-46
11.6.3.1 TAWS-A Alerts Summary.................................................... 11-47
11.6.3.2 Excessive Descent Rate Alert.............................................. 11-51
11.6.3.3 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance.................................... 11-52
11.6.3.4 Premature Descent Alerting............................................... 11-52
11.6.3.5 Inhibiting/Enabling TAWS-A PDA/FLTA Alerting................... 11-53
11.6.3.6 Excessive Closure Rate Alert.............................................. 11-54
11.6.3.7 Flight Into Terrain Alert...................................................... 11-56
11.6.3.8 Negative Climb Rate After Take-Off Alert (NCR).....................11-58
11.6.3.9 Excessive Below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation Alert........ 11-59
11.6.3.10 Inhibiting GPWS Alerts (EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR)................ 11-61
11.6.4
Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO)............................................ 11-61
11.6.5
TAWS-A System Status...................................................... 11-62
11.6.6
TAWS-A Abnormal Operations........................................... 11-62
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
xix
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12 Weather............................................................................................. 12-1
12.1 SiriusXM Weather Products (Optional)......................................................................12-2
12.1.1
Displaying SiriusXM Weather............................................... 12-3
12.1.2
Weather Legend.................................................................. 12-5
12.1.3
Weather Map Orientation.................................................... 12-6
12.1.4
SiriusXM Product Age.......................................................... 12-7
12.1.5
NEXRAD............................................................................. 12-9
12.1.5.1 Reflectivity........................................................................ 12-11
12.1.5.2 NEXRAD Limitations.......................................................... 12-12
12.1.5.3 Animating NEXRAD........................................................... 12-13
12.1.6
Echo Tops.......................................................................... 12-15
12.1.7
Cloud Tops........................................................................ 12-16
12.1.8
Cell Movement.................................................................. 12-17
12.1.9
SIGMETs and AIRMETs...................................................... 12-18
12.1.10 County Warnings............................................................... 12-19
12.1.11 Freezing Level................................................................... 12-20
12.1.12 METARs............................................................................ 12-21
12.1.13 Cyclone............................................................................. 12-22
12.1.14 Lightning........................................................................... 12-23
12.1.15 City Forecast..................................................................... 12-24
12.1.16 Surface Analysis................................................................ 12-25
12.1.17 Winds Aloft....................................................................... 12-26
12.1.18 Icing................................................................................. 12-27
12.1.19 Turbulence........................................................................ 12-28
12.1.20 AIREP/PIREP...................................................................... 12-29
12.2 StormScope® Weather.......................................................................12-30
12.2.1
StormScope® (Optional)..................................................... 12-30
12.2.2
Clearing the StormScope® Page......................................... 12-32
12.2.3
Changing the StormScope® Display View........................... 12-32
12.2.4
Changing the StormScope® Data Mode.............................. 12-33
12.2.5
Changing the StormScope® Data Display Range................. 12-33
12.2.6
Displaying StormScope® Data on the Map Page................. 12-33
12.3 Weather Radar.................................................................................12-34
12.3.1
Garmin GWX Radar Description......................................... 12-34
12.3.1.1 Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar...................... 12-34
12.3.1.2 Antenna Beam Illumination............................................... 12-35
12.3.1.3 Radar Signal Attenuation................................................... 12-36
xx
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.3.2
12.3.2.1
12.3.2.2
12.3.2.3
12.3.3
12.3.3.1
12.3.3.2
Radar Signal Reflectivity.................................................... 12-37
Precipitation...................................................................... 12-37
Ground Returns................................................................. 12-38
Angle of Incidence............................................................. 12-38
Operating Distance............................................................ 12-39
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level (MPEL) (GWX 68)..... 12-39
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level (MPEL)
(Other Radars)................................................................... 12-39
12.3.4
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup.................................................... 12-40
12.3.5
Weather Mapping and Interpretation................................. 12-42
12.3.5.1 Weather display Interpretation........................................... 12-42
12.3.5.2 Thunderstorms.................................................................. 12-42
12.3.5.3 Tornadoes......................................................................... 12-44
12.3.5.4 Hail................................................................................... 12-45
12.4 GWX Radar Operation in Weather Mode...........................................12-46
12.4.1
Viewing Weather on the Weather Radar Page.................... 12-47
12.4.2
Configuring Weather Radar Page....................................... 12-48
12.4.3
Vertically Scanning a Storm Cell......................................... 12-49
12.4.4
Adjusting the Antenna Tilt Angle........................................ 12-50
12.4.5
Adjusting the Bearing Line................................................. 12-51
12.4.6
Adjusting Gain.................................................................. 12-52
12.4.7
Sector Scan....................................................................... 12-53
12.4.8
Weather Radar Menu........................................................ 12-54
12.4.8.1 Weather Attenuated Color Highlight (WATCH™)............... 12-54
12.4.8.2 Weather Alert.................................................................... 12-55
12.4.8.3 Antenna Stabilization........................................................ 12-56
12.4.8.4 Altitude Compensated Tilt (GWX 70 Only).......................... 12-56
12.4.8.5 Turbulence Detection (GWX 70 Only)................................. 12-56
12.4.8.6 Ground Clutter Suppression (GWX 70 Only)....................... 12-56
12.5 Connext Weather..............................................................................12-57
12.5.1
Using Connext Satellite Weather Products.......................... 12-58
12.5.2
Connext Weather Menu..................................................... 12-59
12.5.3
Connext Settings............................................................... 12-59
12.5.3.1 Connext Data Request....................................................... 12-60
12.5.3.2 Connext Data Request Coverage Region............................ 12-61
12.5.3.3 Connext Weather Map Orientation..................................... 12-61
12.5.4
Register with Connext....................................................... 12-62
12.5.5
Connext Weather Product Age........................................... 12-64
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
xxi
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12.5.6
TFRs.................................................................................. 12-65
12.5.7
Precipitation (PRECIP) Data............................................... 12-66
12.5.7.1 Animating Precipitation Data............................................. 12-67
12.5.8
Lightning........................................................................... 12-67
12.5.9
Infrared Satellite Data........................................................ 12-68
12.5.10 METARs............................................................................ 12-68
12.5.11 PIREPs.............................................................................. 12-70
12.5.12 Winds Aloft....................................................................... 12-71
12.5.13 SIGMETs and AIRMETs...................................................... 12-72
12.6 FIS-B Weather...................................................................................12-73
12.6.1
FIS-B Operation................................................................. 12-76
12.6.2
FIS-B NEXRAD................................................................... 12-77
12.6.2.1 NEXRAD Abnormalities...................................................... 12-77
12.6.2.2 NEXRAD Limitations.......................................................... 12-77
12.6.2.3 NEXRAD Intensity.............................................................. 12-78
12.6.2.4 NEXRAD........................................................................... 12-78
12.6.3
FIS-B TFRs......................................................................... 12-82
12.6.4
FIS-B METARs.................................................................... 12-83
12.6.5
FIS-B PIREPs...................................................................... 12-84
12.6.6
FIS-B Winds and Temperatures Aloft................................... 12-86
12.6.7
FIS-B SIGMETs and AIRMETs.............................................. 12-87
13 Nearest.............................................................................................. 13-1
13.1 Select a Nearest Page.........................................................................13-2
13.2 Nearest Airport...................................................................................13-2
13.3 Nearest Intersection (INT)...................................................................13-4
13.4 Nearest VOR.......................................................................................13-6
13.5 Nearest VRP.......................................................................................13-8
13.6 Nearest NDB.....................................................................................13-10
13.7 Nearest User Waypoint......................................................................13-11
13.8 Nearest Airspace...............................................................................13-12
13.9 Nearest ARTCC.................................................................................13-15
13.10 Nearest Flight Service Station (FSS)...................................................13-17
13.11 Nearest Weather Frequency (WX Freq)...............................................13-19
14 Services/Music................................................................................... 14-1
14.1 Music.................................................................................................14-2
14.2 Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services.........................................14-3
14.3 Music Operation.................................................................................14-4
xxii
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
14.3.1
Browsing Channels and Categories...................................... 14-5
14.3.2
Selecting an SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel by Number.... 14-6
14.3.3
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Volume........................................... 14-7
14.3.4
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel Presets............................. 14-8
14.3.4.1 Saving a Preset.................................................................... 14-8
14.3.4.2 Recalling a Preset................................................................ 14-8
14.3.5
GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting.................. 14-9
14.4 Iridium Phone Operation (Optional)...................................................14-11
14.4.1
Status............................................................................... 14-11
14.4.2
Making a Phone Call......................................................... 14-12
14.4.3
Answering a Phone Call.................................................... 14-14
14.4.4
Suppress Visuals................................................................ 14-15
14.4.5
Phone Volume................................................................... 14-16
14.4.6
SMS Text Operation........................................................... 14-16
14.4.6.1 SMS Text Messaging Menu................................................ 14-17
14.4.6.2 Composing a SMS Text Message........................................ 14-17
14.4.6.3 A Failed SMS Text Message................................................ 14-18
14.4.7
Position Reporting............................................................. 14-19
14.4.7.1 Status............................................................................... 14-20
14.4.7.2 Position Reporting Status................................................... 14-20
14.4.8
Contacts........................................................................... 14-21
14.4.8.1 Creating a Contact............................................................ 14-21
14.4.8.2 Using a Contact................................................................ 14-22
15 Utilities.............................................................................................. 15-1
15.1 Vertical Calculator (VCALC).................................................................15-3
15.1.1
Target Altitude..................................................................... 15-5
15.1.2
Altitude Type....................................................................... 15-5
15.1.3
Vertical Speed (VS) Profile.................................................... 15-6
15.1.4
Target Offset....................................................................... 15-7
15.1.5
Before/After Target Waypoint............................................... 15-7
15.1.6
Target Waypoint.................................................................. 15-8
15.1.7
Display VCALC Messages..................................................... 15-9
15.1.8
Restore VCALC Defaults....................................................... 15-9
15.2 Flight Timers.....................................................................................15-10
15.3 RAIM Prediction................................................................................15-11
15.4 Trip Planning....................................................................................15-12
15.4.1
Point-To-Point Mode.......................................................... 15-14
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
xxiii
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15.4.2
Flight Plan Mode............................................................... 15-19
15.5 Fuel Planning....................................................................................15-22
15.5.1
Point-To-Point Mode.......................................................... 15-23
15.5.2
Flight Plan Mode............................................................... 15-26
15.6 DALT/TAS/Winds...............................................................................15-28
15.7 Clean Screen Mode...........................................................................15-33
15.8 Scheduled Messages.........................................................................15-34
15.9 Checklists.........................................................................................15-36
15.9.1
Checklists Menu................................................................ 15-36
15.9.2
Viewing Checklists............................................................ 15-37
16
System.............................................................................................. 16-1
16.1 System Status.....................................................................................16-3
16.1.1
Serial Number and System ID............................................... 16-4
16.1.2
Version Information............................................................. 16-4
16.1.3
Database Information.......................................................... 16-4
16.2 GPS Status..........................................................................................16-4
16.2.1
GPS Status Page.................................................................. 16-4
16.2.2
Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS)....................... 16-8
16.2.3
Circle of Uncertainty............................................................ 16-9
16.2.4
GPS Faults......................................................................... 16-10
16.3 External LRUs...................................................................................16-11
16.3.1
GDL 69 (and GDL 69A) Status........................................... 16-11
16.3.2
GDL 88 or GTX 345 Status................................................ 16-13
16.3.3
GSR 56 Status................................................................... 16-14
16.4 Setup...............................................................................................16-15
16.4.1
Date/Time......................................................................... 16-16
16.4.2
Com Channel Spacing....................................................... 16-17
16.4.3
Reverse Frequency Look-Up............................................... 16-17
16.4.4
Nearest Airport Criteria...................................................... 16-18
16.4.5
Crossfill............................................................................. 16-20
16.4.5.1 GTN-to-GTN Crossfilling.................................................... 16-20
16.4.5.2 GTN-GNS Crossfilling........................................................ 16-21
16.4.6
CDI Scale Selection............................................................ 16-22
16.5 Alerts Settings..................................................................................16-24
16.6 Units Settings...................................................................................16-26
16.6.1
Setup Units....................................................................... 16-26
16.6.2
Setting a User-Configured (Manual) Nav Angle.................. 16-27
xxiv
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
16.6.3
Position Format Selection................................................... 16-30
16.7 User Fields........................................................................................16-32
16.8 Audio...............................................................................................16-35
16.9 Backlight Settings.............................................................................16-37
16.10 Connext Setup - GSR 56...................................................................16-38
16.11 Connext Setup - Flight Stream 210 and 510......................................16-38
16.11.1 Operation.......................................................................... 16-39
16.11.2 Pairing a Device................................................................. 16-40
16.12 Connext Setup – Other Bluetooth Devices.........................................16-41
16.13 Voice Command...............................................................................16-42
17 Messages........................................................................................... 17-1
18 Symbols.............................................................................................. 18-1
18.1 Map Page Symbols.............................................................................18-1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
18.6
18.7
18.8
18.9
SafeTaxi™ Symbols...........................................................................18-2
Traffic Symbols....................................................................................18-3
Terrain Obstacle Symbols....................................................................18-5
HTAWS Obstacle Symbols...................................................................18-5
Basemap Symbols...............................................................................18-6
Map Tool Bar Symbols.........................................................................18-7
Miscellaneous Symbols.......................................................................18-8
Stormscope Symbols...........................................................................18-9
19 Appendix............................................................................................ 19-1
19.1 Glossary.............................................................................................19-1
19.2 Datacard Information and Updates......................................................19-9
19.2.1
GTN Databases................................................................... 19-9
19.2.2
Updating Databases with an SD Card................................ 19-11
19.2.3
Updating Databases with a Flight Stream 510.................... 19-13
19.2.4
Database SYNC................................................................. 19-16
19.2.4.1 Resolving Database SYNC Conflicts................................... 19-17
19.2.5
Chart Streaming................................................................ 19-17
19.2.6
Database Troubleshooting Tips........................................... 19-18
19.3 Demo Mode.....................................................................................19-19
19.4 Glove Qualification Procedure...........................................................19-22
19.5 Telligence Voice Command Qualification Procedure...........................19-25
Index..................................................................................................... Index-1
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
xxv
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
This page intentionally left blank
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
xxvi
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Welcome
Foreword
Welcome to the GTN era of navigation. The Garmin Touchscreen Navigator
(GTN) supports airway navigation and flexible flight planning, including arrival
and departure procedures and precision approaches. All of these advanced
features are easily accessed with an easy-to-use touchscreen display, another first
for general aviation. You can be confident in knowing that this product has been
designed to meet or exceed industry performance standards and is supported
through a global network of Garmin Aviation Distributors.
About This Guide
Take a little time to review the various sections of this guide to familiarize
yourself with it. First, read this section and the Getting Started section as an
introduction to quickly get you started with the GTN. The other sections are
not meant to necessarily be read in order, but provide detailed information
on the subject they contain as you need them. Do take the time to review the
information before using the product to assist you in getting the most out of
your avionics.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Generally, a feature will be described in a section that provides a brief
description, a graphic functional diagram, and step-by-step procedures. If read
cover-to-cover sequentially, the information may seem repetitive. The guide is
designed as a reference and learning tool where you will generally skip around
the document learning about a particular feature or function after becoming
familiar with the unit.
Weather
Electronic Document Features
Nearest
Versions of this guide are saved in the Adobe Portable Document Format
(PDF) and have features that help the user navigate more easily through the
document. The cover icons, table of contents, and index are hyperlinks that will
take you directly to the selected item.
Versions of aviation products in PDF format are available at
www.flyGarmin.com.
Traffic
Terrain
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
xxvii
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Conventions
The GTN display dynamically tailors the number and position of the controls
for each function and are engaged by merely touching them.
Touch Touch the key with your finger.
Drag Touch the list or location on the map with your finger. Continue
lightly holding your finger to the display surface and drag your
finger in the intended direction to scroll through the list or
move the location on the map.
In this pilot’s guide, key titles are noted by bold text. An image of the key
used will be shown to the left of a procedure. Keys are outlined areas on the
display. Figures in the guide will identify the available controls. A key may have
a name of a control, such as Enter, Terrain, or Back. A key may also be an
information field, such as a numeric value that can be changed.
Text Description
Of Key Operation
Graphic Of Key
While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Terrain Map
Overlay key to toggle the view of Terrain data.
Wpt Info
Map
Graphic Of Key With
Numeric Value
Traffic
Terrain
Text Description
Of Key
When the Fuel on Board value is selected, touch the Fuel
on Board key to display the Fuel on Board values.
List “Keys.” Touch To
Select.
Weather
Nearest
Scroll Bar Indicates More
Selections Available.
Touch Finger To An Item
In The List And Drag Your
Finger To View More
Selections.
Services/
Music
Utilities
Selected Field Type
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
xxviii
Touching the Back key returns to the previous display. The
Cancel key cancels any information selected or entered and
returns to the previous display.
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
1
1.1
GETTING STARTED
Foreword
Model Descriptions
This guide covers the operation of the GTN 725 and 750. In general, all
models will be referred to as the GTN 7XX, except where there are physical or
operational differences. The GTN units are 6.25 inches wide and 6 inches high.
The display is a 708 by 600 pixel, 6.9 inch diagonal color LCD with touchscreen
controls. The units include one removable SD datacard for the databases and
software upgrades.
The GTN 7XX simplifies your workload with an easy-to-use touch panel that
provides a visual display of both controls and functions. The required controls
are displayed for the selected function. Keys on the display allow you to access
and control their functions by a simple touch on the interactive display.
The GTN 7XX can integrate a variety of avionics that will not only simplify
operation, but also save panel space. The GTN 725 and 750 have their own
GPS/SBAS navigator and flight planning functions. The GTN 750 adds VHF
Com and VHF Nav radios. Selected optional external equipment allows you
to display and control active traffic systems, XM Entertainment Radio, XM
Weather, audio panel, and a Mode S transponder directly from the GTN 7XX
display, and more. When the optional audio panel and/or transponder are not
installed, the area on the upper portion of the display is used for configurable
navigation information.
1.1.1
GTN 725
The GTN 725 has a GPS/SBAS engine and is TSO C146c certified for primary
domestic, oceanic, and remote navigation including en route, terminal, and
non-precision approaches, and approaches with vertical guidance, such as LPV
and LNAV/VNAV. The GTN 725 can simultaneously give aviators vital approach
information and weather and traffic data in relation to their position on a
large, color moving map display. Thanks to a high-contrast color display, the
information can be easily read from wide viewing angles even in direct sunlight.
Its color moving map features a built-in database that shows cities, highways,
railroads, rivers, lakes, coastlines, and a complete Jeppesen database. The
Jeppesen database (that can be updated with a front-loading datacard) contains
all airports, VORs, NDBs, Intersections, FSSs, Approaches, DPs/STARs, and SUA
information.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
1-1
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Navigation Information
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 1-1 GTN 725 Upper Display Without Optional Transponder or Audio Panel
Pilots will enjoy the GTN 725 as a flexible and powerful navigator, especially
when it is coupled with traffic, lightning detection, and weather interfaces. With
the PC-based FDE prediction program, the GTN 725 may be used for oceanic
or remote operations. For the latest in graphic and text weather information,
the GTN 725 can interface to XM Satellite Radio’s XM Weather Service via the
Garmin GDL 69/69A datalink receiver.
1.1.2
GTN 750
The GTN 750 includes all of the features of the GTN 725, and also includes
a TSO’d airborne VHF communications transceiver and TSO’d airborne
VOR/Localizer and Glideslope receivers.
Wpt Info
Navigation Information
Map
Figure 1-2 GTN 750 Upper Display Without Optional Transponder or Audio Panel
Traffic
1.2
About This Pilot’s Guide
Terrain
1.2.1
Conventions
Weather
Bold text indicates a control. The small right knob is the smaller, inner knob
of the two concentric rotary knobs on the lower, right corner of the bezel. The
large right knob is the larger, outer knob.
Nearest
Large, Outer Knob
Services/
Music
Small, Inner Knob
Utilities
Figure 1-3 Large/Small Concentric Knobs
System
A graphic of a control on the side of the page refers to the control you should
use for the associated step as shown below.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
1.2.2
Using the Touchscreen
Most of the controls are operated by touching the display. Highlighted icons
and keys may be simply touched to make a selection. A list of menu items
may be scrolled by touching the screen and retaining pressure while sliding
1-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
your finger up or down. Map displays may be panned by touching the screen
and retaining pressure while sliding your finger in the desired direction.
Pinch-to-zoom capability is available in software v6.20 or later.
You can return to the previous page or exit the current function
by touching the Back key.
1.3
Quickly return to the Home page by pressing the HOME key.
Press and hold the HOME key to reach the Map page.
Product Description
Volume, Squelch On/
Off, and Nav ID On/Off
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
This section provides an overview of the GTN 7XX product and a quick look
at some important features. The GTN 7XX presents a full-color moving map
with navigation information to the pilot through a large-format display. Controls
are a combination of rotary knobs and push-keys on the bezel with the color
display providing information as well as a touchscreen controls. The GTN 7XX
has a 708 x 600 pixel, 6.9 inch LCD display.
Active Com Frequency
Foreword
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Standby Com
Active Nav Standby Nav
Frequency
Frequency Frequency
Audio Panel Xpdr Panel
Controls (opt) Controls (opt)
Map
HOME Key
Photo Sensor
Datacard
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Home Page
Nearest
Services/
Music
Function
Keys
Utilities
Direct-To Key
Large and
Small Knobs
Locking
Screw
Messages
Symbols
Annunciations
Dual Rotary Knob Function Hints
Appendix
Figure 1-4 GTN 750 Front Panel
190-01007-03 Rev. P
System
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
1-3
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
1.3.1
The GTN 7XX uses a Secure Digital (SD) card or Flight Stream 510 to load
and store various types of data. The datacard is required for Terrain, FliteChart,
and ChartView database storage and all database updates.
NOTE: Do Not remove or insert the datacard while in flight. Ensure the
GTN 7XX is powered off before inserting or removing a datacard.
Com/Nav
NOTE: For instructions on updating databases refer to section 19.2.
FPL
Direct-To
1.3.1.1
Inserting a Datacard
1. Insert the datacard in the datacard slot (the label side of the
card should face the right edge of the display bezel).
2. To eject the card, gently press on the datacard to release the
spring latch.
1.3.2
Pilot Controls
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Datacard
The GTN 7XX controls have been designed to simplify operation of the
system and minimize workload and the time required to access sophisticated
functionality. Controls are located on the bezel and on the touchscreen display.
Controls are comprised of dual concentric knobs, volume/squelch knob, bezel
keys, and active touch areas on the display.
1.3.2.1
Volume/Squelch Knob
The Volume knob located in the top left corner of the bezel controls audio
volume for the selected Com radio or Nav receiver and external audio input
devices that are controlled via the GTN interface to the optional remote-mounted
audio panel, if installed. When the Com radio is active, press the Volume knob
momentarily to disable automatic squelch control for the Com radio. When the
Nav radio is active, press the Volume knob momentarily to enable/disable the
ident tone for the Nav radio.
System
Messages
Figure 1-5 Volume/Squelch Knob
Symbols
Appendix
Index
1-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
1.3.2.2
Large/Small Concentric Knobs
The large right and small right knobs are used for data entry, such as in the
Waypoint or Direct-To functions, and to set the frequencies for the NAV/COM
radios in units so equipped.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 1-6 Large/Small Concentric Knobs
1.3.2.3
HOME Key
FPL
Pressing the HOME key displays the Home page, the main screen for
accessing the GTN features. Pressing and holding the HOME key will open the
Map page from any other page.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 1-7 HOME Key
Wpt Info
Page Or Function Name
Map
Traffic
Touch The Key To
Access The Function
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 1-8 Home Page
1.3.2.4
Direct-To Key
Utilities
The Direct-To key provides access to the direct-to function, which allows you
to enter a waypoint and establishes a direct course to the selected destination.
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 1-9 Direct-To Key
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
1-5
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
1.3.2.5
Touchscreen Keys
Touchscreen keys are placed at the lower portion of the display. The keys vary
depending on the page selected. Touch the key to perform the function or access
the described information.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 1-10 Touchscreen Key Control Example
1.4
Unit Power Up
The GTN 7XX System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and
receives power directly from electrical buses. The GTN 7XX and supporting
sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that
exercise the processor, memory, external inputs, and outputs to ensure safe
operation.
1.4.1
Start-Up Screens
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed. All system
annunciations should disappear typically within the first 30 seconds after
power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also become momentarily
illuminated on the GTN 7XX display bezel.
The splash screen displays the following information:
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
• Copyright
• Database List and System version
• Instrument Panel Self-Test
Currently installed database information includes valid operating dates,
cycle number, and database type. When this information has been reviewed for
currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue. Databases that are not current will be shown in amber.
During the startup process the user may be asked if they would like to update
to newer databases. Additional information on database updates can be found
in 19.2.
The COM and NAV radios, transponder controls, GDL 88 control panel,
and audio panel controls are displayed on the Start-Up screens. Some functions
may be unavailable until after the databases are verified. Also, the audio panel
controls may be temporarily unavailable until the GMA 35 has finished its
start-up process.
1-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
1 - Copyright
1.4.2
2 - SW & Database
Versions & Dates
Figure 1-11 System Startup Pages
FPL
3 - Panel Self-Test
Direct-To
Database Verification and Fuel Settings
Proc
1. When the System and Database Version page appears, ensure
databases are current. Then, touch Continue.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Software and GPS
Engine Versions
Traffic
Ensure Required
Databases Are
Present And
Current
Terrain
Weather
Touch To
Continue
To Self-Test
Page
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 1-12 System Startup Pages
System
2. When the Instrument Panel Self-Test and Fuel Setting page
appears, ensure that the CDI/HSI outputs and other displayed
data are correct on the external interfaced equipment.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
1-7
Index
3. Touch each of the Fuel value keys and set the appropriate
values as desired. Fuel capacity units are selected on the
System - Units page.
Foreword
Getting
Started
NOTE: When the GTN is interfaced with a digital fuel computer the pilot
may not be able to manually edit the fuel flow and fuel on board data on
the Self-Test.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch To Set
Current Fuel
Quantity
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Start-Up
Instrument
Panel Test
Conditions
Touch To Set
Fuel Flow
Map
Touch To Continue
To Home Page
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 1-13 Instrument Panel Self-Test & Fuel Settings Page
Nearest
4. When the Fuel on Board value is selected, touch the Full or
Tabs keys to display those values after they have been set.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
1-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Selected Fuel
on Board
Capacity
Getting
Started
Touch To
Delete
Characters
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch Keys
To Select Fuel
Capacity Values
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch To
Display Fuel
Full Capacity
Touch To
Display Fuel
Tabs Capacity
Touch To Set
Fuel Full or Tab
Capacity
Touch To
Accept Fuel on
Board Values
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 1-14 Fuel On Board Page
Charts
Wpt Info
5. Touch the Set Full/Tabs key to set the fuel values for Fuel
Full Capacity and Fuel Tab Capacity. After setting the fuel
values, touch the Back and then the Enter keys to return to
the Instrument Panel Self Test page.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Touch To
Set Fuel Full
Capacity
Touch To Return
To Fuel On
Board Display
Touch To
Set Fuel Tab
Capacity
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 1-15 Fuel Capacity Setup Page
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
1-9
Index
6. On the Instrument Panel Self Test page, touch the Fuel Flow
key and then use the numeric keypad to set those values. Touch
the Enter key after selecting the Fuel Flow values.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To
Delete
Characters
Selected Fuel
Flow Value
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch Keys To Select
Fuel Flow Values
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Touch To
Accept Fuel
Flow Values
Touch To Cancel
Selection And Return
To Previous Page
Figure 1-16 Fuel Flow Setup Page
Traffic
7. Touch the Continue key to advance to the Home page.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 1-17 Home Page
Symbols
Appendix
Index
1-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
1.5
System Operation
1.5.1
Using the Touchscreen Key Controls
Foreword
Except for the knobs, the HOME, and Direct-To keys on the bezel, the
controls for the GTN 7XX are located on the display and activated by touch.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Back to
Previous Page
Wpt Info
Touchscreen Keys - Touch to
Toggle Activation
Map
Touch to Zoom
In and Out
Traffic
Figure 1-18 On-Screen Keys and Active Display Areas
1.5.2
Terrain
System Page
GTN 7XX system settings are managed on the System page. The
following features are available:
• System Status
• GPS Status
• External LRUs
• Setup
• Alerts Settings
• User Fields
• Units Settings
• Audio
• Backlight
• Connext Setup
• Voice Commands
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
1-11
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
GPS Status Page &
SBAS Providers
Foreword
Getting
Started
Information on
External LRUs
View System
Status Values
and SW Versions
Select System
Setup Values
Set Alert Values
Select User Fields
Set System Units
Of Measurement
Select Audio Settings
Select Voice
Command Setup
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Select Backlight
Setting
Proc
Charts
Select Connext Setup
Figure 1-19 System Page
1.5.2.1
System Setup Values
1. From the Home page, touch System and then Setup.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
2. Select the desired Time Format and Local Offset by touching
the Time Format (12 Hour, 24 Hour, and/or UTC) keys and
selecting the appropriate Local Time Offset after touching the
Local Offset key.
Terrain
Weather
3. Touch the Com Channel Spacing key to toggle between
8.33 and 25.0 kHz channel spacing.
Nearest
4. For Nearest Airport filtering, touch the Runway Surface key
and select the desired type of surface that will appear in the
Nearest Airport list.
Services/
Music
Utilities
5. Touch the Minimum Runway Length key to select the
minimum runway length allowed for the Nearest Airport.
Selecting 0 feet will show all airports regardless of runway
length.
System
Messages
6. Touch the Crossfill key to enable or disable crossfill with a
second GTN unit.
Symbols
7. Select the CDI and ILS CDI Capture method with the Selected
CDI and ILS CDI Capture keys.
Appendix
Index
1-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
1.5.2.2
Units Settings Values
1. From the Home page, touch System and then Units.
Foreword
Getting
Started
1.5.2.3
2. Touch the desired item key and select the desired value.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
3. Continue to select the desired Units values and then touch the
Back or HOME key to exit.
Com/Nav
FPL
Alerts Settings Values
1. From the Home page, touch System and then Alerts.
Direct-To
Proc
2. Touch the Alert type key to toggle its active status. A lighted
green bar under the label indicates that it is active.
3. Set arrival alerting. Touch the Arrival key. Touch the Proximity
key and select the desired value with the keypad.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
4. Touch the Airspace Altitude Buffer key and select the
desired value for airspace alerting.
5. Continue to select the desired Alerts values and then touch
the Back or HOME key to exit.
1.5.2.4
1.5.2.5
Audio Values
1. From the Home page, touch System and then Audio.
2. Touch the arrow keys to raise or lower the volume of key click
sounds.
Backlight Values
1. From the Home page, touch System and then Backlight.
2. Touch the arrow keys to increase or decrease the Manual
Offset of the backlight brightness.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
1-13
Index
Foreword
1.5.2.6
Connext Setup
1. From the Home page, touch System and then Connext
Setup.
2. This page is used to setup Connext devices that are connected
to the GTN.
1.5.2.7
Voice Commands
1. From the Home page, touch System and then Voice
Commands.
2. This page is used to turn voice recognition on or off, and to
view voice command history.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
1-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
1.5.3
Dual GTN Installations
Foreword
Dual GTN units when connected in the aircraft may be set up to communicate
and share information by “Crossfilling” or synchronizing information between
the two units.
The following Crossfill information is always synchronized between both
GTN units:
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
• User Waypoints
FPL
• Flight Plan Catalog
• Alerts (traffic pop-up acknowledgement, missed approach waypoint
pop-up acknowledgement, altitude leg pop-up acknowledgement)
Direct-To
Proc
• External sensors (transponder status and commands, synchro heading)
• System setup:
Charts
– User-defined NAV frequencies to store favorites
Wpt Info
– Date/Time convention
– Nearest airport criteria
Map
– Units (Nav angle, Fuel, and Temperature)
Traffic
– User-defined COM frequencies to store favorites
– CDI Scale setting
Terrain
– ILS CDI Capture setting
Weather
This data is crossfilled only if crossfill is turned on by the pilot:
Nearest
• Active navigation (flight plan)
Services/
Music
NOTE: In dual GTN installations with crossfill on, the OBS course will only
be updated in real time on the GTN that is receiving the new OBS course.
The course will be transferred to the other GTN when OBS is exited.
NOTE: There is an installer option to turn on a system message that will
be provided anytime crossfill is turned off to alert the pilot that flight plans
are not being crossfilled.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
1-15
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
1.6
Press the Direct-To key to quickly navigate from your present position
directly to a selected waypoint, flight plan waypoint, or nearest airport.
1.6.1
FPL
1. Press Direct-To.
3. Touch Activate or press the small right knob. Text near the
small right knob indicates its current function.
Direct-To
Charts
Direct-To a Waypoint
2. Touch the Waypoint Identifier field and select the characters for
the desired waypoint with the large and small right knobs
or the touch keypad.
Com/Nav
Proc
Direct-To Navigation
OR
1.6.2
Direct-To a Flight Plan Waypoint
1. Press Direct-To.
Wpt Info
Map
2. Touch the FPL tab and then the desired Flight Plan waypoint.
Traffic
3. Touch Activate or press the small right knob.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
OR
1.6.3
1. Press Direct-To.
Utilities
2. Touch the NRST APT tab and then the desired airport from
the Nearest Airport list. Touch the Up or Down keys as needed
to show more of the list.
System
3. Touch Activate or press the small right knob.
Messages
Symbols
Direct-To a Nearest Airport
OR
Appendix
Index
1-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
1.7
Selecting Com/Nav Frequencies
Active Com Frequency
Volume and
Squelch
Foreword
Active Nav Frequency
Frequency Monitor
Annunciation
Standby Nav Frequency
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Standby Com
Frequency
Standby
Frequency
Backspace
Key
Com Standby
Editing Window
Find Frequency
Key
Numeric Keypad
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Standby Frequency
Monitor Key
Enter Key
Frequency
Transfer
(Flip/Flop)
Key
Large and
Small Knobs
(Frequency
Adjust)
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 1-20 Com Radio Frequency Selection Page
Traffic
To switch between Com and Nav frequency selection
Tuning control normally remains in the Com window and will return after
30 seconds of inactivity. If you wish to select a Nav frequency, press the small
right knob momentarily to make the Nav window active for editing. The
Standby Nav frequency will be highlighted briefly to indicate that it is active
for editing. The standby frequency in blue is active for editing by the large and
small right knobs.
Method 1: Select a Nav/Com frequency using the small and large right rotary knobs
1. Turn the large right knob to select the desired megahertz
(MHz) value. For example, the “118” portion of the frequency
“118.30.”
2. Turn the small right knob to select the desired kilohertz
(kHz) value. For example, the “.30” portion of the frequency
“118.30.”
3. Touch the Com or Nav window to flip/flop the Active and Standby
frequencies. You can also press and hold the small right knob
to transfer the standby frequency to the active window.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
1-17
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Method 2: Select a Nav/Com frequency using the numeric keypad
1. Touch the Standby window. A pull down keypad will appear
with the current Standby frequency highlighted.
Getting
Started
2. Touch the numeric keys to add the desired values and touch
Enter to accept the displayed value and place it into the
Standby window.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
3. Touching the XFER key will place the selected frequency directly
into the Active window.
FPL
Direct-To
To transfer the standby frequency to the active frequency
1. Touch the Active (top) frequency window.
Proc
Airport Identifier and Type Shown
for the Selected Frequency
Charts
The "+" Sign Indicates More Stations
Associated With This Frequency
Wpt Info
2. Each touch of the Active window will flip/flop the Active and
Standby frequencies.
Traffic
3. The identifier and frequency type will be shown for the selected
Com and Nav frequencies for the nearest stations that are in
the database when the unit is receiving a valid position input.
Terrain
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Standby Com Frequency
Figure 1-21 Com Radio Frequency Windows (Touch Active to Flip/Flop)
Map
Weather
Active Com Frequency
(Touch to Flip/Flop)
Remote Frequency Selection Control
On units configured for remote Com frequency Recall, pressing the remote
recall switch will load the next preset Com frequency into the unit’s Standby
frequency window. The remote recall switch can be pressed multiple times to
scroll the entire preset frequency list through the Standby frequency box (the list
will “wrap” from the bottom of the list back up to the top, skipping any empty
preset positions).
The standby frequency isn’t activated until a Com FLIP/FLOP switch (either
bezel-mounted or remote (COM RMT XFR) is pressed. Remote Frequency Selection
only functions on units configured for a remote Com Frequency recall switch.
NOTE: Frequencies must be stored in the User Frequency List prior to
utilizing the remote channel select switch.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
1-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
1.8
Flight Planning
1.8.1
Creating a Flight Plan
Foreword
1. From the Home page, touch the Flight Plan key. The Active
Flight Plan page will be displayed.
2. If there is already an Active Flight Plan, touch Menu and then
the Delete key to clear the existing flight plan. If there is not
an Active Flight Plan, continue to the next step.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
3. Touch Add Waypoint. Use the alphanumeric keypad to select
the Waypoint Identifier for the first leg in your flight plan and
then touch Enter.
4. Touch the next Waypoint Identifier field. Use the alphanumeric
keypad to select the Waypoint Identifier for the first leg in your
flight plan and then touch Enter.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
5. Continue entering waypoints to complete the flight plan.
Traffic
6. Touch the Menu key and then touch Store.
Terrain
7. The screen will now display the Flight Plan Catalog and show
the new flight plan. Flight plans are listed by the Departure
and Destination waypoints.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
NOTE: The destination waypoint is the last airport in the flight plan.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
1-19
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
1.9
VFR and IFR Procedures
Visual approaches and IFR procedures (i.e., SIDs, STARs, and instrument
approaches) are available using the PROC (Procedures) key.
Select a Visual or Instrument Approach
1. Touch the PROC key on the Home page.
Com/Nav
2. Touch the Approach key and then touch the Airport key to
select the desired airport if it is not present.
3. Touch the Approach key, if necessary. Select the desired
approach.
FPL
Direct-To
4. Touch the Transition key and then touch the key for the
desired transition. Visual approaches do not have selectable
transitions.
Proc
Charts
5. Touch the Load Approach key to load the approach at the
end of the active flight plan. The Active Flight Plan page will
be displayed.
Wpt Info
Map
6. Or, touch the Load Approach & Activate key for the flight
plan to go Direct-To the selected transition or provide guidance
on the final approach course for vectored or visual approaches.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
1-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
1.10
Dead Reckoning
Foreword
Dead reckoning is a feature that enables the GTN to provide limited
navigation using the last known position and speed after a loss of GPS
navigation while on an active flight plan.
Getting
Started
CAUTION: Navigation using dead reckoning is only an estimate and
should not be used as the sole means of navigation. Use other means of
navigation, if possible.
Dead reckoning becomes active after a loss of GPS position while navigating
using an active flight plan and the flight phase is either En Route (ENR) or
Oceanic (OCN).
“DR” will be overlayed on the ownship icon. The To/From flag is removed
from the CDI. The Dead Reckoning annunciator (DR) appears on the lower
left side of the map display and will replace ENR or OCN when a GPS position
is unavailable and the unit is in Dead Reckoning mode. All external outputs
dependent on GPS position are flagged.
Terrain will be noted as not available and new terrain advisory pop-ups
will not occur. Traffic and StormScope information will not be shown on the
Map page, but will continue to be available on their own dedicated pages. XM
weather will still be available on the Map page.
Dead Reckoning mode will continue until GPS position is restored, when GPS
navigation is restored Dead Reckoning mode is exited. The DR annunciations
will be removed and GPS information will be used to compute navigation related
information for the current flight phase.
Dead Reckoning is only allowed in En Route and Oceanic phases of flight.
If the unit is in a Terminal or Approach phase of flight when Dead Reckoning
takes place, “No GPS Position” will be displayed on the map pages and all
navigation data will be dashed. If you are operating in Dead Reckoning mode
and a transition to Terminal or Approach phases of flight would occur from the
projected Dead Reckoning position, Dead Reckoning mode will be discontinued.
“No GPS Position” will be displayed on the map pages and all navigation data
will be dashed. For information about GPS faults, refer to 16.2.4.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
1-21
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
1.11
FastFind provides the pilot with a shortcut to the nearest waypoint with an
identifier that starts with the typed letters. As a result, the GTN can predict the
pilot's entry within as little as one key press.
FastFind predictions are shown in the top right-hand corner of the keypad
display. Touching the FastFind field will select the predicted waypoint. If the
FastFind prediction is not what the pilot is looking for, keep typing until the
desired waypoint is displayed.
1.11.1
Selected Wpt
Characters
Predicted Wpt
Figure 1-22 Select Characters for FastFind to Predict a Waypoint - KP Selected
Wpt Info
Map
FastFind With Waypoint Info
1. Use the alphanumeric keypad to begin selecting characters
for the desired waypoint.
Proc
Charts
FastFind Predictive Waypoint Entry
Selected Wpt
Characters
Predicted Wpt
Figure 1-23 Select Characters for FastFind to Predict a Waypoint - KPA Selected
Traffic
2. After selecting the desired waypoint, touch the FastFind key.
Terrain
Weather
Complete
Wpt Selection
Touch to Select
Displayed Wpt
Figure 1-24 Select Characters for FastFind to Predict a Waypoint - KPAE Selected
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
1-22
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
1.11.2
FastFind With A Flight Plan
Foreword
When creating a new flight plan or searching for a waypoint, the GTN
will search for waypoints closest to the current GPS position. When adding
waypoints in the middle of the flight plan, the GTN will search halfway between
the previous and next waypoints. When adding waypoints at the end of the
flight plan, the GTN will search for waypoints closest to the last waypoint in the
flight plan.
1. When the aircraft is located in KSLE, and the last waypoint in
the flight plan is "DRK," the GTN will search for waypoints
nearest "DRK."
2. Typing K, will result in "KPRC" being displayed as the FastFind
prediction because it is the nearest waypoint to "DRK" that
starts with "K."
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Selected Wpt
Characters
Predicted Wpt
Wpt Info
Figure 1-25 Using FastFind to Predict a Waypoint in a Flight Plan
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
1-23
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
This page intentionally left blank
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
1-24
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2
AUDIO AND TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
(OPTIONAL)
Foreword
Getting
Started
The GTN 7XX can perform the control and display for a remotely mounted
audio panel (such as the GMA 35) and a transponder (such as one of the GTX
family of transponders) functions. See your dealer for more information.
2.1
Transponder Operation
Com/Nav
FPL
NOTE: The transponder control panel on the GTN will only contain the
Ground key when the GTN is interfaced with a GTX 33/330 with software
versions prior to 8.00.
NOTE: Starting the GTN with a Flight Stream 510 wireless datacard in
the slot may cause the control panel to be temporarily unavailable on the
start-up screens during unit power up.
Active
Transponder
Selection
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Active
Transponder
Ident
Key
Map
Transponder Control
Code Key, Code Display,
and Mode
Traffic
Reply Annunciation
Terrain
Squawk Code
Backspace Key
Weather
VFR Squawk
Code (1200) Key
Squawk Code
Window
Green Bar Indicates
"Active" Condition
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch To Enter
Flight ID
Transponder
Mode Keys
Touch To Toggle
Extended Squitter
System
Enter Key
Messages
Context Sensitive
Instructions For Rotary Knob
Symbols
Figure 2-1 XPDR Control Display
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
2-1
Index
Foreword
The GTN 7XX will operate as a control head for remotely connected optional,
compatible transponders.
Getting
Started
Active XPDR
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
XPDR 1
XPDR 2
Com/Nav
Flight ID
FPL
Ident
VFR
Standby
Ground
On
Altitude Reporting
1200
Figure 2-2 XPDR Functional Diagram
Direct-To
Proc
Mode
2.1.1
Select Transponder
1. Touch the Active XPDR key to activate the desired transponder
by stepping through the available transponders.
Charts
Active Transponder
Wpt Info
Figure 2-3 Active Transponder Indication
Map
2. The active transponder will be shown on the key.
Traffic
Terrain
2.1.2
IDENT
Weather
1. Touch the IDENT key once to reply with an identifying squawk
code.
Nearest
2. The IDENT key will show a green “ID” in the top right corner
of the key to indicate active Ident.
Services/
Music
2.1.3
Standby
Touch the Standby key to place the transponder into Standby
mode. The transponder will still be powered, but will not
transmit information. The active transponder indication and
Ident annunciation will be grayed to show they are disabled.
Utilities
System
Messages
Active XPDR and IDENT Disabled
Symbols
Transponder Operation "Standby" Mode
Appendix
Index
Figure 2-4 Transponder Mode "Standby" Indication
2-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2.1.4
Ground
Touch the Ground key to place the transponder into Ground
mode. Mode S replies will be allowed in Ground mode.
Active XPDR and IDENT Enabled
Com/Nav
Figure 2-5 Transponder Mode "Ground" Indication
FPL
NOTE: The transponder control panel on the GTN will only contain the
Ground key when the GTN is interfaced with a GTX 33/330 with software
versions prior to 8.00. With all other GTX software versions, the transponder
will automatically transition out of airborne mode.
On
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Touch the On key for Mode A operation. The transponder is
"On" and will transmit its squawk code when interrogated.
Wpt Info
Map
Transponder Operation "ON" Mode
Figure 2-6 Transponder Mode "ON" Indication
2.1.6
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Transponder Operation "Ground" Mode
2.1.5
Foreword
Traffic
Altitude Reporting
Terrain
1. Touch the Altitude Reporting key for Mode C operation.
Weather
2. The transponder will be "On" and will transmit its squawk
code and altitude when interrogated. An "ALT" annunciation
will appear when the squawk code is transmitted.
2.1.7
VFR
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch the VFR key to set the VFR squawk code (1200).
System
VFR (1200) Transponder Squawk Code
Messages
Figure 2-7 Transponder VFR Squawk Code
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
2-3
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
2.1.8
Selecting a Squawk Code
The selected squawk code will always be in use. As you change a squawk
code, the original code will be used until you are finished selecting the new
code.
Squawk Code
Description
1200
Default VFR code in the USA
7500
Hijacking
7600
Loss of Communications
7700
Emergency
Table 2-1 XPDR Special Squawk Codes
Proc
1. Touch the transponder squawk code window at the top of the
display.
Charts
2. The XPDR page will be displayed. The Squawk Code value will
be active for selection for use by the active Transponder.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Active Squawk
Code Selection
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Transponder Is In
Standby Mode
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 2-8 XPDR Squawk Code Selection Display
3. Touch the numeric keypad, or use the rotary knobs, to select
the desired Squawk Code.
Messages
Symbols
Squawk Code Character
Selected For Editing
Appendix
Index
Figure 2-9 Selected XPDR Squawk Code
2-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4. Then, touch Enter or press the small right knob.
Foreword
Getting
Started
5. The selected Squawk Code will be shown in the XPDR window
at the top of the display.
2.1.9
Com/Nav
FPL
Flight ID
1. While viewing the transponder page, touch the Flight ID key.
2. Touch the numeric keypad, or use the rotary knobs, to select the
desired Flight ID number and then press Enter. The selected
number will be shown in the Flight ID key.
2.1.10
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
GDL 88 ADS-B Reporting
The GDL 88 is a remote-mount ADS-B transceiver that sends ADS-B out
messages to ATC and other aircraft and communicates ADS-B In data to
panel-mounted avionics for the display of traffic and weather. Reference the
GDL 88 Pilot Guide for a full description of GDL 88 functions. When a GTN is
interfaced to a GDL88 transceiver for ADS-B Out functions the GTN can control
some aspects of the ADS-B Out message and the GTN may provide position
information to the GDL88. The display and control of the information sent
depends on the equipment installed and how it is configured. Some installations
allow control by the pilot of the information sent, while others do not.
The Anonymous Mode, when armed, will replace the identifying information
in the ADS-B Out message with a temporary randomized number for privacy
while the position information will still be provided. The call sign will be sent as
"VFR." To enable Anonymous Mode, the Squawk Code must be set to the VFR
code (based on the GDL 88 configuration) and the Anonymous key must be
selected.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
2-5
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Viewing the ADS-B Control Panel Without Integrated Transponder Control
1. Touch the Transponder window to view the ADS-B control
panel.
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch To Toggle
Anonymous
Mode
Touch To Select
Flight ID
Figure 2-10 ADS-B Control Panel
Direct-To
2. Touch the ADS-B window again to return to the previous
display.
Proc
Charts
Touch To View
ADS-B Control
Panel
Altitude
Reporting
Status
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Viewing the ADS-B Control Panel With Integrated Transponder Control
1. Touch the Transponder window to view the ADS-B control
panel.
Wpt Info
Touch To View
Transponder and
ADS-B Control Panel
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch To Toggle
Anonymous Mode
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch To Select
Flight ID
Utilities
Figure 2-11 ADS-B/Transponder Control Panel
System
2. Touch the Anonymous Mode key to toggle arming the
Anonymous mode.
Messages
3. While viewing the transponder page, touch the Flight ID key.
Symbols
4. Touch the numeric keypad, or use the rotary knobs, to select
the desired Flight ID number and then press Enter.
Appendix
Index
2-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
NOTE: Changing the flight ID while in anonymous mode wouldn't actually
change the flight ID because a randomized ID is being broadcast. If the
ANONYMOUS key is armed, change the squawk code to the VFR code to
activate Anonymous mode.
2.1.11
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Extended Squitter Transmission
When interfaced with a compatible transponder, the GTN can act as a control
for the Extended Squitter functions. When “Enable ES” is selected, the GTX
turns on Extended Squitter (ES) transmissions.
Squawk Code
Backspace Key
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
VFR Squawk
Code (1200) Key
Squawk Code
Window
Numeric Keypad
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Green Bar Indicates
"Active" Condition
Map
Touch To Enter
Flight ID
Traffic
Enter Key
Transponder
Mode Keys
Foreword
Terrain
Touch To Toggle
Extended Squitter
Weather
Figure 2-12 Transponder Control Panel With Extended Squitter Capability
1. While viewing the Transponder (XPDR) page, touch the Enable
ES key to toggle Extended Squitter Off and On.
2. Touch the Flight ID key and use the keypad to select a Flight
ID and then touch Enter.
3. After selecting a Flight ID, the selected value will be shown in
the Flight ID key.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
2-7
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
2.1.12
TCAS II Transponder Mode Controls
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.30 and later.
The GTN can control the modes of a TCAS II system through a
GTX 3000. The TA Only and TA/RA modes are added to the transponder control
panel. Selecting TA Only or TA/RA will command the TCAS into the selected
mode. Depending on the aircraft configuration (e.g., on ground), the TCAS may
remain in a different mode.
Direct-To
Reported TCAS II Mode
Proc
Charts
Touch To Select TCAS II
Mode
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 2-13 TCAS II Transponder Control Panel
NOTE: The XPDR/TCAS Mode on the Transponder Control Panel always
shows the pilot-selected mode and does not necessarily correspond with
the traffic system if it is in a lower mode due to other constraints. The active
mode is shown in the radio bar next to the transponder squawk code.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
XPDR/TCAS Mode
Selection
TA/RA
TA Only
Altitude Reporting
On
Standby
Transponder
Mode
Altitude Reporting
Altitude Reporting
Altitude Reporting
On
Standby
Available TCAS II
Modes
TA/RA or TA Only
TA Only
Standby
Standby
Standby
Table 2-2 Transponder and TCAS II Operating Modes
Appendix
Index
2-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2.2
Audio Panel Operation
Foreword
The GTN 7XX can operate as a control head for remotely connected
compatible audio and intercom equipment (such as the GMA 35).
Audio Panel Controls
Touch To Display
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Mic Selection: 1, 2 or 3
Intercom Setup
Getting
Started
Com/Nav
"+" Indicates Additional Audio Source
Monitoring (Nav, DME, or ADF)
FPL
Direct-To
Mon Selection:
1, 2 or 3
Proc
Activates Split
Mode
Charts
Recorder
Playback
Control
Cabin Speaker
Select & Vol
Monitor and
Mic Selections
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Marker Audio
And Volume
3D Audio
Terrain
Weather
Figure 2-14 Audio Panel Controls
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
2-9
Index
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Index
Nearest
2-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Menu
Group Co-Pilot
with Passenger
Direct-To
Com 1
Passenger Address
Co-Pilot Radios
Com 1
Passenger Address
Pilot Radios
FPL
Bluetooth Audio
Telephone
Music 2
Music 1
Wpt Info
Split Mode
Playback Controls
Cabin Speaker
Speaker Volume
Marker Audio
Marker Volume
Marker Hi Sense
3D Audio
Crew Intercom
Proc
Volume
Squelch
1
2
3
Charts
Audio Panel
Com 1
Com 2
Com 3
Passenger
Address
MIC Selection
Com 1
Com 2
Com 3
Nav 1
Nav 2
DME
ADF
Monitored Radios
Radio &Mic Selection
Com/Nav
Co-Pilot VOL/SQ
Terrain
1
2
3
Traffic
Mon
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Volume
Squelch
Weather
Mic
Getting
Started
Pilot VOL/SQ
Intercom Setup
Foreword
Map
Messages
Figure 2-15 Audio Panel Functional Diagram
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2.2.1
Mic Selection
Foreword
Mic selection can be determined by two methods: the Mic window or by the
Audio Panel page.
2.2.1.1
Mic Window Mic Selection
1. Touch the Mic window to toggle between Mic 1 and Mic 2.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
2. Note that the selected Mic is automatically monitored.
FPL
3. If Mic 3 or Passenger Address (PA) are selected, touching the
Mic window will revert to toggling between Mic 1 and Mic 2.
2.2.1.2
Audio Panel Page Mic Selection
1. Touch the Audio Panel key at the top of the display.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Mic Selection: 1, 2 or 3
Wpt Info
Map
Selected Mic
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Passenger Address Mic
Selection
Nearest
Figure 2-16 Audio Panel MIC Selection
2. Touch the desired Mic (Com 1, Com 2, or Com 3) from the
MIC Selection list on the right side of the display.
3. The selected Mic will be shown in the Mic window.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
2-11
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
2.2.2
Monitor
The Monitor function indicates which radios are being listened to.
1. Monitor is automatically selected for the associated Com Mic
Radio (1, 2, or 3). For example, when Com 1 is selected, Mon
1 is automatically active.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
2. Touch the Mon key to toggle between the automatically
selected monitored channel (selected Mic) and the other
channels.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
2.2.3
Passenger Address
The Passenger Address key toggles the passenger address system on and
off.
Touch the Passenger Address key to toggle the passenger
address system on and off.
2.2.4
3D Audio
Nearest
Advanced processing adjusts audio in the headset to mimic how the human
ear normally hears and registers sounds in space. This 3-D Audio feature makes
it seem as though different audio sources are coming from different directions
around you. Now it’s much easier to focus on and understand one particular
source from among many. For example, COM 1 will seem to be coming from
the left while COM 2 will seem to be coming from the right. When 3D Audio is
disabled, balance is restored.
Services/
Music
NOTE: The stereo/mono headsets must be in the stereo position in order
for 3D audio to function.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Utilities
Touch the 3D Audio key to toggle the 3D Audio function on
and off.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
2-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
This is currently done such that audio sources will either be 30 degrees
to your left (330 degrees), 30 degrees to your right, and directly in front
(0 degrees). The following table details the left/right balance of the audio level
depending on the selected Com:
Active Com
1,2,3
1,2
1,3
2,3
1
2
3
2.2.5
1
330
330
330
N/A
0
N/A
N/A
2
0
30
N/A
330
N/A
0
N/A
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
3
30
N/A
30
30
N/A
N/A
0
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Table 2-3 3D Audio Left/Right Balance
Charts
Cabin Speaker Selection and Volume
Wpt Info
The Cabin Speaker key turns the cabin speaker on and off. The Speaker
Volume key sets the volume level.
1. Touch the Cabin Speaker key to toggle the cabin speaker
on and off.
2. Touch the Speaker Volume key to set the Cabin Speaker
volume. Touch the Speaker Volume arrows to set the volume.
Percent Of Maximum Volume
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Graphic Scale Showing Volume
Nearest
Touch To
Increase Volume
Touch To
Decrease Volume
Services/
Music
Figure 2-17 Cabin Speaker Volume Selection
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
2-13
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
2.2.6
Marker Audio and Volume
The optional Marker Beacon Receiver uses an audio indicator to alert you
when the aircraft passes over a Marker Beacon transmitter. The audio from the
Marker Beacon Receiver can be heard unless disabled by selecting Marker Audio.
When Marker is selected (green bar shown), the tones for Marker Beacons are
heard. When Marker is not selected (green bar not shown), the tones for Marker
Beacons are not heard.
The GMA 35 marker beacon receiver and indicators are part of the ILS system.
The marker beacon lamps operate independently of any audio selection and
cannot be turned off. The GMA 35 can drive external marker lamps if required
and also provides an autopilot middle marker sense output.
Prior to beginning an ILS approach, select high or low marker sensitivity with
the Marker Hi Sense key. The lighted green bar in the key illuminates for high
sensitivity and remains off for low sensitivity.
Touching the Marker Audio key prior to an approach allows the marker
audio tones to be heard in the headsets. When the green bar in the Marker
Audio key shows, the marker audio will be heard when available. The Audio
Panel key will change to a Mute key. Touching the Mute key while audio is
heard will mute the marker audio until the next beacon is received. The marker
beacon signal sensitivity threshold can be set in Configuration mode. Contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for adjustment.
1. While the Audio Control page is displayed, touch the Marker
Audio key to hear the current Marker Beacon tones.
2. Touch the Marker Audio key again to disable Marker Beacon
tones.
3. Touch the Marker Volume key to set the Marker Beacon tone
volume. Touch the Marker Volume arrows to set the volume.
Percent Of Maximum Volume
Utilities
System
Graphic Scale Showing Volume
Touch To
Increase Volume
Touch To
Decrease Volume
Messages
Figure 2-18 Audio Panel Marker Beacon Tone Volume Selection
Symbols
Appendix
Index
2-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2.2.7
Marker Hi Sense
Foreword
The Marker Hi Sense setting allows detecting the outer Marker Beacon from
a greater distance.
1. While the Audio Control page is displayed, touch the Marker
Hi Sense key to activate greater Marker Beacon sensitivity.
2. Touch the Marker Hi Sense key again to return to normal
sensitivity.
2.2.8
A visual annunciation of marker beacons will be shown on the display when
the aircraft flies over a marker beacon. The annunciation will appear in the
lower left of the display.
Icon (Standard)
Icon (Blink)
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Marker Beacon Annunciations
Current Beacon
Getting
Started
Blink Interval
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Inner Marker
250 ms
Middle Marker
333 ms
Wpt Info
Outer Marker
750 ms
Map
The marker beacon alternates between the standard icon and the blink icon at
the blink interval corresponding to the current beacon.
Traffic
Table 2-4 Marker Beacons
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
2-15
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
2.2.9
Audio Split Mode
In Split Mode the pilot uses one radio for MIC audio while the copilot uses a
different radio. The pilot and copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate
radios. The pilot can still listen to their individually selected radios. In the Split
mode, the pilot and co-pilot may talk and listen independently to the radios (or
PA) as selected.
Split Mode Annunciation
FPL
Direct-To
Crew Intercom
Activation
Proc
Charts
Select Audio
Split Mode
Wpt Info
Touch And Drag
Finger To Scroll List
of Radio Selections
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch To Scroll List
of Radio Selections
Weather
Figure 2-19 Audio Panel Split Mode Controls
1. While the Audio Control page is displayed, touch the Split
Mode key to display the Crew Intercom selections.
Nearest
Services/
Music
2. Touch the Split Mode key again to toggle the Crew Intercom
selection off.
Utilities
3. Touch the Crew Intercom key to toggle activation of the
Crew Intercom allowing the Pilot and Co-Pilot to talk to each
other.
System
4. Touch the desired Pilot and Co-Pilot Radio selections.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
2-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2.2.10
Playback Controls
Foreword
The voice recorder feature records all the audio heard on any selected COM
radio that is selected for transmission (the MIC selected COM) and not others
selected for monitoring only. Playback is heard by anyone listening on the
selected radios. The Clearance Recorder can record up to 2.5 minutes of Com
audio.
1. While the Audio Control page is displayed, touch the Playback
Controls key to display the Playback Control selections.
Percent Of Maximum Volume
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Graphic Scale Showing Volume
Direct-To
Touch To
Decrease Volume
Touch To
Increase Volume
Proc
Heavy Outline
Indicates The Upper
Left Rotary Knob
Controls Volume
Recording Time
Line
Charts
Playback Controls
Number Of
Recordings Made
After The Current
Selection
Number Of
Recordings
Made Before
The Current
Selection
Figure 2-20 Audio Panel Playback Controls
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
2. Touch the Playback Volume arrows to set the volume.
3. Touch the Backward, Play, or Forward keys to control the
playback of the currently selected recording.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
4. Touch the Previous or Next keys to select a recording.
Utilities
System
Messages
5. Touch the Back key to return to the Audio Panel page.
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
2-17
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
2.3
Intercom Setup
The GTN 7XX can operate as a control head for remotely connected
compatible intercom equipment. The Internal Communication System (ICS)
has several modes of operation that are selected on the display of the GTN 7XX
to control communication in the aircraft. Passengers cannot transmit over the
active Com radio, even if equipped with a PTT key.
Depending on the installation and aircraft, the pilot and co-pilot positions on
this page may be reversed (such as configured for rotorcraft).
1. Touch the Intercom window at the top of the display to
display the Intercom Setup page.
Proc
Touch To Display
Intercom Setup
Charts
Touch To Configure
Co-Pilot Volume
And Squelch
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch To Configure
Pilot Volume And
Squelch
Selected
Intercom
Mode
Touch To Configure
Passenger Volume
And Squelch
Terrain
Weather
Touch Source
To Configure
Nearest
Figure 2-21 Intercom Setup
Services/
Music
2. Touch the arrow between the intercom recipients to activate
communication between those recipients. The arrow will be
green when communication is active. Touch the arrow again
to deactivate communication. Detailed information is shown
in the Intercom Modes table.
Utilities
System
Messages
3. Touch the key for a function to the make the desired changes to
their setup. Then, touch the Back key to return to the Intercom
Setup page.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
2-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Mode
Pilot Hears
Co-Pilot Hears
Selected radios, pilot Selected radios,
co-pilot
Passengers Hear
Passengers
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Selected radios, pilot, Selected radios, pilot, Passengers
co-pilot
co-pilot
Com/Nav
FPL
Selected radios, pilot, Selected radios,
co-pilot
co-pilot, pilot,
passengers
Selected radios,
co-pilot, passengers
Selected radios, pilot, Selected radios,
passengers
co-pilot
Selected radios, pilot,
passengers
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Selected radios, pilot Selected radios,
Selected radios,
co-pilot, passengers co-pilot, passengers
Map
Traffic
Selected radios, pilot, Selected radios, pilot, Selected radios, pilot,
co-pilot, passengers co-pilot
passengers
Selected radios, pilot, Selected radios,
Selected radios, pilot,
passengers
co-pilot, passengers co-pilot, passengers
Selected radios, pilot, Selected radios, pilot, Selected radios, pilot,
co-pilot, passengers co-pilot, passengers co-pilot, passengers
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Table 2-5 Intercom Modes
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
2-19
Index
Foreword
Intercom Setup
Getting
Started
Pilot VOL/SQ
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Volume
Squelch
Com/Nav
Co-Pilot VOL/SQ
FPL
Volume
Squelch
Direct-To
Music 1 & Music 2
Proc
Music Setup
Pilot
Co-Pilot
Passenger
Charts
Wpt Info
Mute Music During...
Map
Radio
Intercom
Traffic
Music Volume
Terrain
Telephone
Telephone Setup
Weather
Pilot
Co-Pilot
Passenger
Nearest
Services/
Music
Telephone Volume
Utilities
Menu
Group Co-Pilot
with Passenger
System
Messages
Figure 2-22 Intercom Setup Functional Diagram
Symbols
Appendix
Index
2-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2.3.1
Set Pilot, Co-Pilot, & Passenger Volume and
Squelch
Foreword
In the Intercom Setup function, the Volume and Squelch may be set separately for the
Pilot, Copilot, and Passenger intercoms.
1. While viewing the Intercom Setup page, touch the Pilot,
Co-Pilot, or Passenger VOL/SQ keys to set the Volume and
Squelch for the selected item.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Heavy Outline Indicates The Upper Left Rotary
Knob Controls Volume
Touch To
Decrease
Volume
Direct-To
Touch To
Increase Volume
Touch To Select
Manual Or Auto
Squelch
With Manual
Squelch, Touch To
Increase Squelch
With Manual Squelch,
Touch To Decrease Squelch
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 2-23 Pilot Audio Setup
Traffic
2. Touch the Volume arrows to set the desired Volume level.
Terrain
3. Touch the Auto Squelch key to allow the unit to set the
Squelch level automatically. When enabled, the Auto Squelch
key will display a green bar.
Weather
4. Touch the Squelch arrows to set the desired Squelch level.
Nearest
5. Touch the Back key to return to the Intercom Setup page.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
2-21
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
2.3.2
Co-Pilot is Passenger
When the GTN 7XX is installed with a GMA 35, the GTN can place the GMA
into "Co-Pilot is Passenger" mode. While in this mode, the GMA 35 treats the
copilot headset as a passenger headset and the co-pilot only hears what the other
passengers hear. This applies to intercom audio, alerts (if configured for the
passengers), selected audio (if configured for passengers), and music/telephone
distribution. "Co-Pilot is Passenger" mode allows simpler audio control for the
pilot when the co-pilot is just a passenger and not involved in flying the aircraft.
1. To activate "Co-Pilot is Passenger" mode, open the Intercom
Setup page and touch Intercom.
2. Touch Menu, to display the Intercom Menu, and then touch
Group Co-Pilot with Passenger to enable "Co-Pilot is
Passenger" mode.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Selected Intercom
Configuration
Traffic
Terrain
Set Co-Pilot as
Passenger
Weather
Figure 2-24 Set Co-Pilot as a Passenger in Intercom
Nearest
NOTE: This feature should not be used for multi-crew aircraft. When the
co-pilot is treated as a passenger, co-pilot position may not hear audio
alerts or radios.
Services/
Music
Utilities
NOTE: While this mode is active, the co-pilot intercom and audio controls
are unavailable because the co-pilot intercom/audio is controlled by the
passenger controls. Split mode is also unavailable.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
2-22
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2.3.3
Music 1 and Music 2 Setup
The GMA 35 provides two music interfaces. Operation depends on the state of the
music distribution.
1. While viewing the Intercom Setup page, touch the Music 1
or Music 2 keys to set their setup.
Heavy Outline Indicates The Upper Left Rotary
Knob Controls Volume
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch To Select
Music Recipients
Direct-To
Proc
Touch To Select Source
That Will Mute Music
Touch To
Decrease
Volume
Touch To
Increase Volume
Percent Of Maximum Volume
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Graphic Scale Showing Volume
Figure 2-25 Music 1 Setup
Traffic
2. Select the recipients for Music Distribution by touching any
combination of the Pilot, Co-Pilot, or Passenger keys.
Terrain
Weather
3. Touch the Radio and/or Intercom keys to select the function
that, when active, Music will be muted.
4. Touch the Volume arrows to set the desired Volume level.
NOTE: At every power cycle, the “mute music during radio” selection will
be active.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
2-23
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
2.3.4
The GMA 35 provides a 2-way telephone interface. Operation depends on
the state of the telephone distribution. Telephone communication is much like
using the intercom, allowing both parties to talk at once.
NOTE: Garmin recommends when using the GSR 56 Iridium phone system
that the audio only be activated when on a phone call.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Telephone Setup
The telephone channel may be disabled in Configuration mode. Contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for details.
1. While viewing the Intercom Setup page, touch the Telephone
key to set its setup.
Proc
Heavy Outline Indicates The Upper Left Rotary
Knob Controls Volume
Charts
Wpt Info
Touch To Select
Telephone Recipients
Map
Touch To
Decrease
Volume
Traffic
Touch To
Increase Volume
Percent Of Maximum Volume
Terrain
Graphic Scale Showing Volume
Figure 2-26 Telephone Setup
Weather
2. Select the recipients for Telephone Distribution by touching
any combination of the Pilot, Co-Pilot, or Passenger keys.
Nearest
Services/
Music
3. Touch the Volume arrows to set the desired Telephone Volume
level.
Utilities
NOTE: Telephone audio distribution is retained across power cycles for the
passengers, however, pilot and co-pilot telephone distribution will default
to OFF over power cycles.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
2-24
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2.3.5
Bluetooth Setup
Foreword
The GMA 35c provides a Bluetooth audio connection to a portable device.
Operation depends on the state of the Bluetooth Audio Distribution.
1. While viewing the Intercom Setup page, touch the Bluetooth
key to access its setup.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 2-27 Audio Bluetooth Setup
Wpt Info
2. Select the recipients for Bluetooth Distribution by touching
any combination of the Pilot, Co-Pilot, or Passenger keys.
Map
Traffic
3. Touch the Radio and/or Intercom keys to select the function
that, when active, will mute the Bluetooth audio.
Terrain
Weather
4. Touch the Volume arrows to set the desired Volume level.
NOTE: At every power cycle, the “mute Bluetooth during radio” selection
will be active.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
2-25
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
2.4
Garmin's Telligence Voice Command voice recognition feature allows
the pilot (and optionally copilot) to control the GTN 7XX connected to
a GMA 35/350 using spoken commands. To activate Voice Recognition,
push and hold the Push-to-Command (PTC) switch while speaking
a command. When the Push-to-Command switch is released, the
GTN 7XX and/or the audio panel will respond.
If a command is understood by the GMA, a positive acknowledgement
chime will be played, and the relevant information will be displayed to
reflect the change (if applicable). The pilot should verify that the correct
response has occurred.
If a command is not understood by the GMA or the GTN is unable
to complete the requested action, a negative acknowledgement tone
will be played. The pilot should repeat the command by using the
Push-to-Command switch, or by manually using the GTN 7XX touch
screen. In the event of any abnormal Voice Recognition operation, the
front panel controls and touch screen may be used to override Voice
Recognition and manually control the GTN 7XX.
Traffic
NOTE : If Telligence Voice Command malfunctions and needs to be disabled,
remove power to the GMA audio panel. This will force the audio panel
into the fail-safe mode. The pilot will be able to communicate using the
COM 2 radio only.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Telligence™ Voice Command
The available voice recognition commands are listed in GTN 6XX/7XX
Telligence Voice Command Guide, P/N 190-01007-50.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
2-26
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3
NAV/COM (GTN 750 NAV/COM)
Foreword
The GTN 750 features a digitally-tuned VHF Com radio and digitally-tuned
Nav/localizer and glideslope receivers. The GTN 750’s Com radio operates in the
aviation voice band, from 118.000 to 136.975 MHz, in 25 kHz steps (default).
For European operations, a Com radio configuration of 8.33 kHz steps is also
available.
Volume and
Squelch
On/Off Knob
Active Com Frequency
Active Nav Frequency
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Standby Nav Frequency
Direct-To
Standby Com
Frequency
Proc
Backspace
Key
Com Standby
Editing Window
Find Frequency
Key
Numeric Keypad
Charts
Wpt Info
Frequency
Transfer
(Flip/Flop)
Key
Frequency
Monitor Key
Map
Large and
Small Knobs
(Frequency
Adjust)
Figure 3-1 Nav/Com Controls
Find
Xfer
Monitor
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Keypad
Nearest
Recent
Nearest - Filter - Com - Nav
Flight Plan
Airport
User
VOR
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Airport
FSS
ARTCC
Messages
Symbols
Figure 3-2 Nav/Com Functional Diagram
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
3-1
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
3.1
Volume
Com radio volume is adjusted using the Volume knob. Turn the Volume
knob clockwise to increase volume, or counterclockwise to decrease volume.
The level will be maintained until changed.
1. Turn the Volume knob to set the Com volume.
Com/Nav
FPL
Percent Of Maximum Volume Graphic Scale Showing Volume
Direct-To
Figure 3-3 Com Volume Setting
2. A bar graph showing the relative volume level will indicate the
selected level and will disappear a few seconds after releasing
the Volume knob.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
3.2
Squelch
The Com radio features an automatic squelch to reject many localized noise
sources. You may override the squelch function by pressing the Volume knob.
This facilitates listening to a distant station or setting the desired volume level.
To override the automatic squelch, press the Volume knob momentarily.
Press the Volume knob again to return to automatic squelch operation. A “SQ”
indication appears above the active Com frequency window in the upper left
corner of the display when automatic squelch is overridden.
Com Control Text
Nearest
Receive Annunciation
Services/
Music
Squelch Annunciation
Utilities
Active Com Frequency
(Touch to Flip/Flop)
System
Standby Com Frequency
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 3-4 Com Controls
While receiving a transmission, an “RX” indication appears in the Com
frequency window to the immediate right of “Com.” A “TX” indication appears
at this location while you are transmitting.
3-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3.3
Com Window and Tuning
Communication frequencies are selected by using the large and small right
knobs or by touching the value in the standby Com frequency field and using
the displayed keypad. The standby frequency always appears below the active
frequency. The active frequency is the frequency currently in use for transmit
and receive operations.
Once a frequency is selected in the standby field, it may be transferred to the
active frequency by touching the active frequency field.
NOTE: The Com window is normally active for adjustment, unless the NAV
window is made active by pressing the small right knob. The active state
automatically returns to the Com window after 30 seconds of inactivity.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
To select a Com frequency using the small and large right knobs:
Charts
1. If the tuning cursor is not currently in the Com window,
press the small right knob momentarily. The Standby Com
frequency will be highlighted to indicate that it is active for
editing.
Wpt Info
2. Turn the large right knob to select the desired megahertz
(MHz) value. For example, the “118” portion of the frequency
“118.30.”
Traffic
3. Turn the small right knob to select the desired kilohertz
(kHz) value. For example, the “.30” portion of the frequency
“118.30.”
Map
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
3-3
Index
Foreword
To select a Com frequency using the numeric keypad:
1.
Getting
Started
Touch the Standby window.
2. A pull down keypad will appear with the current Standby
frequency highlighted.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Backspace - Frequency
Clear Key
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Com Standby
Editing Window
Proc
Find Frequency
Key
Charts
Numeric Keypad
Wpt Info
Frequency
Transfer
(Flip/Flop)
Key
Frequency
Monitor Key
Map
Traffic
Enter Key
Terrain
Figure 3-5 Com Standby Frequency Numeric Keypad
Weather
3. Touch the numeric keys to add the desired values and touch
Enter to accept the displayed value and place it into the
Standby Com window.
Nearest
Services/
Music
4. Touching the Xfer key will place the selected frequency directly
into the Active window.
Utilities
System
To make the standby frequency the active frequency:
1. Touch the Com active frequency (top) window.
Messages
Symbols
2. The Active (top) and Standby frequencies will flip/flop.
Appendix
Index
3-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3.3.1
Com Frequency Finding
The GTN 750’s frequency finding feature allows you to quickly select any
displayed database Com frequency as your standby frequency. The following are
some examples of selecting Com frequencies from some of the main GPS pages.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
To select a Com frequency for a User created frequency, Recent selected
frequency, Nearest airport, or from your Flight Plan:
1. While viewing the numeric keypad touch the Find key.
Categories for User, Recent, Nearest, and Flight Plan are
available.
2. Touch Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or User.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Selected
Frequency
for Nearest
Airport
Selected
Frequency
Category
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch to Select
Nearest List
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 3-6 Com Nearest Airport Frequency
3. Touch the desired Com frequency to select it and place it into
the Com Standby window.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
3-5
Index
Foreword
3.3.1.1
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Find Recent Frequencies
1. While viewing the Find results, touch the Recent tab. A list
of the recently selected frequencies will be displayed.
Selected Frequency
Category
Recent
Frequency
Category
Touch Frequency From
Recent List To Select
Standby Frequency
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 3-7 Recent Com Frequency List
Map
2. Touch the desired frequency to select it and place it into the
Standby window.
Traffic
Terrain
3.3.1.2
Weather
Find Nearest Frequencies
1. While viewing the Find results, touch the Nearest key. A list
of the nearest airport Com frequencies will be displayed.
Selected
Frequencies
For Nearest
Airport
Nearest
Selected
Frequency
Category
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 3-8 Com Nearest Airport Frequency
3-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2. Touch the Multiple FREQ key to show the available
frequencies.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch A Frequency Key
To Place It In The Standby
Window
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 3-9 Nearest Airport Multiple Frequency List
3. Touch the Filter key to filter the Nearest List by Airports, FSS,
or ARTCC.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 3-10 Nearest Com Frequency List
Services/
Music
4. Touch the desired Frequency List. Then, touch the desired
frequency to load it into the Standby window.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
3-7
Index
5. Some frequencies will have more information detail available.
Touch the key that shows "More Information."
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch
For More
Information
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 3-11 More Information Is Available For Some Frequencies
Wpt Info
6. More detailed information is shown on the display. Touch the
frequency key to load it into the Standby window.
Map
Touch To Insert
Into Standby
Window
Traffic
Terrain
Additional
Information
Narrative
Weather
Nearest
Figure 3-12 More Frequency Detail
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
3-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3.3.1.3
Find Flight Plan Frequencies
1. While viewing the Find results, touch the Flight Plan tab.
A list of Com or Nav frequencies associated with the active
flight plan will be displayed.
Selected
Frequency
Category
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Selected
Frequency
Category
Touch To Select
Frequency From List
For Nearest Airport
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 3-13 Flight Plan Frequency List
3.3.1.4
Map
2. Touch the Multiple FREQ key to show the available
frequencies, if present.
Traffic
3. Touch the desired frequency to select it and place it into the
Standby window.
Terrain
Find User Frequencies
1. While viewing the Find results, touch the User tab. A list of
User-created frequencies will be displayed.
2. Touch the desired frequency to load it into the Standby window.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
3-9
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
3.3.2
Simple Frequency Entry
Frequencies can be entered on the GTN without the leading one and/or
trailing zero(s). As a result, the pilot can touch “2,” “1,” and “5” for 121.50. If a
number is pressed that is not valid for the cursor location, the pilot is presented
with a confirmation pop-up upon selecting the typed frequency. Frequency
entry can be accomplished by typing every digit in the frequency or by leaving
off the leading one and/or trailing zero(s). The frequency that will be entered is
always displayed in the cursor window.
1. Touch the Standby frequency field and then touch the 2 key.
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 3-14 Simplified Frequency Entry Without Leading Number
2. Touch the 7 key.
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 3-15 Second Frequency Number
Map
3. Touch the 2 key.
Traffic
Figure 3-16 Final Frequency Without Trailing Number
Terrain
4. Touch Enter.
Weather
Nearest
Entered Frequency Value
Services/
Music
Figure 3-17 Completed Frequency Entry
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
3-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3.3.3
Adding a New User Frequency
1. While viewing the numeric keypad touch the Find key at the
bottom of the display.
2. Touch the User tab and then touch the Add User Frequency
key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Add User Frequency
Direct-To
Proc
User Frequency Selection
Charts
Figure 3-18 Add New User Frequency
3. The Add New User Frequency information window will now
be displayed. Touch the Name key to select a name for the
User frequency.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
User Frequency Name
Terrain
Weather
User Frequency Value
Nearest
Figure 3-19 Add New User Frequency Detail Window
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
3-11
Index
4. Select the characters from the alphanumeric keypad for the
desired name. Touch the Enter key to accept the displayed
Name.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Cursor Movement
User Frequency
Name
Backspace
FPL
Direct-To
Alphanumeric
Keypad
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 3-20 Select a Name for the New User Frequency
Traffic
5. Touch the Frequency key and select the characters from
the keypad for the desired frequency. Touch the Enter key to
accept the displayed frequency.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 3-21 Select a Frequency Value for the New User Frequency
Appendix
Index
3-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
6. Touch the Enter key to accept the displayed name and
frequency. The new User Frequency will be added to the list.
The list can store up to 15 user frequencies.
User Frequency Name
User Frequency Value
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Add Another
User Frequency
Com/Nav
Touch to Edit/Remove
the User Frequency
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 3-22 Completed New User Frequency
3.3.4
Emergency Frequency
Charts
The GTN 750’s emergency frequency select provides a quick method
of selecting 121.50 MHz as the active frequency in the event of an in-flight
emergency. The emergency frequency select is available whenever the unit is on,
regardless of GPS or cursor status, or loss of the display.
To quickly tune and activate 121.50, press and hold volume
knob or the remote Com flip-flop key for approximately
two seconds.
NOTE: Pressing and holding the remote Com FLIP/FLOP key for
approximately two seconds, on units so configured, will lock the COM
board, preventing further changes in Com frequency until the Com board is
unlocked, by pressing the remote Com FLIP/FLOP key again for two seconds.
The following message will notify the pilot that the Com board has been
locked: “COM LOCKED TO 121.5 MHZ. HOLD REMOTE COM TRANSFER
KEY TO EXIT.”
NOTE: Under some circumstances if the Com system loses communication
with the main system, the radio will automatically tune to 121.50 MHz for
transmit and receive regardless of the displayed frequency.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
3-13
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
3.3.5
Whenever the GTN 750 is transmitting, a “TX” indication appears in the
Com window. If the push-to-talk key on the microphone is stuck or accidentally
left in the keyed position, or continues to transmit after the key is released,
the Com transmitter automatically times out (or ceases to transmit) after
30 seconds of continuous broadcasting. You will also receive a “Com
push-to-talk key stuck” message as long as the stuck condition exists.
3.3.6
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
NOTE: For software prior to v5.00, frequencies must be stored in the User
Frequency List prior to utilizing the remote channel select switch.
3.3.7
Reverse Frequency Look-Up
When the Reverse Frequency Look-Up feature is enabled in System-Setup,
the identifier and frequency type will be shown for the selected Com and Nav
frequencies for the nearest stations that are in the aviation database when the
unit is receiving a valid position input. Station Identifiers with a “+” sign will
have more stations associated with this frequency than just the type displayed.
Identifier and Type Shown
for the Selected Frequency
The “+” Sign Indicates More
Stations Associated With This
Frequency
Figure 3-23 Reverse Frequency Look-Up
Utilities
System
Messages
NOTE: It can take up to 2 minutes for the RFL frequency to change after
crossing the half way point when flying from one airport to another that
both use the same frequency.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Remote Frequency Selection Control
On units configured for remote Com frequency Recall, pressing the remote
recall switch will load the next preset Com frequency into the unit’s Standby
frequency box. The remote recall switch can be pressed multiple times to scroll
the entire preset frequency list through the Standby frequency box (the list will
“wrap” from the bottom of the list back up to the top, skipping any empty preset
positions).
The standby frequency isn’t activated until a Com FLIP/FLOP switch (either
bezel-mounted or remote (COM RMT XFR) is pressed. Remote Frequency Selection
only functions on units configured for a remote Com Frequency recall switch.
Traffic
Terrain
Stuck Microphone
3-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3.4
Com Frequency Monitoring
Foreword
The Frequency Monitoring function allows you to listen to the Standby
frequency in the Com radio, while monitoring the Active frequency for activity.
1. Touch the Monitor key to listen to the standby frequency.
A small “MON” annunciation is displayed to the right of the
Standby frequency. A green bar will show on the Monitor
key. When the Active frequency receives a signal, the unit will
switch automatically to the Active frequency and then switch
back to the standby frequency when activity ceases.
Frequency Monitor
Annunciation
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Standby Frequency
Clear Key
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Com Standby
Editing Window
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Frequency
Transfer
(Flip-Flop)
Key
Frequency
Monitor Key
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 3-24 Com Frequency Monitoring
2. The Monitor function is deactivated when you touch the
Monitor key again and the green bar is extinguished.
NOTE: The Com radio Monitoring function is different than the Monitor
function of the Audio Panel.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
3-15
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
3.5
NAV (VOR/Localizer/Glideslope)
Receiver Operations
The GTN 750 includes digitally-tuned Nav/localizer and glideslope receivers
with the desired frequency selected on the Nav window, along the top right-hand
side of the display. Frequency selection is performed by pressing the small right
knob to activate Nav Standby frequency editing and then turning the small and
large right knobs or keypad to select the desired frequency.
FPL
Active Nav
Frequency
Nav Control Text
Direct-To
Touch To
Flip/Flop
NAV / STBY
Proc
Touch To
Edit STBY
Charts
Standby Nav
Frequency
Wpt Info
Figure 3-25 Nav Frequency Window
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
3.5.1
Nav ident is enabled by pressing the Volume knob when the Nav window
is active. When Nav ident is enabled, the ID annunciation will appear in the
active Nav window and Morse code tones will be heard. When the Nav function
is enabled, the Nav Standby channel window will highlight briefly and then
turn to blue text. The Nav Standby frequency will be active for editing for about
30 seconds before the Com Standby frequency becomes active for editing.
Nav Ident Is Active
Services/
Music
Nav Standby Frequency Highlighted To
Indicate It Is Active for Frequency Selection
Utilities
Figure 3-26 Nav Standby Frequency Window and Ident is Active
System
Messages
Ident Audio and Volume
Nav audio volume is adjusted using the Volume knob. Turn the Volume
knob clockwise to increase volume, or counterclockwise to decrease volume.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
3-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3.5.2
Nav Tuning Window
Foreword
Nav frequencies are selected with the tuning cursor in the standby Nav
frequency field, and using the small and large right knobs to dial in the desired
frequency. The keypad may also be used for frequency entry after touching
the Standby window. The standby frequency always appears below the active
frequency. The active frequency is the frequency currently in use. The GTN will
automatically decode Morse code and display the Ident for the active frequency
above it. The RFL (reverse frequency lookup) Identifier is displayed below the
frequency and is only dependent on GPS position and database information.
NOTE: Tuning is normally active in the Com window, unless placed in the
Nav window by pressing the small right knob. When the tuning cursor
is in the Nav window, it automatically returns to the Com window after
30 seconds of inactivity. The active frequency in either window cannot
be accessed directly — only the standby frequency is active for editing.
To select a VOR/localizer/ILS frequency:
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
1. Touch the small right knob momentarily to make the Nav
Standby frequency value active for editing. The window will
be highlighted momentarily.
2. Turn the large right knob to select the desired megaHertz
(MHz) value. For example, the “117” portion of the frequency
“117.80.”
3. Turn the small right knob to select the desired kiloHertz
(kHz) value. For example, the “.80” portion of the frequency
“117.80.”
4. Touch the Nav active (top) frequency to make the standby
frequency.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
5. The Active (top) and Standby frequencies will switch.
Nav Frequencies In The Database
Will Display The Ident Based on
GPS Position
Getting
Started
System
Nav Frequencies Will
Automatically Decode Morse
Code And Display The Ident
Messages
Symbols
Figure 3-27 Automatic Nav Frequency Ident Decoding
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
3-17
Index
Foreword
3.5.3
Nav Frequency Finding
Getting
Started
The GTN 750’s frequency finding feature allows you to quickly select any
displayed database Nav frequency as your standby frequency.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
To select a Nav frequency for a User created frequency, Recent selected
frequency, Nearest airport, or from your Flight Plan:
1. While viewing the numeric keypad touch the Find key at the
bottom of the display. Categories for User, Recent, Nearest,
and Flight Plan are available.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
2. Touch the User, Recent, Nearest, or Flight Plan key.
Proc
Active Nav
Frequency Key
Charts
Wpt Info
Touch To
Select For
Standby Nav
Frequency
Map
Traffic
Nearest Nav
Frequency List Is
Selected
Nearest Nav
Frequency List
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch to Filter
Nearest List
Utilities
Figure 3-28 Nearest Airport Nav Frequency
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
3-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the desired Nav frequency to select it and place it into
the Nav Standby window.
OR
Foreword
Getting
Started
4. Touch the Filter key to narrow the list by category, such as
Airport and VOR, and then select a given frequency.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch To Select Nearest
Frequency List Type
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 3-29 Nearest Nav Frequency List
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
3-19
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
This page intentionally left blank
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
3-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4
FLIGHT PLANS
The GTN 7XX lets you create up to 99 different flight plans, with up to 100
waypoints in each flight plan. The Flight Plan function is accessed by touching
the Flight Plan key on the Home page. The Flight Plan function allows you to
create, store, edit, and copy flight plans.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Menu
Active FPL
Waypoint
Options
Activate Leg
Insert Before
Insert After
Load SAR*
Hold at Waypoint
Load Procedures**
Load Airway***
Waypoint Info
Remove
Catalog
Store
Delete
Preview
Parallel Track
Invert
Edit Data Fields
Add Waypoint
Direct-To
Select Waypoint
Find
Recent
Nearest
Flight Plan
User
Search by Name
Search by City
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
* "Load SAR" is only shown when the Search and Rescue feature is enabled by the installer
** "Load Procedures" is shown for airports
***"Load Airway" is shown for waypoints on a published airway
Traffic
Figure 4-1 Flight Plan Functional Diagram
Terrain
NOTE: Navigation is provided for fixed wing aircraft above 30 kts and for
rotorcraft above 10 kts.
NOTE: The Chart feature provides a digital representation of a paper
chart and provides no vertical or lateral course guidance. Flight Plan and
Procedures are separate from Charts, and do provide vertical and lateral
course guidance for the loaded route or procedure shown on the Flight
Plan page. The term “Chart Unavailable” means that the chart cannot be
viewed on the Charts due to either a chart not being published, or an error
in the Chart database, but does not preclude its availability or inclusion of
the procedure in the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system. The
absence of a chart for a particular Departure, Arrival, or Approach does
not preclude its availability or inclusion in the Flight Plan or Procedures
portion of the system. The absence of a particular Departure, Arrival, or
Approach under the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system does
not preclude the ability to view the Chart for that procedure under the
Chart feature.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-1
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
4.1
Creating a New Flight Plan
4.1.1
Creating a New Flight Plan in the Catalog
1. From the Home page, touch Flight Plan.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
2. Touch Menu and then the Catalog key.
Com/Nav
FPL
3. Touch the Create New Catalog Route key at the end of
the flight plan list in the Catalog.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Touch To Create
New Flight Plan
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 4-2 Create a New Catalog Route (Flight Plan)
Weather
4. Touch the Add Waypoint key and select a waypoint identifier
with the alphanumeric keypad. Then, touch Enter.
Nearest
Selected Flight
Plan Waypoint
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 4-3 Select a Waypoint for the New Flight Plan
4-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
NOTE: If a flight plan that includes a procedure that has been modified
by the pilot is saved into the flight plan catalog, the GTN cannot check the
accuracy of that procedure when that flight plan is used on a later flight. It
is recommended that flight plans with modified procedures not be saved
in the flight plan catalog.
4.1.2
Creating a New Flight Plan from the Active
Flight Plan
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
1. From the Home page, touch Flight Plan.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 4-4 Create New Flight Plan by Clearing Active Flight Plan
Wpt Info
2. If there is already an Active Flight Plan, touch Menu and then
the Delete and OK keys to delete the existing active flight
plan. The stored flight plan in the Catalog will not be deleted.
3. Touch the Add Waypoint key and select a waypoint identifier
with the alphanumeric keypad. Then, touch Enter.
4. Touch the Add Waypoint key and select the waypoint
identifier with the keypad for the next waypoint. Touch Enter.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
5. Continue adding waypoints as needed.
6. Touch Menu and then touch Store to store the flight plan
in the Catalog. The screen will now display the Flight Plan
Catalog and show the new flight plan. Flight plans are listed
by the Departure and Destination waypoints.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-3
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
4.2
Active Flight Plan Page
The Active Flight Plan Page provides information and editing functions for
the flight plan currently in use for navigation. Once you have activated a flight
plan, the Active Flight Plan Page shows each waypoint for the flight plan, along
with the Desired Track (DTK), Distance (DIST) for each leg and Cumulative
Distance (CUM). The data fields are user-selectable and may be changed to
display Cumulative Distance (CUM), Distance (DIST), Desired Track (DTK), En
Route Safe Altitude (ESA), or Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA).
Cumulative Dist Between
Current Position and Next Wpt *
Direct-To
DIST Between Legs *
DTK Between Legs *
Proc
Charts
Origin and Destination Waypoints
Wpt Info
Active Leg Navigation
Map
Parallel Track Active
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Flight Plan Menu Options
Services/
Music
Up/Down Keys to Scroll FPL
Utilities
System
Figure 4-5 Active Flight Plan Page
* The field types may be changed using the Edit Data Fields function in the
Flight Plan page Menu.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4.2.1
Waypoint Options
Foreword
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired
flight plan waypoint. The Waypoint Options window will be
shown.
Grayed Options
Are Not Available
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch Key To
Select Option
Waypoint Options List
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 4-6 Active Flight Plan Wpt Options with SAR Available
Map
2. Touch one of the options to perform the selected action. Cancel
the option selection by touching the Back key.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-5
Index
Foreword
4.2.1.1
Activate Leg
The Activate Leg option allows you to change the active leg of a flight plan.
1. On the Waypoint Options menu, touch the desired TO waypoint
and then the Activate Leg key to select the TO waypoint as
the active leg for navigation.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Current Leg
FPL
Current TO Wpt
Direct-To
Touch to Select As
New TO Wpt and
To Activate Leg
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 4-7 Active Flight Plan Activate Leg Option
2. Touch the OK key to set the selected leg as the Active Leg, or
Cancel to not select it.
Traffic
Terrain
Activate Leg Option
Was Selected
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch OK To
Activate Leg
Utilities
System
Touch Cancel To
Cancel The Operation
And Return To the
Flight Plan View
Messages
Figure 4-8 Active Flight Plan Activate Leg Option
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4.2.1.2
Insert Before
The Insert Before option allows you to insert a new waypoint into the active
flight plan before the selected waypoint.
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in
the flight plan. The Waypoint Options list will be displayed.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Option Will
Insert New
Waypoint
Before This
Selected Flight
Plan Waypoint
FPL
Insert Before
Option Was
Selected
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 4-9 Active Flight Plan Insert Waypoint Before Option
2. Touch the Insert Before key to select a new waypoint before
the selected waypoint.
Traffic
3. Select a waypoint identifier with the alphanumeric keypad.
Terrain
Weather
Choose New Waypoint
To "Insert Before" The
Selected Flight Plan
Waypoint
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 4-10 Use the Alphanumeric Keypad to Select Waypoint to Insert Before
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-7
Index
4. Then, touch Enter to confirm the selection, or touch Cancel
to cancel any changes. The new flight plan will be shown.
Foreword
Getting
Started
New
Waypoint
Inserted
Before The
Selected Flight
Plan Waypoint
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 4-11 New Waypoint Is Inserted Before the Selected Waypoint
Wpt Info
Selected Flight
Plan Waypoint
New Flight
Plan Waypoint
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 4-12 Flight Plan Before and After New Waypoint Inserted
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4.2.1.3
Insert After
The Insert After option allows you to insert a new waypoint into the active
flight plan after the selected waypoint.
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in
the flight plan. The Waypoint Options list will be displayed.
2. Touch the Insert After key to select a new waypoint after the
selected waypoint.
3. Select a waypoint identifier with the alphanumeric keypad.
Then, touch Enter to confirm the selection, or touch the
Cancel key to cancel the operation and return to the Waypoint
Options window.
4.2.1.4
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Remove
The Remove option allows you to remove the selected waypoint from the
active flight plan.
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in
the flight plan. The Waypoint Options list will be displayed.
2. On the Waypoint Options menu, touch the Remove key to
delete the selected waypoint from the active flight plan.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Waypoint Selected
To Be Removed
Nearest
Touch OK
To Remove
Waypoint
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch Cancel To
Cancel The Operation
And Return To the
Flight Plan View
System
Messages
Figure 4-13 Active Flight Plan Remove Waypoint Option
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-9
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
4.2.1.5
Load Procedures
The Load Procedure selection from the Waypoint Options will start the
Procedures function. See the Procedures section for complete information.
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in
the flight plan. The Waypoint Options list will be displayed.
2. Touch the Load Procedures key to go to the Procedure
function for adding procedures to the selected flight plan.
FPL
Touch to Select a Departure
Direct-To
Touch to Select an Arrival
Proc
Touch to Select an Approach
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 4-14 Load Procedures Wpt Option
NOTE: In software v5.13 and earlier, for some procedures, due to very
small position differences in the database, consecutive flight plan legs do
not match up. The total effect on navigational guidance is negligible. The
LOC BC 13 at KSLE via UBG shown below is an example of this.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Procedure Flight Plan
Leg Discrepancy
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 4-15 Procedure Flight Plan Leg Position Difference
4-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4.2.1.6
Waypoint Info
The Waypoint Info option allows you to view information about the selected
waypoint. See the Waypoint Info section for complete information.
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in
the flight plan. The Waypoint Options list will be displayed.
2. One Waypoint Options menu, touch the Waypoint Info key
to view information about the selected waypoint.
Distance & Bearing To Airport
From Current Position
Airport
Identifier, City,
& Type
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Airport
Lat/Lon
Waypoint Info
Page Tab
Proc
Charts
Airport
Information
Wpt Info
Touch To
View Airport
Charts
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 4-16 Active Flight Plan Wpt Info
3. Touch the Back key to return to the Active Flight Plan page.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-11
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
4.2.2
Airways
Airways may be added as legs in flight plans with any waypoint that is part
of an airway, such as a VOR.
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired airway entry
waypoint in the flight plan. The Waypoint Options list will then
be displayed.
FPL
Direct-To
Touch VOR
Entry Wpt To
Insert Airway
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 4-17 Active Flight Plan with VOR Entry Wpt
Traffic
2. Touch the Load Airway key to select an airway for the selected
entry waypoint.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch To
Insert Airway
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 4-18 Select Load Airway from the Waypoint Options
Appendix
Index
4-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the desired airway to select it.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch To Insert
Selected Airway
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 4-19 Select an Airway from the List
Charts
4. Scroll through the list and touch the desired exit point from
the airway. The Airway list can be sorted by distance or
alphabetically. Touch the Sort Alpha key to toggle the sort
setting.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch To Select
Exit Waypoint
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 4-20 Select an Exit Waypoint for the Airway
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-13
Index
5. Confirm the airway information and then touch Load to insert
the selected airway into the flight plan. Use the In and Out
keys, and drag the map with your finger to view the airway
detail. If changes are desired, touch the Airway or Exit
Waypoint keys to select alternate choices.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Map Preview
Of Airway
Waypoints
Airway
Waypoint List
Proc
Charts
Touch To Select
Exit Waypoint
Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Touch To Load
Airway Into FPL
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 4-21 Airway Information
6. After loading the airway, it is inserted into the flight plan. The
airway waypoints are shown below the Airway key on the
display. Touch the airway to make any changes.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Entry Waypoint
Nearest
Selected Airway.
Touch To Edit.
Services/
Music
Utilities
Selected Airway
Waypoints
System
Messages
Figure 4-22 Airway Waypoints in the Flight Plan
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
7. Touch the Airway key to display the Airway Options. Make
the desired choice or touch Back.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch To Collapse
Airway Waypoints
Airway
Detail
Shown
FPL
Touch To Select New or
Change Current Airway
Direct-To
Touch To Remove
Airway From Flight Plan
Proc
Charts
Figure 4-23 Airway Options
Wpt Info
8. Touch the Collapse All Airways key to collapse the list of
points along the airway. Touch the Collapse All Airways key
again to toggle the display of airway detail back on.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch To Expand
Airway Waypoints
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 4-24 Airways Collapsed In Flight Plan
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-15
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
4.2.3
Load Hold at Waypoint
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.00 and later.
4.2.3.1
Hold at Waypoint
Holding patterns may be added to existing waypoints within the flight plan.
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in
the flight plan. The Waypoint Options list will then be displayed.
FPL
Direct-To
Hold At
Waypoint
Option Selected
Proc
Charts
Option Will Hold
At This Waypoint
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 4-25 Active Flight Plan with Hold At Waypoint Option
Traffic
2. Touch the Hold At Waypoint key to open the Hold at
Waypoint dialog window.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch To Select
Hold Course
Touch To
Select Course
Direction
Touch To Select
Turn Direction
Touch To Use
Selections To
Create A Hold
At The Selected
Waypoint
Utilities
System
Touch To Select
Leg Length
Type
Messages
Touch To Enter
Leg Length
Symbols
Touch To Select
EFC Time
Figure 4-26 Creating a User-Defined Hold
Appendix
Index
4-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the Course key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the inbound or outbound course.
Foreword
4. Touch the Direction key to select between Inbound or
Outbound for the course direction.
Getting
Started
5. Touch the Turn key to select between Left or Right for the turn
direction.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
6. Touch the Leg Type key to select between Time or Distance
for the leg type.
Com/Nav
7. Touch the Leg Time or Leg Distance key to display the
keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter key to select the length
of the leg.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
8. Touch the Expect Further Clearance key to display the
keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter key to select the time
for a reminder.
Charts
9. Touch the Load Hold key to add the hold into the flight plan.
Wpt Info
Map
4.2.3.2
Removing a Hold
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the hold to be removed.
The Hold Options window is displayed.
2. Touch the Remove key.
3. Touch the OK key in response to “Remove Holding Pattern?”
The holding pattern is removed. To cancel the request, touch
the Cancel key.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-17
Index
Foreword
4.2.4
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.00 and later.
Getting
Started
NOTE: Turn smoothing may result in SAR coverage being different than
intended. The flight crew should always verify that the SAR pattern created
conforms to the specific mission requirements.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Load Search and Rescue Patterns (Optional)
Search and Rescue Patterns may be added to existing waypoints within
the active flight plan. Only one SAR pattern can exist in the active flight plan.
Loading another SAR pattern into the active flight plan when one already exists
will remove the first SAR pattern.
Each pattern has a default initial track. When the pilot changes the initial
track on a SAR pattern, that change becomes the default initial track the next
time the SAR pattern is accessed within the GTN. The pilot can always change
the initial track when creating a SAR pattern in the flight plan.
NOTE: Flight plans cannot be stored in the catalog if they contain a SAR
pattern.
Wpt Info
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in
the flight plan. The Waypoint Options list will then be displayed.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Option will
initiate SAR
pattern from this
waypoint
Load SAR
Option Was
Selected
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 4-27 Active Flight Plan with Load SAR Option
System
2. Touch the Load SAR key to open the Search and Rescue
Patterns page.
Messages
3. Touch the SAR Pattern key to select between Parallel Track,
Sector Search, Expanding Square, or Orbit for the SAR pattern
type. The available patterns can be configured by the installer
and all of the listed pattern types may not be available.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4. Confirm the SAR pattern information and then touch the Load
Pattern key to load selected pattern to the active flight plan
or touch the Load Pattern & Activate key to load selected
pattern to the active flight plan and go direct-to the initial
waypoint.
5. The SAR pattern waypoints are shown below the SAR key on
the display. Touch the SAR pattern to make any changes.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Initial Waypoint
SAR Key.
Selected Pattern.
Touch To Edit.
Direct-To
Proc
Selected
SAR Pattern
Waypoints
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 4-28 SAR Pattern Waypoints in the Flight Plan
6. Touch the SAR key to display the Search & Rescue Options.
Make the desired choice or touch the Back key.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
SAR Key
Touch To Collapse
SAR Pattern
Touch To Insert Wpt
Before SAR Wpts
Touch To Edit SAR
Pattern Parameters
SAR Pattern
Detail Shown
Touch To Remove
SAR Pattern
Figure 4-29 Search & Rescue Options
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-19
Index
7. Touch the Collapse Search Pattern key to collapse the list of
the points along the SAR pattern. Touch the Collapse Search
Pattern key again to toggle the display of SAR pattern detail
back on.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
SAR Pattern Collapsed
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 4-30 SAR Pattern Collapsed in Flight Plan
4.2.4.1
Creating a Parallel Track Pattern
The Parallel Track SAR pattern starts at the initial waypoint and follows the
initial track for the length of the first parallel track leg. A 90° turn in the initial
turn direction leads to the spacing leg with a length equal to the track spacing.
Another 90° turn leads to the second parallel track leg. The turns at the end
of the second parallel track leg are in the opposite direction as the previous
parallel track leg. The parallel track pattern terminates once the desired number
of parallel track legs have been flown. The default initial track for the Parallel
Track Pattern is True North.
Nearest
Selected Initial
Waypoint
Services/
Music
Touch To Select
SAR Pattern
Utilities
Touch To Select
Initial Track
System
Messages
Symbols
Touch To Select Initial
Turn Direction
Touch To Select Leg
Length
Touch To Select Track
Spacing Distance
Touch To Select Touch To Load Selected
Number of Legs
Pattern To Active FPL
Figure 4-31 Search and Rescue Parallel Track Pattern Page
Appendix
Index
Touch
To Load
Selected
Pattern To
The Active
FPL And
Go DirectTo The First
Wpt In The
Pattern
4-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
1. Touch the SAR Pattern key and select Parallel Track as the
pattern type.
Foreword
2. Touch the Initial Track key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the initial course.
Getting
Started
3. Touch the Initial Turn Direction key to select between Left
or Right as the initial turn direction.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
4. Touch the Leg Length key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the length of the parallel track legs.
Com/Nav
5. Touch the Track Spacing key to open the keypad. Use the
keypad and Enter to select the desired spacing between the
parallel track legs.
FPL
Direct-To
6. Touch the Leg Count key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the desired number of parallel track legs.
Proc
7. Touch the Load Pattern key to load selected pattern to the
active flight plan.
Charts
OR
8. Touch the Load Pattern & Activate key to load selected
pattern to the active flight plan and go direct-to the initial
waypoint.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-21
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
4.2.4.2
Creating a Sector Search Pattern
The Sector Search SAR pattern starts at the initial waypoint and follows the
initial track for the desired leg length. A 60° turn in the initial turn direction is
followed by another leg with the desired leg length, another 60° turn, and then
a leg back to the initiating waypoint. The next sector starts with a leg continuing
on the same course outbound from the initiating waypoint and is followed by
the same sequence of legs and turns. The third sector follows the same pattern.
The default initial track for the Sector Search Pattern is True North.
FPL
Selected Initial
Waypoint
Direct-To
Sector Search
Pattern Selected
Proc
Touch To Select
Initial Track
Charts
Wpt Info
Touch To Select Initial
Turn Direction
Touch To Select Leg
Length
Map
Touch To Load Selected Pattern
To Active FPL & Go Direct-To
Initial Wpt
Figure 4-32 Search and Rescue Sector Search Pattern Page
Touch To Load Selected
Pattern To Active FPL
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
1. Touch the SAR Pattern key and select Sector Search as the
pattern type.
Nearest
2. Touch the Initial Track key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the initial course.
Services/
Music
3. Touch the Initial Turn Direction key to select between Left
or Right as the initial turn direction.
Utilities
4. Touch the Leg Length key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the length of the parallel track legs.
System
5. Touch the Load Pattern key to load selected pattern to the
active flight plan.
Messages
OR
Symbols
6. Touch the Load Pattern & Activate key to load selected
pattern to the active flight plan and go direct-to the initial
waypoint.
Appendix
Index
4-22
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4.2.4.3
Creating an Expanding Square Pattern
The Expanding Square SAR pattern starts at the initial waypoint and follows
the initial track for a distance equal to the track spacing. All turns in the expanding
square pattern are in the initial turn direction. All legs in the expanding square
pattern are separated by the track spacing distance. The default initial track for
the Expanding Square Pattern is 090°T.
Selected Initial
Waypoint
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Expanding Square
Pattern Selected
FPL
Touch To Select
Initial Track
Direct-To
Touch To Select Initial
Turn Direction
Proc
Charts
Touch To Select Track
Spacing Distance
Touch To Select Number of Legs
Touch To Load Selected Pattern
To Active FPL & Go Direct-To
Touch To Load Selected
Initial Wpt
Pattern To Active FPL
Figure 4-33 Search and Rescue Expanding Square Pattern Page
1. Touch the SAR Pattern key and select Expanding Square as
the pattern type.
2. Touch the Initial Track key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the initial course.
3. Touch the Initial Turn Direction key to select between Left
or Right as the initial turn direction.
4. Touch the Track Spacing key to open the keypad. Use the
keypad and Enter to select the desired spacing between the
parallel track legs.
5. Touch the Leg Count key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the desired number of legs.
6. Touch the Load Pattern key to load selected pattern to the
active flight plan.
OR
7. Touch the Load Pattern & Activate key to load selected
pattern to the active flight plan and go direct-to the initial
waypoint.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-23
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
4.2.4.4
Creating an Orbit Pattern
The Orbit SAR pattern is a fixed radius turn around the specified center
waypoint. Automatic waypoint sequencing will be suspended while flying the
orbit pattern.
Selected Initial
Waypoint
Com/Nav
Orbit Search
Pattern Selected
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch To Select Initial
Turn Direction
Touch To Select Radius
Charts
Touch To Load Selected
Pattern To Active FPL
Wpt Info
Map
Touch To Load Selected Pattern
To Active FPL & Go Direct-To
Initial Wpt
Figure 4-34 Search and Rescue Orbit Pattern Page
1. Touch the SAR Pattern key and select Orbit as the pattern
type.
Traffic
Terrain
2. Touch the Initial Turn Direction key to select between Left
or Right as the turn direction.
Weather
3. Touch the Radius key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the radius of the orbit pattern.
Nearest
4. Touch the Load Pattern key to load selected pattern to the
active flight plan.
Services/
Music
OR
Utilities
5. Touch the Load Pattern & Activate key to load selected
pattern to the active flight plan and go direct-to the first
waypoint in the pattern.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-24
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4.3
Flight Plan Menu
The Flight Plan Menu provides access to functions to manage your flight
plans. The functions included are: View Catalog, Store Flight Plan, Delete Flight
Plan, Preview Flight Plan, Parallel Track, Invert Flight Plan, and Edit Data Fields.
Touch the Menu key to access the Flight Plan Menu options:
View Catalog, Store Flight Plan, Delete Flight Plan, Preview
Flight Plan, Parallel Track, Invert Flight Plan, and Edit Data
Fields.
Touch To Store
The Active
Flight Plan
Touch To Add
Parallel Track
Course Offsets
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch To Delete
The Active
Flight Plan
Touch To View
List Of Stored
Flight Plans
Touch To Invert
The Active
Flight Plan
Touch To View A
Map And A List Of
Waypoints For The
Active Flight Plan
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Touch To Edit The
Active Flight Plan
Information Fields
Traffic
Figure 4-35 Flight Plan Menu
Terrain
Menu
Weather
Catalog
Store
Delete
Route
Options
Activate
Invert & Activate
Preview
Edit
Copy
Delete
Preview
Parallel
Track
Invert
Direction
Offset
Activate
Nearest
Edit
Data
Fields
Services/
Music
Column 1
Column 2
Column 3
Restore
Defaults
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 4-36 Flight Plan Menu Functional Diagram
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
4-25
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
4.3.1
Store Flight Plan
A flight plan must be saved to the Catalog to be used in future flights. The
Store Flight Plan function will save the Active Flight Plan to the Catalog.
NOTE: If a flight plan that includes a procedure that has been modified
by the pilot is saved into the flight plan catalog, the GTN cannot check the
accuracy of that procedure when that flight plan is used on a later flight. It
is recommended that flight plans with modified procedures not be saved
in the flight plan catalog.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, touch the Menu
key. The Flight Plan Menu will be displayed.
Direct-To
2. Touch the Store key to store the current Active Flight Plan into
the Catalog. The flight plan will be named by the beginning
and ending waypoints.
Proc
Charts
3. When a duplicate flight plan is created, a warning dialog will
appear and the flight plan will be saved with a numeral at the
end of the destination waypoint.
Wpt Info
Map
Duplicate Flight Plan
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Original Flight Plan
Utilities
Duplicate Flight Plan
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 4-37 Duplicate Flight Plan Naming
4.3.2
Invert Flight Plan
The Invert Flight Plan option allows you to reverse the Active flight plan and
use it for navigation guidance back to your original departure point. The original
flight plan stored in the catalog is not affected.
Appendix
Index
4-26
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, touch the Menu
key. The Flight Plan Menu will be displayed.
4.3.3
Foreword
2. Touch the Invert key to invert the current Active Flight Plan.
Getting
Started
Parallel Track
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Parallel Track allows you to create a parallel course offset of 1 to 99 NM to
the left or right of your current flight plan. After setting a parallel track to your
current flight plan, a magenta parallel track line will be drawn offset from the
original by the selected distance. The original course line will be drawn in gray.
The aircraft will navigate to the parallel track course line and external CDI/HSI
guidance will be driven from the parallel track.
When you reach the end of the flight plan, a message will state, “Parallel
offset terminating in X seconds.” The message will be given when the aircraft
reaches the offset distance from the end of the parallel track. This will give the
pilot sufficient time to intercept the original course.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 4-38 Parallel Track Description
Messages
NOTE: In software v6.21 and earlier, graphically editing a flight plan
cancels the parallel track function.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-27
Symbols
Appendix
Index
NOTE: Certain leg types (such as approach) or leg geometries (changes in
desire track greater than 120 degrees), combined with large offset values
do not support parallel track. Default direction and offset values may result
in the status indicating that parallel track is not supported. The user must
enter the desired parallel track offset and distance to determine whether
that flight plan, combined with the offset and distance, support parallel
track.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and
then the Parallel Track key.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch To
Set PTK
Direction
Charts
Wpt Info
Touch To
Set PTK
Distance
PTK Status
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch To
Activate PTK
Settings
Touch To
Cancel Settings
Weather
Figure 4-39 Parallel Track Selection
2. Touch the Direction key to toggle the Parallel Track to be Left
or Right of the current Flight Plan.
Nearest
Services/
Music
3. Touch the Offset key to select the Parallel Offset from the
current Flight Plan. Select the desired distance on the numeric
keypad. Touch Enter when finished.
Utilities
4. Touch the Activate key. A magenta "-P" indication will appear
to the right of the waypoint name on the Active Flight Plan
page.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-28
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Getting
Started
Active FPL Leg
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
PTK Active Symbol
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 4-40 Parallel Track Shown in the Active Flight Plan Page
5. To deactivate Parallel Track, while viewing the Active Flight
Plan touch the Menu key. With the Flight Plan Menu displayed,
touch the Parallel Track key.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
PTK Status
Nearest
Touch To Deactivate
PTK Settings
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 4-41 Deactivating Parallel Track
System
6. Touch the Deactivate key to cancel Parallel Tracking.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-29
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
4.3.4
Edit Data Fields
The Active Flight Plan Page shows each waypoint for the flight plan, along
with the Desired Track (DTK), Distance (DIS) for each leg and Cumulative
Distance (CUM). The data fields are user-selectable and may be changed to
display Cumulative Distance (CUM), Distance (DIS), Desired Track (DTK), En
Route Safe Altitude (ESA), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), or Estimated Time
En route (ETE).
Cumulative Dist Between
Current Position and Next Wpt
FPL
DIST Between Legs
Direct-To
Proc
DTK Between Legs
Origin and Destination Waypoints
Current Flight Plan Leg
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 4-42 Flight Plan Data Fields
1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and
then the Edit Data Fields key.
Traffic
Terrain
Touch To Select
Field Types
Weather
Current Field
Types
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Touch To
Restore Original
Default Types
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 4-43 Flight Plan Edit Data Fields Page
4-30
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2. Touch one of the field keys to select from the list.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Selected Field Type
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 4-44 Flight Plan Data Fields List
3. Touch the Up or Down keys as needed, or touch and drag
the list, to scroll through the list. Touch the desired Field Type
to set it for the selected field.
4. Continue as desired for the other fields.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-31
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
4.3.5
Flight Plan Catalog Route Options
The Flight Plan Catalog allows you to create, edit, activate, delete and copy
flight plans. The catalog can hold up to 99 flight plans of up to 100 waypoints
each. Flight plans are named by the Departure and Destination waypoint. Any
time you activate a flight plan, a copy of the flight plan is automatically transferred
to Active Flight Plan page and overwrites any previously active flight plan.
1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and
then the Catalog key. The list of currently stored flight plans
will be displayed.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Flight Plan
Catalog Total
Proc
Charts
Flight Plan Name
Flight Plan
Comment
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch To Create
New Catalog
Route
(Flight Plan)
Touch Up/
Down Keys To
Scroll List
Terrain
Figure 4-45 Flight Plan Catalog
2. Touch a flight plan to display the Route Options.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Flight Plan
Route Options
Selected
Flight Plan
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 4-46 Flight Plan Catalog Route Options
4-32
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the Route Option key for the desired option to act on
the selected flight plan.
4.3.5.1
Catalog Route Option - Activate
1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired
flight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be
displayed.
2. Touch the Activate key and then touch OK. The selected flight
plan will be activated.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 4-47 Touch OK to Replace the Existing Active Flight Plan
Wpt Info
3. The Active Flight Plan page will now be displayed.
4.3.5.2
Map
Catalog Route Option - Invert & Activate
1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired
flight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be
displayed.
2. Touch the Invert & Activate key and then touch OK. The
selected flight plan will be inverted and activated.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 4-48 Touch OK to Invert and Activate the Selected Flight Plan
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-33
Index
Foreword
4.3.5.3
Catalog Route Option - Preview
1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired
flight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be
displayed.
2. Touch the Preview key. A map view of the flight plan and
list of the waypoints will be displayed.
3. Touch the Back key to return to the Flight Plan Catalog.
4.3.5.4
Catalog Route Option - Edit
1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired
flight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be
displayed.
2. Touch the Edit key. The flight plan will be displayed. Make
any changes necessary by touching the desired waypoint and
using the Waypoint Options.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Waypoint
Options List
Terrain
Selected Waypoint
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 4-49 Use Waypoint Options to Edit the Selected Flight Plan
3. Touch the Back key to return to the Flight Plan Catalog.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-34
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4.3.5.5
Catalog Route Option - Copy
1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired
flight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be
displayed.
2. Touch the Copy key. You will be prompted to copy the selected
flight plan.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 4-50 Flight Plan Catalog Route Copy Option
Charts
3. A copy of the selected flight plan will now be listed. If any
changes are required for the copy, it can be used as a starting
point for a similar flight plan. Use the Edit Route option to
make the desired changes.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Duplicate Copy Of
Selected Flight Plan
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 4-51 Copied Flight Plan
4. Touch the Back key to return to the Active Flight Plan.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-35
Index
Foreword
4.3.5.6
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Catalog Route Option - Delete
1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired
flight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be
displayed.
2. Touch the Delete key and then touch OK.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 4-52 Delete the Selected Flight Plan from the Catalog
3. Touch the Back key to return to the Active Flight Plan.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-36
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4.3.6
Delete Flight Plan
Foreword
There are three ways to delete a flight plan.
1. Remove a selected flight plan from the catalog.
2. Remove all flight plans from the catalog.
3. Remove all waypoints from the active flight plan.
4.3.6.1
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Delete Flight Plan from Catalog
1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and
then the View Catalog key. The list of currently stored flight
plans will be displayed.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Touch Delete To
Remove The Flight
Plan From The Catalog
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 4-53 Select a Flight Plan from the Catalog
2. Touch the Delete and then the OK key. The selected flight
plan will be removed from the Catalog.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 4-54 Delete a Flight Plan from the Catalog
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-37
Index
Foreword
4.3.6.2
Delete All Flight Plans from Catalog
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.20 or later.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog, touch the Menu key
to open the Flight Plan Catalog Menu.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Touch to Delete
All Flight Plans
Pending
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch to Delete
All Catalog Flight
Plans
Figure 4-55 Flight Plan Catalog Menu
Weather
2. Touch Delete All to remove all flight plans in the catalog.
Nearest
Services/
Music
3. Touch Delete Pending to remove all flight plans pending
preview in the catalog.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-38
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4.3.6.3
Delete Active Flight Plan
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, touch the Menu
key, and then the Delete Flight Plan key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 4-56 Delete a Flight Plan from the Active Flight Plan
2. Touch OK to clear the waypoints from the Active Flight Plan.
The flight plan will not be removed from the Catalog.
4.3.7
Preview Flight Plan
The Preview Flight Plan function provides a summary of a flight plan. A
preview of the Active Flight Plan can be selected from the Flight Plan Menu's
Preview Flight Plan key or selecting a flight plan from the catalog and choosing
Preview from the Route Options menu.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-39
Index
Foreword
4.3.7.1
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Previewing the Active Flight Plan
1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and
then the Preview key. A preview of the Active Flight Plan will
be shown.
Flight Plan
Waypoint List
Current Dest
Waypoint
Current Aircraft
Position On
Current Leg of
Active Flight Plan
Map View
of Flight
Plan Legs
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 4-57 Active Flight Plan Preview
Map
2. Touch the Back key to return to the Active Flight Plan page.
Traffic
4.3.7.2
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Previewing a Flight Plan in the Catalog
1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and
then the Catalog key. The list of currently stored flight plans
will be displayed.
2. Touch the desired flight plan. The Route Options will now be
displayed.
Services/
Music
3. Touch the Preview key to display a preview of the selected
flight plan.
Utilities
4. Touch the Back key to return to the Flight Plan Catalog.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-40
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4.4
Graphically Editing a Flight Plan
The Active Flight Plan may be edited graphically on the Map page. See
section 9.3.3 for details.
4.5
Import Flight Plans with Connext
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
When the GTN is interfaced with a compatible Flight Stream device,
flight plans can be wirelessly imported into the GTN from supported Apps
(i.e., Garmin Pilot). The imported flight plans can then be activated or stored to
the flight plan catalog once they are previewed by the pilot.
Com/Nav
NOTE: Flight plans over 99 waypoints long are truncated at 99 waypoints
and the last waypoint in the imported/uploaded flight plan may not be the
destination airport.
Direct-To
FPL
Proc
NOTE: Flight plan information and user waypoints included as part of a
flight plan will not necessarily retain their names when the flight plan is
transferred from the portable device to the GTN via a Flight Stream device.
Whenever a User Waypoint is imported, it is compared to the existing User
Waypoint catalog. If it matches locations with an existing User Waypoint, the
waypoint will utilize the name saved in the GTN for that waypoint. If there is
not a location match, the waypoint is imported but without the name label
that the import software may have used. Therefore all new User Waypoints
will come in as USR### where the number is the lowest open User Waypoint
slot in the catalog.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
NOTE: This feature is available in software v5.10 and later.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-41
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
4.5.1
Operation
On the portable device, select the option to send a flight plan to the GTN.
The GTN MSG key will appear and begin to flash.
1. Pressing the MSG key will open the message page with a
message showing how many flight plans are ready to preview.
Com/Nav
Touch To Preview
Flight Plan
FPL
Figure 4-58 Flight Plan Import Message
Direct-To
2. Touch the New FPL key to open the flight plan preview page
when only one flight plan is imported, or the flight plan catalog
when more than one flight plan is imported.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 4-59 Preview for Single Flight Plan Import
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch To Select The
Desired Catalog
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 4-60 Catalog for Multiple Flight Plan Import
Appendix
Index
4-42
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Selecting a flight plan in the catalog that is "Pending Preview"
will slide out a menu to preview or delete the flight plan.
Once the flight plan has been previewed and then stored
or activated, the other Route Options in the menu will be
available.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 4-61 Route Options by Selecting Flight Plan with Pending Review
4.5.2
Potential Errors
Map
If the GTN is unable to import a flight plan due to errors in the flight plan or
a full catalog, the pilot will be alerted with a system message.
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 4-62 Flight Plan Import Error Messages
If an imported flight plan contains any errors, pop-up messages will be
displayed alerting the pilot of the issues and the resulting changes to the flight
plan.
When the imported flight plan is too long, the GTN will truncate the flight
plan to the correct length. The pilot should be aware that waypoints are missing
from the end of the flight plan, including the destination waypoint.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 4-63 Pop-Up Message Reporting Flight Plan Errors
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-43
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
When the imported flight plan contains waypoints (non-user waypoints),
procedures, or airways that are not found in navigation database, the GTN will
replace those waypoints with locked (lockd) waypoints. These locked waypoints
must be resolved prior to activating the flight plan to provide navigation along
the flight plan.
When more than one error occurs during the flight plan import, the pilot
will need to cycle through the errors by touching the Next key on the pop-up.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 4-64 Pop-Up Message Reporting Unknown Waypoints
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 4-65 Pop-Up Message Reporting Unknown Procedure
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 4-66 Pop-Up Message Reporting Unknown Airway
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-44
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4.6
Import Flight Plans with a Datacard
Flight plans can be created on a computer using compatible flight planning
software and saved to a datacard to be imported into the GTN. The imported
flight plans can then be activated or stored to the flight plan catalog once they
are previewed by the pilot.
NOTE: Flight plans over 99 waypoints long are truncated at 99 waypoints
and the last waypoint in the imported/uploaded flight plan may not be the
destination airport.
NOTE: This feature is available in software v5.10 and later.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
NOTE: The flight plan file format used by the GTN is different than the file
format used by the GNS 400W/500W Series navigators.
1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key and
then the Catalog key to display the Flight Plan Catalog.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch To Import
Flight Plan
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 4-67 Catalog for Datacard Flight Plan Import
2. An Import key will be present in the menu when flight plans
are present on the datacard. Touch the Import key to open a
pop-up with a list of the file names of the flight plans on the
datacard.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-45
Index
Foreword
Touch To Import
Flight Plan From
Datacard
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 4-68 Flight Plan To Import From Datacard
3. Select the desired flight plan to import.
Proc
4. Press Store to save the flight plan to the catalog. Press
Activate to make the imported flight plan the active route.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch To Make
The Imported
Flight Plan The
Active Route
Touch To Store To
Save Flight Plan
To The Catalog
Nearest
Figure 4-69 Route Options For SD Card Flight Plan Import
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-46
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4.6.1
Potential Errors
If the GTN is unable to import a flight plan due to errors in the flight plan or
a full catalog, the pilot will immediately be alerted with a pop-up.
1. Touch OK at the prompt to continue.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 4-70 Flight Plan Import Fault
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 4-71 Flight Plan Import Fault - Catalog Full
2. If an imported flight plan contains any errors, pop-up
messages will be displayed alerting the pilot of the issues
and the resulting changes to the flight plan. These pop-ups
are presented the first time that the flight plan is viewed on
the Flight Plan Preview page.
When the imported flight plan is too long, the GTN will truncate
the flight plan to the correct length. The pilot should be aware
that waypoints are missing from the end of the flight plan.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 4-72 Flight Plan Import Issue - Flight Plan Too Long
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
4-47
Index
3. When the imported flight plan contains waypoints (non-user
waypoints), procedures, or airways that are not found in
navigation database, the GTN will replace those waypoints
with locked waypoints. These locked waypoints must be
resolved prior to activating the flight plan.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
When more than one error occurs during the flight plan import,
the pilot will need to cycle through the errors by touching the
Next key on the pop-up.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 4-73 Flight Plan Import Issue - Flight Plan Contains Unknown Waypoints
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 4-74 Flight Plan Import Issue - Unknown Procedure Removed From Flight Plan
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 4-75 Flight Plan Import Issue - Unknown Airway Removed From Flight Plan
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-48
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
5
DIRECT-TO
The GTN 7XX Direct-To function can quickly set a course to any waypoint.
If the pilot selects Direct-To to a waypoint that is in the flight plan, waypoint
sequencing in the flight plan will resume upon reaching that waypoint. If the
pilot selects Direct-To for a waypoint that is not in the flight plan, the flight
plan will no longer be active but remains available. There are some fixes within
procedures for which if a Direct-To is selected then the approach will not be
active. For example, if you activate a Direct-To course to a waypoint between
the FAF and the MAP and go Direct-To to that waypoint then approach guidance
will not become active.
5.1
Direct-To Navigation
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
1. Press the Direct-To key on the right side of the unit.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 5-1 Direct-To Wpt Page
2. Select Waypoint, FPL, or NRST APT from the Direct-To
window by touching the desired tab.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
3. If a specific course is desired, touch the Course To key.
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
5-1
Index
4. Use the numeric keypad to select the course and then touch
the Enter key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Backspace
Key
Selected
Course
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Numeric
Keypad
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 5-2 Direct-To Course Selection
Wpt Info
5. Touch the desired waypoint and touch the Activate key or
press the small right knob.
Map
Traffic
Waypoint Tab
Terrain
Weather
Waypoint Detail
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch To Select
A Specific Course
Utilities
System
Touch To Activate
Direct-To This Waypoint
Messages
Figure 5-3 Direct-To Selection
6. The Map page will now be displayed with the new Direct-To
course.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
5-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
5.2
Direct-To a Flight Plan Waypoint
Foreword
The Direct-To selection is not available for all flight plan entries. Some
flight plan entries including holds and course reversals cannot be selected using
Direct-To. Instead, select the associated waypoint for the Direct-To function.
1. Press the Direct-To key on the right side of the unit.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
2. Touch the FPL tab at the top of the Direct-To window.
FPL
Flight Plan Tab
Direct-To
Flight Plan Waypoint List
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Touch Waypoint
Key To Select
Map
Traffic
Figure 5-4 Direct-To Flight Plan Leg Selection
3. Touch the flight plan waypoint you want to navigate directly to. The
Direct-To Waypoint page will display information about the selected
flight plan waypoint.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
5-3
Index
Foreword
Waypoint Tab
Getting
Started
Waypoint Detail
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch To Select
A Specific Course
Proc
Touch To Activate
Direct-To This Waypoint
Charts
Figure 5-5 Selected Direct-To Flight Plan Leg
Wpt Info
4. Touch the Activate key or press the small right knob to
activate the selection.
Map
Traffic
5. The Map page will now be displayed with the new Direct-To
course.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
5-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
5.3
Direct-To a Nearest Airport
Foreword
1. Press the Direct-To key on the lower right side of the unit.
2. Touch the NRST APT tab at the top of the Direct-To window.
The nearest 25 airports within 200 NM will be listed. The
airport at the top of the list is the nearest airport. To review
the other nearest airports, touch the Up and Down keys to
scroll through the list.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Nearest Tab
Proc
Touch List And Drag
Finger To Scroll List
Charts
Wpt Info
Nearest Airport List
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 5-6 Direct-To Nearest Airport Selection
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
5-5
Index
3. Touch the desired airport to select it. The selected airport will
be displayed in the Waypoint page.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Direct-To Waypoint
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Activate Direct-To
Course
Map
Figure 5-7 Selected Direct-To Nearest Airport
Traffic
4. Touch the Activate key or press the small right knob to
activate the selection.
Terrain
Weather
5. The Map page will now be displayed with the new Direct-To
course.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
5-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
5.4
Removing a Direct-To Course
Foreword
When a Direct-To course is cancelled, the previously active flight plan will be
reactivated and the nearest leg to the aircraft position will become the active leg.
If there was no active flight plan, after cancelling the Direct-To course the aircraft
will continue with the current heading.
1. Press the Direct-To key to display the Direct-To page.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Waypoint Tab
Direct-To
Direct-To Waypoint
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch To Remove
(Cancel) The
Direct-To Course
Terrain
Figure 5-8 Cancel the Direct-To Course
Weather
2. Touch the Remove key.
Nearest
Services/
Music
3. Navigation will now return to the active flight plan.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
5-7
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
5.5
Direct-To Map Waypoint
A Direct-To course may be set to any waypoint selected on the Map page. The
waypoint is selected by touching an item such as an airport, VOR, or NDB or
any other location. Touching the map page at any place not having an existing
location name will create a waypoint with the name “MAPWPT.” Touching the
Direct-To key will automatically insert the selected waypoint as the Direct-To
waypoint. The MAPWPT will be saved as a User Waypoint.
1. On the Map page, touch the map at the location intended to
be the Direct-To waypoint.
FPL
Direct-To
2. Press the Direct-To key on the right side of the unit.
Proc
Charts
Waypoint Tab
Wpt Info
Direct-To
Waypoint Name
Direct-To Waypoint
Map Symbol
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch To
Remove The
Direct-To Course
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch To
Activate The
Direct-To Course
Figure 5-9 Touch the Map to Create a MAPWPT as the Direct-To Course Destination
3. Touch the Activate key or press the small right knob to
activate the selection.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
5-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
5.6
Off-Route Direct-To Course
Foreword
An off-route Direct-To course may be selected by using the Waypoint
tab, Nrst Apt tab, or selecting a waypoint on the map. When an off-route
Direct-To course is activated, the existing active flight plan will be deactivated.
The original active flight plan and waypoint sequencing is reactivated when the
Direct-To course is removed.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Direct-To Waypoint
FPL
Direct-To
Flight Plan
Waypoint List
Flight Plan Data
Is Cleared
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 5-10 Active Flight Data is Removed When a Direct-To Course is Activated
5.7
Graphically Editing a Direct-To Route
Traffic
Direct-To routes may be edited graphically on the Map page the same as a
regular flight plan. See section 9.3.3 for details.
Terrain
5.8
Weather
Direct-To a User-Defined Hold
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.00 and later.
Nearest
NOTE: Any time a user hold is changed with the Direct-To key, upon
pressing the "Activate the Direct-To Hold" key, navigation guidance will
be given back to the holding fix and the new hold re-initiated.
Services/
Music
A user-defined hold can be created as part of a Direct-To to any waypoint.
Automatic waypoint sequencing will be suspended during the hold.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
5-9
Index
1. Press the Direct-To key to display the Direct-To page.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Waypoint Tab
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Direct-To
Waypoint Name
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch To Create
A Hold At
Direct-To Wpt
Touch To Select A
Specific Course
Proc
Charts
Figure 5-11 Create Hold at Direct-To Waypoint
2. Touch the Hold key. The Direct-To Hold page is displayed.
Wpt Info
Map
Touch To Select A
Specific Course
Traffic
Touch To Select
Course Direction
Terrain
Touch To Select
Turn Direction
Weather
Touch To Select
Leg Length Type
Nearest
Touch To Select
Leg Length Time
Services/
Music
Touch To Select EFC Time
Touch To Accept Hold
Parameters
Figure 5-12 Entering Direct-To Hold Parameters
Utilities
System
3. Touch the Course key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and the Enter key to select the inbound or outbound course.
Messages
4. Touch the Course Direction key to select between Inbound
or Outbound for the course direction.
5. Touch the Turn key to select between Left or Right for the turn
direction.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
5-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
6. Touch the Leg Type key to select between Time or Distance
for the leg type.
7. Touch the Leg Time or Leg Distance key to display the
keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter key to select the length
of the leg.
8. Touch the Expect Further Clearance key to display the
keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter key to select the time
for a reminder.
9. Touch the Load Hold key to accept the hold parameters and
return to the Direct-To page.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Specified Course
To Direct-To Wpt
Hold Pattern Course
Terrain
Touch To Activate
The Direct-To
Course And Hold
Weather
Nearest
Figure 5-13 Direct-To Page with Hold Selected
10. Touch the Hold Activate key or press the small right knob
to activate the selection.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
5-11
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
5.9
Direct-To a Search and Rescue Pattern
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.00 and later.
A search and rescue pattern can be created as part of a Direct-To for a flight
plan, off-route, or map waypoint. Creating a SAR pattern as part of an off-route
Direct-To will insert the SAR pattern waypoints at the end of the En Route
portion of the active flight plan.
1. Press the Direct-To key to display the Direct-To page.
FPL
Direct-To
Direct-To Wpt
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 5-14 Create SAR Pattern at Direct-To Waypoint
Terrain
2. Touch the SAR key. The Direct-To Search and Rescue Patterns
page is displayed.
Weather
Nearest
Selected Initial Wpt
Services/
Music
Touch To Select Desired
SAR Pattern
Utilities
System
Touch To Select Initial Track
Touch To Select
Initial Turn Direction
Touch To Select Leg Length
Messages
Touch To Select Track
Spacing Distance
Symbols
Touch To Select Number
Of Legs
Appendix
Index
Touch To Create SAR
Pattern At Direct-To Wpt
Touch To Select A
Specific Course
Touch To Load Selected
SAR Pattern to Direct-To
Figure 5-15 Direct-To Search and Rescue Pattern Page
5-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the SAR Pattern key to select between Parallel Track,
Sector Search, Expanding Square, or Orbit for the SAR pattern
type. The available patterns can be configured by the installer
and all of the listed pattern types may not be available. See
the section 4.2.4 Load Search and Rescue Pattern for more
details on configuring each pattern type.
4. Confirm the SAR pattern information and then touch the Load
Pattern key to accept the SAR parameters and return to the
Direct-To page.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Direct-To Wpt
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Specified Course
To Direct-To Wpt
Selected SAR Pattern Type
Touch To Activate Direct-To
Course And SAR Pattern
Figure 5-16 Direct-To Page with SAR Pattern Selected
5. Touch the SAR Activate key or press the small right knob
to activate the selection.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
5-13
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
This page intentionally left blank
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
5-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
6
PROCEDURES
Foreword
The GTN 7XX allows you to fly non-precision and precision approaches to
airports with published instrument approach procedures. The system can also
provide visual approach guidance to most airports. Approach procedures are not
the same as the approach plates available in ChartView or FliteCharts, which are
separate databases.
The Procedures Page is displayed by touching the PROC key on the Home
page. The Procedures Page provides access to approaches, departures and
arrivals. Selections are also shown to: Activate Approach, Vectors to Final, and
Activate Missed Approach.
NOTE: With the exception of Charted Visual Flight Procedures (CVFPs),
visual approaches do not have associated approach charts.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
NOTE: The Chart feature provides a digital representation of a paper
chart and provides no vertical or lateral course guidance. Flight Plan and
Procedures are separate from Charts, and do provide vertical and lateral
course guidance for the loaded route or procedure shown on the Flight
Plan page. The term “Chart Unavailable” means that the chart cannot be
viewed on the Charts due to either a chart not being published, or an error
in the Chart database, but does not preclude its availability or inclusion of
the procedure in the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system. The
absence of a chart for a particular Departure, Arrival, or Approach does
not preclude its availability or inclusion in the Flight Plan or Procedures
portion of the system. The absence of a particular Departure, Arrival, or
Approach under the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system does
not preclude the ability to view the Chart for that procedure under the
Chart feature.
NOTE: Baro-corrected altitude is not required by the GTN unit to meet
the requirements of TSO-C146c; however, to take full advantage of
the GTN unit's capabilities, an optional baro-corrected altitude source
is recommended for automatic sequencing of altitude leg types. If no
baro-corrected altitude data is provided to the GTN unit, altitude leg types
must be manually sequenced.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
6-1
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
6.1
Basic Approach Operations
The GTN 7XX provides lateral and, when appropriate, vertical guidance
for visual and GPS/RNAV approaches. The moving map pages can also be used
as an aid to situational awareness for ILS, VOR, and NDB approaches (and
non-precision localizer-based approaches), but the appropriate radio navigational
aid MUST be used for primary approach course guidance for non-GPS approaches.
Approaches designed specifically for GPS are often very simple and don’t require
overflying a VOR or NDB. Currently, many non-precision approaches have “GPS
overlays” to let you fly an existing procedure (VOR, VOR/DME, NDB, etc.) more
accurately using GPS.
Many overlay approaches are more complex (in comparison to GPS-only
approaches). The GTN 7XX displays and guides you through each leg of the
approach — automatically sequencing through each of these legs, up to the missed
approach point (MAP). Approaches may be flown “as published” with the full
transition — using any published feeder route or initial approach fix (IAF) — or
may be flown with a vectors-to-final transition.
Phase of flight annunciations are provided on the bottom of the display
indicating the current mode of flight.
Procedures are arranged around the existing flight plan in the following order:
Departure, En Route, Arrival, and Approach. For example, Departure waypoints
are inserted before the En Route waypoints in the flight plan and Arrival waypoints
are inserted between the En Route waypoints and the approach waypoints. Always
verify that the transition waypoints between each phase are correct.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Departure
Airport
Departure
Runway
Transition
Preview
Load Departure
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Arrival
Approach
Airport
Arrival
Transition
Runway
Preview
Load Arrival
Airport
Approach
Transition
Channel/ID
Preview
Load Approach
Activate Approach
Figure 6-1 Procedures Functional Diagram
6-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Annunciation
Description
LPV
Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance (LPV) approach. Fly to LPV
minimums.
Localizer Performance using published LP minima. Advisory vertical guidance is
provided. Fly to LP minimums.
Localizer Performance with no vertical guidance. Fly to LP minimums.
Advisory visual approach with vertical guidance based on advisory terrain
avoidance calculations. CDI scaling is identical to LPV approaches.
Lateral Navigation and Vertical Navigation (LNAV/VNAV) approach. Fly to
LNAV/VNAV minimums.
GPS approach using published LNAV minima. Advisory vertical guidance is
provided. Fly to LNAV minimums.
Lateral Navigation approach. Fly to LNAV minimums.
Missed Approach indicates the system is providing missed approach integrity
and CDI full-scale deflection ±0.3 NM.
En route, CDI full-scale deflection is 2.0 NM or current CDI scale selection,
whichever is smaller.
Terminal, CDI full-scale deflection is 1.0 NM or current CDI scale selection,
whichever is smaller.
LP +V
LP
VISUAL
L/VNAV
LNAV+V
LNAV
MAPR
ENR
TERM
DPRT
OCN
LOW ALT
(lower window)
Foreword
Departure, indicates the system is using non-precision approach integrity.
CDI full-scale deflection is 0.3 NM.
Oceanic, CDI full-scale deflection is 2.0 NM.
For LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, or LPV approaches, the LOW ALT annunciation
indicates the aircraft’s estimated height is lower than the Final Approach
Waypoint height by approximately 50 meters. This annunciation will not be
active when TAWS is operational.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Table 6-1 Phase of Flight Annunciations
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
6-3
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
6.2
Selecting a Departure
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight
plan. Only one departure can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure
is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight plan, the new
departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a
departure, the transition waypoint, and a runway.
NOTE: Vector-only departures are not available in the Procedures database
as the GTN 7XX cannot provide navigational guidance on vectored legs.
FPL
1. Touch the PROC key on the Home page and then touch the
Departure key to display the Departure list.
Direct-To
Proc
2. If necessary, touch the Airport key and enter the departure
airport. Touch the key for the desired Departure.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Touch To Select
Desired Departure
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 6-2 List for Selecting a Departure
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
6-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the key for the desired Transition.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch To Select
Desired Departure
Transition
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 6-3 Selecting a Transition for a Departure
Charts
4. Touch the key for the desired Runway, if necessary. The
Departure page with preview will be displayed.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Sequence List
For The Selected
Departure
Departure
Diagram
Terrain
Touch To Select
Departure
Weather
Touch To Select
Airport
Touch To Select
Transition
Touch To Select
Runway
Touch To Load
Departure
Services/
Music
Touch To View
Charts
Utilities
Figure 6-4 Departure Selected
Nearest
System
NOTE: If the selected runway is depicted as RW10B, for instance, this
means both runways 10L and 10R.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
6-5
Index
5. Touch the Load Departure key. The Active Flight Plan page
will be displayed.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch To Change
Or Remove
Departure
Touch To Edit
Waypoint
Direct-To
Scroll To View
Flight Plan
With Departure
Waypoints
Proc
Charts
Figure 6-5 Flight Plan After Loading a Departure
Wpt Info
6. Remove a departure or select a new one by touching the
Departure key and selecting the desired choice.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Touch To Change
A Departure
Services/
Music
Touch To Remove
Departure
Utilities
System
Figure 6-6 Editing a Departure
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
6-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
6.3
Selecting an Arrival
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport with
a published arrival procedure. Only one arrival can be loaded at a time in a
flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by
selection of an arrival, the transition waypoint, and a runway.
1. Touch the PROC key on the Home page and then touch the
Arrival key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Touch To Select
Airport
Touch To Show
Arrival List
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 6-7 Arrival Page
2. Confirm that the intended airport is shown or touch the
Airport key and select the desired airport. Touch the key for
the desired Arrival.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Touch To Select
Arrival
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 6-8 Arrival List
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
6-7
Index
3. Touch the Transition key and then touch the key for the
desired transition.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch To Select
Desired Arrival
Transition
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 6-9 Select Transition
Wpt Info
4. Touch the key for the desired Runway, if necessary.
NOTE: If the selected runway is depicted as RW10B, for instance, this
means both runways 10L and 10R.
Map
Traffic
5. After selecting the runway, the Arrival page with map preview
will be displayed.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Sequence List
For The Selected
Arrival
Arrival
Diagram
Touch To Select
Arrival
Touch To Select
Transition
Touch To Load
Arrival
Touch To Select
Airport
Touch To Select
Runway
Symbols
Touch To View
Charts
Figure 6-10 Previewing an Arrival
Appendix
Index
6-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
6. Touch the Load Arrival key. The Active Flight Plan page will
be displayed.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Select
Or Remove
Arrival
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch To Edit
Waypoint
Direct-To
Scroll To View
Flight Plan
With Departure
Waypoints
Proc
Charts
Figure 6-11 Flight Plan With Arrival Loaded
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
6-9
Index
Foreword
6.4
NOTE: In software v6.21 and later, the pilot may load an alternate approach
during a missed approach procedure. The GTN retains all missed approaches
in the flight plan.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Selecting an Approach
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach
is loaded when another approach is already in the active flight plan, the new
approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by selection of an
approach, the transition waypoint, and a runway.
1. Touch the PROC key on the Home page. The Approach, Arrival,
and Departure fields will be dashed until a selection is made.
Proc
Touch To View
Available Departures
Charts
Touch To View
Available Arrivals
Wpt Info
Touch To View
Available Approaches
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 6-12 Procedures Selection Window
2. Touch the Approach key on the Procedures page to select
an approach for the destination airport. Confirm that the
intended airport is shown or touch the Airport key and select
the desired airport.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
6-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the Approach key on the Procedures-Approach page
and then touch the key for the desired approach. Selections
are listed according to approach type: instrument first, visual
second.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 6-13 Selecting an Approach
4. After selecting the approach for the destination airport, the
approach options will be displayed.
Wpt Info
Map
Sequence List For The Selected Transition
Unselected
Transition
Final Approach Fix
Missed Approach Point
Missed Approach Hold
Point
Selected
Transition
Approach
Diagram
Current Dest
Waypoint. Touch To
Select Airport.
Touch
To Select
Transition
Touch To Select
Channel/ID
Touch To
Activate
Approach
Touch To Select Approach
Touch To Load Approach
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 6-14 Selected Approach Options
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
6-11
Index
5. Touch the Transition key and then touch the key for the desired
transition. The selected Transition will be shown in white on
the Procedure page Approach diagram. Unselected Transitions
will be shown in gray.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Select
Transition
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 6-15 Select Approach Transition
Proc
6. If desired, touch the Channel/ID key, then use the numeric
keypad to select the channel number, and then touch the Enter
key. The Channel and ID are typically loaded automatically if
they are present.
Charts
Wpt Info
NOTE: As an alternate means of loading an approach, the Channel ID key
allows you to select the channel ID for a SBAS approach for the current
destination. The channel ID for the SBAS approach is available from an
approved approach chart. If duplicate numbers are available for a channel,
a list will be available where you may select the desired approach.
Map
Traffic
7. Touch the Load Approach key. The Active Flight Plan page
will be displayed. The approach waypoints are placed at the
end of the flight plan and the unit will automatically sequence
to them after the en route waypoints.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Approach Waypoints
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 6-16 After Loading an Approach
6-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
NOTE: In software v6.00 and later, if you build your flight plan with the
destination airport at the end and then load an approach procedure, the
destination airport will be removed from the end of the flight plan. If the
leg to the destination airport is the active leg when loading an approach
procedure, you will navigate all the way to the destination airport before
joining the procedure. Be sure when LOADING and not ACTIVATING an
approach procedure that the route to be flown is correct.
NOTE: In software v5.13 and earlier, if you build your flight plan with the
destination airport at the end and then load an approach procedure, you will
navigate all the way to the destination airport before joining the procedure.
Be sure when LOADING and not ACTIVATING an approach procedure that
the route to be flown is correct.
8. Touch the Load Approach & Activate key, which makes
the active leg Direct-To the selected transition waypoint, or
for Vector approaches to activate a leg that is an extended
final approach course. You can also “activate” the selected
procedure on the Procedures page, if the approach is not
activated on this page.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Approach Waypoints
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Direct-To Waypoint
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 6-17 After Activating the Approach
NOTE: When re-activating an approach, the decision as to whether a hold
is inserted at the IAF or not is assumed to be the same as the first time
the approach was activated, regardless of current aircraft position. If the
pilot wishes to have the hold inserted or removed from the procedure, the
procedure must be re-loaded or activated from the PROC-Approach page.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
6-13
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
6.5
The procedure turn portion of an approach is stored as one of the legs of
the approach. For this reason, the GTN 7XX unit requires no special operations
from the pilot — other than flying the procedure turn itself — beyond what is
required for any other type of approach. Roll steering is provided to aircraft with
compatible autopilots.
Com/Nav
NOTE: The steering provided for the procedure turn does not guarantee
that the aircraft will stay within charted procedure turn boundaries. As
such the crew will need to ensure that the approach is flown within the
confines of the charted procedure.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Approaches with Procedure Turns
6.6
Flying the Missed Approach
Upon reaching the Missed Approach Point, the GTN 7XX unit continues to
give guidance along an extension of the final course segment (FAF to MAP) until
you manually initiate the missed approach procedure (as mentioned previously
in reference to the “SUSP” advisory).
NOTE: If the unit is not configured for a CDI key, then the “activate GPS missed
approach” will only resume automatic waypoint sequencing. The user must
switch to GPS navigation, if desired, by using their external source selection
method (this is typical an EFIS system).
Map
Traffic
1. When the MAP is reached, a pop-up will appear.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 6-18 Pop-Up Upon Reaching the MAP
Utilities
2. Touch the Remain Suspended key to continue with
sequencing suspended or touch Activate GPS Missed
Approach for guidance to the Missed Approach Hold Point.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
The Activate GPS Missed Approach function is the same for the on screen
controls or a remote switch. Activating the missed approach prior to the MAP
can be accomplished on either the Flight Plan or Procedures pages. If using the
Flight Plan page, the approach banner must be touched to display the Approach
Options where Activate Missed Approach can be selected.
6-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch the Approach Banner to
Display the Approach Options
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch the Desired Option
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 6-19 Approach Option Selection on the Flight Plan Page
Touch the Approach Banner to
Display the Approach Options
Proc
Charts
Touch the Desired Option
Wpt Info
Figure 6-20 Approach Option Selection on the Procedures Page
Once an option is selected, the GTN will continue to provide guidance along
the final approach course. Upon reaching the MAP, the unit will automatically
sequence to the first leg of the missed approach. This is used when a pilot needs
to execute the missed approach prior to reaching the MAP.
6.7
Flying an Approach with a Hold
Upon activating an RNAV GPS approach, you are given the option to skip
any non-required holding patterns during the initial transitions of the approach.
The Flight Plan Page displays a timer or distance, as appropriate, during
the holding pattern. Use this timer or distance to fly the outbound portion of
the holding pattern. (The holding pattern is displayed on the Map Page and
indicated as the active leg on the Active Flight Plan pages.)
NOTE: If you need to lose extra altitude or speed by going around the holding
pattern again, touch SUSP to manually suspend waypoint sequencing BEFORE
crossing the holding waypoint the second time. If you’ve already passed this
waypoint, re-activate the holding pattern.
As you cross the MAP, a “SUSP” annunciation will appear, indicating that
automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP. A “from”
indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page, but course guidance
along the final approach course continues.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
6-15
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
6.8
Flying a DME Arc Approach
Approaches that contain DME arcs are supported by the GTN. The GTN will
provide guidance (left / right) relative to the arc. If you wish to activate the DME
arc leg manually, the aircraft must be near the arc, as shown in the shaded area
below.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 6-21 DME Arc Example
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
6.9
RF legs associated with RNAV RNP 1.0 non-AR (Approval Required)
approaches are supported by the GTN in version 6.00, or later, when approved
by the installation.
• AC 90-101A defines RF leg as "a constant radius circular path, around a
defined turn center, that starts and terminates at a fix. An RF leg may be
published as part of a procedure."
Services/
Music
Utilities
• Flying the RF leg of an approach is similar to flying a DME arc approach.
All GTN annunciations and indications are identical whether flying DME
arcs or RF legs with the GTN.
System
Messages
• RF legs may have a larger or smaller radius than DME arcs.
• Unlike DME arcs, RF legs are not based on a VOR.
Symbols
• Refer to the aircraft AFMS for specific details regarding RF legs for a
specific aircraft.
Appendix
Index
Radius-to-Fix (RF) Approaches
6-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
6.10
Vectors to Final
Foreword
With “Vectors-To-Final” (VTF) selected, the CDI needle remains off center
until you’re established on the final approach course. With the approach
activated, the Map Page displays an extension of the final approach course in
magenta (remember, magenta is used to depict the active leg of the flight plan)
and “vtf” appears as part of the active leg on the Map page (as a reminder that
the approach was activated with vectors-to-final).
NOTE: In software v5.13 and earlier, once VTF is activated all waypoints in
the approach prior to the FAF are removed.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
NOTE: In software v6.00 and later, all waypoints along the final approach
course, including waypoints before the FAF, are included in the flight plan and
the final approach course to the FAF is activated.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
6-17
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
6.11
ILS Approaches (GTN 750 Only)
Precision ILS approaches can be performed with the built-in VLOC
(VOR/localizer/glideslope) receivers. The GPS receiver can be used for guidance
prior to reaching the final approach fix, but once there, the proper frequency
must be selected on the VLOC window (right side of screen) and the CDI output
set to “VLOC.”
The GTN 7XX can be set to automatically
1.2
1.2
15
switch the external CDI output from GPS to
VLOC as you intercept the final approach
course (if used with a KAP140/KFC225
autopilot, you will need to manually enable
outputs. See instructions in the “Enabling
Autopilot Outputs for the King KAP140/
OC
L
KFC225” section). When the ILS approach
V
to rea
a
tch this
i
is activated and the correct ILS frequency is
Sw
to thin
u
active in the VLOC window, the GTN 7XX
A wi
automatically switches to VLOC within
1.2 NM left or right of the final approach
course. This switch can take place anywhere
from 2.0 to 15.0 NM from the FAF.
NM
NM
NM
FPL
Direct-To
GPS
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
VLOC
GPS
VLOC
Map
Traffic
2NM
Terrain
MANUAL
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
FAF
The illustration shows multiple locations
along the approach path and the CDI
selection that you can expect: GPS or VLOC.
Within the area of the shaded box, the
automatic switch from GPS to VLOC should
occur.
Utilities
System
Messages
NOTE: If you attempt to intercept the approach course at a distance less
than 2.0 NM from the FAF, the GTN 7XX does not automatically switch
the CDI to VLOC. In this case, touch the CDI key to manually switch from
GPS to VLOC.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
6-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
The automatic switch from GPS to VLOC is not immediate, but instead occurs
gradually to prevent abrupt CDI changes when coupled to an autopilot. The CDI
selection can also be changed manually by touching the CDI key.
6.12
RNAV Approach Procedures
The GTN 7XX allows for flying LNAV/VNAV, LNAV, LNAV +V, LPV, LP, and
LP +V approaches according to the published chart.
Phase of flight
Annunciation
L/VNAV
Description
Minimums
Lateral Navigation/Vertical Navigation. RNAV nonprecision approach with vertical guidance.
Published
LNAV/VNAV
minimums.
Published LNAV
minimums.
LNAV
Lateral Navigation. RNAV non-precision approach.
LNAV + V
Lateral Navigation with Advisory Vertical
Guidance. RNAV non-precision LNAV approach
with advisory vertical guidance. The glidepath
is typically denoted by a light dashed line on
the vertical profile (Jeppeson only) with an
associated glidepath angle (usually in the 3.00
degree range) and is provided to assist the pilot
in maintaining a constant vertical glidepath,
similar to an ILS glideslope.
Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance
(LPV) approach.
LPV
LP
LP +V
RNAV precision approach.
LP indicates Localizer Performance with no
vertical guidance.
LP +V indicates Localizer Performance with
advisory vertical guidance. This annunciation
is available in software v6.00 and later. This
advisory guidance follows the same nature as
set by the LNAV +V as shown above.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Published LNAV
minimums.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Published LPV
minimums.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Published LP
minimums.
Utilities
Published LP
minimums.
System
Messages
Symbols
Table 6-2 RNAV Approach Annunciations
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
6-19
Index
Foreword
6.12.1
Flying the LPV Approach
1. Within 31 NM of the destination, the GTN switches from en
route mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions
from 2.0 to 1.0 NM, full scale deflection.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
2. As you approach the IAF, a waypoint message appears on the
bottom of the screen.
Com/Nav
3. As the distance (DIST) to the IAF approaches zero, the message
is replaced by a turn advisory that counts down 10 seconds
prior to the turn.
FPL
4. As you approach the FAF, the GTN will begin to automatically
rescale in an angular fashion. This will allow the LPV approach
to be flown in an identical fashion to a standard ILS. At
2.0 NM from the FAF, CDI scaling is tightened from 1.0 NM to
the angular full scale deflection (typically the angular full-scale
deflection is 2.0°, but will be as defined for the approach).
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
5. Sixty seconds prior to reaching the FAF, the unit will check the
required Horizontal Alarm Limit (HAL) and Vertical Alarm Limit
(VAL) to ensure the GPS position integrity is within limits to
complete the LPV precision approach. In the event the HAL
or VAL limits are exceeded, the approach will be downgraded
to a non-precision approach indicated by “LNAV” on the
moving map, a message that the approach is downgraded
(“APPROACH DOWNGRADE - GPS approach downgraded. Use
LNAV minima.”), and the glideslope indicator will be flagged.
You may continue the approach using LNAV non-precision
minimums if there are LNAV minimums for this approach. In
the rare event the GPS integrity cannot meet the non-precision
HAL limits, the unit will send a message to the pilot to abort
the approach (“ABORT APPROACH - GPS approach no longer
available.”). The unit will revert to terminal limits to support
navigation to the missed approach when the message is
acknowledged. After the aircraft has passed the FAF, a loss of
WAAS integrity will cause the approach to abort instead of
downgrade.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
6. Capture the glideslope as you would an ILS glideslope.
Appendix
Index
6-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
7. As you cross the FAF, the destination sequences to the MAP
(e.g., “RW31,” the runway threshold). With the needle on the
external CDI (or HSI) centered, fly toward the MAP, observing
the altitude minimums published on the approach plate.
8. When viewing the Map Page, you’ll note that the final course
segment is displayed in magenta (the active leg of the flight
plan always appears in magenta).
9. As you approach the MAP, a waypoint message appears on
the bottom of the screen.
10. Once the unit crosses the MAP (defined as the runway end
waypoint), sequencing will be suspended. Prepare the aircraft
for missed approach operation. Touch the Unsuspend key to
sequence to the Missed Approach procedure.
11. Fly the guidance provided by the unit to the MAHP and hold.
6.12.2
An LP approach is flown similarly to an LNAV approach, except the precision
is greater as it utilizes the SBAS accuracy. It has similar lateral accuracy as an LPV
approach. Angular scaling is similar to a localizer approach. Most LP approaches
have step down altitudes associated with them. The approach still results in an
MDA and missed approach point.
If the approach is indicated as LP +V, advisory vertical guidance will be
provided. This does not change how the approach should be flown, and the
pilot is still responsible for descending to the correct altitude at each step down.
The approach still results in an MDA and missed approach point.
1. Within 30 NM of the destination, the GTN switches from en
route mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions
from 2.0 to 1.0 NM, full scale deflection.
2. As you approach the IAF, a turn direction message appears on
the bottom of the screen.
3. As the distance (DIST) to the IAF approaches zero, the message
is replaced by a time to turn advisory that counts down
10 seconds prior to the turn.
4. As you approach the FAF, the GTN will begin to automatically
rescale in an angular fashion. This will allow the LP approach to
be flown in the same fashion as a standard localizer approach.
At 2.0 NM from the FAF, CDI scaling is tightened from up to
either 2° or 0.3 NM, full scale deflection, whichever is smaller.
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Flying the LP Approach
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Foreword
6-21
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
5. Sixty seconds prior to reaching the FAF, the GTN will check
the required Horizontal Alarm Limit (HAL) to ensure the
GPS position integrity is within limits to complete the LP
non-precision approach. In the event the HAL limits are
exceeded, the approach will be downgraded, when available,
indicated by “LNAV” on the moving map, otherwise the
approach will be aborted. A message will note that the
approach is downgraded and the NAV indicator will be
flagged until the message is viewed. You may continue the
approach using LNAV non-precision minimums if there are
LNAV minimums for this approach. In the rare event the GPS
HAL limits cannot meet non-precision limits, the GTN will notify
the pilot with a message to abort the approach. The GTN will
revert to terminal limits of 1.0 NM to support navigation to the
missed approach. If the approach is indicating an LP +V, it is
possible that the advisory vertical guidance could be removed
without annunciation due to the vertical guidance not being
within tolerances. This does not constitute a downgrade, and
the approach can still be flown to LP minimums.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
6. As you cross the FAF, the destination sequences to the MAP.
With the needle on the external CDI (or HSI) centered, fly
toward the MAP, observing the altitude minimums published
on the approach plate.
Traffic
Terrain
Nearest
7. When viewing the Map Page, you’ll note that the final course
segment is displayed in magenta (the active leg of the flight
plan always appears in magenta).
Services/
Music
8. As you approach the MAP, a waypoint message (“Arriving at
Waypoint”) appears on the bottom of the screen.
Weather
9. At the MAP initiate the missed approach, if necessary. Once
the GTN crosses the MAP, sequencing will be suspended.
Prepare the aircraft for missed approach operation. Touch the
Unsuspend key to sequence to the Missed Approach procedure.
Utilities
System
NOTE: For missed approaches with heading legs, fly manually until the
first active course leg is reached.
Messages
Symbols
10. Fly the guidance provided by the GTN to the MAHP and hold.
Appendix
Index
6-22
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
6.13
Visual Approach Procedures
Foreword
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.30 and later. Not all airports
in the database support visual approaches.
The GTN generates visual approaches, providing advisory horizontal and
optional vertical guidance for the selected runway. Advisory guidance aids in
the performance of a stabilized approach and ensures the aircraft is in line with
the destination runway.
There are three different methods for loading and activating visual approaches.
Method 1: Select the Visual key on the map. When the aircraft is within
10 NM of the destination airport the Visual key displays. For information about
key configuration, refer to "Visual Approach Selector".
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Destination
Airport
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch To
Load Visual
Approach For
Destination
Airport
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 6-22 Visual Approach Key - No Selected Destination
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
6-23
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Method 2: Select the Visual key located on the bottom edge of the screen.
This key displays when a visual approach supported airport is selected on the
map during pan mode.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Selected Airport
Direct-To
Proc
Touch To Load Visual
Approach For Selected
Airport
Charts
Figure 6-23 Visual Approach Key - Selected Destination
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
For both methods, pressing the Visual key prompts a list of available visual
approaches. Once selected, the visual approach immediately loads and becomes
active.
Method 3: Visual approaches load from the PROC - Approach page or the
Airport Info - Procedures tab (similar to published instrument approaches). For
information on how to use this page, refer to section 6.4.
After a visual approach loads, a confirmation pop-up prompts, detailing
the glidepath angle (GPA) and threshold crossing height (TCH) when vertical
guidance is available. When unavailable it reads, "NO VERTICAL GUIDANCE."
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Vertical Guidance Available
Vertical Guidance Unavailable
Figure 6-24 Visual Approach Confirmation Pop-up
Symbols
Appendix
Index
6-24
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
The availability of vertical guidance advisories for visual approaches is
dependent on terrain and obstacle obstructions along the approach path.
If no known obstructions are within the approach path, vertical guidance is
provided to a maximum distance of 28 NM from the runway. If there are known
obstructions further than 3 NM, but within the 28 NM maximum distance from
the runway along the approach, vertical guidance is limited to the approach path
portion after crossing the known obstructions. This is indicated by the shortened
magenta line on the map after loading the approach. If obstructions are within
3 NM to the runway, along the approach path, advisory vertical guidance is not
provided. Lateral guidance is always provided for visual approaches.
Published data is used to determine the visual approach GPA and TCH for
the selected runway. If no published data is available, the default is 3º GPA and
50 FT TCH.
NOTE: If the GTN does not have a valid terrain database, advisory vertical
guidance is not available for visual approaches.
NOTE: Only external CDI/VDI displays provide vertical deviation indications.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
6-25
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
6.14
• The GTN 7XX Map page is designed to complement your approach
plates and vastly improve situational awareness throughout the approach.
However, you must always fly an approach as it appears on the approach plate.
• The active leg (or the portion of the approach currently in use) is depicted
in magenta on the Map Page. As you fly the approach, the GTN 7XX
automatically sequences through each leg of the approach unless “SUSP”
appears at the annunciation bar at the bottom of the display. “SUSP”
indicates that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended
on the current leg and normally appears at holding patterns, upon crossing
the missed approach point (MAP), for Climb to Altitude legs, and for Hold
to Altitude legs.
• For roll steering autopilots: roll steering is terminated when approach mode
is selected on the autopilot and is available once the missed approach is
initiated.
• If Vectors-to-Final is activated while on the “FROM” side of the FAF,
automatic waypoint sequencing is suspended and the SUSP annunciation
will appear. Automatic waypoint sequencing will resume once the aircraft is
on the “TO” side of the FAF and within full-scale deflection.
• For all procedures, make sure to check the runway, transition, and all
waypoints.
• Most legs are “TO” legs on which the TO/FROM flag on the CDI indicates
“TO” and the Distance field on the flight plan decreases as you navigate
along the leg. However, some procedures include legs which are “FROM”
legs. On these legs, the TO/FROM flag on the CDI indicates “FROM” and the
Distance field on the flight plan increases as you navigate the leg. “FROM”
legs are typically found on procedure turns and on some missed approach
procedures.
CAUTION: Not all autopilots will follow guidance when on a heading leg
using NAV, GPSS, or APR mode on the autopilot. Heading legs for procedures
can be identified by “HDG XXX°” in white on the Flight Plan page, as well
as the procedure chart indicating that the aircraft must fly a particular
heading. Certain autopilots will revert to a “Roll Only” or “Wings Level”
mode on these leg types and the pilot must engage the heading (HDG)
mode of the autopilot and set the heading bug appropriately in order to
use the autopilot on these legs.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Points to Remember for All Procedures
6-26
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
6.15
Points to Remember for Localizer or
VOR-based Approaches
Foreword
• The default factory setting allows the CDI output to automatically switch
from the GPS receiver to the LOC receiver. This may be changed to manual
in some installations. If the “ILS CDI Selection” setting is changed to
“Manual,” you must determine when to select “GPS” or “VLOC” guidance
during the approach. Remember, “VLOC” is required for the final course
segment from the Final Approach Fix (FAF) to the MAP.
NOTE: Installations with certain autopilots, such as the KAP 140 and
KFC225, do not allow automatic ILS CDI switching.
NOTE: GPS phase of flight annunciations (LPV, ENR, etc.) are not applicable
to the external CDI (or HSI) when VLOC is active.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
• If the CDI output has not automatically switched from GPS to ILS upon
reaching the FAF, you must manually switch to the VLOC receiver by
touching the CDI key. Verify that “VLOC” is displayed.
• Automatic switching of CDI output is available for ILS, localizer, SDF and
LDA approaches. Automatic CDI switching is not available for backcourse
approaches or VOR approaches.
• When flying an approach with the autopilot-coupled, you must monitor
system functions at all times and verify that the autopilot and external CDI
(or HSI) switch to the VLOC receiver with sufficient time to capture and
track the approach course. Switching to “VLOC” late in the approach may
not provide the autopilot enough time to respond and intercept the approach
course prior to the FAF (depending upon the performance characteristics of
your autopilot and aircraft).
• When an ILS or VOR approach is first selected or executed, the frequency
is automatically checked. If the frequency is incorrect, you will receive a
message and you must place the correct ILS or VLOC frequency in the
active frequency field.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
6-27
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
• When flying a localizer-based approach (other than backcourse) with
automatic CDI switching enabled:
1. “GPS” guidance may be used while flying outbound and on
the initial portion of the procedure turn.
2. “VLOC” guidance is used on the remainder of the approach
from the time you turn inbound on the procedure turn.
3. The localizer frequency must be active to use “VLOC” guidance
at the MAP.
• When flying a localizer-based approach with automatic CDI switching
disabled:
1. You may select “VLOC” guidance at any point on the approach
prior to reaching the FAF.
2. The localizer frequency must be active to use “VLOC” guidance.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
6-28
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
6.16
Enabling Autopilot Outputs for the
King KAP140/KFC225
Foreword
Autopilot outputs for the King KAP140/KFC225 autopilots are activated
manually by the pilot after being prompted during the approach procedure. After
enabling outputs, the GTN 7XX will provide guidance information consistent
with what the autopilot expects (i.e., angular CDI scaling and glideslope capture
for an LPV or other vertically guided GPS approach).
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Prompt To Activate
Autopilot Outputs
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Touch To Activate
Autopilot Outputs
Traffic
Figure 6-25 Prompt To Activate Autopilot Outputs
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
6-29
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
This page intentionally left blank
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
6-30
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
7
CHARTS
Foreword
NOTE: The availability of SafeTaxi, ChartView, or FliteCharts in electronic
form may not preclude the requirement to carry paper charts aboard the
aircraft. See the AFMS for more information.
NOTE: The Chart feature provides a digital representation of a paper
chart and provides no vertical or lateral course guidance. Flight Plan and
Procedures are separate from Charts, and do provide vertical and lateral
course guidance for the loaded route or procedure shown on the Flight
Plan page. The term “Chart Unavailable” means that the chart cannot be
viewed on the Charts due to either a chart not being published, or an error
in the Chart database, but does not preclude its availability or inclusion of
the procedure in the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system. The
absence of a chart for a particular Departure, Arrival, or Approach does
not preclude its availability or inclusion in the Flight Plan or Procedures
portion of the system. The absence of a particular Departure, Arrival, or
Approach under the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system does
not preclude the ability to view the Chart for that procedure under the
Chart feature.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
NOTE: Features that are selectable on the main map page, such as obstacles,
airports, airspace, and other waypoint types that are not visible beneath the
overlaid chart, remain selectable even when an approach chart is overlaid
on the main map.
NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground
maneuvering. SafeTaxi and Chartview do not comply with the requirements
of AC 120-76C and are not qualified to be used as an airport moving map
display (AMMD). SafeTaxi and Chartview should only be used by the flight
crew to orient themselves on the airport surface.
The chart page will default to the nearest airport if no flight plan or destination
airport is present. While you are on the ground, the displayed charts will default
to the current airport location regardless of flight plan. The optional ChartView
and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts.
Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information.
Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be configured in the system, but not both.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
7-1
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures
charts. The charts are displayed in full color with high-resolution. The Map
depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view of
approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in
magenta. The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc.
Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Approaches
• Departure Procedures (DP) • NOTAMs
An enablement card that is purchased from Garmin is separate from the
Jeppesen database and is required to enable ChartView.
NOTE: The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will
automatically be selected.
Direct-To
Proc
NOTE: If two GTN 7XX units are crossfilled, then the same type (ChartView
or FlightCharts) and version (cycle number and effective dates) for the chart
database must be installed on both units in order for the correct chart to
be overlaid on the main map page.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Airport
Terrain
Select
Airport
Weather
Nearest
Info
View
Select
Detailed
Info
Chart Detail
Info
APR
DP
Arrival
Airport Info
View
Airport
Wpt
Info
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Menu
Full Screen
Invert Colors
All
Header
Plan
Profile
Mins
Figure 7-1 Charts Functional Diagram
The following list describes the order in priority in which charts are auto-loaded
in the system when the Chart page is displayed:
Messages
1. The most-recently selected chart during the current power cycle, if valid*.
2. The airport surface chart for the nearest airport, if on ground and nearest
airport is found.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. The approach chart for the approach in the active flight plan, if approach
exists in the flight plan.
4. The airport surface chart for the last airport in the flight plan, if one exists.
5. The airport surface chart for the nearest airport, if nearest airport is found
(same as #2 but aircraft could be in-air).
6. The airport surface chart for the first airport in the database, if found.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
7. No chart.
* “Selected” does not include charts that were auto-selected. A selection must
be made while on the charts page.
FPL
Direct-To
The following actions will invalidate #1:
• Changing the approach in the active flight plan
Proc
• Changing the on-ground status while not viewing the Charts page
7.1
Foreword
Charts
Chart Page
1. From the Home page, touch the Charts key.
Wpt Info
Map
Touch to Select Airport
Traffic
Touch to Select Airport
Info Chart
Terrain
Touch to View The
Airport Information Chart
Touch to View Airport
Approach, Departure,
& Arrival Charts
Touch to View Airport Wpt Info
Touch To Change
Chart Scale
Touch For Full Display
View Of Chart
Figure 7-2 Charts Function Page
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
2. Various controls allow viewing of more available detail.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
7-3
Index
Foreword
7.1.1
Airport Selection
1. Touch the Airport selection key to select another airport.
Getting
Started
2. Select the desired airport identifier with the keypad and touch
Enter.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Selected Airport
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch to Select Airport
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 7-3 Airport Identifier Selection
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
7.1.2
Info
1. Touch the Info key to select the specific information chart.
Touch To View Selected
Airport Info
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 7-4 Airport Info Selection
2. Touch an item from the list to view the chart.
Proc
Charts
Selected Airport
Wpt Info
Touch To View Selected
Airport Info List
Map
Traffic
Detailed View Of
Selected Airport Info
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 7-5 Airport Info Selection Detail
7.1.3
Services/
Music
Information
1. Touch the Information key.
Utilities
2. View the available airport information charts.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
7-5
Index
Foreword
7.1.4
Approaches
1. Touch the Approaches key to view available approaches.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Selected Airport
Com/Nav
Touch To View
Approach List
FPL
Touch To View
Approach Charts
Direct-To
Detailed View Of
Selected Approach
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 7-6 Approach Detail
2. Touch the Approach key to select an approach chart.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch To View Approach Chart
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 7-7 Approach List
Utilities
3. Touch the desired approach to view detailed information.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
7.1.5
Departures
Foreword
1. Touch the Departures key to view available departures.
Getting
Started
Selected Airport
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To View
Departure List
Com/Nav
FPL
Detailed View Of
Selected Departure
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 7-8 Departure Detail
2. Touch the Departure key to change the selected Departure
chart.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch To View The Departure Chart
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 7-9 Departure List
3. Touch the desired departure to view detailed information.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
7-7
Index
Foreword
7.1.6
Arrivals
1. Touch the Arrivals key to view available arrivals.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Selected Airport
Com/Nav
Detailed View Of
Selected Arrival
FPL
Touch To View
Arrival Chart List
Direct-To
Touch To View
Arrival Charts
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 7-10 Arrival Detail
Map
2. Touch the Arrival key to change the selected Arrival chart.
Traffic
Touch To View Selected
Arrival Info
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 7-11 Arrival List
Utilities
3. Touch the desired arrival to view detailed information.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
7.1.7
Airport Info
1. Touch the Airport Info key to view the Waypoint Info for the
selected airport.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Selected Airport Info
Com/Nav
Touch Tabs To View
More Details
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Touch To Return To
Charts Page
Wpt Info
Figure 7-12 Selected Airport Detail
2. Touch the Back key to return to the Charts page.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
7-9
Index
Foreword
7.1.8
Full/Split Screen
1. Touch the Full key to display a full screen view of the current
chart page.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Full Chart Page View
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Touch To Return To
Split Chart Page View
Wpt Info
Figure 7-13 Full View of Chart Page
2. Touch the Split key to display a view of the current chart page
split between the chart detail and chart page controls.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Split Chart Page View
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch To Display Full
Chart Page View
System
Figure 7-14 Split View of Chart Page
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
7.2
Chart Menu Options
Foreword
1. From the Charts page, touch the Menu key.
Getting
Started
Touch To Display
Normal Or Inverted
Chart Colors
Touch To Select
Chart Layer
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 7-15 Chart Options
FPL
2. Touch the Chart Information key to select a Chart Layer.
Chart Layers are only available with ChartView.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Current Selected
Chart Layer
Wpt Info
Map
Touch To Select
Chart Layer
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 7-16 Select From Chart Layer List
Nearest
3. Touch the desired selection to display the selected Chart Layer.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
7-11
Index
Foreword
7.2.1
Chart Layers - All
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
7.2.2
Touch the All key to view the composite of layers available
for the selected chart.
Chart Layers - Header
Com/Nav
Touch the Header selection from the Chart Layer list to view
the header information for the selected approach chart.
FPL
Selected Airport
Direct-To
Detailed View Of
Selected Header
Selected Approach
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Touch Menu To
Select Layers
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 7-17 Header View of Chart for the Selected Approach
7.2.3
Chart Layers - Plan
Weather
Touch the Plan selection from the Chart Layer list to view the
Plan View for the selected approach chart.
Nearest
Selected Airport
Services/
Music
Detailed Plan View Of
Selected Approach
Utilities
Selected Approach
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 7-18 Plan View of Chart for the Selected Approach
7-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
7.2.4
Chart Layers - Profile
Touch the Profile selection from the Chart Layer list to view
the vertical profile of the selected approach.
Selected Airport
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Detailed View Of
Selected Profile
Com/Nav
Selected Approach
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch To Display
Chart Info Options
Charts
Figure 7-19 Profile View of Chart for the Selected Approach
7.2.5
Wpt Info
Chart Layers - Minimums
Touch the Minimums selection from the Chart Layer list to
view the minimums for the selected approach.
Selected Airport
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Detailed View Of
Selected Minimums
Weather
Selected Approach
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch To Display
Minimums
System
Figure 7-20 Minimums View of Chart for the Selected Approach
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
7-13
Index
Foreword
7.2.6
Getting
Started
Invert Colors
While viewing the Charts Menu, touch the Invert Colors key
to show an inverted color view of the display that enhances
low light viewing.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Inverted Color
Chart Page View
Proc
Touch For
Inverted Color
Chart Page View
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 7-21 Inverted Chart Colors View
7.2.7
Geo-Referenced Aircraft Position
The geo-referenced aircraft position is placed on the chart when a position
is established. On the Map page, the chart and geo-referenced position are
shown when the aircraft is in the air (such as, speed is greater than 30 knots).
When a chart is viewed on the Map page, areas of the chart that do not support
geo-referencing, such as expanded details and text blocks, are removed. Typically,
SIDs and STARs are not geo-referenced and thus will not typically display the
ownship symbol on those charts.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Geo-Referenced Aircraft Position
Appendix
Index
Figure 7-22 Areas of Chart Info Removed For Map Overlay and Geo-Reference
7-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
NOTE: The entire ownship symbol must be able to fit within the
displayed chart area before it will be drawn.
7.3
Foreword
Getting
Started
ChartView Cycle Number and Revision
The ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable
during a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date.
ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no longer available
for viewing upon reaching the disable date. When turning on the GTN unit, the
Power-up Page indicates the criteria for ChartView availability. An enablement
card that is purchased from Garmin is separate from the Jeppesen database and
is required to enable ChartView. Jeppeson charts that do not contain a specific
effective date are effective upon receipt.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Info Not Provided
ChartView Will
Be Disabled On
This Date
ChartView Cycle
ChartView
Expiration Date
Figure 7-23 System Status Database Information for ChartView
Map
Traffic
Terrain
The database CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the
ChartView database appear in either white or yellow text. When the ChartView
EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is
shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are
no longer available for viewing.
The ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Jeppesen
Databases in Appendix A for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
7-15
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
7.4
FliteCharts®
FliteCharts® resemble the paper version of National Aeronautical Charting Office
(NACO) terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed with high-resolution
and in color for applicable charts.
Garmin FliteCharts is an electronic version of the National Aeronautical
Navigation Services Charts (AeroNav Services), which was formerly NACO.
FliteCharts lets pilots quickly find and view all AeroNav Services Departure
Procedures (DP), Standard Terminal Arrival Routes (STARs), approach charts, and
airport diagrams. If the current approach is known, the GTN 7XX automatically
selects the correct chart based on the flight plan. Pilots will have access to all
approach plates currently published by AeroNav, which encompasses over 15,000
charts and over 2,900 airports in the U.S. FliteCharts updates are available from
Garmin every 28 days, and the new geo-referenced capability will be included with
the regular updates.
Traffic
FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data
includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
Terrain
7.4.1
Wpt Info
Map
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Revision
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a
period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts
is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer available for viewing
upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the GTN 7XX, the Power-up
page indicates the criteria for chart availability. These indications are whether the
databases are not configured, not available, current, out of date, or disabled.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 7-24 System Status Database Information for FliteCharts
Appendix
Index
Date FliteCharts
Is Effective
FliteCharts Will
Be Disabled On
This Date
FliteCharts Cycle
FliteCharts
Expiration Date
7-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
7.5
SafeTaxi®
SafeTaxi® is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when zooming
in on airports. The airport display on the map reveals runways with numbers,
taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent
features. Resolution is greater at lower map ranges (zooming in). When the
aircraft location is within the screen boundary, including within SafeTaxi ranges,
an airplane symbol is shown on any of the navigation map views for enhanced
position awareness.
NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground
maneuvering. SafeTaxi and Chartview do not comply with the requirements
of AC 120-76C and are not qualified to be used as an airport moving map
display (AMMD). SafeTaxi and Chartview should only be used by the flight
crew to orient themselves on the airport surface.
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting
taxiways and runways, and/or complex ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are
outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are
defined with a magenta circle or outline around the region of possible confusion.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Taxiway Detail
Weather
Taxiway Identification
Nearest
Aircraft Position
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 7-25 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
7-17
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
7.5.1
Using SafeTaxi®
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi®
airport layout within the maximum configured range. Charts and SafeTaxi are
mutually exclusive. So, to view SafeTaxi and Hot Spots, the Charts feature must
be turned off. Charts are displayed when the aircraft is in the air, but when on
the ground, charts are removed and SafeTaxi will be shown automatically.
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to
taxiways, runways, and airport features. The nose of the ownship symbol, not
the center, depicts the current location of the aircraft.
7.5.2
Hot Spot Information
Hot Spot locations are identified by a magenta circle or outline. To view more
information touch the Hot Spot on the moving map.
Charts
Wpt Info
Hot Spot Location
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Hot Spot Location
Weather
Touch to View Hot
Spot Info
Figure 7-26 SafeTaxi Hot Spot Depiction
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
7.5.3
SafeTaxi® Cycle Number and Revision
Foreword
The SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available
for use after the expiration date. When turning on the GTN 7XX, the Power-up
Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or not available.
The Power-up Page shows the SafeTaxi database is current when the “SafeTaxi
Expires” date is shown in white. When the SafeTaxi cycle has expired, the
“SafeTaxi Expires” date appears in yellow. The message “unknown” appears in
white if no SafeTaxi data is available on the database card.
The SafeTaxi, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle
can also be found on the System - System Status page. SafeTaxi information
appears in white and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in white when
data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date.
The EXPIRES date appears in white when data is current and in yellow when
expired. SafeTaxi REGION NOT AVAILABLE appears in white if SafeTaxi data is
not available on the database card.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
7-19
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
This page intentionally left blank
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
8
WAYPOINT INFO
Foreword
The Waypoint Info function allows you to view information about the selected
waypoint. The Waypoint Info page can be reached from the Home page, selected
from a flight plan, or selected from the Nearest page.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch Key to Display
Waypoint Type
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 8-1 Waypoint Info Page
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
8-1
Index
Proc
Charts
Index
Select NDB
Preview
Map
Utilities
Messages
8-2
Preview
Comment
Position Type
Lat/Lon
Lat/Lon
Radial/Radial
Ref Wpt - Rad
Radial/Dist
Ref Wpt - Rad - Dis
Temporary?
Create
Edit
Delete
User Wpt Import
View All
Direct-To
Name
FPL
Name
Com/Nav
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
NOTAMs
Wpt Info
Select VRP
Preview
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Wx Data
Metars
Forecast
TAF
Terrain
Select VOR
Preview
Frequency
Getting
Started
Runways
Runway
PCL
Frequencies
Nearest
Select INT
Preview
Services/
Music
Info
Preview
Procedures
Foreword
Traffic
Weather
System
Figure 8-2 Waypoint Info Functional Diagram
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
8.1
Waypoint Selection
Foreword
1. Touch the Waypoint Info key and then touch the desired
waypoint type (Airport, INT, VOR, etc).
2. Touch the waypoint identifier.
3. The waypoint identifier selection page will be shown and the
waypoint identifier field will be active for selection. Touch the
required keys on the alphanumeric keypad to select the desired
waypoint identifier and then touch the Enter key.
Airport Identifier
Backspace
Key Clears
Wpt Ident
Cursor
Movement
Keys
Find Key Displays
Waypoint Search
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Alphanumeric
Keypad
Wpt Info
Map
Touch To Cancel
Selection And
Return To
Previous Page
Touch Enter
After Selecting
Ident
Figure 8-3 Waypoint Ident Selection
Traffic
Terrain
4. The information page for the selected waypoint will be
displayed.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 8-4 Waypoint Ident Selection Result
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
8-3
Index
Foreword
8.2
Getting
Started
The Airport page of the Waypoint Info function provides a variety of detailed
information about the airport.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
8.2.1
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Airport
Info
The upper part of the page shows the airport identifier and type, name, city
and region, the lat/lon coordinates of the airport, and the bearing (and direction
arrow) and distance to the airport from your present position. The center area
shows the airport elevation, fuel availability, and time zone.
1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the Airport key.
Distance & Bearing To Airport
From Current Position
Proc
Airport
Identifier, City,
& Type
Charts
Airport
Lat/Lon
Waypoint Info
Page Tab
Wpt Info
Map
Airport
Information
Traffic
Touch To
View Airport
Charts
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 8-5 Waypoint Info Airport Page
2. Touch the View Charts key to display available charts for the airport.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
8.2.2
Preview
Foreword
The Waypoint Info Airport Preview page provides detailed information about
the selected airport.
1. Touch the Preview tab to view a map of the airport and
surrounding area.
2. Use the In and Out keys to zoom in and out on the Preview
map.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Distance & Bearing To Airport
From Current Position
Direct-To
Airport
Identifier, City,
& Airport Type
Airport
Lat/Lon
Airport Area
Map
Proc
Charts
Waypoint
Preview Page Tab
Wpt Info
Touch & Move
Finger While
Pressing To Pan Map
Map
Traffic
Touch
To Zoom
Figure 8-6 Waypoint Info Airport Map Page
3. You may touch the map window and while pressing the display
drag your finger to move the map view.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
8-5
Index
Foreword
8.2.3
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Procedures
1. Touch the Procedures page tab to view details about
procedures for the selected airport.
Distance & Bearing To Airport
From Current Position
Airport
Identifier, City,
& Airport Type
Airport
Lat/Lon
FPL
Approach
Name & Type
Direct-To
Procedures
Page Tab
Proc
Charts
Touch
To Scroll
Wpt Info
Figure 8-7 Waypoint Info Airport Procedures Page
Map
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to view additional procedures,
as needed.
Traffic
3. Touch one of the procedure keys to select it for the Procedures
function.
Terrain
Distance & Bearing To Airport
From Current Position
Weather
Nearest
Airport
Identifier, City,
& Airport Type
Airport
Lat/Lon
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Arrival Name
Procedures
Page Tab
Messages
Symbols
Touch
To Scroll
Appendix
Index
Figure 8-8 Waypoint Info Airport Arrival Information
8-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
8.2.4
Runways
Foreword
Distance & Bearing To Airport
From Current Position
Airport
Identifier, City,
& Airport Type
Getting
Started
Airport
Lat/Lon
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Runway
Detail
FPL
Direct-To
Runway Number.
Touch For Detail
Airport Runways
Page Tab
Traffic
Pattern Info
Proc
Charts
Runway
Dimensions
PilotControlled
Lighting
Freq. Touch
To Place In
Standby.
Wpt Info
Surface
Type
Map
Traffic
Figure 8-9 Waypoint Info Airport Runway Information Page
Terrain
1. Touch the Runways tab to view information about the
available runways for the selected airport. The runway
identifiers, surface type, lighting with Pilot Controlled Lighting
(PCL) frequency, runway size, and Traffic Pattern direction are
shown.
2. Touch the PCL key to load the PCL frequency into the Com
Standby location.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
8-7
Index
Foreword
8.2.5
Frequencies
1. Touch the Frequencies tab to view details about available
frequencies for the selected airport.
Getting
Started
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to view additional frequencies,
as needed. A "c" symbol in a white circle will appear next to
frequencies that also function as the Common Traffic Advisory
Frequency (CTAF).
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Distance & Bearing To Airport
From Current Position
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Airport
Identifier, City,
& Airport Type
Airport
Lat/Lon
Airport
Frequencies
Page Tab
Charts
Wpt Info
"c" Indicates
CTAF
Frequency Name
Map
Traffic
Touch Frequency
Key To Load Into
Com Standby
Terrain
Touch
To Scroll
Figure 8-10 Waypoint Info Airport Frequency List Page
Weather
3. Touch the Frequency key next to the frequency name to
load it as the Com or Nav standby frequency, depending on
frequency type.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
8.2.6
Weather (WX) Data
1. Touch the WX Data tab next to the center window to view
textual METARs, City Forecast, and TAF weather information
available for the selected airport.
Distance & Bearing To Airport
From Current Position
Airport
Identifier, City,
& Airport Type
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Airport
Lat/Lon
FPL
Direct-To
Airport
Weather
Page Tab
Proc
Weather
Information
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 8-11 Waypoint Info Airport Weather Page
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the Weather
page information.
Distance & Bearing To Airport
From Current Position
Airport
Identifier, City,
& Airport Type
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Airport
Lat/Lon
Nearest
Services/
Music
Airport
Weather
Page Tab
Weather
Forecast
Information
Utilities
System
Messages
Touch To
Change Pages
Appendix
Figure 8-12 Waypoint Info Airport Weather Forecast Page
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Symbols
8-9
Index
Foreword
8.2.7
NOTAM Pages
1. Touch the NOTAMs tab next to the center window to view
any NOTAMs available for the selected airport. This feature is
supported with ChartView and FIS-B.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 8-13 Waypoint Info Airport NOTAMs Page
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to view additional information,
as needed.
Map
Traffic
8.2.8
Terrain
Weather
Helipads
1. Touch the Helipad tab next to the center window to view
any information available for the selected helipad. Helipad
information may not be complete or consistent due to the
data available from the 3rd party sources.
Distance & Bearing To Helipad
From Current Position
Nearest
Services/
Music
Helipad
Identifier, City,
& Type
Helipad
Lat/Lon
Utilities
System
Messages
Appendix
Index
Helipad
Information
Helipad Info
Page Tab
Symbols
Figure 8-14 Helipad Waypoint Info
8-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
8.2.9
Nearest VRPs
1. Touch the NRST VRPs tab for a list of the visual reporting
points located near the selected airport.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 8-15 Waypoint Info Airport NRST VRPs Page
Charts
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to view additional information,
as needed.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
8-11
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
8.3
Intersection (INT)
The Intersection page of the Waypoint Info function provides a variety
of detailed information about the intersection. The top left area of the page
displays the Intersection identifier and region. The top center area shows the
lat/lon coordinates of the Intersection and the bearing (with direction arrow)
and distance to the Intersection from your present position.
Select another Waypoint by touching the Waypoint Identifier key, entering
the characters for the desired name with the alphanumeric keypad, and then
touching the Enter key. You may also search through the list by touching the
Find key and then choosing from the existing list of waypoints by touching the
desired waypoint from the list.
The center area of the page shows a map with the Intersection in the center.
1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the Intersection
key.
Charts
Wpt Info
Distance & Bearing To Intersection
From Current Position
Map
Intersection
Identifier
Traffic
Intersection
Lat/Lon
Nearest VOR
Information
Terrain
Intersection
Area Map
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Intersection
Symbol &
Identifier
Touch & Move
Finger While
Pressing To Pan Map
Touch
To Zoom
Utilities
Figure 8-16 Waypoint Info - Intersections
System
2. Use the In and Out keys to zoom in and out on the map. You
may touch the map window and while lightly pressing the
display, drag your finger to move the map view.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
8.4
VOR
The VOR page of the Waypoint Info function provides a variety of detailed
information about the VOR. The top left area of the page displays the VOR
identifier, name, city and state, and region. The top center area shows the
lat/lon coordinates of the VOR and the bearing (with direction arrow) and distance
to the VOR from your present position. The top right area shows the frequency
in a key. Select another Waypoint by touching the Waypoint Identifier key,
entering the characters for the desired name with the alphanumeric keypad, and
then touching the Enter key. You may also search through the list by touching
the Find key and then choosing from the existing list of waypoints by touching
the desired waypoint from the list.
The center area of the page shows a map with the VOR in the center.
1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the VOR key.
Nearest Airport
Information
Magnetic
Variation
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Map
Traffic
Terrain
VOR Symbol
& Identifier
Touch & Move
Finger While
Pressing To Pan Map
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Wpt Info
VOR Lat/Lon
VOR Area Map
Getting
Started
Charts
Distance & Bearing To VOR VOR Frequency - Touch To
Insert Into Nav Standby
From Current Position
VOR Identifier,
Symbol, & Name
VOR Location
& Region
VOR Class
Foreword
Weather
Nearest
Map Scale
Touch To Zoom
Figure 8-17 Waypoint Info - VORs
Services/
Music
Utilities
2. Use the In and Out keys to zoom in and out on the map. You
may touch the map window and while lightly pressing the
display, drag your finger to move the map view.
3. Touch the Frequency key next to load it as the Nav standby
frequency.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
8-13
Index
Foreword
8.5
VRP
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.20 or later.
Getting
Started
NOTE: Visual Reporting Point database coverage is not available in all
regions.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Wpt Info
The VRP (Visual Reporting Point) page of the Waypoint Info function provides
information about the VRP. The top area displays the Lat/Lon coordinates of the
VRP and the bearing (with direction arrow) and distance to the VRP from your
present position. Select another Waypoint by touching the Waypoint Identifier
key, entering the characters for the desired name with the alphanumeric keypad,
and then touching the Enter key. You may also search through the list by
touching the Find key and then choosing from the existing list of waypoints by
touching the desired waypoint from the list. The center area of the page shows a
map with the VRP in the center.
1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the VRP key.
Map
Distance and Bearing to
VRP from Current Position
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Traffic
VRP Lat/Lon
VRP Symbol
and Identifier
Terrain
Nearest
Airport
Information
VRP Location
and Region
Weather
Touch and
Move Finger
While Pressing
To Pan Map
Nearest
Services/
Music
VRP Area
Map
Utilities
Map Scale
Touch to
Zoom
System
Figure 8-18 Waypoint Info -Visual Reporting Point
Messages
2. Use the In and Out keys to zoom in and out on the map. You
can touch the map window and while lightly pressing the
display, drag your finger to move the map view.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
8.6
NDB
Foreword
The NDB page of the Waypoint Info function provides a variety of detailed
information about the NDB. The top left area of the page displays the NDB
identifier, name, city and state, and region. The top center area shows the
lat/lon coordinates of the NDB and the bearing (with direction arrow) and
distance to the NDB from your present position. The top right area shows the
frequency in a key.
Select another Waypoint by touching the Waypoint Identifier key, entering
the characters for the desired name with the alphanumeric keypad, and then
touching the Enter key. You may also search through the list by touching the
Find key and then choosing from the existing list of waypoints by touching the
desired waypoint from the list.
The center area of the page shows a map with the NDB in the center.
1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the NDB key.
Distance & Bearing To NDB
From Current Position
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
NDB Frequency
Map
NDB Identifier,
Symbol, & Name
NDB Location
& Region
Marker
Description
NDB Lat/Lon
Nearest Airport
Information
NDB Symbol
& Identifier
NDB Area Map
Touch & Move
Finger While
Pressing To Pan Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Map Scale
Touch To Zoom
Figure 8-19 Waypoint Info for NDBs
2. Use the In and Out keys to zoom in and out on the map. You
may touch the map window and while lightly pressing the
display, drag your finger to move the map view.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
8-15
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
8.7
User Waypoints (User)
In addition to the airport, VOR, NDB and intersection information contained
in your Jeppesen NavData® card, the GTN 7XX allows you to store up to 1,000
user-defined waypoints. The User Waypoint Page displays the waypoint name
(up to six characters long), identifier and radial from two reference waypoints,
distance from one reference waypoint, along with the user waypoint’s lat/lon
position.
The following descriptions and abbreviations appear on the User Waypoint
Page:
• Ref Wpt — Reference waypoint identifier (name)
• Radial — Radial from reference waypoint, in degrees magnetic or degrees
true (depending upon unit configuration)
• Distance — Distance from reference waypoint, in nautical miles/statute
miles/kilometers (depending upon unit configuration)
• Lat/Lon — Latitude/Longitude (degrees/minutes)
Distance & Bearing To Wpt
From Current Position
Map
Traffic
Identifier, Symbol,
& References
Terrain
Wpts Used
Reference Wpt
Delete Wpt
View All Wpts
Weather
Edit Wpt
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Wpt Symbol
& Identifier
Area Map
Touch & Move
Finger While
Pressing To Pan Map
Map Scale
Touch To Zoom
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 8-20 Waypoint Info for a User Waypoint
Select another Waypoint by touching the Waypoint Identifier key, entering
the characters for the desired name with the alphanumeric keypad, and then
touching the Enter key. You may also search through the list by touching the
View All key and then choosing from the existing list of User waypoints by
touching the desired waypoint from the list.
8-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
8.7.1
Select User Waypoint by Name
1. While viewing the User Waypoint page, touch the User
Waypoint Name.
8.7.2
Foreword
Getting
Started
2. Use the keypad to select the characters for the name and then
touch Enter.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Select User Waypoint from a List
Com/Nav
1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the User
Waypoint key.
2. Touch the View List key and then use the Up and Down
keys to view the waypoints on the list.
User
Waypoint
List Name
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
User
Waypoint
List
User
Waypoint
Type
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 8-21 Waypoint Info User Waypoint List
8.7.3
Services/
Music
Edit User Waypoint
1. Select the desired User Waypoint and touch the Edit key.
2. Touch the key for the desired information and make changes
as needed.
8.7.4
Delete User Waypoint
1. Select the desired User Waypoint and touch the Delete key.
2. Touch the OK key to confirm deleting the selected waypoint.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
8-17
Index
Foreword
8.7.5
Delete All User Waypoints
1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the User
Waypoint key.
Getting
Started
2. Touch the View List key and then touch the Menu key to
open the User Waypoints Menu.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Touch to Filter
Waypoints to
Delete
Traffic
Touch to
Delete All User
Waypoints
Figure 8-22 User Waypoints Menu
Terrain
3. Touch the Filter key to select which type of user waypoints
to delete: All, Basic, or Mark On Target.
Weather
4. Touch the Delete All key to delete all of the user waypoints.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
8.8
Create Waypoint
Foreword
User waypoints are created from the Create User Waypoint page. To create a
new user waypoint, simply enter its name (identifier) and position, or reference
another waypoint by radial and distance.
Waypoint Name
Map Area Around
Waypoint
Waypoint
Comment
Waypoint Type
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Temporary
Waypoint
Touch To Setup
Ref Wpt 1
Touch To Setup
Ref Wpt 2
Proc
Touch to Finalize
Waypoint
Creation
Touch to Cancel
Waypoint
Creation
Touch To Zoom
Figure 8-23 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint
3. Use the alphanumeric keypad to make the waypoint name (up
to six characters) and then touch the Enter key.
Backspace
Key Clears
Wpt Name
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Cursor
Movement
Keys
Alphanumeric
Keypad
Wpt Info
Map
1. From the Waypoint Info page, touch the Create Waypoint
key.
2. Touch the User Identifier key.
User Waypoint
Name
Charts
Utilities
System
Messages
Touch Enter
After Creating
Name
Touch To Cancel
Creating Name
Appendix
Figure 8-24 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint Name
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Symbols
8-19
Index
4. Touch the Comment key to add a short comment for the new
waypoint.
Foreword
5. Touch the Position Type key and then Lat/Lon,
Radial/Radial, or Radial/Distance to assign the type. See
the following instructions for more detail.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch to Select the
Desired Waypoint
Position Type
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 8-25 Waypoint Info - Create User Position Type
6. If desired, touch the Temporary? key to create the waypoint
for only temporary use. Temporary waypoints will be removed
when the power is cycled.
Wpt Info
Map
7. When finished with all selections, touch the Create key to
create the new waypoint.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
8.8.1
Mark On Target
If an external Mark On Target (MOT) switch is installed, pressing that switch
will result in the creation of a User waypoint called MOTxxx at the point in space
where the MOT switch was pushed. The waypoints are created in increasing
numeric order up to number 999, at which point they will start replacing
existing waypoints at the beginning of the list.
When a Mark on Target waypoint is created, it may not be immediately
visible on the moving map page because the ownship icon will be directly on
top of the waypoint. Creation of the waypoint can be verified by changing zoom
scales on the map or viewing the User Waypoints page.
Messages
NOTE: This feature is available in software v4.00 and later.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
8.8.2
Waypoint Location Based on LAT/LON
1. From the Create User Waypoint page, touch the Position
Type key and then the LAT/LON key. Then, touch the
Latitude/Longitude value key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Select Lat/Lon
Waypoint Reference
Type
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 8-26 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint Type - LAT/LON
2. The Lat/Lon coordinate values will be highlighted. Touch the
Lat or Lon key to toggle selection of the hemisphere values
and highlight the selected value.
When The Lat
Key Is Touched,
The Latitude
Hemisphere Value
Is Active For
Selection
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Touch To Toggle Lat/Lon
Traffic
Terrain
Touch to Select
Numeric Values
Touch to Select
Hemisphere Value
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 8-27 Lat/Lon Coordinate Selection
3. Touch the desired hemisphere keys to select the desired values.
After selecting the hemisphere value, the cursor will advance to
the first character of the adjacent numeric value for selection.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
8-21
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Even when the hemisphere values are highlighted, touching the
numeric keys will always place the cursor at the first numeric
value. The Large knob may also be used for cursor movement
and characters are selected with the Small knob.
NOTE: When editing values, turn the Large knob counter-clockwise to
backspace or move the cursor to the left.
Com/Nav
FPL
4. As each value is selected, the cursor will advance to the next
character. Touch the necessary key for the desired values.
Direct-To
5. When finished with the Lat/Lon selections, touch the Enter
key.
6. When finished with all selections, touch the Create key to
create the new waypoint.
Proc
Charts
8.8.3
Waypoint Location Based on Two Radials
1. From the Create User Waypoint page, touch the Position Type
key and then the Radial/Radial key.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch to Select
Radial/Radial Waypoint
Reference Type
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 8-28 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint Type - Radial/Radial
Services/
Music
2. Touch the Ref Wpt key and use the alphanumeric keypad to
select the desired identifier.
Utilities
3. Touch the upper Radial key and use the alphanumeric keypad
to select the desired value.
System
4. Touch the Enter key.
Messages
5. When finished with all selections, touch the Create key to
create the new waypoint.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-22
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
8.8.4
Waypoint Location Based on Radial and Distance
1. From the Create User Waypoint page, touch the Position Type
key and then the Radial/Distance key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch to Select
Radial/Distance Waypoint
Reference Type
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 8-29 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint Type - Radial/Distance
2. From the Create User Waypoint page, touch the Ref Wpt
key and use the alphanumeric keypad to select the desired
identifier.
Charts
Wpt Info
3. Touch the upper Radial key and use the alphanumeric keypad
to select the desired value.
Map
4. Touch the upper Distance key and use the alphanumeric
keypad to select the desired value.
Traffic
5. Touch the Enter key.
Terrain
Weather
6. Touch the Create key to save the new waypoint.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
8-23
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
8.9
The GTN can import user generated waypoints from a file on the datacard.
The created waypoints will be at the latitude and longitude specified in the file
with the specified name and comment.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Import User Waypoints (Datacard)
NOTE: This feature is available in software v5.10 and later.
When a user waypoint file is on the datacard, a key will be available on the
Waypoint Info page for importing user waypoints.
1. Insert a datacard with the User waypoints into the the GTN.
2. From the Waypoint Info page, touch the Import Waypoints
key.
3. Touch OK to acknowledge the pop-up to import all of the user
waypoints in the file.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 8-30 Start User Waypoint Import
4. The pilot is informed of the status of the user waypoint import
via one of the following system messages.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-24
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Message
USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User
waypoints were imported successfully.
USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User
waypoint import failed.
USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User
waypoint import failed. User waypoint
database is full.
USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User
waypoints imported successfully existing waypoints reused.
Description
All user waypoints were imported
successfully.
User waypoint import failed due to
improper file format.
User waypoint catalog is full and the
requested user waypoints could not be
imported.
User waypoints imported and existing
waypoints are used instead of creating
duplicate waypoints. This occurs when
a waypoint to be imported is within
0.001° latitude and longitude of an
existing user waypoint (roughly a few
hundred feet, depending on latitude).
Table 8-1 User Waypoint Import Messages
For more details on importing user waypoints, visit www.fly.Garmin.com.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
8-25
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
This page intentionally left blank
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-26
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
9
MAP
The Map page is used to provide situational awareness in flight. The Map
page can display the following information:
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspace,
airways, land data (highways, cities,
lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) with
names
• Wind direction and speed
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (with the nose
representing present position)
• Topography scale
Foreword
Getting
Started
• Topography data
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
• NEXRAD (or Precip) Weather (Opt.)
Com/Nav
• ChartView or FliteChart Overlay
FPL
• Terrain Overlay
• Traffic Overlay
Direct-To
• Radar Overlay
• Nav range ring
• Fuel Range Ring (SW v6.00 or later)
• Flight plan legs
• Track vector (SW v6.20 or later)
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
North Indicator
Map Orientation
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Map
Nav Range Ring
Aircraft Symbol
(Present Position)
Traffic
Terrain
From - To - Next
Waypoints
Weather
Touch To Edit FPL
CDI
Back to
Previous Page
Touch to View Messages
Nearest
Services/
Music
Range Keys
Touch to Zoom
In and Out
Map Menu Options
CDI - Select Nav Source
Utilities
OBS - Select Manual or Auto Sequencing
190-01007-03 Rev. P
System
Figure 9-1 Map Page Description
The following information describes the ownship symbol
behavior in a helicopter that does not have a source of magnetic
heading information connected to the GTN. When greater than
15 knots groundspeed the map is oriented either north up with
ownship oriented to its current track or track up. When less than
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-1
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15 kts groundspeed, the directional ownship icon is replaced
with a non-directional icon because it can't be determined if
the rotorcraft is going sideways or backwards. The map will
continue to orient to the current track if the map is selected
for Track Up. If the map is oriented to track up, then below
5 kts groundspeed the map orientation will "latch" to the last
valid track prior to the groundspeed going below 5 kts. The
map will reorient when the groundspeed again exceeds 5 kts.
The position of the ownship icon over the map is always the
current GPS position of the aircraft.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
NOTE: The electronic map is an aid to navigation and is designed to
facilitate the use of authorized government charts, not replace them.
Land and water data is provided only as a general reference. The accuracy
of the land and water data is not suitable for use as a primary source of
navigation and should only be used to supplement official government
charts and notices.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Map Overlays
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Map Setup
Utilities
System
Map Detail
Messages
Map User Fields
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Topo
Airways
Terrain
NEXRAD (or PRECIP)*
Charts*
StormScope*
Traffic*
Radar*
Graphically Edit FPL
Map Pointer - Create Wpt
Map
Aviation
Land
Airspace
Traffic*
Weather*
Change User Fields
Restore Defaults
* Optional
Figure 9-2 Map Page Functional Diagram
9-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
NOTE: NEXRAD (or PRECIP) and Radar may not be shown at the same
time.
9.1
Foreword
Getting
Started
Map Menu
The Map Menu provides the ability to modify and control the information
displayed on the Map page.
• Map Overlays are selected to overlay various types of information over the
base map.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
• Map Setup modifies the display of other map features.
• Map User Fields determines whether or not the fields in the corners of the
Map page are displayed and the data shown in each corner.
• Map Detail lets you control the amount of information displayed at different
map ranges.
• Restore Defaults lets you start all over again with the default values for the
settings for the Map User Fields.
NOTE: Changes made in the Map Menu take effect immediately on the
map display.
1. From the Home page, touch Map to reach the Map page, or
press and hold the HOME key to go to the Map page from
any function. On the Map page, touch the Menu key.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Map Overlay
Selections
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch To Edit Map Setup
Touch and Slide Finger To
Adjust Map Detail Level
Utilities
Touch To Edit Map
User Fields (Corners)
System
Return Map User Fields
To Default Values
Messages
Symbols
Figure 9-3 Map Menu
2. Touch the key for the desired option to access its settings.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
9-3
Index
3. Touch the Back key to return to the Map page. Any changes
made will be retained until changed.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
9.1.1
Map Overlays
Map Overlays are layers of information that are referenced to geographic
location and are overlayed on the base map. A green bar will appear below
the Map Overlay key text when the overlay is selected, except for Airways and
NEXRAD.
FPL
NOTE: Data linked weather (SiriusXM / FIS-B / Connext) is displayed below
the chart overlay, Active onboard RADAR overlay is displayed above the
chart overlay.
Direct-To
Proc
NOTE: Map overlay keys do not turn on or activate equipment necessary
for the overlay to function. Map overlay keys may remain available even
if the information necessary for the overlay is not available. For example:
the Radar overlay key is available even if the radar is turned off.
Charts
Wpt Info
NOTE: Map overlays for StormScope, Traffic, or Radar are prevented from
being overlaid on the main map without a heading source or while User
Navigation Angles are selected.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
9.1.1.1
Overlay Priority
The data overlayed on the map is displayed according the following priorities
(from highest to lowest):
1 - Traffic
19 - County
Warning
2 - Ownship
11 - Freezing Levels 20 - PIREPs
3 - Flight Plan
12 - Cell Movement 21 - AIREPS
4 - TAWS Alerts
13 - Lightning
22 - City Forecast
5 - Weather Radar 14 - METARs
23 - Surface
Analysis
6 - Charts
15 - Winds Aloft
24 - Airspace
7 - Stormscope
16 - SIGMETs
25 - Waypoints
8 - Obstacles
17 - AIRMETs
26 - Airways
9 - Fuel Range Ring 18 - Cyclone
27 - Turbulence
Warning
Appendix
Index
10 - TFRs
28 - Icing Potential
29- Echo Tops
30 - NEXRAD
31 - Cloud Tops
32 - IR Satellite
33 - SafeTaxi
34 - Terrain
35 - Base Map
36 - Topo
Table 9-2 Data Overlay Priority
9-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
9.1.1.2
Topo
The Topo Data option selects whether the colored topographical features are
displayed. Traffic, Land Data, Terrain, and Obstacles will still be displayed even
with Topo Data turned off.
1. While viewing the Map Menu, touch the TOPO Map Overlay
key to toggle the Topo setting.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Topo Map Overlay Off
Topo Map Overlay On
Figure 9-4 Topo Map Overlay Selections
2. When the Topo Map Overlay is toggled off, all topographic
color features are removed.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-5
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
9.1.1.3
Airways
The Airways option allows you to select the airways that are shown on the
Map page. All, Low only, and High only Airways may be selected. When Off is
selected, airways will not be shown.
1. While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Airways Map Overlay
key to select the Airways viewed. Selections are: Off, Low, High,
and All.
FPL
Low Airway (Gray)
Direct-To
High Airway (Green)
Proc
Charts
Active Flight Plan Leg
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 9-5 Airways Map Overlay
Terrain
2. Low Airways are shown as gray lines. High Airways are shown
as green lines.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
9.1.1.4
Terrain
The Terrain Data option selects whether Terrain Data is shown on the Map
page. Terrain and NEXRAD weather may not be displayed at the same time.
Selecting one will disable the other. A Terrain icon will indicate that the Terrain
overlay has been selected. Terrain overlay colors may or may not be shown
depending on the altitude of the aircraft.
1. While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Terrain Map Overlay
key to toggle the view of Terrain data.
Red Terrain - At or
Within 100 ft below
Aircraft Altitude
Yellow Terrain - Between
100 ft and 1000 ft
below current aircraft
altitude
Current Position
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Icon Shows Terrain Overlay
Is Active
Map
Traffic
Touch to Zoom Map Range
Terrain
Figure 9-6 Terrain Map Overlay
2. The colors of the terrain are referenced to your aircraft altitude.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-7
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
9.1.1.5
NEXRAD (Optional)
The NEXRAD menu option allows the display of NEXRAD Precip weather
information overlayed on the Map page. Terrain and NEXRAD Precip weather
may not be displayed at the same time. Selecting one will disable the other.
NEXRAD Precip weather is an optional feature that requires the installation of
a GDL 69/69A, GDL 88, GTX 345, or GSR 56 and an appropriate Weather
subscription. Only one weather source can be displayed at a time (i.e., FIS-B and
XM cannot be displayed on the map simultaneously. See the Weather section for
more detail.
While viewing the Map Menu, touch the NEXRAD Map Overlay
key to toggle the view of NEXRAD weather data.
Proc
NEXRAD
Product
Age
Charts
NEXRAD
Weather
Wpt Info
Map
NEXRAD
Weather
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 9-7 NEXRAD Map Overlay
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
9.1.1.6
Charts (Optional)
The Charts menu option allows the display of Charts overlayed on the Map
page. The Charts Map Overlay option selects whether Chart data is shown on
the Map page. Charts may or may not be shown depending on the other aircraft's
location. The ownship icon will be shown over an available chart. See the Charts
section for more detail.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
A chart will be displayed on the map if all of the following are true:
• A charts database is a valid database.
FPL
• The system date is prior to the disable date of the charts database.
Direct-To
• The Charts Overlay Setting is active.
• The aircraft is In Air.
Proc
The chart displayed on the map will be chosen based on:
• The approach chart for the approach in the active flight plan, if an
approach exists in the active flight plan.
• The airport surface chart for the nearest airport, if no approach exists
in the active flight plan and an airport exists within 200NM of the
aircraft's current position.
NOTE: Features that are selectable on the main map page, such as
obstacles, airports, airspace, and other waypoint types that are not visible
beneath the overlaid chart, remain selectable even when an approach
chart is overlaid on the main map.
NOTE: If the chart for the loaded approach procedure is not overlaid on
the map page with the Chart Overlay active, ensure the correct chart is
selected on the dedicated Charts page.
NOTE: If two GTN 7XX units are crossfilled, then the same type (ChartView
or FlightCharts) and version (cycle number and effective dates) for the chart
database must be installed on both units in order for the correct chart to
be overlaid on the main map page.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-9
Index
While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Charts Map Overlay key
to toggle the view of the Charts overlay.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Chart Overlay Selected
In The Map Menu
Com/Nav
Ownship Located on
Chart Overlay
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 9-8 Charts Map Overlay
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
9.1.1.7
StormScope® (Optional)
The WX-500 StormScope Weather Mapping Sensor is a passive weather
avoidance system that detects electrical discharges associated with thunderstorms
within a 200 NM radius of the aircraft. The StormScope measures relative
bearing and distance of thunderstorm-related electrical activity and reports the
information to the display. Stormscope and XM Lightning are mutually exclusive.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
NOTE: The StormScope map overlay is only displayed if valid aircraft
heading information is available. Refer to the WX-500 Pilot’s Guide for a
detailed description of the WX-500 StormScope.
Com/Nav
1. While viewing the Map Menu, touch the StormScope Map
Overlay key to show the menu for selecting the StormScope
radar weather data display mode (Cell, Strike, Off, or Clear
Strikes).
Direct-To
FPL
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Select StormScope Data Display
Map
Traffic
Figure 9-9 StormScope Map Overlay Selections
2. StormScope data will be overlayed on the Map page when Cell
or Strike is selected. See the Weather section for more details.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Icon Shows Stormscope
Overlay Is Active
Messages
Figure 9-10 StormScope Map Overlay
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-11
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
9.1.1.8
Radar (Optional)
With the exception of WATCH Shading, all radar settings specified
on the Weather Radar page are applied to the radar map overlay.
NEXRAD/PRECIP and the Radar overlay may not be shown at the same time.
While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Radar Map Overlay key
to toggle the view of airborne Radar data.
Precipitation
Returns
FPL
Scan Line
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 9-11 Radar Map Overlay
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
9.1.1.9
Traffic (Optional)
The Traffic Map Overlay option selects whether Traffic data is shown on the
Map page. A Traffic icon will indicate that the Traffic overlay has been selected.
Traffic may or may not be shown depending on the other aircraft's location and
equipment. See the Traffic section for more detail.
While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Traffic Map Overlay key
to toggle the view of Traffic data.
Services/
Music
Icon Shows Traffic Overlay
Is Active
Utilities
Non-Threat Traffic Indication.
Currently 1200 Ft Above And
Rising
Icon Shows Aircraft Is Receiving
TIS Traffic From Ground Stations
When A GDL 88 Is Connected
(GTN software v5.11 or earlier)
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 9-12 Traffic Map Overlay
9-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Orientation
North Up Above
Visual APPR Sel
Auto Zoom
Auto Zoom Min
Auto Zoom Max
Track Vector Length
Nav Range Ring
Fuel Range Ring
Fuel Reserve Time
Topo Scale
Point Obstacle Rng
Wire Obstacle Rng
Chart Color
Restore Defaults
Airport Range
SafeTaxi Diagrams
Runway Extensions
Intersection Range
NDB Range
VOR Range
VRP Range
User Waypoint Range
Airway Range
TFRs
Restore Defaults
Road Detail
City Detail
State/Province Names
River/Lake Detail
Restore Defaults
Smart Airspace
Show Airspaces
Class B/TMA Range
Class C/TCA Range
Class D Range
Restricted Range
MOA (Military) Range
Other/ADIZ Range
Restore Defaults
Range
Type
Restore Defaults
Weather Source
Cell Movement
METAR
Cloud Tops
Echo Tops
Lightning
Restore Defaults
9.1.2
Map Setup
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Foreword
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 9-13 Map Setup Functional Diagram
Appendix
9-13
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
The Map page is customized by selecting groups from the Map Menu. The
Map Menu groups include choices for Map, Aviation, Land, Airspace, Traffic,
and Weather groups depending on the installed equipment of a given aircraft.
Each group has a list of options that vary with the group.
1. While viewing the Map page, touch the Menu key. Then, touch
the Map Setup key. The Map Setup page will be displayed.
Com/Nav
Map
Setup
Group
FPL
Group
Options
Direct-To
Group
Option
Details
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 9-14 Map Setup Page
Terrain
2. Touch the desired Map Setup Group tab (Map, Aviation,
Airspace, Land, Traffic, or Weather) to display the set of group
options.
Weather
Nearest
3. Touch the desired group key. A list of options for the selected
group will be shown. (i.e., Map - Orientation, North Up Above,
Auto Zoom, etc.) Touch the Up or Down keys as needed to
scroll through the list.
Services/
Music
Utilities
4. Touch the key for the selected option.
System
5. Touch the Restore Defaults key to return to the original
default values for the selected option.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
9.1.2.1
Map
The Map option defines the behavior and display of information on the Map
page such as: Orientation, North Up Above, Auto Zoom, Nav Range Ring, Topo
Scale, Obstacle Range, and Restore Defaults. The default values are shown in
bold type.
Feature
Orientation
North Up Above
Visual APPR Selector
Auto Zoom
Auto Zoom Min
Auto Zoom Max
Track Vector Length
Nav Range Ring
Fuel Range Ring
Fuel Reserve Time
Topo Scale
Point Obstacle Range
Wire Obstacle Range
Chart Color Scheme
Restore Defaults
Selection
North Up, Track Up, Heading Up
Off, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM, 75 NM,
100 NM, 150 NM, 250 NM
Off, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM,
25 NM
Off, On
250 ft, 400 ft, 500 ft, 750 ft, 1000 ft, 1500 ft, 2500 ft,
0.5 NM, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5
NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM,
75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM, 250 NM, 400 NM
250 ft, 400 ft, 500 ft, 750 ft, 1000 ft, 1500 ft, 2500 ft,
0.5 NM, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM,
7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM,
75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM, 250 NM, 400 NM
Off, 30 SEC, 60 SEC, 2 MIN, 5 MIN, 10 MIN, 20 MIN
Off, On, Enhanced
Off, On
30 Min, 45 Min, 60 Min, 90 Min
Off, On
Off, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM
Off, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM
Day, Night
Returns values to original factory settings
Table 9-1 Map Setup Map Options
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-15
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Map Orientation
The Map Orientation selection sets the orientation of the Map page. Selections
are North Up, Track Up, and Heading Up. A Map Orientation label is shown
below the North indicator (reference to True North) in the top left corner of the
Map page.
Com/Nav
FPL
Map Orientation
Figure 9-15 Map Orientation Label
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
North Up Above
The North Up Above option allows you to select the map range where at and
above the selected value the Map Orientation will automatically change to North
Up as a default. When the map range is 500 NM or more, the map orientation
will automatically become North Up.
Visual Approach Selector
This option allows you to select the range at which the Visual Approach
Selector becomes active. When the aircraft is within a specified distance of the
destination airport, the Visual key automatically appears in the bottom left
corner of the map. Any values displaying in this area are obscured while the key
is active. To disable this feature, select OFF.
For visual approach procedures, refer to section 6.13.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Touch To Select
Visual Approach
for Destination
Airport
Figure 9-16 Visual Approach Key
Appendix
Index
9-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Auto Zoom
With a valid flight plan, the Auto Zoom feature will automatically change the
Map page range depending on the distance to the next waypoint in the flight
plan. If enabled, it will also automatically zoom to the SafeTaxi zoom range
when the aircraft is on the ground. Auto Zoom can be overridden at any time by
manually zooming with the In and Out keys. The Auto Zoom Min selection sets
the minimum range that the display will Zoom in. The Auto Zoom Max value sets
the maximum range the display will Zoom out.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Auto Zoom Active Indication
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 9-17 Auto Zoom Active Indication
Auto Zoom is re-enabled once one of the following conditions is met:
• A waypoint is sequenced
• The aircraft transitions from “on ground” to “in air”
• A point is reached where the Auto Zoom range matches the manual override
range (known as auto-sync) and will be noted as “Auto” above the map
range value on the map page
• Auto Zoom is toggled off and back on in the Map Setup page
NOTE: Rotorcraft use a Local Auto Zoom function where Auto Zoom will
remain at the 1500 ft zoom scale until the rotorcraft is above 400 ft GSL
or 40 kts.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-17
Index
Foreword
Auto Zoom Min
Set the limit that the display will zoom in automatically.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Selected Minimum
Auto Zoom Range
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 9-18 Map Setup Minimum Auto Zoom Range
Wpt Info
Map
Auto Zoom Max
Set the limit that the display will zoom out automatically.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Selected Maximum
Auto Zoom Range
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 9-19 Map Setup Maximum Auto Zoom Range
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Track Vector
Foreword
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.20 and later.
When turned on, the track vector is depicted as a cyan line extending from the
nose of the aircraft in the direction of movement. The length of the track vector
represents the path the aircraft will follow if the present speed and direction are
maintained for the time configured in the Track Vector Length setting.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Track Vector
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 9-20 Track Vector
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-19
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Nav Range Ring
When turned on, the Nav Range Ring option will show a ring with a compass
rose oriented to magnetic north around your present position on the Map page.
When selected ON, the Enhanced Range Ring function provides a second ring
at 1/2 the distance of the primary ring to allow the pilot to accurately judge
distance to objects depicted on the map.
Com/Nav
FPL
Nav Range Ring
Direct-To
Current Position
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Nav Range
Ring Range
Active Obstacle
Overlay Types *
Map
Figure 9-21 Nav Range Ring
Traffic
Terrain
Fuel Range Ring
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.00 and later.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
When interfaced with a fuel computer, the GTN can display a Fuel Range
Ring which shows an estimate of the remaining flight distance at the current fuel
consumption rate and groundspeed. If either fuel quantity or fuel flow sensor
data is not received, the GTN will use the Fuel on Board or Fuel Flow values
on the Utilities – Fuel Planning page. If both fuel quantity and fuel flow are not
received by the GTN, the Fuel Range Ring will be removed. A dashed green
circle indicates the selected Range to Reserve Fuel. A solid yellow circle indicates
the Total Endurance Range.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Total Endurance
Range
Total Endurance
Time
Range To
Reserve Fuel
Time To Reserve
Fuel
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 9-22 Fuel Range Ring
TOPO Scale
The Topo Scale option selects whether the elevation scale for topographical
features on the Map page is displayed. The scale will be located on the left side
of the display.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 9-23 Map Page Topo Scale
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-21
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Point Obstacle Range
The Point Obstacle Range option selects whether the Point Obstacle Data is
shown on the Map page at and below the selected Point Obstacle range. Map
ranges above this value will not show the Point Obstacle Data. An obstacle with
an asterisk indicates a group of the same obstacle type.
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is less than
1000 ft AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is less
than 1000 ft AGL)
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is greater
than 1000 ft AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than
1000 ft AGL)
Direct-To
Table 9-2 Navigation Map Point Obstacle Icons by Elevation
Proc
Tower
Windmill
Windmill in Group
Power Line
Charts
Wpt Info
Table 9-3 Obstacle Icon Types
Map
Color
None
Traffic
Terrain
White
Amber
Red
Weather
Nearest
Table 9-4 Fixed Wing Color Scheme for Obstacles and Wires
Services/
Music
Color
None
Utilities
System
White
Amber
Red
Messages
Symbols
Description
Lines are removed when they are more than 500 ft below the
rotorcraft.
Lines are white when they are within 500 ft below the rotorcraft.
Lines are amber when they are within 250 ft below the rotorcraft.
Lines are red when they are at or above the altitude of the
rotorcraft.
Table 9-5 Rotorcraft Color Scheme for Obstacles and Wires
Appendix
Index
Description
Lines are removed when they are more than 2000 ft below the
aircraft.
Lines are white when they are within 2000 ft below the aircraft.
Lines are amber when they are within 1000 ft below the aircraft.
Lines are red when they are within 100 ft below or above the
altitude of the airplane.
9-22
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Grouped obstacles are shown with an asterisk. The color of the asterisks
is tied to the relative altitude of the highest obstacle in the group, not other
obstacles within that group. Obstacles are grouped when they would otherwise
overlap.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
1. While viewing the Map function, touch the Menu key.
Com/Nav
2. Touch the Map Setup key.
FPL
3. Under the Map tab touch the Point Obstacle Range key and
select the maximum range where obstacles will be displayed.
Direct-To
Proc
Lighted Obstacle
Grouped Obstacles
Unlighted
Obstacle
Current Position
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Active Obstacle
Overlay Types *
Terrain
Weather
Figure 9-24 Navigation Map Point Obstacles
*
The icon on the left shows that the point obstacle overlay is
active. The icon on the right shows that the wire obstacle overlay
is active. These icons are available in software v5.12 or later.
4. Touch an obstacle on the map and the elevation will be shown.
If there are nearby or overlayed objects (obstacle, airspace,
airport, etc), touch the Next key to step through the nearby
objects. Touch the Back key to return to the normal map view.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-23
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Selected
Obstacle
Selected Obstacle
Info and Type
Detail at
Cursor
Point
Touch to Step to
the Next Nearby
Obstacle
Figure 9-25 Point Obstacle Detail
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Wire Obstacle Range
The Wire Obstacle Range option selects whether the power lines are shown
on the Map page at and below the selected Wire Obstacle range. Map ranges
above this value will not show the Wire Obstacle Data.
Map
NOTE: This feature is available in software v5.10 and later and requires
the use of obstacle databases that contain wire obstacle data.
Traffic
Grouped
Obstacles
Wire
Obstacle
Selected
Obstacle
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
TAWS
Alert
Services/
Music
Utilities
Detail at
Cursor Point
System
Detail About
the Selected
Obstacle
Figure 9-26 Wire Obstacles
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-24
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Chart Color Scheme
The Chart Color Scheme setting changes the day and night view of the Chart
Overlay colors on the Map page.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 9-27 Chart Color Scheme Settings
Restore Defaults
Charts
Returns values to the original factory settings.
9.1.2.2
Aviation
The Aviation group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you
to customize the display of Active Flight Plan, Active Flight Plan Waypoints,
Airport size range, SafeTaxi information, Runway Extensions, Intersection/NDB
locations, VOR locations, Airspace Detail, and TFR icons on the Map page. The
feature will be shown at map ranges of the selected value and lower. The options
for each feature are shown in the following table. The default values are shown
in bold type.
Feature
Selection
Off, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM,
Airport Range
75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM
Heliports (Optional) Off, On
Off, 1000 ft, 1500 ft, 2500 ft, 0.5 NM, 0.75 NM, 1 NM,
SafeTaxi Diagrams
1.5 NM
Runway Extensions Off, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM
Off, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM,
Intersection Range
10 NM
Off, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM,
NDB Range
7.5 NM, 10 NM
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-25
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Feature
Foreword
Getting
Started
VOR Range
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
VRP Range
Com/Nav
User Wpt Range
FPL
Direct-To
Airway Range
TFR
Restore Defaults
Table 9-6 Map Setup Aviation Options
Proc
NOTE: The term “intersection range” means any GPS waypoint included
in the navigation database, and includes waypoints that may not be
intersections of two VOR radials.
Charts
Wpt Info
Airport Size
Map
Traffic
Small
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Selection
Off, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM, 75 NM,
100 NM
Off, 0.74 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM,
10 NM
Off, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM,
10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM, 75 NM, 100 NM
2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM
Off, On
Returns values to original factory settings
Medium
Services/
Music
Utilities
Large
System
Size Criteria
Longest runway length
is less than 5,000 feet,
unless it has a tower
frequency, in which case
it is a Medium Airport.
Longest runway length
is less than 8,100 feet
but greater than or
equal to 5,000 feet or
less than 8,100 feet and
has a tower frequency.
Longest runway length
is greater than or equal
to 8,100 feet.
Display Criteria
Small airports and heliports are displayed
on the map when the Map Range is less
than or equal to 1/4 times the Airport
Range Setting.
Medium airports are displayed on the
map when the Map Range is less than
or equal to 1/2 times the Airport Range
Setting.
Large airports are displayed on the map
when the Map Range is less than or
equal to the Airport Range Setting.
Table 9-7 Airport Display Range Setting
Messages
NOTE: The Airport Range Setting of "Off" means airports are never displayed.
Heliports are displayed on the map page if the Heliport Display Setting is
"On" and the Map Range is less than or equal to 1/4 times the Airport
Range Setting.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-26
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
9.1.2.3
Land
The Land Data option selects whether detailed land features, such as Freeways,
National Highways, Local Roads, Cities, States/Provinces, and Rivers/Lakes are
displayed. Topo features, traffic, terrain, and obstacles will still be displayed,
even with Land Data turned off. The options for each feature are shown in the
following table. The default values are shown in bold type.
Feature
Selection
Road Detail
None, Least, Less, Normal, More, Most
City Detail
None, Least, Less, Normal, More, Most
State/Province Names Off, On
River/Lake Detail
None, Least, Less, Normal, More, Most
Restore Defaults
Returns values to original factory settings
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Table 9-8 Map Setup Land Options
9.1.2.4
Airspace
The Airspace viewing range options select whether the Airspaces are shown
on the Map and at and below the selected map ranges. The Smart Airspaces
selection filters airspaces to show the ones appropriate for your altitude.
Feature
Selection
Airspace Label Range Off, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM
Smart Airspace
Off, On
All, Below 18000 ft, Below 15000 ft, Below 12000 ft, Below
Show Airspaces
9000 ft, Below 6000 ft, Below 3000 ft
Off, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM,
Class B/TMA Range
75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM
Off, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM,
Class C/TCA Range
75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM
Off, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM,
Class A/D Range
75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM
Off, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM,
Restricted Range
75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM
Off, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM,
MOA (Military) Range
75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM
Off, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM,
Other/ADIZ Range
75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM
Restore Defaults
Returns values to original factory settings
Table 9-9 Map Setup Airspace Options
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-27
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Airspace Labels
NOTE: This feature is available in software v5.10 and later when configured
by the installer.
The Airspace Label feature shows the United States airspace system altitude
limits up to the selected range.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Airspace Labels - On
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 9-28 Display of Airspace Labels
Smart Airspaces
Garmin’s Smart Airspace™ feature aids visual clarity on-screen by deemphasizing airspace that’s well above or below the aircraft’s current altitude.
The vertical separation is 1,000 feet at sea level and the vertical separation will
gradually increase to 2,000 feet until the aircraft reaches 10,000 feet. Anything
above 10,000 feet keeps the 2,000 feet vertical separation.
NOTE: Smart Airspace only changes the depiction of the airspace on the
moving map display. It does not alter the Airspace Alerts that can be set
on the System-Alerts portion of the system.
Weather
Nearest
Smart Airspaces - Off
Smart Airspaces - On
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 9-29 Display of Smart Airspaces (Airspace Borders Grayed)
Appendix
Index
9-28
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
To control the display of European airway airspaces
1. While viewing the Map Setup Airspaces option, touch the
Other/ADIZ Range key and select a value.
2. Select Off for the Other/ADIZ Range to turn off the display of
airway airspaces.
Airway Airspaces - On
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Airway Airspaces - Off
Airway Airspaces - On
Figure 9-30 Selecting the Display of European Airway Airspaces
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-29
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
9.1.2.5
Airway Range
The Airways viewing range option selects whether the Airways are shown on
the Map and at and below the selected map ranges for Low and High Airways.
When Off is selected, the information will not be shown.
1. While viewing the Map function, touch the Menu key.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
2. Touch the Map Setup key and then with the Aviation tab
highlighted drag the list down or use the Down key to show
the Airway Range.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Touch To Select
Airway Range
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 9-31 Map Setup for Airway Range
3. Touch the Airway Range key and select a range.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Selected Airway
Display Range
Utilities
Figure 9-32 Select Airway Display Range
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-30
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
9.1.2.6
Traffic (Optional)
The Traffic group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to
customize the display of traffic on the Map page. The Traffic function requires
the installation of the appropriate traffic device. Only one traffic source can be
configured for the GTN and this traffic source will be overlaid on the main map.
Coverage follows the airplane. In the Navigation Map page setup you can select
the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown. Once outside of the
selected range, traffic will be decluttered. The default values are shown in bold
type.
Traffic Selection
Range
Traffic
Restore Defaults
Display Result
1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM,
15 NM, 25 NM
All Traffic, Alerts & Advisories, Alerts Only
Returns values to original factory settings
Table 9-10 Map Page Traffic Display Options
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-31
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
9.1.2.7
Weather (Optional)
The Weather group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to
customize the overlay of the available weather information on the Map page.
Weather is an optional feature that requires an external weather source, which
must be selected to allow the overlay.
Feature
Weather Source
Cell Movement
METAR
Cloud Tops
Echo Tops
Lightning
Restore Defaults
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Selection
SiriusXM, Connext, or FIS-B
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Returns values to original factory settings
Table 9-11 Map Setup SiriusXM Weather Options
Wpt Info
NOTE: Map overlay keys may remain available even if the information
necessary for the overlay is not available. For example: the Radar overlay
key is available even if the radar is turned off.
Map
Traffic
Feature
Weather Source
METAR
IR Satellite
Lightning
Restore Defaults
Connext Settings
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Selection
SiriusXM, Connext, or FIS-B
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Returns values to original factory settings
Selectable Connext Settings
Table 9-12 Map Setup Connext Weather Options
Utilities
Feature
Weather Source
METAR
Restore Defaults
System
Messages
Symbols
Selection
SiriusXM, Connext, or FIS-B
Off, On
Returns values to original factory settings
Table 9-13 Map Setup FIS-B Weather Options
Appendix
Index
9-32
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
9.1.3
Change User Fields
Foreword
The Change User Fields selection allows you to configure the Data, Function,
and Page field type shown in each of the four corners of the Map page. The
information shown in each field may be selected from a list after Change User
Fields is selected.
1. While viewing the Map page, touch the Menu key.
2. From the Map Menu screen, touch the Change User Fields
key.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch To Select Data Field
(TRK Currently Shown)
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Touch To Select Data Field
(DIS Currently Shown)
Traffic
Touch To Save Any Changes
Terrain
Figure 9-33 Map Data Fields Selection
Weather
NOTE: Map Data Field Types that use the term "Destination" refer to the
missed approach point (if an approach is loaded) or the final airport in the
flight plan.
NOTE: In software v5.13 and earlier, ETE to Destination is not available
when a procedure is loaded and there are waypoints in the Enroute section
of the flightplan.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-33
Index
3. Touch the corner data field key you want to select. Touch the
Data, Function, or Page keys to select the User Field type.
A list of information types will be displayed.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Select Data,
Function, or Page
Field Type List. Touch To
Select Data Field
Slider Indicates More
Selections Available. Press
Finger and Slide To View
More Selections.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Selected Field Type
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 9-34 Map Data Field Type Selections
Map
4. Touch the Up or Down keys or touch the display and drag
your finger to scroll through the list. Touch the desired item
to select it or touch the Back key to cancel selection.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-34
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Map Data Field Type
ACTV WPT - Active Waypoint
B/D APT - BRG/DIS from Dest APT 1
BRG - Bearing to Current Waypoint
DIS - Distance to Current Waypoint
DIS to Dest - Distance to Destination 2
DTK - Desired Track
ESA - Enroute Safe Altitude
ETA - Estimated Time of Arrival
ETA at Dest - ETA at Destination
ETE - Estimated Time Enroute
ETE to Dest - ETE to Destination
Fuel Flow - Total Fuel Flow
GS - GPS Ground Speed
GSL - GPS Altitude
Generic Timer - Timer Display
MSA - Minimum Safe Altitude
OAT (static) - Static Air Temperature
OAT (total) - Total Air Temperature
RAD ALT - Radar Altimeter
Time - Current Time
Time to TOD - Time to Top of Descent
TKE - Track Angle Error
TRK - Track
Trip Timer - Timer Display
VOR/LOC - Tuned VOR/LOC Info
VSR - Vertical Speed Required
Wind - Wind Speed and Direction
XTK - Cross Track Error
OFF - Do Not Display Data Field
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Table 9-14 Map Data Field Types of Information
Traffic
Note 1:
B/D APT is the straight line distance.
Note 2:
Dist to DEST is the distance along the flight plan.
Function Field Type
CDI - Course Deviation Indicator
Flap Override - Flap Override 1
GPWS Inhibit - GPWS Inhibit 1
G/S Inhibit - G/S Inhibit 1
HTAWS RP Mode - HTAWS RP Mode 2
OBS/Suspend/Unsuspend Button
On Scene - "On Scene" Mode Toggle
Weather
Passenger Address - PA Toggle
Playback - Play Last Recording
TAWS Inhibit - TAWS Inhibit
Gen Timer - Generic Timer Control
WX RDR Controls - Weather Radar
Controls
OFF - Do Not Display Data Field
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Table 9-15 Map Function Field Types of Information
Note 1:
With TAWS-A enabled
Note 2:
With HTAWS enabled
Terrain
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-35
Index
Map Page Field Type
Foreword
Blackout Mode
Charts - Charts Page
Flight Plan - Flight Plan Page
Map - Map Page
Nearest - Nearest Page
NEAR APT - Nearest Airport Page
PROC - Procedures Page
Approach - Approach Page
Arrival - Arrival Page
Departure - Departure Page
Backlight - Backlight Page
Services - Services Page
Traffic - Traffic Page
Terrain - Terrain Page
Utilities - Utilities Page
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Checklist - Checklist Page
Fuel PLAN - Fuel Planning Page
SCHED MSG - Scheduled Messages
Trip PLAN - Trip Planning Page
VCALC - VCALC Page
User FREQ - User Frequencies
WPT INFO - Waypoint Information
Weather - Weather Page
CNXT WX - Connext WX Page
FIS-B WX - FIS-B Weather Page
Stormscope - Stormscope Page
WX Radar - Weather Radar Page
SiriusXM WX - Sirius XM WX Page
OFF - Do Not Display Page Field
Table 9-16 Map Page Field Types of Information
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-36
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
9.1.4
Map Detail
Foreword
The Map Detail feature allows four levels of decluttering to remove map
information. Level 0 shows the most detail and level 3 shows the least detail.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
0
1
2
Charts
3
Figure 9-35 Map Detail Levels
Wpt Info
1. While viewing the Map page, touch the Menu key.
2. While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Map Detail scale
and slide your finger to adjust the level. Features marked with
a • are shown at the indicated Map Detail Level.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-37
Index
Foreword
Feature
0
1
2
3
Feature
0
1
2
3
River/Lake Names
•
TRSA
•
•
Getting
Started
Land/Country Text
•
ADIZ
•
•
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Large City
•
Alert Areas
•
•
Medium City
•
Caution Areas
•
•
Small City
•
Danger Areas
•
•
Small Town
•
Warning Areas
•
•
Freeways
•
Large Airports
•
•
•
Highways
•
Medium Airports
•
•
•
Roads
•
Restricted Areas
•
•
•
Railroads
•
Prohibited Areas
•
•
•
Political Boundaries
•
MOAs
•
•
•
User Waypoints
•
•
Runway Labels
•
•
•
VORs
•
•
Lightning Strike Data
•
•
•
NDBs
•
•
NEXRAD Data
•
•
•
Intersections
•
•
Traffic Symbols
•
•
•
Class B Airspace
•
•
Traffic Labels
•
•
•
Class C Airspace
•
•
Water Detail
•
•
•
•
Class D Airspace
•
•
Active FPL Legs
•
•
•
•
•
•
Airways
•
•
Table 9-17 Features Shown at Each Map Detail Level
•
•
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Tower
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-38
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
9.2
Map Panning
Foreword
In the Map Page function, panning allows you to move the map beyond its
current limits without adjusting the map scale. The panning function is selected
by simply touching the Map display. The In and Out keys at the lower right
corner of the page control the map range. Touching the display momentarily
switches the display to Map Pan Mode. While in Map Pan Mode, touch the
display gently and drag your finger to pan around the map.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
1. Touch the Map page display.
Direct-To
Proc
Map Pointer
Location
Selected Item
Aircraft Present
Position
Touch To Step
To Items Near
The Map
Pointer
Touch To Edit FPL
On The Display
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Pan Mode Annunciation and
Bearing and Distance To The Map
Pointer From Present Position
Info On
Selected
Item
Weather
Figure 9-36 Map Panning With Airspace Highlighted
Nearest
NOTE: It is possible that multiple airspaces can be stacked vertically and be
difficult to visually identify them. Touching the Next key will step through
the airpaces.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-39
Index
2. If you touch an item on the display (waypoint, airspace,
obstacle) there may be other items very close that are difficult
to see at a given zoom level. Touch the Next key to annunciate
and highlight the next item. Each touch of the Next key steps
to another item near the Map Pointer.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Next
Nearest Item
Highlighted
Direct-To
Cursor Location
Aircraft Present
Position
Proc
Charts
Touch To Step
To Items Near
The Cursor
Touch To Edit FPL
On The Display
Wpt Info
Info On
Pan Mode Annunciation and Bearing
and Distance To The Cursor From Present Selected
Item
Position And Elevation At The Cursor
Map
Traffic
Figure 9-37 Map Panning With Next Airspace Shown
Terrain
3. Touch the Airspace Info (Item) key for more information
about the selected item. Touch the Back key to return to the
Map Panning display.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-40
Figure 9-38 Map Panning Selected Item Information
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4. While pressing your finger gently against the display, drag your
finger across the display to scroll the display in the direction
of your finger movement. The Map Pointer cross hair location
is based on where your finger touches the display, but after
dragging your finger the Map Pointer will be centered on the
map when your finger is lifted from the display.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Map Pointer
Proc
Pan Mode
Annunciation
Coordinates Of
Map Pointer
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 9-39 Map Panning With Map Pointer
Traffic
NOTE: Pressing the Direct-To key will use the Map Pointer location as the
destination.
Terrain
Weather
5. Touch the Back key to return to the normal map display.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-41
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
9.3
While in the Map page function, several controls are available to manage the
view and display of information. The In and Out keys at the lower right corner
of the page control the map range. Touching the display momentarily switches
the display to Map Pan Mode.
While in any of the Map function pages, touching the display starts Pan
Mode. Options are available to Create a waypoint at the Map Pointer position
and to Graphically Edit Flight Plan.
9.3.1
Pan Map Mode
The Pan Map mode allows you to move the map display to view the
surrounding area.
1. Touch the Map page display.
2. See the description in the Map Panning section for details of
using this feature. Touch the Back key to return to the normal
Map display.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Map Controls
9.3.2
Create Waypoint
Terrain
The Create Waypoint function will create a User Waypoint at the Map Pointer
location when that location is not an already named object, such as an airport
or airspace.
1. In Pan Mode, touch the Create Waypoint key.
Weather
2. Follow the directions in the Waypoint Info section for Creating
User Waypoints.
Traffic
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 9-40 Create User Waypoint While Map Panning
9-42
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
9.3.3
Graphically Edit Flight Plan Mode
The Edit Flight Plan Mode allows making quick changes to the active flight
plan directly on the display. The process is simply touching the display to start
Map Pan Mode, touching the Graphically Edit FPL key, dragging the desired
leg to a new waypoint or airway, and touching the Done key. When graphically
editing the active flight plan leg, the active leg course and TO Waypoint will be
added to the flight plan as a Direct-To. At any point, a step may be removed by
touching the Undo key or the whole process ended by touching the Cancel key.
The Undo key will remove up to nine steps.
NOTE: It is not possible to graphically add an intermediate waypoint
between the current position and a Direct-To waypoint unless that waypoint
is in the flight plan. Garmin recommends deleting any flight plan prior to
graphically editing a Direct-To waypoint.
9.3.3.1
Adding a Waypoint Within an Existing Flight Plan
1. Touch the Map page display. The Map Mode selection keys
will appear. Touch the Graphically Edit FPL key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Active Flight Plan
Traffic
Map Pointer Where
Display Was Touched
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Touch Edit Flight Plan
Key To Change FPL
Services/
Music
Touch To Return To
The Map Display
Utilities
Figure 9-41 Edit Flight Plan Mode
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-43
Index
2. Touch and hold the desired leg of the flight plan.
Foreword
Current Active
FPL Waypoints
Getting
Started
Active Flight Plan Leg
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Intended New Waypoint
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch To Cancel Changes
And Return To Map Display
Proc
Figure 9-42 Select Leg of Flight Plan to Change
Charts
3. Drag the flight plan leg to a new waypoint, or airway, to add
a waypoint, or airway, to the active flight plan. The flight plan
leg being edited will turn cyan.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
New FPL Waypoint
Terrain
Weather
Active Flight Plan Leg
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch To Cancel Changes
And Return To Map Display
Utilities
Figure 9-43 Drag Selected Leg of Flight Plan to New Waypoint
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-44
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4. Touch the Done key. The aircraft will now navigate according
to the new flight plan.
New Active FPL
Foreword
Getting
Started
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
New FPL Waypoint
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch To Accept
Changes To FPL
Touch To Undo
Last Step
Touch To
Cancel Editing
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 9-44 Completed Flight Plan with New Waypoint
NOTE: In software v6.21 and earlier, graphically editing a flight plan cancels
the parallel track function.
Wpt Info
Map
9.3.3.2
9.3.3.3
Adding a Waypoint to the End of an Existing Flight Plan
1. Touch the Map page display. The Map Mode selection keys
will appear. Touch the Graphically Edit FPL key.
2. Touch a waypoint that you want to add to the end of the flight
plan.
3. Touch the Done key to accept the changes and return to the
Map page.
Removing a Waypoint from an Existing Flight Plan
1. Touch the Map page display. The Map Mode selection keys
will appear. Touch the Graphically Edit FPL key.
2. Touch a waypoint, or airway, on the flight plan that you want
to remove.
3. Drag the flight plan line away from the waypoint, or airway,
and release the line. The waypoint, or airway, will be removed
from the flight plan.
4. Touch the Done key to accept the changes and return to the
Map page.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-45
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
9.3.3.4
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Creating a Flight Plan Without an Existing Flight Plan
1. Touch the Map page display. The Map Mode selection keys
will appear. Touch the Graphically Edit FPL key.
2. Touch a waypoint on the map to set the first waypoint in the
flight plan. If there are several nearby waypoints, touch the
desired waypoint to select it.
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch Desired Waypoint
Direct-To
Cluster Of Nearby
Multiple Waypoints
Proc
Figure 9-45 Select the Desired Waypoint From Multiple Waypoints
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
New FPL Waypoint
Weather
Touch To Undo
Last Step
Nearest
Figure 9-46 Start New Flight Plan with Origin Waypoint
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-46
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Touch a waypoint, or airway, on the map for the next waypoint,
or airway, in the flight plan. Continue adding waypoints, or
airways, as needed.
New Active FPL
New FPL Waypoint
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Active Flight
Plan Leg
FPL
Direct-To
Touch To Undo
Last Step
Touch To Accept
Changes To FPL
Touch To
Cancel
Editing
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 9-47 Add New Waypoint to Flight Plan
4. Touch the Done key to accept the changes and return to the
Map page.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-47
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
9.4
CDI (GTN 750 only)
The GTN 750's CDI key is used to select data that is sent from the GPS
or VLOC receiver to the external CDI (or HSI). When the external CDI (or
HSI) is connected to the GPS receiver, “GPS” appears below the CDI key in the
annunciation bar. When the external CDI (or HSI) is being driven by the VLOC
receiver, “VLOC” appears instead.
NOTE: The VLOC receiver must be selected for display on the external CDI/
HSI for approaches which are not approved for GPS. See the ILS example
in the Procedures section for more information.
FPL
Direct-To
NOTE: GPS phase of flight annunciations (LPV, ENR, etc.) are not applicable
to the external CDI (or HSI) when VLOC is active.
Proc
NOTE: The internal on-screen CDI information is based on GPS data and
cannot be used for primary navigation.
Charts
Wpt Info
Traffic
NOTE: If the unit is not configured for a CDI key, then the “activate GPS missed
approach” will only resume automatic waypoint sequencing. The user must
switch to GPS navigation, if desired, by using their external source selection
method (this is typical an EFIS system).
Terrain
1. The navigation source is annunciated under the CDI key.
Map
Weather
Touch CDI Key To Toggle
Navigation Source
Nearest
Navigation Source
Annunciation
Services/
Music
Figure 9-48 Navigation Source Selection
Utilities
2. Touch the CDI key to toggle between sources.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-48
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
9.5
OBS
Foreword
The OBS key is used to select manual or automatic sequencing of waypoints.
Touching this key selects OBS mode, which retains the current “active to”
waypoint as your navigation reference even after passing the waypoint
(i.e., prevents sequencing to the next waypoint). Touching the OBS key again
returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints. Whenever
OBS mode is selected, you may set the desired course To/From a waypoint using
the pop-up window on the GTN 7XX or with the external OBS selector on your
HSI or CDI. For leg types that do not support OBS, this key will be shown as a
SUSP key. This key will then also function as an Unsuspend key for legs that
auto-suspend, such as holds, missed approaches, etc.
NOTE: In dual GTN installations with crossfill on, the OBS course will only
be updated real time on the GTN that is receiving the new OBS course. The
course will be transferred to the other GTN when OBS is exited.
1. Touch the OBS key to enable the OBS function.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
2. Enter the desired OBS heading using the keypad and touch
Enter.
3. The OBS heading will be shown in the flight plan annunciation
above the CDI in the lower portion of the display. The OBS
function annunciation will show.
Next FPL Leg
Runway Extension
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Destination Wpt
Services/
Music
Ownship Position
Utilities
Active FPL Leg
System
OBS Heading
Touch the OBS Key To
Enable OBS Function
OBS Function
Annunciation
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 9-49 OBS Course Selection
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Messages
9-49
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
9.6
Map Symbols
Various symbols are used to distinguish between waypoint types. The
identifiers for any on-screen waypoints can also be displayed. Special-use and
controlled airspace boundaries appear on the map, showing the individual
sectors in the case of Class B, Class C, or Class D airspace. The following symbols
are used to depict the various airports and navaids on the Map Page.
Com/Nav
Symbol
FPL
Direct-To
Description
Airport with hard surface runway(s); Serviced, Primary runway shown
Airport with hard surface runway(s); Non-Serviced, Primary runway
shown
Airport with soft surface runway(s) only, Serviced
Proc
Charts
Airport with soft surface runway(s) only, Non-Serviced
Wpt Info
Unknown Airport
Map
Restricted (Private) Airfield
Traffic
Intersection
Terrain
VOR
Weather
VORTAC
VOR/DME
Nearest
TACAN
Services/
Music
DME
Utilities
NDB
System
Locator Outer Marker
Heliport
Messages
User Waypoint
Symbols
VRP
Appendix
Index
Table 9-18 Map Symbols
9-50
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
9.7
Flight Plan Depiction
Foreword
When a flight plan is present, it will be depicted on the GTN maps.
Flight plan leg colors are used to indicate past, active, or future flight plan
segments. A thin light gray line indicates a previous flight plan segment. A bold
magenta line indicates an active flight plan segment for which the navigator is
providing guidance. A bold white line indicates future flight plan segments.
Missed approach procedures are depicted with a thin white line to indicate that
they are an upcoming segment of the flight plan, but will not become navigable
without the pilot specifically activating the missed approach procedure.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Flight plan labels are white boxes with black borders and black text to
indicate they are fixes in the flight plan. If the waypoint is the active waypoint in
the flight plan, the border and text are magenta.
Direct-To
All holding patterns and procedure turns are depicted with the same
coloration as all other flight plan segments. Entries are depicted with segmented
arrows to indicate which direction in which the course guidance will be given.
This is used for both hold entry and procedure turn course reversals. Once a
hold becomes active the entry guidance is removed from the map and only the
active hold is depicted.
Charts
Headings to fly are depicted as directional arrows with spaces between
them and the label “Vectors” or “MANSEQ” to indicate what the pilot might
expect while flying the heading depicted. “MANSEQ” is “Manual Sequencing”
abbreviated and denotes that the procedure is complete upon reaching that
heading and that no other guidance will be given from the navigator without
pilot interaction.
The following illustrates the flight plan segments as presented on the GTN
maps.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-51
Index
Foreword
GTN provides guidance in the hold at WIGAN intersection.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 9-50 Active Hold
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
In this case the teardrop entry for the hold at WIGAN is being depicted.
Upon reaching the holding fix inbound, the entry arrows will be removed from
the map and the dotted holding pattern will become active with magenta arrows.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 9-51 Holding Pattern Entry
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-52
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
The active flight plan leg is WARIC to WHATE as indicated by the magenta
line to the magenta labeled waypoint.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 9-52 Active and Future Flight Plan Segments
Wpt Info
The active leg is the course to OCITY intersection. After OCITY the flight
plan depicts a turn to 100° for vectors.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 9-53 Active Leg to Vectors
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-53
Index
Foreword
Previous legs are light gray, active leg is magenta.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 9-54 Exiting the Hold
Wpt Info
Map
The leg outbound from LSO is active and indicates a procedure turn. When
inbound from the procedure turn the inbound segment will become active and
LSO will still be the active waypoint.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 9-55 Active Procedure Turn
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-54
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
A flight plan along T295 with previous, the active leg and the future legs
depicted.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 9-56 Past, Active and Future Flight Plan Segments
Wpt Info
Map
Active Heading Leg
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 9-57 Active Heading Leg (Vectors)
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
9-55
Index
Foreword
Active Flight Plan Leg
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 9-58 Active Flight Plan Leg
Wpt Info
The active flight plan leg inbound to a holding pattern at WIGAN intersection.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 9-59 Active Flight Plan Leg Prior to Holding Pattern
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-56
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10
TRAFFIC
Foreword
The Traffic function displays available traffic information depending on
your installed equipment to assist in situational awareness. The features and
operation depend on the capabilities and options of each type of traffic system.
NOTE: The reference point for the ownship is the nose of the ownship
aircraft symbol (either miniature aircraft or triangle). The reference point
for all traffic icons is the center of the depicted traffic.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
1. From the Home page, touch the Traffic key.
2. Use the active areas on the display and the Menu options to
set up the Traffic display.
10.1
Getting
Started
Traffic Pop-Up
When the GTN 7XX is displaying any page (other than the Traffic page) and
a traffic alert becomes active, the Traffic Warning pop-up will be displayed.
NOTE: The traffic pop-up will not appear when your aircraft is on the
ground.
1. The traffic pop-up will appear on pages other than the Traffic
page when a traffic alert occurs.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Traffic Location
Ownship Position
Nearest
Touch To Close
Pop-Up
Traffic Alert
Annunciation
Touch To Go To
Traffic Page
Traffic Alert
Annunciation
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 10-1 Traffic Pop-Up On the Map Page
Messages
2. Touch the Go to Traffic key to view the Traffic page.
OR
3. Touch the Close key to close the pop-up. The pop-up will
return if the traffic alert persists.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-1
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
10.2
Traffic Test
The Traffic Test function is only available on some traffic systems. The aircraft
must be on the ground and Traffic Status must be in Standby.
1. Touch the Test key to activate the test function in the Traffic
equipment.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Test Traffic Status
Wpt Info
Touch For Traffic Test
While In Standby
Traffic Status
Map
Figure 10-2 Traffic Test Mode
Traffic
2. The unit will return to normal operation mode after the test
process is successfully completed.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.3
TIS (Optional)
Foreword
WARNING: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory
use only. TIS is intended to help the pilot locate traffic visually. It is the
responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of
a TIS-capable terminal radar site. Aircraft without an operating transponder
are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS. Aircraft without
altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data
or climb/descent indication.
NOTE: TIS and Traffic Advisory System (TAS) may not both be configured
at the same time.
NOTE: GDL 88 equipped aircraft only: When the radio tower symbol is
crossed out, the aircraft is not a participant in the TIS-B system – i. e., not
visible to other TIS-B clients. The GDL 88 will, however, continue to receive
available TIS-B and FIS-B ground station up-links and continue to display
TIS-B and FIS-B data along with available ADS-B and ADS-R data.
NOTE: Except for GDL 88 or GTX 345 equipped aircraft, TIS, and Traffic
Advisory System (TAS) may not both be displayed at the same time.
NOTE: More information is available about the GDL 88 in the "Garmin
GDL 88 ADS-B Transceiver Pilot’s Guide" and the GTX 345 in the "Garmin
GTX 335/345 Pilot's Guide."
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and
avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the Mode S transponder for the traffic data
link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated every
five seconds. The GTN 7XX displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5 NM
radius, from 3000 feet below to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft.
7.0 NM
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
3,500 ft
System
Messages
3,000 ft
Symbols
Figure 10-3 TIS Coverage Volume (not to scale)
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
10-3
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
10.3.1
TIS Symbology
Traffic is displayed according to TCAS symbology using three different
symbols.
TIS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Com/Nav
Traffic Advisory (TA)
FPL
Direct-To
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Table 10-1 TIS Traffic Symbols
Traffic Advisories (TA) alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When traffic meets
the advisory criteria for the TA, a solid yellow circle symbol is generated. A
Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an
intruding aircraft is at greater than ±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is
beyond five NM. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is
indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of
the intruder.
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic
is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic information for which TIS is unable to
determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
Traffic Page or in a banner on maps other than the Traffic Map Page on which
traffic can be displayed.
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder
aircraft is displayed above/below the traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the
other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation appears
above the traffic symbol with a "+" sign; if below, the altitude separation appears
below. Altitude trend is displayed as an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than
500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic symbols for
aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation
or climb/descent information.
Always remember that TIS cannot alert you to the presence of aircraft that
are not equipped with transponders, nor can it alert you to aircraft that may be
nearby, but obscured from the ground surveillance radar by interfering terrain.
10-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.3.2
Traffic Page
Foreword
The Traffic Map Page is configured to show surrounding TIS traffic data in
relation to the aircraft’s current position and altitude, without clutter from the
basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is
no valid heading.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map
Page. When the aircraft is on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby
Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to Operating
Mode and the GTN 7XX begins to display traffic information.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Altitude Filter
Normal
Above
Below
Unrestricted
TRF Status
Wpt Info
Operate
Standby
Map
Traffic
Figure 10-4 Traffic Page Functional Diagram
Heading
Annunciation
Non-Threat
Traffic
Ownship
Position
Proximity
Advisory, 1200
ft Above and
Climbing
Traffic Direction
Of Travel
Range Ring
Radius
Range Rings
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Traffic Status Key
(Operate/Standby)
Altitude Filter
System
Messages
Figure 10-5 Traffic Page
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-5
Index
Foreword
10.3.3
Displaying Traffic on the Traffic Page
1. From the Home page, touch the Traffic key.
Getting
Started
2. Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
3. Touch the Traffic Status key to toggle between Operate and
Standby mode.
Com/Nav
FPL
10.3.4
Altitude Display
1. While viewing the Traffic page, touch the Operate key to begin
displaying traffic. “Operate” is displayed in the Traffic Status
field.
Direct-To
Proc
2. The Altitude Filter limits the traffic displayed to the Below,
Normal, Above or Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the
“Displayed Traffic Range” table. The filter altitudes are relative
to ownship altitude. Touch the Altitude Filter key to change
the altitude filter value. Select the desired altitude filter by
touching the BELOW, NORMAL, ABOVE, or UNRESTRICTED
keys. The selection is displayed in the Altitude mode field.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Selected Altitude Filter
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 10-6 Traffic Altitude Filter Page
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Displayed Traffic Range
-9,900 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 9,900 ft
All Traffic Shown
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Table 10-2 Displayed Traffic Range
10.3.5
Com/Nav
TIS Limitations
FPL
NOTE: This section on TIS Limitations is not comprehensive. Garmin
recommends the user review the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical
Information Manual, Section 1-3-5.
TIS is NOT intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not
relieve the pilot of responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. TIS should not
be used for avoidance maneuvers during IMC or other times when there is no
visual contact with the intruder aircraft. TIS is intended only to assist in visual
acquisition of other aircraft in VMC. No recommended avoidance maneuvers
are provided for, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or
TIS advisory.
While TIS is a useful aid to visual traffic avoidance, it has some system
limitations that must be fully understood to ensure proper use. Many of these
limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance. In other words, the
information provided by TIS will be no better than that provided to ATC. TIS
will only display aircraft with operating transponders installed.
TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode S radar, which is a “secondary
surveillance” radar similar to the Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System
(ATCRBS). TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering.
TIS is dependent on two-way, “line-of-sight” communication between the
aircraft and the Mode S radar. Whenever the structure of the client aircraft
comes between the transponder antenna (usually located on the underside of
the aircraft) and the ground-based radar antenna, the signal may be temporarily
interrupted. Other limitations and anomalies associated with TIS are described
in the AIM, Section 4-5-6.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-7
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Garmin is not responsible for Mode S
geographical coverage. Operation of the
ground stations is the responsibility of the
FAA. Refer to the Aeronautical Information
Manual for a Terminal Mode S Radar Site Map
covering the U.S.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
NOTE: TIS will be unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the U.S.,
particularly in mountainous regions. Also, when flying near the “floor” of
radar coverage in a particular area, intruders below the client aircraft may
not be detected by TIS.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
TIS information is collected one radar scan prior to the scan during which
the uplink occurs. Therefore, the surveillance information is approximately
five seconds old. In order to present the intruders in a “real time” position,
the TIS ground station uses a “predictive algorithm” in its tracking software.
This algorithm uses track history data to extrapolate intruders to their expected
positions consistent with the time of display in the cockpit. Occasionally, aircraft
maneuvering will cause this algorithm to induce errors in the display. These
errors primarily affect relative bearing information and traffic target track vector
(it will lag); intruder distance and altitude will remain relatively accurate and
may be used to assist in “see and avoid.” Some of the more common examples
of these errors follow:
• When client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the
tracking algorithm may report incorrect horizontal position until the
maneuvering aircraft stabilizes.
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that crosses the client aircraft
course at a shallow angle (either overtaking or head on) and either aircraft
abruptly changes course within 0.25 NM, TIS may display the intruder on
the opposite side of the client than it actually is.
These are relatively rare occurrences and will be corrected in a few
radar scans once the course has stabilized.
10-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.3.6
TIS Alerts
Foreword
When the number of Traffic Advisories (TAs) on the Traffic Map Page
increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the bottom of the display, flashing for
5 seconds and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft,
the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only when the number of TAs
increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual
annunciation are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display,
no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second TA appears on the
display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently
increases, another voice alert is generated.
A “Traffic Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service
becomes unavailable or is out of range.
Traffic may not be displayed in the radar coverage area due to the following:
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the
TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
Terrain
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and
out of range of an adjacent site.
Weather
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the
coverage extends from about 3000 feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain
and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in
all directions.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-9
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
10.3.7
TIS System Status
The GTN 7XX performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If
TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby Mode on the ground or Operating
Mode in the air. If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page. Contact a service center or Garmin
dealer for corrective action for a failure message.
Traffic Page
Annunciation
No Data
FPL
Direct-To
Failed
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Data is not being received from the transponder
The transponder has failed
Unavailable
Charts
Description
TIS is unavailable or out of range
Table 10-3 TIS Failure Annunciations
The Traffic mode is annunciated in the bottom left corner of the Traffic Page.
When the aircraft is on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode.
Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic
information is displayed. The mode can be changed manually using the
Traffic Status key.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Traffic
Status
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic On Map Page)
TIS Operating
Operate
TIS Standby
Standby
TIS Failed*
TIS Fail
Traffic Display
Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
Utilities
System
Messages
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 10-4 TIS Modes Shown on the Map Page
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
The annunciations that indicate the status of traffic information appear in a
banner at the bottom center of maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status
Banner
Annunciation
Foreword
Getting
Started
Description
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last
message).
Traffic Coast 9 SEC
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when
this message is displayed.
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to
60 seconds since last message).
Traffic Removed
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is
not displayed.
Table 10-5 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-11
Index
Foreword
10.4
NOTE: TIS and Traffic Advisory System (TAS) may not both be configured
at the same time.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
TAS data comes from a TAS unit such as a Garmin GTS 800 or 820, Skywatch
497, KTA 810, or other unit.
Refer to the appropriate Traffic Advisory System’s Pilot’s Guides for a detailed
discussion of the respective traffic advisory system.
The type of traffic systems that is installed is described by the Traffic Page
keys. If a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is configured, a Traffic Mode and
Altitude Filter key will be displayed.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems
require transponders of other aircraft to respond to system interrogations.
If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due to phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may
be displayed intermittently, or not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting
capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent
indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
WARNING: The Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is intended for advisory use
only to aid the pilot in visually acquiring traffic. No avoidance maneuvers
should be based solely upon TAS traffic information. It is the responsibility
of the pilot in command to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
TAS (Optional)
A Traffic Advisory System (TAS) enhances flight crew situational awareness
by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The TAS
also provides visual and aural traffic alerts including voice announcements to
assist in visually acquiring traffic.
When the TAS is in Operating Mode, the unit interrogates the transponders
of intruding aircraft while monitoring transponder replies. The TAS uses this
information to derive the distance, relative bearing, and if reported, the altitude
and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The TAS then
calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of
Approach (CPA). If the closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory
(TA), visual and aural alerting is provided.
Appendix
Index
10-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.4.1
TAS Symbology
Foreword
Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance
of other aircraft. TAS uses an on-board interrogator-processor to detect traffic.
Only aircraft with operating transponders will be detected. Traffic is displayed
according to TCAS symbology using four different symbols.
TAS Symbol
Description
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Non-Threat Traffic
(intruder is beyond 5 NM and greater than 1,200 ft
vertical separation)
Proximity Advisory (PA)
(intruder is within 5 NM and less than 1,200 ft vertical
separation)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
(closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA
criteria)
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Traffic
Table 10-6 TAS Intruder Symbol Description
Terrain
Relative Altitude (1200 ft Above)
Non-Threat Traffic
Getting
Started
Vertical Trend Arrow (Climbing)
Weather
Figure 10-7 Intruder Type, Altitude, and Vertical Trend
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-13
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
10.4.2
Displaying and Operating Traffic (TAS Systems)
The unit must be in Operating mode for traffic to be displayed. The ability to
switch from Standby to Operating mode on the ground is especially useful for
scanning the airspace around the airport before takeoff.
Heading
Annunciation
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Ownship
Position
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Traffic
Proximity
Advisory
Non-Threat
Traffic
Range Rings
Range Ring Distance
Traffic Status Key
(Operate/Standby)
Altitude Filter
Wpt Info
Figure 10-8 Traffic Page
Map
10.4.2.1
Traffic
2. Confirm TAS is in Operating Mode.
Terrain
Weather
3. Touch the Traffic Status key to toggle between Operate and
Standby mode.
Nearest
4. The Altitude Filter limits the traffic displayed to the Below,
Normal, Above or Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the
“Displayed Traffic Range” table. The filter altitudes are relative
to ownship altitude. Touch the Altitude Filter key to change
the altitude filter value.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Switching from Standby Mode to Operating Mode
1. From the Home page, touch the Traffic key.
NOTE: Not all TAS systems can be set to “Standby” mode while in the air.
The Traffic Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s
current position and altitude without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is
always heading up unless no valid heading is received. The Traffic Status is
annunciated in the lower left corner and the Altitude Filter is annunciated in the
lower right corner.
10-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.4.2.2
Range Ring
Touching the In and Out keys will zoom in and out in preset steps depending
on the installed equipment as shown in the following table.
Traffic Device
Map Ranges
Garmin GTS 800, Skywatch (SKY497/ 2 NM, 6 NM, 12 NM
SKY889)
Garmin GTS 820 and 850, Honeywell 2 NM, 6 NM, 12 NM, 24 NM, 40 NM
KTA 810 TAS, KTA 910 TAS, KMH
820 IHAS, KMH 920 IHAS, and
Avidyne TAS 620 (Ryan 9900BX)
Table 10-7 Available Traffic Range Ring Steps
10.4.3
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Altitude Display
1. While viewing the Traffic page, touch the Traffic Status key
to begin displaying traffic. “TAS OPERATING” is displayed in
the Traffic mode field.
2. Touch the Altitude Filter key to change the altitude filter
value. The filter altitudes are relative to ownship altitude. Select
the desired altitude filter by touching the BELOW, NORMAL,
ABOVE, or UNRESTRICTED keys. The selection is displayed
in the Altitude mode field.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Selected Altitude Filter
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 10-9 Traffic Altitude Filter Page
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-15
Index
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Table 10-8 Displayed Traffic Range
Com/Nav
FPL
10.4.4
Traffic System Status
NOTE: Refer to the equipment documentation for information on the
self-test and operating modes.
Direct-To
Proc
Displayed Traffic Range
-9,900 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 9,900 ft
All Traffic Shown
The Traffic Status is indicated in the lower left corner of the Traffic Page.
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Page)
TAS Self-test Initiated
Test
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
TAS Operating
Operate
TAS Standby
Standby
TAS Failed
TAS Fail
Traffic Display
Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Table 10-9 TAS Modes
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the
center of the Traffic Page.
Traffic Page
Annunciation
No Data
System
Messages
Data Failed
Symbols
Failed
Appendix
Index
Description
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 10-10 TAS Failure Annunciations
10-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.5
ADS-B Traffic
ADS-B technology is an important part of the FAA’s Next Generation Air
Transportation System (NextGen), allowing for enhanced safety, efficiency, and
the ability of the system to handle greater numbers of aircraft. ADS-B In allows
a properly-equipped aircraft to access FAA broadcast services such as TIS-B and
FIS-B. With ADS-B Out, the avionics transmit an aircraft’s precise location, as
well as specific information about that aircraft, to ground stations and other
aircraft.
If more than one target is occupying the same area of the screen, the GTN
will combine the two traffic targets into one traffic group. The group symbol
maintains the iconology of the highest priority traffic target in the group and
indicates a grouped symbol by the presence of an asterisk to the left of the
grouped traffic target.
Traffic targets displayed on the dedicated traffic page may be selected in
order to obtain additional information about a traffic target or to view all targets
in a grouped target. When a grouped target is selected, the Next key on the
dedicated traffic page will cycle through all targets located in close proximity to
where the screen has been touched.
Touch Icon For Info
ADS-B and TCAS
Status and Altitude
Filter
Traffic Motion
Vector
Alerted Target,
1200 ft Above and
Climbing
Map
Orientation
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch For
Next Target
Nearest
Ownship
Icon
Selected Vector
Motion and Duration
Touch To View
Traffic Menu
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 10-10 ADS-B Traffic Page
NOTE: The “Next” key on the dedicated traffic page will cycle through
all targets located in close proximity to where the pilot has touched the
screen.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Getting
Started
Selected
Traffic Info
Range Rings
Range Ring
Radius
Foreword
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-17
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Symbol
Foreword
Getting
Started
Description
Basic Non-Directional Traffic
Basic Directional Traffic
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Basic Off-scale Selected Traffic
Com/Nav
Proximate Non-Directional Traffic
FPL
Proximate Directional Traffic
Direct-To
Proximate Off-scale Selected Traffic
Proc
Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Charts
Off-Scale Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Wpt Info
Directional Alerted Traffic
Map
Off-Scale Directional Alerted Traffic
Traffic
Non-Directional Surface Vehicle
Terrain
Directional Surface Vehicle
Weather
Table 10-11 ADS-B Traffic Symbols
Nearest
NOTE: Color of basic and proximate traffic is dependent on configuration
(cyan or white) and airborne/on-ground status of target (target is brown
when on the ground, see the surface vehicles).
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.5.1
Traffic Applications - SURF, AIRB, etc.
Foreword
The GTN ADS-B traffic display is capable of running in two “modes:”
Airborne Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface Situation Awareness (SURF).
AIRB is in operation in the en route environment, outside of five NM from
and 1,500 feet above the nearest airport.
SURF is in operation within the terminal environment (within five NM and
less than 1,500 feet above field elevation). When SURF is running, and the
zoom scale on the traffic display is less than two NM, the airport environment
(including taxiways and runways) is displayed in addition to traffic. This is to
aid in situational awareness of runway occupancy/availability, etc.
Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and
TIS-B, all traffic targets may not be depicted on the traffic display. Because higher
data precision is required for display in the SURF environment, some targets
eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while SURF is active. Individual eligibility
for AIRB and SURF is depicted in the selected traffic data on the traffic page.
10.5.2
ADS-B Traffic Menu
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
The Traffic Menu allows control of the traffic information display.
Traffic
Select TCAS Status:
Operate and Standby
Select ADS-B Status:
Off, Surface, or
Airborne
Touch To Perform
Traffic Test
Select Altitude Filter:
Normal, Above, Below,
Unrestricted
Select Motion Vector:
Absolute, Relative, Off
Select Vector Duration:
30 sec, 1 min, 2 min,
5 min
Figure 10-11 ADS-B Traffic Menu
10.5.2.1
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
ADS-B Status
ADS-B Status displays the current status of traffic application: Off, Surface,
or Airborne.
Touch the ADS-B Status key to toggle the ADS-B Status.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-19
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
10.5.2.2
TCAS Status
This shows the current status of the TCAS system. The modes reported by
the traffic device are "Operate" while in the air and "Standby" while on the
ground. This control allows the pilot to manually select the TCAS Status.
Touch the TCAS Status key to toggle the TCAS Status.
10.5.2.3 Test
The Traffic Test function is only available on some TAS traffic systems. The
aircraft must be on the ground and traffic system must be in Standby.
1. Touch the Test key to activate the test function in the Traffic
equipment.
2. The unit will return to normal operation mode after the test
process is successfully completed.
10.5.2.4 Motion Vector
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the
traffic targets depict the target reported track and speed over the ground. When
Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic targets
display how the traffic target is moving relative to your aircraft. These vectors are
calculated using the traffic targets track and ground speed and your aircraft’s track
and ground speed. These two values are combined to depict where the traffic target
is moving purely with respect to your aircraft and give a forecast of where the traffic
target will be, relative to your aircraft, in the near future.
Selected Vector Type
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 10-12 Traffic Motion Vector Type Selection
Messages
NOTE: Absolute motion vectors are colored either white or cyan. Relative
motion vectors are always green. The annunciation on the bottom of the
dedicated traffic page indicates which vector type is selected and their length.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
* Indicates Multiple Targets. Touch
NEXT To View Each Target. Traffic Motion Vector (White)
Foreword
Map
Orientation
ADS-B and TCAS
Status and Altitude
Filter
Selected
Traffic Info
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch For
Next Target
Proximate
Non-Directional
Traffic
3000 ft Below and
Descending
Range Ring
Radius
Getting
Started
Ownship
Icon
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Selected Vector
Motion and Duration
Touch To View
Traffic Menu
Proc
Charts
Figure 10-13 Absolute Motion (White Vectors)
* Indicates Multiple Targets. Touch
NEXT To View Each Target.
ADS-B and TCAS
Status and Altitude
Filter
Traffic Motion
Vector (Green)
Wpt Info
Map
Orientation
Selected
Traffic Info
Touch For
Next Target
Proximate
Non-Directional
Traffic
Ownship
Icon
Range Ring
Radius
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Selected Vector
Motion and Duration
Touch To View
Traffic Menu
Utilities
System
Figure 10-14 Relative Motion (Green Vectors)
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-21
Index
Target Motion Vector
Foreword
Motion Vector Target
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Ownship Icon
Proc
Ownship Icon
Figure 10-15 Comparison of Absolute and Relative Motion Vectors With a Single Target
Charts
Target
Motion Vector
Motion Vector
Target
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Target Motion
Vector
Nearest
Services/
Music
Ownship Icon
Target
Motion
Vector
Ownship Icon
Figure 10-16 Comparison of Absolute and Relative Motion Vectors With a Two Targets
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-22
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.5.2.5
Vector Duration
The Vector Duration selection sets the time that the vector will show the
calculated distance and direction of the traffic target. A longer duration will
result in a longer vector.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Selected Vector Duration
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 10-17 Traffic Motion Vector Duration Selection
10.5.2.6
Charts
Altitude Filter
1. The Altitude Filter limits the traffic displayed to the Below,
Normal, Above or Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the
“Displayed Traffic Range” table. The filter altitudes are relative
to ownship altitude. Touch the Altitude Filter key to change
the altitude filter value.
2. Select the desired altitude filter by touching the BELOW,
NORMAL, ABOVE, or UNRESTRICTED keys. The selection
is displayed in the Altitude mode field.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Selected Altitude Filter
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 10-18 Traffic Altitude Filter Selection
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-23
Index
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Table 10-12 Displayed Traffic Range
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
10.5.2.7
1. While viewing the Traffic page, touch the Menu key.
2. Touch the On Scene key to enable/disable On Scene mode.
Wpt Info
10.5.3
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Rotorcraft Traffic Page Orientation
NOTE: Rotorcraft Traffic Page Orientation functionality is available in
software v5.12 or later.
Traffic
Terrain
On Scene Mode
When a GDL 88 (with software v3.00, or later) or GTX 345 is installed with
a GTN in a helicopter, the GTN provides controls for enabling/disabling “On
Scene” mode. “On Scene” mode decreases traffic alerts when operating near
other helicopters (e.g., news reporting).
Charts
Map
Displayed Traffic Range
-9,900 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 9,900 ft
All Traffic Shown
When flying at low speeds in a helicopter, heading may not always be closely
aligned with track (it could easily be up to 180 degrees different). If the GTN is
interfaced with a heading source, the ADS-B traffic page will remain fixed with
the ownship heading pointed up. However, if heading is not being received by
the GTN, the display of ADS-B traffic will be unavailable.
When one of the following conditions is true, the ADS-B traffic page will be
unavailable, and a "Display Unavailable" banner will be displayed.
• Ownship directionality is invalid (no valid heading or track)
• GPS ground speed is less than 15 knots and ownship heading is not
available
While the traffic display is unavailable due to these conditions, traffic alerts
will be provided in a non-bearing textual form at the top of the traffic page.
Appendix
Index
10-24
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.6
RYAN TCAD 9900BX with the GDL 88
Foreword
NOTE: When a TCAD is connected to a GTX 345, the available controls
will appear as described for a TCAS in section 10.5.2.
Ryan TCAD is a system that provides audio and visual alerts for traffic near
your aircraft. The information from this system can be interfaced through the
GTN series. Operating instructions and details on the modes of operation are
described in the Ryan TCAD operator’s handbooks.
•
•
•
•
TCAS-like symbols are used in the 9900BX.
Altitude modes are available (normal, look up, look down, unrestricted).
Ranges are manually controlled for the current shield.
Traffic display range selections:
-
10.6.1
Ryan 9900BX — 1 NM, 2 NM, 2 and 6 NM, 6 and
12 NM, and 12 and 24 NM.
Ryan TCAD Description
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
NOTE: Refer to the Ryan TCAD Pilot’s Guide for a detailed description of
the Ryan TCAD System.
The Ryan TCAD (Traffic and Collision Alert Device) is an on-board air
traffic display used to identify potential collision threats. TCAD computes
relative altitude and range of threats from nearby Mode C and Mode
S-equipped aircraft. TCAD will not detect aircraft without operating
transponders or those that are beyond radar coverage. TCAD, within defined
limits, creates a “shield” of airspace around the aircraft that detected traffic
cannot penetrate without triggering an alert.
TA: Traffic Advisory. This is traffic with 500 feet, or less, of altitude separation
that is converging or maintaining altitude separation.
PA: Proximity Advisory. This is traffic with 500 feet of altitude separation that
is not a TA.
TRFC: Other traffic.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-25
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch Icon For Info
ADS-B and TCAD
Status and Altitude
Filter
Direct-To
Proc
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Touch For
Next Target
Traffic Motion
Vector
Ownship
Icon
Range Ring
Radius
Selected Vector
Motion and Duration
Traffic
Annunciation
Figure 10-19 Traffic Page for Ryan TCAD with GDL 88
Charts
Wpt Info
Selected
Traffic Info
Alerted Target,
1200 ft Above and
Climbing
FPL
10.6.2
Map
Orientation
Touch To View
Traffic Menu
Altitude Mode
The GDL 88 has four altitude display modes: Normal (±2,700 feet, Above
(-2,700 feet to +9,000 feet), Below (-9,000 feet to +2,700 feet), and Unrestricted
(±9,900 feet). The GDL 88 continues to track up to 30 intruder aircraft within its
maximum surveillance range, regardless of the altitude display mode selected.
The selected altitude display mode is displayed in the upper left-hand corner
of the Traffic page.
The Altitude Filter limits the traffic displayed to the Below,
Normal, Above or Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the
“Displayed Traffic Range” table. The filter altitudes are relative
to ownship altitude. While viewing the Traffic page, touch the
Altitude Filter key to change the altitude filter value. Select
the desired altitude filter by touching the BELOW, NORMAL,
ABOVE, or UNRESTRICTED keys. The selection is displayed
in the Altitude mode field.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-26
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Selected Altitude Filter
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Figure 10-20 Traffic Altitude Filter Selection
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Displayed Traffic Range
-9,900 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 9,900 ft
All Traffic Shown
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Table 10-13 Displayed Traffic Range
10.6.3
TCAD Control Menu
Map
The TCAD Control Menu allows control over the settings for the TCAD
Traffic display.
Traffic
Terrain
Select TCAD Control Menu
Weather
Nearest
Figure 10-21 TCAD Traffic Menu
1. While viewing the Traffic menu, touch the TCAD Control key.
Select Field Elevation
Set Traffic Audio
Volume
Activate
Operation
Utilities
Select Local Baro
Select Approach
Mode: Set,
Armed, or Active
Select Ground Mode
2. Touch the desired key from the menu to make any settings.
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 10-22 TCAD Control Menu
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Services/
Music
10-27
Appendix
Index
Foreword
10.6.3.1
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Traffic Audio
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Traffic
Audio key.
Touch To Lower
The Volume
Touch To Raise
The Volume
Com/Nav
Bar Graph Showing Volume Level
FPL
Figure 10-23 TCAD Traffic
2. Touch the arrow keys to raise or lower the TCAD Traffic Audio
level. The selected volume will be shown as a percentage value
and graphically with a bar graph.
Direct-To
Proc
3. Touch the Back key to return to the TCAD Control menu.
Charts
Wpt Info
10.6.3.2
Map
Traffic
Field Elevation
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Field
Elevation key.
Touch To Automatically
Select The Destination
Airport Field Elevation
Touch To Manually
Set Field Elevation
Terrain
Figure 10-24 TCAD Traffic Field Elevation Selection
Weather
2. With the Use DEST APT key deactivated (no green bar), touch
the Field Elevation key to manually select the Field Elevation
for traffic reporting. Use the keypad to select the elevation
value.
Nearest
Services/
Music
3. Touch the Enter key to accept the selected value. The selected
value will be shown in the Field Elevation key.
Utilities
4. Touch the Use DEST APT key to automatically use the field
elevation of the destination airport of the active flight plan for
traffic reporting.
System
Messages
NOTE: Activating the Use DEST APT feature automatically uses the
elevation for the current destination airport for the TCAD. If no destination
airport is present in the GTN system, the TCAD will not receive a field
elevation and therefore not automatically enter approach mode.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-28
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.6.3.3
10.6.3.4
10.6.3.5
10.6.3.6
Baro
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the BARO key
to manually select the barometric pressure.
2. Use the keypad to select the barometric pressure value.
3. Touch the Enter key to accept the selected value. The selected
value will be shown in the BARO key.
Operate
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Operate
key to activate TCAD traffic.
2. Touching the Operate key toggles TCAD traffic operation on
and off.
Ground Mode
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Ground
key to activate Ground Mode TCAD traffic.
2. Touching the Ground key toggles Ground Mode on and off.
Approach Mode
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Approach
key to activate Approach Mode TCAD traffic.
2. Touching the Approach key toggles Approach Mode on and
off.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-29
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
10.7
TCAD 9900B Operation
The TCAD 9900B provides a passive system that uses transponder replies
from other aircraft to acquire traffic information.
Map
Orientation
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Altitude Separation
900 Feet, Closing
Traffic Advisory
Altitude Separation 0
Feet, Steady Altitude
Separation
Traffic
Terrain
Ownship
Icon
Range Ring
Radius
Touch To Select
Barometric Pressure
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Advisory
Separation
100 Feet,
Opening
Touch To Select
Active Shield
Touch To View
Traffic Menu
Figure 10-25 Traffic Page for Ryan TCAD 9900B
Symbol
Imminent Traffic
Non-Imminent
Traffic
(Traffic within ±500 feet
AND 1.0 NM; OR no altitude
AND within 1.0 NM)
Description
Weather
Traffic Closing Vertically
Nearest
Traffic Diverging Vertically
Traffic not Closing or Diverging
Vertically
Services/
Music
Table 10-14 9900B TCAD Symbols
Utilities
System
10.7.1
Select Local Barometric Pressure
1. While viewing the TCAD display, touch the Baro key to select
the local barometric pressure.
Messages
2. Use the keypad to select the values and touch Enter to save
the values.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-30
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.7.2
Select Active Shield
1. While viewing the TCAD display, touch the Active Shield
key to select the Active Shield values (Departure, Enroute, or
Ground).
2. Touch the desired setting to save the values.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
10.7.3
TCAD 9900B Traffic Menu
The TCAD 9900B Menu allows control over the settings for the TCAD Traffic
display.
1. While viewing the Traffic page, touch the Menu key.
Select Approach
Mode: Set,
Armed, or Active
Set Traffic Audio
Volume
Select Shield Setup
2. Touch the desired key from the menu to make any settings.
Traffic Audio
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Traffic
Audio key.
Touch To Lower
The Volume
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 10-26 TCAD 9900B Traffic Menu
10.7.3.1
FPL
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch To Raise
The Volume
Nearest
Bar Graph Showing Volume Level
Services/
Music
Figure 10-27 TCAD Traffic Audio
2. Touch the arrow keys to raise or lower the TCAD Traffic Audio
level. The selected volume will be shown as a percentage value
and graphically with a bar graph.
3. Touch the Back key to return to the TCAD Control menu.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-31
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
10.7.3.2
The Shield Setup function allows you to select the Shield Type (mode of
operation) and the size of the shield volume that will provide alerts when
entered by aircraft.
Approach Shield Type
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Shield Type
key and touch the Approach Shield Type.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Shield Setup
Touch To Select
Shield Type:
Approach or
Standard
Touch To Automatically
Select The Destination
Airport Field Elevation
Touch To Manually
Set Field Elevation
Charts
Figure 10-28 TCAD 9900B Shield Setup for Approach
Wpt Info
2. Touch the Field Elevation key.
3. With the Use DEST APT key deactivated (no green bar), touch
the Field Elevation key to manually select the Field Elevation
for traffic reporting. Use the keypad to select the elevation
value.
Map
Traffic
4. Touch the Enter key to accept the selected value. The selected
value will be shown in the Field Elevation key.
Terrain
Weather
5. Touch the Use DEST APT key to automatically use the field
elevation of the destination airport of the active flight plan for
traffic reporting.
Nearest
Services/
Music
NOTE: Activating the Use DEST APT feature automatically uses the
elevation for the current destination airport for the TCAD. If no destination
airport is present in the GTN system, the TCAD will not receive a field
elevation and therefore not automatically enter approach mode.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-32
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
En Route, Standard, or Terminal Shield Type
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Shield Type
key and touch the desired Shield Type: Enroute, Standard, or
Terminal.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Select
Shield Type:
Approach or
Standard
Com/Nav
Touch To Manually
Set Shield Height
Touch To Shield Range
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 10-29 TCAD 9900B Shield Setup for En Route, Standard, and Terminal
2. Touch the Shield Height key and use the keypad to select
the Shield Height value. The selected value will be shown in
the Shield Range key.
3. Touch the Shield Range key and use the keypad to select
the Shield Range value. The selected value will be shown in
the Shield Range key.
10.7.3.3
Approach Mode
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Approach
key to activate Approach Mode TCAD traffic.
2. Touching the Approach key toggles Approach Mode between
Set, Armed, or Active.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-33
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
10.8
The TCAD 9900BX provides an active system that interrogates other aircraft
to acquire traffic information.
Map
Orientation
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Altitude
Separation
1600 Feet,
Ascending
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
TCAD 9900BX Operation
Other Traffic,
Separation 1300
Feet Above
Ownship
Icon
Traffic Advisory
Altitude Separation
200 Feet,
Descending
Range Ring
Radius
Touch To Select
Barometric
Pressure
Traffic
Annunciation
Touch To Select
Altitude Filter
Touch To View
Traffic Menu
Figure 10-30 Traffic Page for Ryan TCAD 9900BX
Map
Symbol
Description
Traffic
Traffic Advisory
Terrain
Proximity Advisory (color may be configured as cyan)
Other Traffic (color may be configured as cyan)
Weather
Out-of-Range Traffic Advisory
Nearest
Services/
Music
Table 10-15 9900BX (TCAS) Symbols
10.8.1
Select Local Barometric Pressure
1. While viewing the TCAD display, touch the Baro key to select
the local barometric pressure.
Utilities
2. Use the keypad to select the values and touch Enter to save
the values.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-34
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.8.2
Select Altitude Filter
The Altitude Filter limits the traffic displayed to the Below,
Normal, Above or Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the
“Displayed Traffic Range” table. The filter altitudes are relative
to ownship altitude. While viewing the Traffic page, touch the
Altitude Filter key to change the altitude filter value. Select
the desired altitude filter by touching the Normal, Above,
Below, or Unrestricted keys. The selection is displayed in
the Altitude Filter field.
Selected Altitude Filter
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 10-31 Traffic Altitude Filter Selection
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Map
Displayed Traffic Range
-9,900 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 9,900 ft
All Traffic Shown
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Table 10-16 Displayed Traffic Range
10.8.3
Nearest
TCAD 9900BX Traffic Menu
The TCAD 9900BX Menu allows control over the settings for the TCAD
Traffic display.
1. While viewing the Traffic page, touch the Menu key.
Services/
Music
Utilities
Select Shield Setup
Set Traffic Audio
Volume
System
Select Approach
Mode: Set,
Armed, or Active
Messages
Toggle Ground
Mode On or Off
Symbols
Figure 10-32 TCAD 9900BX Traffic Menu
2. Touch the desired key from the menu to make any settings.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-35
Appendix
Index
Foreword
10.8.3.1
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Traffic Audio
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Traffic
Audio key.
Touch To Lower
The Volume
Touch To Raise
The Volume
Com/Nav
Bar Graph Showing Volume Level
FPL
Figure 10-33 TCAD Traffic Audio
2. Touch the arrow keys to raise or lower the TCAD Traffic Audio
level. The selected volume will be shown as a percentage value
and graphically with a bar graph.
Direct-To
Proc
3. Touch the Back key to return to the TCAD Control menu.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
10.8.3.2
Shield Setup
The Shield Setup function allows you to select the Shield Type (mode of
operation) and the size of the shield volume that will provide alerts when
entered by aircraft.
Approach Shield Type
Terrain
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Shield Type
key and touch the Approach Shield Type.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch To Select
Shield Type:
Approach or
Standard
Figure 10-34 TCAD 9900BX Shield Setup for Approach
System
2. Touch the Field Elevation key.
Messages
3. With the Use DEST APT key deactivated (no green bar), touch
the Field Elevation key to manually select the Field Elevation
for traffic reporting. Use the keypad to select the elevation
value.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Touch To Automatically
Select The Destination
Airport Field Elevation
Touch To Manually
Set Field Elevation
10-36
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4. Touch the Enter key to accept the selected value. The selected
value will be shown in the Field Elevation key.
5. Touch the Use DEST APT key to automatically use the field
elevation of the destination airport of the active flight plan
for traffic reporting.
NOTE: Activating the Use DEST APT feature automatically uses the
elevation for the current destination airport for the TCAD. If no destination
airport is present in the GTN system, the TCAD will not receive a field
elevation and therefore not automatically enter approach mode.
En Route, Standard, or Terminal Shield Type
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Shield Type
key and touch the desired Shield Type: Enroute, Standard, or
Terminal.
Touch To Shield Range
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
2. Touch the Shield Height key and use the keypad to select
the Shield Height value. The selected value will be shown in
the Shield Range key.
3. Touch the Shield Range key and use the keypad to select
the Shield Range value. The selected value will be shown in
the Shield Range key.
Approach Mode
1. While viewing the Traffic menu, touch the Approach key to
activate Approach Mode TCAD traffic.
2. Touching the Approach key toggles Approach Mode between
Set, Armed, or Active.
Ground Mode
1. While viewing the Traffic menu, touch the Ground key to
activate Ground Mode TCAD traffic.
2. Touching the Ground key toggles Ground Mode between On
and Off.
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Map
Traffic
Figure 10-35 TCAD 9900BX Shield Setup for En Route, Standard, and Terminal
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Wpt Info
Touch To Manually
Set Shield Height
10.8.3.4
Getting
Started
Charts
Touch To Select
Shield Type:
Approach or
Standard
10.8.3.3
Foreword
10-37
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
10.9
NOTE: This feature is available with software v6.30 and later.
Getting
Started
WARNING: Traffic information shown on system displays is provided as an
aid in visually acquiring traffic. Traffic avoidance maneuvers are based upon
TCAS II Resolution Advisories, ATC guidance, or positive visual acquisition
of conflicting traffic.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to
accurately depict all of the traffic information within range of the aircraft.
Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented
on the displays.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
NOTE: If the installed TCAS II traffic system is not a GTS 8000, refer to
the applicable documentation for system-specific information.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
TCAS II
A Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System II (TCAS II), such as the
GTS 8000, improves flight safety by monitoring nearby airspace for aircraft flying
with operating transponders. The TCAS II system provides traffic information to
the displays. If separation from other aircraft is within certain limits, the system
issues Traffic Advisories (TAs) assisting the flight crew in the visual acquisition of
traffic, or Resolution Advisories (RAs) providing recommended vertical guidance
maneuvers to resolve traffic conflicts.
10.9.1
TCAS II Theory of Operation
When the TCAS II system is operating in TA/RA or TA Only Mode, the system
interrogates the transponders of other aircraft in the vicinity, and monitors for
their replies. Based on successive replies, the system tracks the range, bearing,
and (if reported) the altitudes of other aircraft. For each detected aircraft
transponder, the system calculates time to, and separation at, the closest point
of approach (CPA) around the potential collision area surrounding own aircraft.
Based on CPA time, own aircraft altitude, and selected TCAS II system mode,
the system determines if a TA or RA should be issued for a detected intruder.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-38
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Altitude
(Feet*)
TA Time to CPA
(Seconds)
0 - 1,000
20
1,000 - 2,350
2,350 - 5,000
5,000 - 10,000
10,000 - 20,000
20,000 and above
25
30
40
45
48
RA Time to CPA
(Seconds)
RA not issued below
1,000 feet
15
20
25
30
35
* System uses pressure altitude except when Radar Altitude is available. Radar Altitude takes precedence over pressure altitude
reporting.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Table 10-17 Altitude-based TCAS II TA/RA Alert Thresholds
Proc
The TCAS II system categorizes detected traffic into four groups of increasing
collision threat potential:
Charts
• Other Traffic (OT), displayed as a hollow white diamond, is not currently
a threat.
• Proximate Traffic (PT), displayed as a filled white diamond, is not
currently a threat, but is within 6 nm and ±1,200 feet of the own-aircraft
altitude.
• Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a filled yellow circle, indicates traffic is
within 20-48 seconds of a potential collision area. If a Traffic Map is shown,
and the TA traffic is beyond the selected map range, the system displays a
half-TA symbol at the edge of the map at the approximate relative bearing
of the TA traffic. If TA traffic subsequently meets the criteria for an RA, the
system will issue an RA.
• Resolution Advisory (RA), displayed as a filled red square, indicates
traffic is within 15-35 seconds of a potential collision area. If a Traffic
Map is shown, and the RA traffic is beyond the selected map range, the
system displays a half-RA symbol at the edge of the map positioned at the
approximate relative bearing to the RA traffic.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-39
Index
Symbol
Foreword
Getting
Started
Description
Other Non-threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Com/Nav
Off-scale Traffic Advisory
FPL
Resolution Advisory (RA)
Off-scale Resolution Advisory
Direct-To
Table 10-18 TCAS II Traffic Symbol Description
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
10.9.2
TCAS II with ADS-B
When the GTS 8000 TCAS II is in operating mode, it interrogates Mode-S
transponder data while automatically receiving ADS-B position and velocity
information directly from a comparably equipped aircraft target. The system
attempts to match (or “correlate”) the two surveillance data sources to increase
the preciseness of its target location. When a correlation is made, the system
displays the traffic information for the source determined to be the most
accurate. Any traffic that is not correlated (i.e., only detected by one system but
not the other) is also displayed for the flight crew. This may occur, for example,
if another aircraft is beyond the surveillance range of the TCAS II, but the
GTS 8000 is still receiving position and velocity information from other ADS-B
equipped aircraft. The traffic correlation feature improves the accuracy of the
traffic displayed, while reducing the occurrence of displaying a single target
twice.
NOTE: Aircraft that are surveilled by ADS-B In only will not trigger a TCAS
resolution advisory.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-40
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.9.3
TCAS II Alerts
Foreword
When the TCAS II unit issues a TA or RA, the following occur:
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears in the annunciator bar of the GTN,
flashes for 5 seconds and remains displayed until no TAs or RAs are detected
in the surveillance area.
- RA ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciations are white text with red backgrounds.
- TA ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciations are black text with yellow backgrounds.
- If a TA and RA occur simultaneously, only the red and white RA
‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation is shown.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
• If the GTN is not displaying the traffic page, the system displays a traffic
alert pop-up.
Proc
• During a TA event, the system issues a single “Traffic, Traffic” voice alert
each time the system detects a new TA threat.
Charts
• During an RA event, voice alert(s) provide vertical guidance to resolve the
traffic conflict.
- The Vertical Speed Indicator displays a range of vertical speeds to fly
to or avoid as applicable.
- Additional voice alerts occur if the RA status changes and when the
aircraft is clear of the conflict.
If the traffic system cannot determine the bearing of a Traffic or Resolution
Advisory, the alert will be displayed as a traffic alert banner outlined in the
following table:
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-41
Index
Traffic Alert Banner
Foreword
RA X.X ± XX <UP> or <DN>
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
TA X.X ± XX <UP> or <DN>
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Description
• Warning banner displayed when
system unable to determine bearing of
Resolution Advisory (RA) and extreme
pilot vigilance is required.
• Banner indicates distance in nm
and altitude separation in hundreds
of feet.
• If altitude trend is available, banner
indicates altitude trend up <UP>
for climbing and down <DN> for
descending traffic.
• Caution banner displayed when
system unable to determine bearing
of Traffic Advisory (TA) and pilot
vigilance is required.
• Banner indicates distance in nm
and altitude separation in hundreds
of feet.
• If altitude trend is available, banner
indicates altitude trend up <UP>
for climbing and down <DN> for
descending traffic.
Table 10-19 TCAS II No Bearing Alert Banners
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-42
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.9.3.1
Resolution Advisories
Resolution Advisories (RAs) are TCAS II recommended vertical guidance
maneuvers to be flown to resolve a traffic conflict. If the targeted threat
aircraft is also TCAS II equipped, the two traffic systems use Mode S data
link interrogations to generate complimentary responses to the RAs. During
an RA event, the system monitors the performance and status of the aircraft
response. It may command an increase/decrease vertical speed, and/or reverse
climb/descend commands until the aircraft is clear of the conflict.
RAs are categorized in two resolution types: preventive and corrective:
Preventive Resolutions
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Preventive RAs are issued when the aircraft's present vertical speed will
resolve a traffic conflict. The system displays a range of vertical speed avoidance
limits. These limits are displayed to help the pilot from climbing or descending
into conflicting traffic.
Corrective Resolutions
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Corrective RAs are issued when the aircraft's present vertical speed will
not resolve a traffic conflict. The VSI indicates a range of vertical speeds to be
avoided,while the current vertical speed appears in white with a red background.
For advisory, the VSI indicates a green “fly to” vertical speed range that needs
to be flown to resolve the RA conflict. In some cases, the TCAS II system logic
determines it will be necessary to cross through the intruder aircraft’s altitude to
resolve the traffic conflict.
The following tables illustrate Preventive Advisories, Corrective Advisories,
and TCAS II Voice Alerts.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-43
Index
Preventive RA Type
Do Not Climb
Do Not Climb > 500 fpm
Do Not Climb > 1,000 fpm
Do Not Climb > 2,000 fpm
Do Not Descend
Do Not Descend > 500 fpm
Do Not Descend > 1,000 fpm
Do Not Descend > 2,000 fpm
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Required Vertical Speed (fpm)
<0
< 500
< 1,000
< 2,000
>0
> -500
> -1,000
> -2,000
Table 10-20 Preventative RA Types with Required Vertical Speeds
Proc
Corrective RA Type
Climb
Crossing Climb
Crossing Maintain Climb
Maintain Climb
Reduce Descent
Descend
Crossing Descend
Crossing Maintain Descent
Maintain Descent
Reduce Climb
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Required Vertical Speed (fpm)
1,500 to 2,000
1,500 to 4,400
0
-1,500 to -2,000
-1,500 to -4,400
0
Table 10-21 Corrective RA Types with Required Vertical Speeds
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-44
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Alert Type
TA
Climb RA
Descend RA
Altitude Crossing Climb RA
Altitude Crossing Descend RA
Reduce Climb RA
Reduce Descend RA
RA Reversal to Climb RA
RA Reversal to Descend RA
Increase Climb RA
Increase Descent RA
Maintain Rate RA
Altitude Crossing, Maintain Rate RA
(Climb and Descend)
Preventive RA
RA Removed
Voice Alert
"Traffic, Traffic"
"Climb, Climb"
"Descend, Descend"
"Climb, Crossing Climb, Climb,
Crossing Climb"
“Descend, Crossing Descend,
Descend, Crossing Descend"
"Level Off, Level Off"
"Level Off, Level Off"
"Climb - Climb NOW, Climb - Climb
NOW"
"Descend - Descend NOW,
Descend - Descend NOW"
"Increase Climb, Increase Climb"
"Increase Descent, Increase Descent"
"Maintain Vertical Speed, Maintain"
"Maintain Vertical Speed, Crossing
Maintain"
"Monitor Vertical Speed"
"Clear of Conflict"
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Table 10-22 TCAS II Voice Alerts
10.9.4
Nearest
TCAS II System Test
The TCAS II system test is initiated from the traffic menu. During a TCAS
II system test, the system displays a traffic test pattern on the Traffic Page. A
Resolution Advisory (RA) alert annunciation will be displayed with the vertical
speed indicator indicating not to descend nor climb greater than 2,000 feet per
minute. The system test takes approximately eight seconds to complete.
Condition
System Test Passed
System Test Failed
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Utilities
System
Messages
Voice Alert
"TCAS Two System Passed"
"TCAS Two System Failed"
Symbols
Table 10-23 GTS 8000 System Test Voice Alerts
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Services/
Music
Appendix
10-45
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
10.9.5
TCAS II Operation
To display TCAS II traffic, the system must be in TA ONLY or TA/RA Mode.
These modes can be accessed from the transponder control panel or the Traffic
Page Menu.
The Traffic Map is the principal map page for viewing TCAS II traffic data.
Traffic data is displayed in relation to the aircraft’s current position and altitude,
without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there
is no valid heading. The map range is adjustable from 2 to 40 nm. Its scale is
indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic operating mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the
upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 10-36 TCAS II Traffic Map Page
Utilities
NOTE: The GTS 8000 TCAS II system automatically selects TA ONLY
Mode when the aircraft is below 1,000’ AGL. After landing, the
GTS 8000 automatically selects STANDBY Mode. If the installed TCAS II
traffic system is not a GTS 8000, refer to the applicable documentation
for system-specific automatic traffic mode selections.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-46
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
10.9.5.1
Altitude Display
Foreword
The flight crew can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat
and proximity traffic is displayed. TAs and RAs outside of these limits will always
be shown. This airspace can be selected by pressing the Altitude Filter button
on the traffic page.
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Displayed Traffic Range
-9,900 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 9,900 ft
-9,900 ft to 9,900 ft
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Traffic System Status
Charts
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map
pane. If the traffic system fails, or is in test mode, an annunciation is shown in
the center of the Traffic Map.
Operating Mode
TCAS II Self-Test Initiated
(TEST)
Traffic and Resolution
Advisory (TA/RA)
Traffic Advisory Only
TCAS II Standby
TCAS II Failed
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic Page
Annunciations
Traffic Page
Banner
Test
Test Mode
Terrain
TA/RA
N/A
Weather
TA Only
STBY
Fail
N/A
N/A
Failed or No Data
Nearest
Traffic
Services/
Music
Table 10-25 TCAS II Modes
10.9.5.3
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Table 10-24 Displayed Traffic Range
10.9.5.2
Getting
Started
Utilities
External Display
If an external traffic display is being controlled by the GTN, it will be
commanded to match the display settings on the GTN (traffic range and altitude
filter). In a dual GTN installation, GTN #1 will control the external display.
The traffic range on the external display will be set to the nearest range to the
selected range on the GTN.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
10-47
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
This page intentionally left blank
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-48
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11
11.1
TERRAIN
Foreword
Terrain Configurations
Getting
Started
During power-up of the GTN 7XX, the terrain/obstacle database versions are
displayed along with a disclaimer. At the same time, the Terrain system self-test
begins. A failure message is issued if the terrain test fails.
Com/Nav
Garmin provides the following terrain awareness solutions within the
GTN 7XX environment:
FPL
• Terrain Proximity - This is the standard Terrain function and refers to the
display of the relative terrain elevations on the moving map. No aural alerts
of any type are provided by a Terrain Proximity configuration.
• TAWS-B (Optional) - A system developed to meet the terrain alerting and
ground proximity requirements for Class B TAWS systems as defined in
TSO-C151c. Garmin’s GTN 7XX Terrain Awareness and Warning System
(TAWS-B) is an optional feature and is intended to provide the flight crew
with both aural and visual alerts to aid in preventing inadvertent Controlled
Flight Into Terrain (CFIT).
• HTerrain Proximity - This is the standard Terrain function and refers to the
display of the relative terrain elevations on the moving map. No aural alerts
of any type are provided by a Terrain Proximity configuration.
• HTAWS (Optional) - A system to increase situational awareness
and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain. Garmin HTAWS satisfies
TSO-C194 requirements for certification.
• TAWS-A (Optional) - A system to increase situational awareness and aid
in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT) as defined in TSO-C151c.
TAWS-A provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and obstacles
are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
NOTE: Obstacles are removed from the Terrain and TAWS pages at ranges
greater than 10 NM.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-1
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
11.2
Garmin TAWS and HTAWS use terrain and obstacle information supplied by
government and private sources. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to
confirm accuracy of the content. However, the displayed information should
never be understood as being all-inclusive. Pilots must familiarize themselves
with the appropriate charts for safe flight.
Com/Nav
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes
from government and private agencies. Garmin accurately processes
and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and
completeness of the data.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
General Database Information
11.2.1
Database Versions
The version and area of coverage of each terrain/obstacle database is shown
on the System-System Status page. Databases are checked for integrity at
power-up. If a database is found to be missing and/or deficient, the
TAWS/HTAWS system fails the self-test and displays the TAWS/HTAWS system
failure message.
11.2.2
HTAWS Database Requirements
To function properly, HTAWS requires the use of databases specific to
helicopters and HTAWS. The databases required are:
• 2.5 arc-second Terrain Database
• Helicopter Obstacle Database
• Helicopter Navigation Database
11.2.3
Database Updates
For information on how to update databases see section 19.2.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.2.4
Terrain Database Areas of Coverage
Foreword
The fixed-wing terrain database provides worldwide coverage. The following
describes the area of coverage available in each helicopter terrain database.
Regional definitions may change without notice.
Database
Americas - North
Americas - South
Atlantic - North
Atlantic - South
Pacific - North
Pacific - South
Coverage Area
Latitudes: 0° to N90°
Longitudes: W180° to W30°
Latitudes: N30° to S90°
Longitudes: W180° to W30°
Latitudes: 0° to N90°
Longitudes: W30° to E90°
Latitudes: N30° to S90°
Longitudes: W30° to E90°
Latitudes: 0° to N90°
Longitudes: E60° to E180°
Latitudes: N30° to S90°
Longitudes: E60° to E180°
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Table 11-1 Terrain Database Coverage
Traffic
NOTE: Because of higher resolution helicopter terrain data, the world-wide
data won't fit on the terrain database card. Therefore, data is regionalized.
If you have the wrong region database for your present position, then you
get the message that terrain is unavailable for the current location and a
crosshatched pattern on the terrain display.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-3
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
11.2.5
The following describes the area of coverage available in each database.
Regional definitions may change without notice.
Database
Coverage Area
Limited to the United States plus some areas of Canada,
United States (US)
Mexico, Caribbean, and the Pacific.
Alaska, Austria, Belgium, Canada*, Caribbean*, Czech
Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece,
US/Europe
Hawaii, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Mexico*,
Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Spain,
Sweden, Switzerland, United Kingdom, United States
* Indicates partial coverage
Table 11-2 Obstacle Database Coverage
Charts
NOTE: It is very important to note that not all obstacles are necessarily
charted and therefore may not be contained in the Obstacle Database.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Obstacle Database Areas of Coverage
Obstacle databases created for GTN software v5.10 or later include all power
lines or only HOT lines depending on the type of obstacle database installed.
Hazardous Obstacle Transmission (HOT) Lines are those power lines that are
co-located with other FAA-identified obstacles. The installed obstacle database
type can be verified on the System Status page. Power line data is available for
the contiguous United States as well as small parts of Canada and Mexico.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.3
Terrain Proximity
Foreword
Garmin Terrain Proximity is a non-TSO-C151c-certified terrain awareness
system provided as a standard feature of GTN 7XX to increase situational
awareness and help reduce controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Terrain may be
displayed on the Map and Terrain pages.
Terrain Proximity uses information provided from the GPS receiver to
provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
measurements. GPS altitude is converted to a Mean Sea Level (MSL)-based
altitude (GSL altitude) and is used to determine Terrain alerts. GSL altitude
accuracy is affected by factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject
to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude
devices. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
altitude. Therefore, GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL
altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
Terrain utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced to mean
sea level (MSL). Using the GPS position and GSL altitude, Terrain displays a
2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. In this manner, Terrain Proximity can provide advanced
alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
Terrain requires the following to operate properly:
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
• The system must have a valid 3-D GPS position solution.
• The system must have a valid terrain/obstacle database.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
View
System
360
Arc
Layers
Messages
Flight Plan
Legend
Symbols
Figure 11-1 Terrain Proximity Page Functional Diagram
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-5
Index
Foreword
11.3.1
Displaying Terrain Proximity
The Terrain page is in the Terrain function.
Getting
Started
1. Touch the Terrain key on the Home page.
Terrain Active Flight
Page Title Plan Leg
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Heading Annunciation
Com/Nav
Aircraft GSL Value
(GPS Derived)
Yellow Terrain Is Between
100 ft and 1000 ft Below
The Aircraft Altitude
FPL
Direct-To
Ownship Position
Proc
Range Rings
Charts
Red Terrain Is Above Or
Within 100 ft Below The
Aircraft Altitude
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Icon shows point
obstacle overlay
is active (software
v5.12, or later)
Terrain
Terrain Menu Key Terrain Type
Icon shows wire obstacle
overlay is active
(software v5.12, or later)
Figure 11-2 Terrain Page
Weather
2. Touch the Menu key for options.
Nearest
Selected View Flight Plan Selected To Show
Services/
Music
Terrain and Obstacle
Legend Selected To
Show
Utilities
System
Figure 11-3 Terrain Menu Options
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.3.1.1
Terrain Page 120° Arc or 360° Rings
Select the 120º Arc or 360º rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the
360 or Arc keys from the Menu.
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
2. Touch the 360º or Arc key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Outer Arc Range Heading Annunciation
Direct-To
Aircraft GSL Value
(GPS Derived)
Proc
120° Arc Outline
Red Terrain Is Above Or
Within 100 ft Below The
Aircraft Altitude
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Yellow Terrain Is Between
100 ft and 1000 ft Below
The Aircraft Altitude
Terrain Scale Obstacle Scale (software
version 6.00, or later)
Traffic
Terrain
Terrain Type
Weather
Figure 11-4 Terrain 120° Arc View
11.3.1.2 Display Flight Plan on Terrain Page
Select the display of the active flight plan on the Terrain page.
Touch the Flight Plan key to toggle the display of active flight
plan on or off.
11.3.1.3 Display Terrain and Obstacle Legend
Select the display of the Terrain Legend on the Terrain page.
Touch the Legend key to toggle the display of the Terrain
Legend on or off.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-7
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
11.3.2
Terrain Limitations
Terrain Proximity displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the
aircraft. The displayed alerts are advisory in nature only. Individual obstructions
may be shown if available in the database. However, all obstructions may not
be available in the database and data may be inaccurate. Terrain information
should be used as an aid to situational awareness. Never use this information for
navigation or to maneuver to avoid obstacles.
Terrain Proximity uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by
government sources. The displayed information should never be understood as
being all-inclusive.
NOTE: The data contained in the Terrain databases comes from
government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates
the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
Proc
Charts
NOTE: TERRAIN, TAWS-A, TAWS-B, HTAWS, or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY
functionality will be available via the Terrain page, depending on the
installed hardware and configuration. HTAWS or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY
are available in software v4.00, or later. TAWS-A is available in software
v5.00, or later.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.4
TAWS-B (Optional)
Foreword
TAWS (Terrain Awareness and Warning System) is an optional feature to
increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain
(CFIT). TAWS provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and
obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft.
TAWS satisfies TSO-C151c Class B requirements for certification. Class B
TAWS is required for all Part 91 turbine aircraft operations with six or more
passenger seats and for Part 135 turbine aircraft operations with six to nine
passenger seats (FAR Parts 91.223, 135.154).
11.4.1
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
TAWS-B Requirements
TAWS requires the following to operate properly:
Proc
• A valid terrain/obstacle database
Charts
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
11.4.2
Wpt Info
TAWS-B Limitations
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government
agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the data but
cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
TAWS displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the aircraft.
Compliance with TAWS B alerts and warnings is MANDATORY. When a
TAWS B “pull up” annunciation is issued, the pilot is required to pull up.
TAWS uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources.
Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that
may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be shown if available in
the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of
the content, per TSO-C151c.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-9
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
11.4.3
Computing GPS Altitude for TAWS
TAWS uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal
position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS
altitude is converted to a Mean Sea Level (MSL)-based altitude (GSL altitude)
and is used to determine TAWS alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by
factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to variations in pressure
and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices. GSL altitude does
not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. Therefore, GPS
altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate
terrain and obstacle alerts.
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS are referenced to Mean Sea
Level. Using the GPS position and GSL altitude, TAWS displays a 2-D picture of
the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate
and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain
and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS can provide advanced alerts of predicted
dangerous terrain conditions.
11.4.4
Baro-Corrected Altitude Versus GSL Altitude
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting
the altimeter setting for local atmospheric conditions. The most accurate
baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However,
because actual atmospheric conditions seldom match the standard conditions
defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the
baro-corrected altitude (as read from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL
altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s true altitude differing from the
baro-corrected altitude.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.4.5
Using TAWS-B
Foreword
During unit power-up, the terrain/obstacle database versions are displayed.
At the same time, TAWS self-test begins. One of the following aural messages is
generated:
• “TAWS System Test OK”
• “TAWS System Failure”
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
TAWS information can be displayed on the Map page. Terrain and obstacles
with heights greater than 200 feet Above Ground Level (AGL) are displayed
in yellow and red. The GTN 7XX adjusts colors automatically as the aircraft
altitude changes.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
View
360
Arc
Layers
TAWS
Traffic
Flight Plan
Legend
Terrain
TAWS Inhibit
Test TAWS
Weather
Figure 11-5 TAWS-B Page Functional Diagram
11.4.6
Nearest
Displaying TAWS-B Data
TAWS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles
alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the aircraft
altitude changes. The colors and symbols shown below are used to represent
terrain, obstacles, and threat locations. Obstacles are removed when more than
2000 ft below the aircraft.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-11
Index
Foreword
Threat Location
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Getting
Started
Unlighted Obstacle
Terrain above or
within 100 ft
below the aircraft
altitude (Red)
1000 ft
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Com/Nav
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black)
Figure 11-6 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-B
FPL
Unlighted Obstacle
Threat
Location Terrain
< 1000 ft > 1000 ft < 1000 ft > 1000 ft Indicator Color
AGL
AGL
AGL
AGL
Direct-To
Proc
Lighted Obstacle
Charts
Red
Wpt Info
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Obstacle Symbol
Map
Utilities
System
Alert
Level
Terrain/
Obstacle at or
within 100 ft WARNING
below current
(Red)
aircraft
altitude
Yellow
Terrain/
Obstacle
between
100 ft and
1000 ft
below current
aircraft
altitude
White
Terrain/
Obstacle
between
1000 ft and
2000 ft
below current
aircraft
altitude
Nearest
Services/
Music
Terrain/
Obstacle
Location
CAUTION
(Yellow)
Table 11-3 TAWS-B Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Tower
Windmill
Windmill in Group
Power Line
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Table 11-4 Obstacle Icon Types
Grouped obstacles are shown with an asterisk (as shown in the Windmill in
Group example above). The color of the asterisks is tied to the relative altitude
of the highest obstacle in the group, not other obstacles within that group.
Obstacles are grouped when they would otherwise overlap.
11.4.7
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid
heading. If orientation is not heading up, it will be track up. Two views are
available relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the
radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range is adjustable with the In and Out keys
from 1 to 200 NM, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Terrain Page Layers
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
Select Terrain View
FPL
Direct-To
TAWS-B Page
TAWS information is displayed on the Map and Terrain pages. The TAWS
Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and threat location data in relation
to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Flight plan
information (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) included in the flight plan are
displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft
intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest threat location on the
TAWS Page.
11.4.7.1
Com/Nav
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Select Displayed Layer
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Select TAWS Function
Figure 11-7 Terrain Page TAWS-B Menu
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
11-13
Index
2. Touch the Flight Plan key to toggle the display of the active
flight plan.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Flight Plan
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Terrain Overlay
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Terrain
Legend
Obstacle Legend
(software v6.00,
or later)
Charts
Icon shows point obstacle
overlay is active (software
v5.12, or later)
Wpt Info
3. Touch the Legend key to toggle the display of the Terrain and
Obstacle legend.
Traffic
Weather
Icon shows wire obstacle overlay is
active (software v5.12, or later)
Figure 11-8 Flight Plan and Legend Shown On TAWS-B Terrain Page
Map
Terrain
TAWS-B
Annunciation
11.4.7.2 Terrain Page View
Select the 120º Arc or 360º rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the
360 or Arc keys from the Menu.
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
Nearest
2. Touch the 360º or Arc key.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
11.4.7.3 Terrain Page TAWS-B Selections
The TAWS selections allow you to inhibit aural TAWS alerts and to send a
request to the TAWS equipment to run its internal tests. After cycling power,
TAWS will no longer be inhibited.
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2. Touch the TAWS Inhibit key to toggle the inhibiting of TAWS
alerts.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Test TAWS - Only
Available on
Ground
TAWS Alerts
Inhibited
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
TAWS Inhibited
Annunciation
Direct-To
Figure 11-9 TAWS-B Alerts Inhibited Selected
3. Touch the Test TAWS key to test the TAWS system. This function
is not available when the aircraft is in the air.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
TAWS Test
Display
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
TAWS Test
Annunciation
Nearest
Figure 11-10 TAWS-B Test Selected
11.4.8
Services/
Music
TAWS-B Alerts
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within
TAWS software algorithms. When an alert is issued, visual annunciations are
displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. TAWS alert types are
shown in the TAWS Alerts Summary with corresponding annunciations and
aural messages.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the TAWS page. If the
TAWS page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the page
being viewed.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-15
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Alert Location
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Blinking Message
Touch To Remove
Pop-Up And Remain
On Current Page
Touch To Display
Terrain Page
TAWS Annunciation
Figure 11-11 Terrain Alert Pop-Up
To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
Touch the Go to Terrain key (accesses the TAWS Page)
Charts
OR
Wpt Info
Touch the Close key to remove the pop-up alert
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
If the pilot takes no action, the pop-up will be removed when the alert is no
longer active.
11.4.8.1 TAWS-B Alerting Colors and Symbology
Color and symbols are also associated with TAWS alerts. The alert
annunciations show in the bottom left corner of the display. The three TAWS
alert levels and their associated text coloring as well as any associated symbology
are shown in the following table.
Alert Level
Annunciator Text
Warning
White text on red
background
Caution
Black text on yellow
background
Informational
Appendix
Index
11-16
Threat Location
Indicator
Example Visual Annunciation
Black text on white
Not Applicable
background
Table 11-5 TAWS-B Alert Colors and Symbology
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Alert Type
Alert
Annunciation
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR-W)
FLTA Terrain Warning
(RTC-W, ITI-W)
FLTA Obstacle Warning
(ROC-W, IOI-W)
FLTA Wire Warning
(ILI-W, RLC-W)
FLTA Terrain Caution
(RTC-C, ITI-C)
FLTA Obstacle Caution
(ROC-C, IOI-C)
FLTA Wire Caution
(ILI-C, RLC-C)
Premature Descent
Alert Caution (PDA)
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR-C)
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR-C)
Voice Call Out
(VCO-500)
Aural Message
Foreword
“Pull Up”
Getting
Started
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead,
Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead,
Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
"Wire Ahead Pull Up, Wire Ahead Pull
Up"
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
"Wire Ahead"
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
None
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
“Too Low, Terrain”
Weather
“Sink Rate”
Nearest
Services/
Music
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
“Five-Hundred”
Utilities
System
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are
installation-dependent. Alerts for the default configuration are indicated with asterisks.
Table 11-6 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-17
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
11.4.8.2 Excessive Descent Rate Alert
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide
notification when the aircraft is determined to be descending upon terrain at an
excessive rate. The parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151c are shown
below.
6000
Com/Nav
5500
5000
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
4500
E"
4000
3000
2500
2000
1500
"PULL UP"
1000
Map
K
IN
"S
3500
T
RA
500
Traffic
0
Terrain
2000
4000
6000
8000
Descent Rate
10000
12000
Figure 11-12 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11.4.8.3
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC), Reduced Required Line
Clearance (RLC), and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) alerts
are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come
within the minimum clearance values in the FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and
Obstacle Clearance Values table. When an RTC, RLC, and/or a ROC alert is
issued, a threat location indicator is displayed on the TAWS Page.
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI), Imminent Line Impact (ILI), and
Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the aircraft is below
the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI, ILI,
and IOI alerts are accompanied by a threat location indicator displayed on the
TAWS Page. The alert is annunciated when the projected vertical flight path is
calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in the following table.
11-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Minimum Clearance Altitude (feet)
Level Flight
Descending
700
500
350
300
150
100
100
100
Flight Phase
En Route
Terminal
Approach
Departure
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Table 11-7 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
During final approach, FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the
aircraft is below 200 feet AGL while within 0.5 NM of the approach runway or
below 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the runway threshold.
11.4.8.4
Direct-To
Proc
Premature Descent Alerting
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the
aircraft is significantly below the normal approach path to a runway.
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 NM of the destination
airport and ends when the aircraft is either 0.5 NM from the runway threshold
or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the threshold. During
the final descent, algorithms set a threshold for alerting based on speed, distance,
and other parameters.
700
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
FPL
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
600
Weather
500
400
Nearest
300
Services/
Music
PDA Alerting Area
200
100
Utilities
Runway 1
Threshold
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Distance From Destination Airport (nm)
System
Figure 11-13 PDA Alerting Threshold
PDA and FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion
should be used when inhibiting TAWS and the system should be enabled when
appropriate. When TAWS is inhibited, the alert annunciation “TER INHB” is
shown.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-19
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
11.4.8.5
Inhibiting/Enabling TAWS-B PDA/FLTA Alerting
TAWS also has an inhibit mode that deactivates the PDA/FLTA aural and
visual alerts. Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting TAWS and always
remember to enable the system when appropriate. Only the PDA and FLTA
alerts are disabled in the inhibit mode. After cycling power, TAWS will no longer
be inhibited.
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch To Toggle
TAWS Inhibit.
TAWS Inhibited
shown.
Direct-To
Terrain (TAWS)
Inhibited
Annunciation
Proc
Charts
Figure 11-14 TAWS-B Alerting Disabled (TAWS Inhibited) Annunciation
Wpt Info
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
Map
2. Touch the TAWS Inhibit key to inhibit or enable TAWS (choice
dependent on current state). A green bar in the key indicates
the TAWS is inhibited.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
11.4.8.6
Negative Climb Rate After Take-Off Alert (NCR)
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Take-Off alert (also referred to as
“Altitude Loss After Take-Off”) provides alerts when the system determines the
aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff. The aural message
“Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a
pop-up terrain alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing
from an airport and when the following conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
System
Messages
Symbols
• Distance from the departure airport is 2 NM or less
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110º
The NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151c are shown below.
Appendix
Index
11-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Charts
Figure 11-15 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
Wpt Info
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Map
Traffic
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Sink Rate (FPM)
System
Figure 11-16 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-21
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
11.4.8.7 Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO)
TAWS-B provides aural advisory alerts as the aircraft descends, beginning at
500 feet above the terrain, as determined by the radar altimeter (if greater than
5 NM from the nearest airport) or 500 feet above the nearest runway threshold
elevation (if less than 5 NM from the nearest airport). Upon descent to this
altitude, TAWS-B issues the aural alert message “Five-hundred.”
11.4.8.8 TAWS-B Not Available Alert
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS position solution along with specific vertical
accuracy minimums. Should the position solution become degraded or if the
aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation “TAWS N/A” is
generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-B page. The aural
message “TAWS Not Available” is generated. When the GPS signal is reestablished and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the aural
message “TAWS Available” is generated (when the aircraft is airborne).
11.4.8.9 TAWS-B Failure Alert
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database
validity, hardware status, and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not
available, the aural message “TAWS System Failure” is generated along with a
“TAWS FAIL” annunciation.
11.4.9
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
TAWS-B System Status
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its aural and visual
annunciations. The system test can also be manually initiated. An aural alert is
issued at test completion. TAWS System Testing is disabled when ground speed
exceeds 30 knots.
Alert
Alert Type
Aural Message
Annunciation
TAWS Available
None
“TAWS Available”
TAWS System Test in Progress
TAWS System Test Pass
None
None
TAWS N/A
“TAWS System Test OK”
TAWS Not Available
TAWS Alerting is Disabled
Symbols
TAWS System Test Fail
Appendix
Index
None
“TAWS System Failure”
Table 11-8 TAWS-B System Test Status Annunciations
11-22
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.5
HTAWS (Optional)
11.5.1
Introduction
Foreword
NOTE: TERRAIN, TAWS, HTAWS, or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY functionality will
be available via the Terrain page, depending on the installed hardware and
configuration. HTAWS or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY are available in software
v4.00, or later.
11.5.1.1 Overview
Garmin’s Helicopter Terrain Awareness Warning System (HTAWS) is an
optional feature to increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled
flight into terrain. Garmin HTAWS is TSO-C194 authorized. Units installed in
helicopters that do not have HTAWS installed will display HTerrain Proximity.
This is noted by the five color terrain scale which is appropriate to the low
altitude operating environment for helicopters.
HTAWS provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and obstacles
are a hazard to the aircraft.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
HTAWS Relative
Terrain Depiction
Terrain
Rotorcraft Ownship
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 11-17 Map Page with Terrain
Utilities
NOTE: HTAWS-enabled units can be identified by going to the Terrain
page and checking the lower right-corner for “HTAWS.”
11.5.1.2
Operating Criteria
Messages
Garmin HTAWS requires the following to operate properly:
• The system must have a valid 3D GPS position solution.
• The system must have a valid terrain/obstacle database.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
System
Symbols
Appendix
11-23
Index
Foreword
11.5.1.3
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases
comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and
cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and
completeness of the data.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
HTAWS displays terrain and obstructions relative to the flight path of the
aircraft. Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database.
However, all obstructions may not be available in the database and data may be
inaccurate. Never use this information for navigation.
Direct-To
NOTE: Terrain databases do not consistently represent foliage. Some trees
may extend above HTAWS protection limits in some operating modes.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Limitations
Terrain information is based on terrain elevation data contained in a database
that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain information should be used as an aid
to situational awareness. Never use it for navigation or to maneuver to avoid
terrain.
HTAWS uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government
sources. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the
content. However, the displayed information should never be understood as
being all-inclusive.
11.5.2
HTAWS Operation
11.5.2.1
HTAWS Alerting
HTAWS uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide
a horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
measurements. GPS altitude is converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based
altitude (GSL altitude) and is used to determine HTAWS alerts. GSL altitude
accuracy is affected by factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject
to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude
devices. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
altitude. Therefore, GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL
altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
HTAWS utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced to mean
sea level (MSL). Using the GPS position and GSL altitude, HTAWS displays a
2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
11-24
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
altitude of the aircraft. The GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate
and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and
obstacles. In this manner, HTAWS can provide advanced alerts of predicted
dangerous terrain conditions. Detailed alert modes are described later in this
section.
11.5.2.2
Power Up
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
During power-up of the unit, the terrain/obstacle database versions are
displayed along with a disclaimer to the pilot. At the same time, HTAWS
self-test begins. HTAWS gives the following aural messages upon test completion:
FPL
Direct-To
• “HTAWS System Test, OK,” if the system passes the test
• “HTAWS System Failure,” if the system fails the test
Proc
A test failure is also annunciated visually for HTAWS, as shown in the HTAWS
Alert Summary table.
11.5.3
Foreword
HTAWS Page
Charts
Wpt Info
HTAWS is shown on the Terrain page when HTAWS is available.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
120º Arc View
Relative Terrain
Elevation depiction
Rotorcraft
Ownship
Icon shows point
obstacle overlay is
active (software v5.12,
or later)
Nearest
Services/
Music
HTAWS
Annunciation
Utilities
Icon shows wire obstacle
overlay is active (software
v5.12, or later)
System
Figure 11-18 Terrain/HTAWS Page
Messages
Terrain information, aircraft ground track, and GPS-derived MSL altitude are
displayed on the page. The “GSL” above altitude display in the top right corner
of the display reminds the pilot that altitude is GPS-derived.
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-25
Index
Foreword
The HTAWS page menu provides options to acknowledge caution alerts,
reduce protection, or inhibit alerting.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 11-19 HTAWS Terrain Menu
FPL
Direct-To
11.5.3.1 View Selection
The HTAWS Page has two selectable view settings:
Proc
Charts
HTAWS Terrain
Colorization Overlay
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Rotorcraft Ownship
360º View
Terrain Legend
Obstacle
Legend
(software
v6.00, or
later)
Figure 11-20 Terrain Page with HTAWS - 360° View
• 360˚ View—View from above aircraft depicting surrounding terrain on
all sides.
• Arc (120˚) View—View of terrain ahead of and 60˚ to either side of the
aircraft flight path.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
NOTE: If a heading source is available the HTAWS page will be oriented
heading up. If no heading source is available the HTAWS page will be
oriented track up.
System
1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS Page, touch MENU.
Touch Arc or 360˚.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-26
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display. The
HTAWS Page displays the selected view. Repeat step 1 to
select the alternate view, and touch Back.
11.5.3.2
HTAWS Inhibit
HTAWS provides an “inhibit mode.” This mode deactivates aural and
visual alerts when they are deemed unnecessary by the aircrew. Pilots should
use discretion when inhibiting the HTAWS system and always remember to
enable the system when appropriate. VCO’s are not inhibited in Inhibit Mode.
See section 11.5.5 for more information on HTAWS alerts. When alerting is
inhibited, all FLTA aural and visual alerting is suppressed. HTAWS should only
be inhibited when in visual contact with terrain and when the pilot can be
assured of maintaining clearance from terrain and obstacles. When conducting
en route operations and operations from published airports and heliports,
HTAWS should be operated in Normal mode. HTAWS configured units will
always start up with HTAWS alerts uninhibited.
To inhibit HTAWS alerts:
1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS page, touch MENU.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
2. Touch HTAWS Inhibit. The green bar will show when HTAWS
Inhibit is active.
3. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display. The HTAWS
alerts are inhibited. The
annunciation is displayed
in the terrain annunciator field whenever HTAWS is inhibited.
NOTE: When the ground speed is less than 30 knots HTAWS
will automatically display the “HTAWS INHB” annunciation.
This indicates that HTAWS is no longer providing protection.
This automatic “TAWS INHB” cannot be removed by menu option selection.
Menu selections for INHIBIT HTAWS and RP Mode remain available when
HTAWS is automatically inhibited due to groundspeed. If the pilot selects
a mode on the menu while HTAWS is auto inhibited because it is less than
30 knots then the unit will enter that mode once ground speed exceeds
30 knots. Hence, the presence of these selections on the Menu.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-27
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
11.5.3.3
External HTAWS Inhibit Control
An optional installation is allowed for providing an external HTAWS Inhibit
switch. Touching the external HTAWS Inhibit switch toggles the HTAWS inhibit
on and off in the same manner as using the Terrain Menu selection.
11.5.3.4
Reduced Protection Mode
The Reduce Protection (RP) functionality allows operating with a reduction
in the alerting thresholds, and suppresses visual and aural annunciation of
caution alerts. Reduced protection allows low level operations and landings off
airport with a minimum number of alerts while continuing to provide protection
from terrain and obstacles. Reduced Protection should only be selected when
operating in visual contact with the terrain as alerting times are significantly less
than in normal mode. There is support for an external RP Mode switch and an
external Alert Acknowledge switch.
To toggle protection:
Wpt Info
1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS Page, touch MENU.
Map
2. Touch the RP Mode key to toggle the RP mode on and off.
The green bar will show when RP mode is active.
Traffic
Terrain
3. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display. The “RP
Mode” annunciation is displayed in the terrain annunciator
field and in the lower right corner of the terrain page whenever
protection is reduced.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-28
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.5.3.5
HTAWS Manual Test
Garmin HTAWS provides a manual test capability which verifies the proper
operation of the aural and visual annunciations of the system prior to a flight.
To manually test the HTAWS system:
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS Page, touch MENU.
Com/Nav
2. Touch the Test HTAWS key.
FPL
3. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display.
Direct-To
Proc
An aural message is played giving the test results:
• “HTAWS System Test, OK” if the system passes the test
• “HTAWS System Failure” if the system fails the test
Charts
NOTE: HTAWS System Testing is disabled when in the air so as not to
impede HTAWS alerting.
11.5.3.6
HTAWS Legend
1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS page, touch MENU.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
2. Touch the Legend key to toggle the legend on or off. The
green bar will show when the Legend is active.
Weather
3. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 11-21 HTAWS Terrain and Obstacle Legend
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-29
Index
Color
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Black
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Description
Terrain is more than 250 ft above the aircraft.
Terrain is between 0 ft and 250 ft above the aircraft.
Terrain is between 250 ft and 0 ft below the aircraft.
Terrain is between 250 ft and 500 ft below the aircraft.
Terrain is more than 500 ft below the aircraft.
Table 11-9 HTAWS Terrain Altitude Color Description
FPL
Red
Direct-To
Terrain is more than 250 ft
above the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude +250 ft
Orange Terrain is between 250 ft and 0 ft
above the aircraft altitude
Proc
Aircraft Altitude
Terrain is between 0 ft and 250 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Green
Terrain is between 250 ft and 500 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Black
Terrain more than 500 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude -250 ft
Charts
Aircraft Altitude -500 ft
Wpt Info
Figure 11-22 HTAWS Terrain Altitude Colors
Map
Traffic
Yellow
11.5.3.7
Flight Plan Overlay
1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS page, touch MENU.
Terrain
2. Touch the Flight Plan key to toggle the overlay of the active
flight plan on or off. The green bar will show when the Flight
Plan overlay is shown.
Weather
Nearest
3. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-30
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.5.4
HTAWS Symbols
Foreword
The symbols and colors in the following figures and table are used to represent
obstacles and the location of terrain threats on the HTAWS Page. Each color is
associated with a height above terrain.
Obstacles are ALWAYS shown on the TAWS page at 10 NM and below.
NOTE: If an obstacle or terrain cell and the projected flight path of the
aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest threat
location on the HTAWS Page.
Tower
Windmill
Windmill in Group
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Power Line
Proc
Charts
Table 11-10 Obstacle Icon Types
Grouped obstacles are shown with an asterisk (as shown in the Windmill in
Group example above). The color of the asterisks is tied to the relative altitude
of the highest obstacle in the group, not other obstacles within that group.
Obstacles are grouped when they would otherwise overlap.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-31
Index
Foreword
Unlighted Obstacle
Getting
Started
< 1000 ft
AGL
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Lighted Obstacle
Obstacle
Obstacle Location
Color
> 1000 ft < 1000 ft > 1000 ft
AGL
AGL
AGL
Red
Com/Nav
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Obstacle Symbol
FPL
Yellow
White
Wpt Info
Map
Obstacle is at or
above current
aircraft altitude.
Obstacle is between
250 ft and 0 ft
below current
aircraft altitude.
Obstacle is 250 ft, or
more, below current
aircraft altitude.
Obstacles are
removed when more
than 500 ft below
the helicopter.
Table 11-11 HTAWS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Traffic
Terrain
Obstacle is at or above the aircraft altitude (Red)
Weather
250 ft
Nearest
Obstacle is between 250 ft and 0 ft
below the aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Obstacle is 250 ft, or more,
below the aircraft altitude (White)
Services/
Music
Figure 11-23 HTAWS Obstacle Altitude Colors and Symbology
Utilities
System
Threat Location Indicator
Messages
Alert Level
WARNING (Red)
CAUTION (Yellow)
Symbols
Table 11-12 HTAWS Alert Coloring and Symbology
Appendix
Index
11-32
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.5.5
HTAWS Alerts
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within
HTAWS software algorithms. HTAWS alerts employ either a CAUTION or a
WARNING alert severity level. When an alert is issued, visual annunciations
are displayed. Aural alerts are simultaneously issued. Annunciations appear in a
dedicated field in the lower left corner of the display.
Annunciations are color-coded according to the HTAWS Alert Summary
table. Pop-up terrain alerts will occur if an HTAWS alert is activated while not
on the HTAWS page. There are two options when an alert is displayed:
To acknowledge the pop-up alert and return to the currently viewed
page:
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch the Close key.
Proc
To acknowledge the pop-up alert and quickly access the HTAWS Page:
Touch the ENT key.
NOTE: To further capture the attention of the pilot, HTAWS issues aural
(voice) messages that accompany visual annunciations and pop-up alerts.
For a summary of aural messages, see the HTAWS Alert Summary table.
NOTE: HTAWS Caution Alerts are displayed as constant black text on a
yellow background; HTAWS Warning Alerts are displayed as constant white
text on a red background.
11.5.5.1 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
The unit will issue terrain alerts not only when the aircraft altitude is below
the terrain elevation but also when the aircraft is projected to come within
minimum clearance values of the terrain. This alerting, called Forward Looking
Terrain Avoidance (FLTA), is also provided for obstacles.
The FLTA functionality looks ahead of the aircraft using GPS position
information and the terrain and obstacle databases to provide alerts when
the predicted flight path does not clear the terrain or obstacle by the required
clearance. The amount of clearance required varies depending on position
relative to airports and heliports, in order to reduce the occurrence of nuisance
alerting.
Any threat locations are depicted on the display. There are 2 levels of severity
for FLTA alerts. They are cautionary (amber) and warning (red) in nature and are
described in further detail below.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Foreword
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-33
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
FLTA CAUTION—Estimated potential impact in approximately 30 seconds after a caution
pop-up alert and annunciation. FLTA caution alerts are accompanied by the aural message
“Caution Terrain; Caution Terrain.” Similarly, a “Caution Obstacle; Caution Obstacle” alert
is also provided. The time to an alert can vary with conditions, therefore there is no guarantee
of a 30 second caution alert being issued.
FLTA WARNING— Warning pop-up alerts are issued 15 seconds prior to an estimated
potential impact in normal mode and approximately 10 seconds in RP Mode. FLTA warning
alerts are accompanied by the aural message “Warning - Terrain, Terrain.” Similarly, a
“Warning - Obstacle, Obstacle” alert is also provided. The time to an alert can vary with
conditions, therefore there is no guarantee of a 15/10 second warning alert being issued.
The alerts are annunciated visually through the annunciator status bar, a
pop-up alert box, and the red and yellow areas on the HTAWS page. The alerts
are annunciated aurally through a voice message indicating the potential threat,
such as “Caution - Terrain, Terrain” or “Warning - Obstacle, Obstacle.”
11.5.5.2
HTAWS Voice Call Out Aural Alert
The purpose of the Voice Call Out (VCO) aural alert messages are to provide
an advisory alert to the pilot that the aircraft is between 500 feet and 100 feet
above terrain in 100 foot increments. When the aircraft descends within the
selected distance from the terrain, the aural message for the selected height
above terrain is generated. There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts
that accompany the aural message. HTAWS allows an additional 50 foot VCO
alert with radar altimeter input.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-34
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.5.5.3
HTAWS Voice Call Out Selection
The Voice Call Out (VCO) selection is available when HTAWS is installed. The
VCO functionality provides a voice annunciation of the aircraft’s height above
terrain or the nearest airport, heliport, runway, or helipad when that threshold
is first crossed. The available call outs include “Five Hundred” through “One
Hundred” in one hundred foot intervals. The voice call outs can be enabled and
disabled through the Voice Call Outs Selection option on the System - Audio
page.
NOTE: VCOs are available down to 100 feet above terrain when HTAWS is
installed and use GSL above terrain to generate call outs (no radar altimeter
required). If a radar altimeter is interfaced to the GTN, alerts are available
down to 50 feet and the height above terrain when the radar altimeter is
used to generate the callouts.
To select the Voice Call Out choices in the System - Audio page, select the
Voice Call Out Selection item and then select the desired value.
1. From the Main page, touch System and then Audio.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
2. Touch the Voice Callouts key to view the Voice Call Outs
page.
Terrain
Weather
Audio Volume Bar Graph
Nearest
Audio Volume
Numeric Value
Touch To Adjust
Audio Volume
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch To View
Maximum
Voice Call Outs
Touch To
Select Alert
Voice
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 11-24 Select Voice Call Outs from the System Audio Page
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-35
Index
3. Touch the MAX Voice Callout key to select the Voice Call
Outs.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Set
Maximum Voice
Call Out Range
Com/Nav
FPL
Maximum Voice
Call Out Range None Selected
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 11-25 View the Maximum Voice Call Out Range (None Selected)
Map
4. The values above the selected value will be disabled (Off).
Traffic
Touch To Set
Maximum Voice
Call Out Range 200 ft Selected
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Maximum Voice Call
Out Range - 200
feet Selected
System
Messages
Figure 11-26 View the Maximum Voice Call Out Range (200 ft Selected)
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-36
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.5.5.4
HTAWS Not Available Alert
Garmin HTAWS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with
specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the navigation solution become
degraded, or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
“HTAWS N/A” is shown in the annunciation window. When the GPS signal is
re-established and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the “HTAWS
N/A” annunciation is removed.
11.5.5.5
HTAWS Failure Alert
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
HTAWS Alert Summary
The aural alert voice gender is configurable to be either male or female. See
your Garmin installer for further information on configuring the alert system.
HTAWS
Annunciation
Getting
Started
FPL
HTAWS continually monitors several system-critical items, such as database
validity, hardware status, and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not
available, the aural message “HTAWS System Failure” is issued along with the
“HTAWS FAIL” annunciation.
11.5.5.6
Foreword
Wpt Info
Map
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
Description
None
“HTAWS System Failure”
HTAWS has failed
None
None
HTAWS has been
inhibited by the
crew, or the
aircraft groundspeed is below 30
knots (automatic
inhibiting).
None
“HTAWS Not Available”
HTAWS not
available.
“Caution - Terrain, Terrain”
Forward Looking
Terrain Avoidance
Caution for Terrain.
“Warning - Terrain, Terrain”
Forward Looking
Terrain Avoidance
Warning for
Terrain.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-37
Index
Foreword
HTAWS
Annunciation
Pop-Up Alert
Getting
Started
Aural Message
Description
“Caution - Obstacle,
Obstacle”
Forward Looking
Terrain Avoidance
Caution for
Obstacle.
“Warning - Obstacle,
Obstacle”
Forward Looking
Terrain Avoidance
Warning for
Obstacle.
None
Alerting
thresholds
are reduced.
Visual and aural
annunciation of
caution alerts
are suppressed.
“Wire Ahead”
Forward Looking
Terrain Avoidance
Caution for Wire.
"Wire Ahead Pull Up, Wire
Ahead Pull Up"
Forward Looking
Terrain Avoidance
Warning for
Power Lines.
“Five Hundred”
“Four Hundred”
“Three Hundred”
“Two Hundred”
“One Hundred”
"Fifty"
HTAWS provides
optional 500 ft
through 100 ft (in
100 ft increments)
altitude call
out alerts.
An additional
value of 50 ft
is available if a
radar altimeter is
installed.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
None
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
None
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
None
Utilities
System
Table 11-13 HTAWS Alert Summary
Messages
NOTE: HTAWS Caution Alerts are displayed as constant black text on a
yellow background; HTAWS Warning Alerts are displayed as constant white
text on a red background.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-38
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.5.6
Pilot Actions
Foreword
If an HTAWS warning and associated aural are received, the pilot should
immediately maneuver the rotorcraft in response to the alert unless the terrain
or obstacle is clearly identified visually and determined by the pilot not to be a
factor to the safety of the operation.
A HTAWS caution alert indicates terrain or obstacle nearby. If possible
visually locate the terrain or obstacle for avoidance. A HTAWS warning alert
may follow a HTAWS caution unless the aircraft’s path towards the terrain or
obstacle is changed.
NOTE: Display of terrain and obstacles on the display is supplemental data
only. Maneuvering solely by reference to the terrain and obstacle data is
not recommended or authorized.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-39
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
11.6
TAWS-A (Optional)
11.6.1
Introduction
NOTE: TERRAIN, TAWS-A, TAWS-B, HTAWS, or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY
functionality will be available via the Terrain page, depending on the
installed hardware and configuration. HTAWS or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY
are available in software v4.00, or later. TAWS-A is available in software
v5.00, or later.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government
agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the data but
cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
TAWS-A (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class A) is an optional
feature to increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled flight
into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-A provides visual and aural annunciations when
terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft.
Map
TAWS-A satisfies TSO-C151c Class A and TSO-92c requirements for
certification.
Traffic
Class A TAWS requires the following components and will not work properly
without them:
Terrain
Weather
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
• Valid flap and landing gear status inputs
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
• A valid radar altimeter
TAWS-A uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government
sources. Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a
database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be shown if
available in the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm
accuracy of the content, per TSO-C151c. However, the displayed information
should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may be inaccurate.
TAWS-A uses information from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal
position and altitude, along with additional altitude input from the radar
altimeter. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is
then converted to a height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height
above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. GSL altitude accuracy is
11-40
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
affected by factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to variations
in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices. GSL
altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude.
Therefore, GSL altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude
source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-A are referenced to mean
sea level (MSL). Using the GPS position and GSL altitude, TAWS-A displays a
2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used
to calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding
terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS-A can provide advanced alerts of
predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
Class A TAWS incorporates radar altimeter input with the GSL altitude to
provide a more accurate position reference when at lower altitudes for certain
alert types, and to retain a level of ground proximity warning capability in the
unlikely event of an airport, terrain or obstacle database failure.
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting
the altimeter setting for local atmospheric conditions. The most accurate
baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However,
because actual atmospheric conditions seldom match the standard conditions
defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the
baro-corrected altitude (as read from the altimeter) to differ from the GPS-MSL
altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s true altitude differing from the
baro-corrected altitude.
TAWS-A provides the following alert types:
• Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) Alerting, which consists of:
- Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) / Required Line Clearance
(RLC) / Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) Alerting
- Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) / Imminent Line Impact
(ILI) /Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) Alerting
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
• Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS) Alerting, which consists of:
Appendix
- Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) Alerting
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-41
Index
- Excessive Closure Rate (ECR) to Terrain Alerting
Foreword
- Flight Into Terrain (FIT) Alerting
Getting
Started
- Negative Climb Rate (NCR) after takeoff Alerting
- Excessive below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation (GSD) Alerting
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
- Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO) Alerting
11.6.1.1 Displaying TAWS-A Data
TAWS-A uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and
obstacle (with a height greater than 200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts
relative to aircraft altitude. Depictions of obstacles more than 200 feet below the
aircraft are removed. Colors are adjusted automatically as the aircraft altitude
changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 11-28 and Tables 11-11 and 11-12
are used to represent terrain, obstacles, and threat locations.
Charts
Threat Location
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Wpt Info
Unlighted Obstacle
Terrain above or
within 100 ft
below the aircraft
altitude (Red)
1000 ft
Map
Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Traffic
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black)
Terrain
Figure 11-27 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-A
Weather
Alert Level
Annunciator Text
Nearest
Warning
White text on red
background
Services/
Music
Caution
Black text on yellow
background
Utilities
Informational
System
Tower
Messages
Threat Location
Indicator
Example Visual Annunciation
Black text on white
Not Applicable
background
Table 11-14 TAWS-A Alert Colors and Symbology
Windmill
Windmill in Group
Power Line
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Table 11-15 Obstacle Icon Types
11-42
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Grouped obstacles are shown with an asterisk (as shown in the Windmill in
Group example above). The color of the asterisks is tied to the relative altitude
of the highest obstacle in the group, not other obstacles within that group.
Obstacles are grouped when they would otherwise overlap.
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Threat
Location Terrain
< 1000 ft > 1000 ft < 1000 ft > 1000 ft Indicator Color
AGL
AGL
AGL
AGL
Obstacle Symbol
Red
Yellow
11.6.2
Terrain/
Obstacle
Location
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Alert
Level
Terrain/
Obstacle
above or
WARNING
within 100 ft
(Red)
below current
aircraft
altitude
Terrain/
Obstacle
between
100 ft and
1000 ft
below current
aircraft
altitude
Foreword
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
CAUTION
(Yellow)
Map
Traffic
Table 11-16 TAWS-A Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Terrain
TAWS-A Display
Weather
The TAWS-A Page shows terrain, obstacle, and threat location data in relation
to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation
data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If
an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display
automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TAWS-A
Page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid
heading. Two views are available relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360°
default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range is adjustable
with the In and Out keys from 1 to 200 NM, as indicated by the map range rings
(or arcs).
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-43
Index
Terrain Page Title
Foreword
Track Annunciation
Getting
Started
Aircraft GSL Value
(GPS Derived)
Red Terrain Is Above Or
Within 100 ft Below The
Aircraft Altitude
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Range Arc
Yellow Terrain Is Between
100 ft and 1000 ft Below
The Aircraft Altitude
FPL
Direct-To
Ownship Position
Proc
Terrain Legend
Charts
Ostacle Legend (software
v6.00, or later)
Terrain Type
Figure 11-28 TAWS-A Page with Arc View
Wpt Info
Terrain Page Title
Heading Annunciation
Map
Traffic
Aircraft GSL Value
(GPS Derived)
Red Terrain Is Above
Or Within 100 ft Below
The Aircraft Altitude
Lighted
Tower
Obstacle
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Ownship Position
An Asterisk
Indicates
Grouped
Obstacles
Yellow Terrain Is
Between 100 ft and
1000 ft Below The
Aircraft Altitude
TAWS Annunciations
(all annunciations
shown on Terrain page)
Lighted
Windmill
Obstacle
TAWS Annunciations
(shown on all displays)
(+ indicates there are Range Arcs
more annunciations
and will show each
one for five seconds)
System
Messages
Symbols
Terrain Type
Figure 11-29 TAWS-A Page with 360° View
Appendix
Index
11-44
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
Foreword
2. Selections are grouped by function: View, Layers, and TAWS.
Selected View Flight Plan Selected To Show
Terrain and
Obstacle Legend
Selected To Show
Test TAWS - Only
Available on
Ground
Flap Override
Selection
Glideslope Alert Ground Proximity TAWS Alerts
Warning System Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 11-30 TAWS-A Menu
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
View
Terrain
360
Arc
Layers
Flight Plan
Legend
TAWS
Flap Override
G/S Inhibit
GPWS Inhibit
TAWS Inhibit
Test TAWS
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 11-31 TAWS-A Page Functional Diagram
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-45
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
11.6.3
TAWS-A Alerts
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set
within TAWS-A software algorithms. TAWS-A alerts employ a CAUTION or a
WARNING alert severity level. When an alert is issued, visual annunciations are
displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. TAWS-A alert types with
corresponding annunciations and aural messages are shown in Table 11-13.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the display. The TAWS-A
Alert Annunciation is shown on the lower left part of the display. If the TAWS-A
Page is not already displayed, a pop-up alert appears while an alert is active.
Direct-To
Proc
Alert Location
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Blinking Alert
Touch To Remove
Pop-Up And Remain
On Current Page
Touch To Display
Terrain Page
TAWS Annunciation
Figure 11-32 Terrain Alert Pop-Up
To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
Touch the Close key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
Nearest
Touch the Go to Terrain key (accesses the TAWS-A Page)
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-46
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.6.3.1
TAWS-A Alerts Summary
Alert Type
Alert
Annunciation
Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-A Page)
Reduced Required
Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
or
Imminent Terrain
Impact Warning (ITI)
or
Reduced Required
Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
or
Imminent Obstacle
Impact Warning (IOI)
or
*
*
*
*
Aural
Message
“Terrain, Terrain;
Pull Up, Pull Up” *
or
“Terrain Ahead,
Pull Up; Terrain
Ahead, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain;
Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
"Terrain Ahead,
Pull Up; Terrain
Ahead, Pull Up”
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull
Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead,
Pull Up; Obstacle
Ahead, Pull Up”
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull
Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead,
Pull Up; Obstacle
Ahead, Pull Up”
Excessive Descent
Rate Warning (EDR)
“<whoop>
<whoop> Pull Up”
Excessive Closure
Rate Warning (ECR)
“<whoop>
<whoop> Pull Up”
Imminent Line
Impact Warning
(ILI)
"Wire Ahead, Pull
Up; Wire Ahead,
Pull Up"
or
"Wire, Wire; Pull
Up, Pull Up"
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-47
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Alert Type
Alert
Annunciation
Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-A Page)
Reduced Line
Clearance Warning
(RLC)
"Wire Ahead, Pull
Up; Wire Ahead,
Pull Up"
or
"Wire, Wire; Pull
Up, Pull Up"
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Reduced Required
Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
or
Imminent Terrain
Impact Caution (ITI)
or
*
“Caution, Terrain;
Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead;
Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Terrain;
Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead;
Terrain Ahead”
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Reduced Required
Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
or
*
Terrain
Weather
Imminent Obstacle
Impact Caution (IOI)
or
Nearest
Services/
Music
Messages
Symbols
*
“Caution,
Obstacle; Caution,
Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead;
Obstacle Ahead”
“Obstacle Ahead;
Obstacle Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Obstacle;
Caution, Obstacle”
Imminent Line
Impact Caution (ILI)
"Wire Ahead; Wire
Ahead"*
or
"Caution, Wire;
Caution, Wire"
Reduced Line
Clearance Caution
(RLC)
"Wire Ahead; Wire
Ahead"*
or
"Caution, Wire;
Caution, Wire"
Utilities
System
Aural
Message
Premature Descent
Alert Caution (PDA)
“Too Low, Terrain”
Appendix
Index
11-48
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Alert Type
Alert
Annunciation
Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-A Page)
Aural
Message
Foreword
Excessive Descent
Rate Caution (EDR)
“Sink Rate”
Getting
Started
Excessive Closure
Rate Caution (ECR)
“Terrain, Terrain”
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Negative Climb
Rate Caution (NCR)
or
*
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
Com/Nav
FPL
Flight Into Terrain
High Speed Caution
(FIT)
“Too Low, Terrain”
Flight Into Terrain
Gear Caution (FIT)
“Too Low, Gear”
Proc
Flight Into Terrain
Flaps Caution (FIT)
“Too Low, Flaps”
Charts
Flight Into Terrain
Takeoff Caution (FIT)
“Too Low, Terrain”
Wpt Info
Direct-To
Map
Glide Slope Deviation Caution (GSD)
“Glideslope”
Altitude Voice Call
Out (VCO)
None
“Five-Hundred,”
“Four-Hundred,”*
“Three-Hundred,”*
“Two-Hundred,”*
“One-Hundred”*
TAWS Available
None
None
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
“TAWS Available”
Nearest
None
Services/
Music
N/A
“TAWS System
Test OK”
Utilities
TAWS N/A
N/A
TAWS Not
Available
System
TAWS Alerting is
Disabled
N/A
None
Messages
TAWS System Test
Fail
N/A
“TAWS System
Failure”
Symbols
TAWS System Test
in Progress
TAWS System Test
Pass
N/A
N/A
None
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-49
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Alert Type
Alert
Annunciation
Incorrect TAWS
configuration,
invalid/missing
terrain, airport, or
obstacle database,
or TAWS audio
fault.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
**
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Incorrect TAWS
configuration,
radar altimeter
unavailable,
GPS position
unavailable/
degraded, TAWS
audio fault
GPWS Inhibit
GPWS Not
Available.
Incorrect TAWS
configuration,
radar altimeter
unavailable,
GPS position
unavailable/
degraded, TAWS
audio fault.
N/A
N/A
GPS position
unavailable/
degraded, outside
of terrain database
coverage
Sufficient GPS
signal reception
restored
Aural
Message
“TAWS System
Failure”
No GPS position
Direct-To
Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-A Page)
N/A
None
N/A
“TAWS Not
Available”
“TAWS Not
Available”
“TAWS Available”
(aural message
only in flight)
“GPWS System
Failure”
*
N/A
N/A
“GPWS System
Failure”
N/A
None
Appendix
Index
11-50
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-A Page)
Aural
Message
N/A
None
Glideslope Inhibit
FLAP Override
N/A
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
None
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable. Alerts for the default configuration are indicated with
asterisks.
** VCO alerts are not issued if both TAWS and GPWS systems have failed or are not available
† GSD alert will be available if a valid ILS is being used for navigation, even in no valid GPS signal is
being received.
Table 11-17 TAWS-A Alerts Summary
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
11.6.3.2 Excessive Descent Rate Alert
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide
notification when the aircraft is determined to be descending upon terrain at an
excessive rate. The parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151c are shown
below.
6000
5500
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
5000
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Terrain
4500
E"
4000
NK
I
"S
3500
T
RA
Weather
Nearest
3000
2500
Services/
Music
2000
Utilities
1500
System
"PULL UP"
1000
Messages
500
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
Descent Rate
10000
Symbols
12000
Appendix
Figure 11-33 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-51
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
11.6.3.3
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC), Reduced Required Line
Clearance (RLC), and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) alerts
are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come
within the minimum clearance values in the FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and
Obstacle Clearance Values table. When an RTC, RLC, and/or a ROC alert is
issued, a threat location indicator is displayed on the TAWS Page.
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI), Imminent Line Impact (ILI), and
Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the aircraft is below
the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI, ILI,
and IOI alerts are accompanied by a threat location indicator displayed on the
TAWS Page. The alert is annunciated when the projected vertical flight path is
calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in the following table.
Charts
Flight Phase
Wpt Info
En Route
Terminal
Approach
Departure
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Minimum Clearance Altitude (feet)
Level Flight
Descending
700
500
350
300
150
100
100
100
Table 11-18 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
During final approach, FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the
aircraft is below 200 feet AGL while within 0.5 NM of the approach runway or
below 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the runway threshold.
11.6.3.4
Premature Descent Alerting
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the
aircraft is significantly below the normal approach path to a runway.
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 NM of the destination
airport and ends when the aircraft is either 0.5 NM from the runway threshold
or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the threshold. During
the final descent, algorithms set a threshold for alerting based on speed, distance,
and other parameters.
Appendix
Index
11-52
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
700
Foreword
600
Getting
Started
500
400
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
300
PDA Alerting Area
200
Com/Nav
100
Runway 1
Threshold
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
FPL
15
Distance From Destination Airport (nm)
Direct-To
Figure 11-34 PDA Alerting Threshold
PDA and FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion
should be used when inhibiting TAWS and the system should be enabled when
appropriate. When TAWS is inhibited, the alert annunciation “TER INHB” is
shown.
11.6.3.5
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Inhibiting/Enabling TAWS-A PDA/FLTA Alerting
TAWS-A also has an inhibit mode that deactivates the PDA/FLTA aural and
visual alerts. Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting TAWS-A and always
remember to enable the system when appropriate. Only the PDA and FLTA
alerts are disabled in the inhibit mode. After cycling power, TAWS-A will no
longer be inhibited.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Touch To Toggle TAWS
Inhibit. TAWS Inhibited
shown.
Services/
Music
Terrain (TAWS)
Inhibited Annunciation
Utilities
Figure 11-35 TAWS-A Alerting Disabled (TAWS Inhibited) Annunciation
System
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
Messages
2. Touch the TAWS Inhibit key to inhibit or enable TAWS (choice
is dependent on current state). A green bar in the key indicates
the TAWS is inhibited.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-53
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
11.6.3.6
Excessive Closure Rate Alert
The Excessive Closure Rate (ECR) alert provides suitable notification
when the aircraft is determined to be closing upon terrain at an excessive speed
for a given aircraft gear and flap configuration.
The following figures show the ECR alerting criteria for flaps in the landing
configuration and for all other flight phases respectively.
ECR alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is 5 NM from the
nearest airport, except when FLTA is not available (causing the TAWS N/A or
TAWS FAIL annunciation to be displayed), in which case ECR alerting will
remain active until landing.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Charts
Nearest
Services/
Music
Closure Rate (FPM)
Figure 11-36 Excessive Closure Rate Alert Criteria (Flaps Up or Takeoff Configuration)
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-54
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Closure Rate (FPM)
Charts
Figure 11-37 Excessive Closure Rate Alert Criteria (Flaps in Landing Configuration)
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-55
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
11.6.3.7
Flight Into Terrain Alert
Flight Into Terrain (FIT) alerts occur when the aircraft is too low with
respect to terrain based on landing gear status, flap position, and groundspeed.
FIT caution alerts are issued when flight conditions meet the criteria shown
below.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Com/Nav
Map
Altitude Change Rate (FPM)
Traffic
* Flap position will not trigger alert if Flap Override option is enabled; see discussion below.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 11-38 Flight Into Terrain Caution Alert Criteria
To reduce nuisance FIT alerts on approaches where flap extension is not
desired (or is intentionally delayed), the pilot may override FIT alerting based
on the flap position, while all other FIT alerting remains in effect.
Services/
Music
Utilities
Flap Override
Selection
System
Messages
Flap Override
Annunciation
Symbols
Figure 11-39 TAWS-A Page Menu and FIT Flap Override Annunciation
Appendix
Index
11-56
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.6.3.7.1 Overriding Flaps-based FIT alerting
1. While viewing the TAWS-A Page, touch the MENU key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
2. Touch the Flap Override key to toggle the override state.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
When the Flaps Override option is enabled, the annunciation “FLAP O/R”
is annunciated on the TAWS-A Page. If GPWS alerts are also inhibited (which
include FIT), the “FLAP O/R” annunciation is not shown.
Com/Nav
NOTE: The FLAP O/R (Flap Override) should be activated when an approach
without flaps is going to be performed.
Direct-To
FIT alerts also occur during takeoff or go-around if the aircraft’s height
above ground level (as determined by the radar altimeter) is too close to rising
terrain. TAWS-A will issue the aural message “Too Low - Terrain” and visual
annunciations when conditions enter the caution alert area.
FPL
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Radio Altitude Loss (Feet)
Messages
Figure 11-40 FIT Alerting After Takeoff
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-57
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
11.6.3.8
Negative Climb Rate After Take-Off Alert (NCR)
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Take-Off alert (also referred to as
“Altitude Loss After Take-Off”) provides alerts when the system determines the
aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff. The aural message
“Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a
pop-up terrain alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing
from an airport and when the following conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 2 NM or less
Direct-To
Proc
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110º
The NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151c are shown below.
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
Weather
Nearest
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Services/
Music
Figure 11-41 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-58
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Sink Rate (FPM)
Charts
Figure 11-42 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
Wpt Info
11.6.3.9 Excessive Below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation Alert
A Glideslope Deviation or Glidepath Deviation (GSD) caution alert
is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly below the
glidepath for the selected approach.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Radio Altitude (Feet)
Nearest
Services/
Music
“GLIDESLOPE”
Utilities
System
Messages
Number of Dots Below Glideslope/Glidepath (4 Dot CDI Example)
Symbols
Figure 11-43 Excessive Below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation Alert Criteria
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-59
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
GSD alerting is only active after departure and the following conditions are
met:
• An ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or LNAV+V approach is active and vertical
navigation indications are being displayed.
• Aircraft is below 1000 feet AGL.
• Gear is configured for landing.
When a GSD caution alert occurs, the aural and visual annunciation
“GLIDESLOPE” is issued. If a GSD caution alert occurs on an LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or
LNAV+V approach, the aural and visual annunciation “GLIDESLOPE” is issued.
11.6.3.9.1 Inhibiting Glideslope Deviation (GSD) Alerts
Proc
NOTE: The Glideslope (G/S) Inhibit function should be activated when
flying a localizer backcourse approach to prevents nuisance GSD alerts.
GSD alerts are inhibited independent from all other FLTA, PDA, and GPWS
alerts.
Charts
Wpt Info
1. While viewing the TAWS-A Page, touch the MENU key.
Map
2. Touch the G/S Inhibit key to inhibit or enable glideslope or
glidepath alerts (choice dependent on current state).
Traffic
Terrain
NOTE: The G/S Inhibit function will only be active for a single approach
and the inhibit function will not remain active for subsequent approaches.
When G/S alerts are inhibited, they are only inhibited for a single approach.
To inhibit G/S alerts on the next approach, the G/S Inhibit function must
be activated again between the first and second approaches.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
NOTE: Glideslope Deviation alerts will not be available if the G/S INHB
function is activated.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-60
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
11.6.3.10 Inhibiting GPWS Alerts (EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR)
Foreword
NOTE: The "Inhibit GPWS" function only affects GPWS alerts (EDR, ECR,
NCR, and FIT). Alerting for FLTA, PDA, and GSD is controlled independently
from the GPWS alerts listed below.
EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited as
a group. Discretion should be used when inhibiting alerts and the GPWS system
should be enabled when appropriate. When these alerts are inhibited, the alert
annunciation “GPWS INH” is shown on the TAWS-A Page annunciation window.
1. While viewing the TAWS-A Page, touch the MENU key.
2. Touch the GPWS Inhibit key to inhibit or enable GPWS alerts
(choice dependent on current state).
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
GPWS Inhibit
Selection
Map
Traffic
GPWS Inhibit
Annunciation
Terrain
Figure 11-44 GPWS Inhibit Annunciation
11.6.4
Weather
Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO)
TAWS-A provides aural advisory alerts as the aircraft descends, beginning at
500 feet above the terrain, as determined by the radar altimeter (if greater than
5 NM from the nearest airport) or 500 feet above the nearest runway threshold
elevation (if less than 5 NM from the nearest airport). Upon descent to this
altitude, TAWS-A issues the aural alert message “Five-hundred.”
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
11-61
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
11.6.5
TAWS-A System Status
During power-up, TAWS-A conducts a self-test of its aural and visual
annunciations. The system test can also be manually initiated. An aural alert
is issued at test completion. TAWS-A System Testing is disabled when ground
speed exceeds 30 knots.
11.6.6
TAWS-A Abnormal Operations
TAWS-A continually monitors several system-critical items such as database
validity, flap and landing gear position, radar altimeter input, and GPS status.
If the GTN does not contain Terrain, Airport Terrain, and Obstacle databases
(or the databases are invalid), the aural message “TAWS System Failure” is
generated along with the “TAWS FAIL” alert annunciation.
TAWS-A requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical
accuracy minimums. Should the navigation solution become degraded or if
the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation “TAWS N/A”
is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-A page, the aural
message “TAWS Not Available” is generated if airborne, some TAWS-A terrain
alerts will not be issued, and GPWS alerting (which are not dependent on GPS
position) will continue to operate. When the GPS signal is re-established and the
aircraft is within the database coverage area, the aural message “TAWS Available”
is generated.
TAWS-A also requires radar altimeter input. Should the radar altimeter input
fail or become degraded, the annunciation “GPWS FAIL” is generated in the
annunciation window and on the TAWS-A Page. The aural message “GPWS
System Failure” is also generated. The “GPWS FAIL” annunciation will also occur
if both GPS altitude and barometric altitude are unavailable. If only the GPWS
system has failed, GPWS-based alerts will not be available, while other TAWS-A
alerting remains unaffected.
Multiple TAWS or GPWS annunciations cannot be displayed at the same
time. When multiple annunciations exist, an asterisk will be present next to the
annunciation. The display of each annunciation will alternate with each being
displayed for approximately five seconds.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-62
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12
WEATHER
Foreword
Weather data are displayed by the Weather function when an optional
weather source is installed. The Wx Weather pages may be oriented to Track
Up, Heading Up, or North Up.
When more weather products are installed, a key for each product will be
shown. Touch the key for the desired weather product. When a single weather
product is installed, touching the Weather key will go directly to the Weather
page.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch To Use
FIS-B Weather
Touch To
Use SiriusXM
Weather
Proc
Touch To Use
Connext Weather
Touch To Use
Stormscope
Weather
Touch To Use
Weather Radar
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 12-1 Weather Product Selection
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 12-2 Weather Page Functional Diagram
NOTE: In data link weather, Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) and
Notices to Airmen (NOTAMs) that do not have geographical locations
cannot be viewed on the GTN.
Messages
NOTE: Stormscope and XM Lightning are mutually exclusive.
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-1
Symbols
Index
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather
conditions.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight
Restriction (TFR) information. Always confirm TFR information through
official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
Com/Nav
FPL
12.1
SiriusXM Weather Products (Optional)
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
NEXRAD
Off
US
Canada
Forecast Period
Current
12 Hour
24 Hour
City Forecast
Surface Analysis
Lightning
Echo Tops
Cloud Tops
METAR
Cell Movement
AIREP/PIREP
County Warnings
Winds Aloft
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Surface
48 Hour
3000 ft ... 45,000 ft
SIGMET/AIRMET
Freezing Level
Icing
Turbulence
Cyclone
Orientation
Utilities
System
Messages
Track Up
Symbols
Heading Up
North Up
Legend
Appendix
Index
36 Hour
Figure 12-3 SiriusXM Weather Functional Diagram
12-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.1.1
Displaying SiriusXM Weather
Foreword
To display SiriusXM Weather information:
1. Touch the Weather key on the Home page and then touch
the SiriusXM key.
Weather
Product
Legends
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
NEXRAD Weather
Com/Nav
Age Of Selected
Weather Products
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Out Of Coverage Area
Selected Altitude
Touch + or - To
Select Altitude
Figure 12-4 SiriusXM Weather Page
2. While viewing the Data Link weather page, touch the Menu
key to configure the Data Link Weather page.
Touch NEXRAD
Key To Select Off,
US, or Canada
NEXRAD
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch Keys To
Select Weather
Product. Green Bar
Indicates Selected
Product.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Weather Overlay
Map Orientation
Touch Legend Key
To Display Legend
Figure 12-5 SiriusXM Weather Menu
System
Messages
3. Once you selected what items you want to display, touch BACK
to return to the Data Link Weather page.
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-3
Index
4. Touch the SiriusXM timestamp to view the age of all selected
weather products.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 12-6 Timestamp Display
Traffic
NOTE: The Timestamp is collapsed when all weather products are current
(software v6.30 and later).
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.1.2
Weather Legend
The Legend key displays a pop-up legend of the currently displayed weather
products.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Legend
key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Legend Of
Selected Weather
Products
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Touch Legend
And Slide Finger
Up And Down To
Scroll Legend
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 12-7 Weather Legend Display
2. Touch the Legend area of the display and while maintaining
light pressure against the display, drag your finger up or down
to scroll through the legend display for the selected weather
products, or use the Up/Down keys.
3. Touch the Legend key again to remove the Legend.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-5
Index
Foreword
Cloud Tops
Surface-Fronts
Freezing Levels
METAR
City Forecast
SIGMET/AIRMET
NEXRAD
Echo Tops
Icing Potential
Winds Aloft
County Warnings
Turbulence
Cell Movement
AIREPS
PIREPS
Lightning
Cyclone
TFR
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 12-8 Available Weather Legends
12.1.3
Symbols
2. Touch the Orientation key to toggle the map view orientation
choices of North Up, Track Up, and Heading Up.
Appendix
Index
Weather Map Orientation
1. While viewing the Weather Data Link function, touch the Menu
key.
12-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.1.4
SiriusXM Product Age
Foreword
When a weather product is active on the Map function or the Weather Data
Link function is selected, the age of the data is displayed on the screen. The age
of the data may not indicate the time between the current GPS time and the time
when the data is assembled, but rather a general indication of the time elapsed
from when the data is received by the GTN.
Updated weather data may or may not contain new weather data. Weather
data is refreshed at intervals that are defined and controlled by SiriusXM Satellite
Radio and its data vendors.
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the designated
intervals, the data is considered expired and is removed from the display.
This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with what is currently being
broadcast by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services. If more than half of the designated
time has elapsed from the time the data is received, the color of the product age
displayed changes to yellow.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
The following table contains the expiration time and XM broadcast interval.
The expiration time is an elapsed time after which the data is considered
expired and is removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data
is consistent with what is currently being broadcast by SiriusXM Satellite Radio
services. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the
data is received, the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow.
The SiriusXM Weather broadcast interval is the time interval when
SiriusXM Satellite Radio broadcasts new signals that may or may not contain
new weather data. Weather data is broadcast at intervals that are defined and
controlled by SiriusXM Satellite Radio.
NOTE: SiriusXM Weather does not provide a timestamp for AIRMETs,
SIGMETs, City Forecasts, County Warnings, Cell Movement and TFR
products. Therefore, the unit does not display a product age indication
for these products.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-7
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
NOTE: The unit displays valid times on the weather map in lieu of product
age indications for SiriusXM Weather Icing Potential, Winds Aloft, and
Turbulence weather products.
Foreword
Getting
Started
NOTE: The unit displays product age for SiriusXM Weather Freezing Level
and Canada Winds Aloft weather products. The product age indication
represents the number of minutes that have elapsed since the weather
product was provided by SiriusXM Weather. The unit does not display the
valid times assigned to the information within these products.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Weather Product
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Expiration
Time
(Minutes)
Estimated
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
30
30
5 (U.S.)
5 (Canada)
5
NEXRAD (NEXRAD and Echo Top are Mutually
Exclusive)
Echo Top (Cloud Top and Echo Top Mutually
Exclusive) (NEXRAD and Echo Top Mutually
Exclusive)
Cloud Top (Cloud Top and Echo Top Mutually
Exclusive)
Lightning
Cell Movement
SIGMETs / AIRMETs
METARs
City Forecast
Surface Analysis
Freezing Levels
Winds Aloft
County Warnings
Cyclone Warnings
Icing Potential (Icing)
60
30
30
30
60
90
90
60
120
90
60
60
90
5
5
5
5
12*
12*
30
30
5
20
15
(SLD)
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
90
15
(Blue - Regular, Yellow - Urgent)
12-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Weather Product
Air Report (AIREP)
Turbulence
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast (TAF)
Expiration
Time
(Minutes)
Estimated
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
90
180
60
60
15
15
15
10
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
* Data for longer forecast periods may not be broadcast at this rate.
FPL
Table 12-1 SiriusXM Weather Products and Data Timing
12.1.5
Direct-To
NEXRAD
WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar), is a network of
158 high-resolution Doppler radar systems that are operated by the National
Weather Service (NWS). NEXRAD data provides centralized meteorological
information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations.
The maximum range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250 NM. The NEXRAD
network provides important information about severe weather for air traffic
safety.
NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection,
processing, and dissemination of NEXRAD images can be significant and may
not reflect the current radar synopsis. Due to the inherent delays and the relative
age of the data, it should be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never
use NEXRAD data for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Instead, use it in an early-warning capacity of pre-departure and en
route evaluation.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is
shown. This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual
radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the
weather severity level.
Services/
Music
NOTE: Due to similarities in color schemes, the display of Echo Tops cannot
be shown with Cloud Tops and NEXRAD.
System
Utilities
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-9
Index
1. While viewing the SiriusXM Weather menu, touch the NEXRAD
key to display the NEXRAD selections.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 12-9 SiriusXM NEXRAD Weather Selection
2. Touch the desired NEXRAD source selection and then the
Back key to view the weather information.
Proc
Charts
NEXRAD Source
Age Of Selected
Weather Products
Wpt Info
Map
NEXRAD Weather
Traffic
Present Position
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 12-10 SiriusXM NEXRAD Weather
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 12-11 NEXRAD Weather Legend
12.1.5.1
Reflectivity
Charts
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver.
Colors on the NEXRAD display directly correlate to the level of detected
reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply
put, certain types of weather reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a
radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the weather hazard level. For
instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative
to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy
reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the letter Z). The value of Z
increases as the returned signal strength increases.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-11
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
12.1.5.2
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to
determine cloud layers or precipitation characteristics. For example, it is
not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet hail, and rain.
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation
angle. An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at
close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over the site.
• In the Cell Movement function, “Base” height is actually the height of
maximum radar reflection and that the “Base” and “Top” heights are based
on radar height and not MSL or AGL.
• Each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers (2.15 NM). The intensity level reflected by each square
represents the highest level of NEXRAD data sampled within the area.
Wpt Info
Map
Block Area Is 4 km2
(2.15 NM2)
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Block Area Is 4 km2
(2.15 NM2)
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 12-12 NEXRAD Data Blocks
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar
scans
12-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
Foreword
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed
because it is unknown.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Precipitation Above 52°N
FPL
Direct-To
Out Of Coverage Area
Proc
Figure 12-13 NEXRAD Data - Canada
12.1.5.3
Charts
Animating NEXRAD
Wpt Info
NOTE: Animated NEXRAD functionality is available in software v6.00 and
later.
When US or Canada NEXRAD is enabled for display and more than two
NEXRAD images have been received by the GTN, the NEXRAD display can be
animated on the SiriusXM Weather page. As new NEXRAD images are received,
the GTN will automatically store them for future animation. The GTN can
animate up to six NEXRAD images from oldest to newest, showing each for one
second and the newest for two seconds.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-13
Index
Touch To Start NEXRAD Animation
Foreword
Product Age
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 12-14 Start NEXRAD Animation
1. While viewing the SiriusXM Weather page with NEXRAD
enabled for display, touch the NXRD key to start the NEXRAD
animation.
Charts
Wpt Info
NOTE: Weather Forecast, Cloud Tops, and Cell Movement will automatically
be turned off while NEXRAD is animating.
Map
2. Touch the NXRD key to stop the NEXRAD animation. The
animation will also stop when leaving the page or turning off
NEXRAD on the SiriusXM weather page.
Traffic
Terrain
Touch To Stop NEXRAD
Animation
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 12-15 Start NEXRAD Animation
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.1.6
Echo Tops
Echo Tops data shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest
radar echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or
clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at which precipitation is detected.
This information is determined from NEXRAD data.
NOTE: Due to similarities in color schemes, the display of Echo Tops cannot
be shown with Cloud Tops and NEXRAD.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Echo
Tops key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Product Age
Proc
Charts
Present Position
Wpt Info
Echo Tops
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 12-16 Echo Tops
Weather
2. Touch the Echo Tops key again to turn it off.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 12-17 Echo Tops Legend
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
12-15
Index
Foreword
12.1.7
NOTE: Due to similarities in color schemes, it is not possible to display
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Cloud Tops
Echo Tops and Cloud Tops at the same time.
Cloud tops data depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite
imagery.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Cloud
Tops key.
FPL
Product Age
Direct-To
Proc
Cloud Tops
Charts
Present Position
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 12-18 Cloud Tops
Weather
2. Touch the Cloud Tops key again to turn it off.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 12-19 Cloud Tops Legend
Appendix
Index
12-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.1.8
Cell Movement
Cell Movement data shows the location and movement of storm cells as
identified by a ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares,
with direction of movement indicated with short, orange arrows.
NOTE: In the Cell Movement function, “Base” height is actually the height
of maximum radar reflection and that the “Base” and “Top” heights are
based on radar height and not MSL or AGL.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Cell
Movement key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Product Age
Proc
Cell Movement
(Position And Direction
Of Movement)
Charts
Present Position
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 12-20 Cell Movement
Weather
2. Touch a Cell Movement icon to view cell details.
Top Height Reported
as Maximum Altitude
of Reflected Precip.
Base Height Reported
as Altitude of Maximum
Reflectivity
Nearest
Cell Speed and
Direction
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 12-21 Cell Movement Detail
3. In the Menu, Touch the Cell Movement key again to turn it off.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 12-22 Cell Movement Legend
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-17
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
12.1.9
SIGMETs and AIRMETs
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METerological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen's
METerological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather
considered of importance to aircraft.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the
SIGMET/AIRMET key.
Com/Nav
IFR Line
FPL
SIGMET Line
Turbulence Line
Direct-To
Proc
Present Position
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 12-23 SIGMETs and AIRMETs
2. Touch the SIGMET/AIRMET key again to turn it off.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 12-24 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.1.10 County Warnings
Foreword
County Warnings data provides specific public awareness and protection
weather warnings from the National Weather Service. This can include
information on fires, tornadoes, severe thunderstorms, flood conditions, and
other natural disasters.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the County
Warnings key. Touch the County Warnings symbol for detailed
information.
Cold Front
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
County Warning Detail
Charts
County Warning Symbol
- Touch To Display Detail
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 12-25 County Warnings Data
2. Touch the County Warnings key again to turn it off.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 12-26 County Warnings Legend
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-19
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
12.1.11 Freezing Level
Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and
location at which the Freezing Level is found. When no data is displayed for a
given altitude, the data for that altitude has not been received, or is out of date
and has been removed from the display. New data appears on the next update.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the
Freezing Level key.
Com/Nav
FPL
Product Age
Direct-To
Freezing Level Line
Proc
Freezing Level Line
Present Position
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 12-27 Freezing Level
Terrain
2. Touch the Freezing Level key again to turn it off.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 12-28 Freezing Level Legend
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.1.12 METARs
Foreword
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report), known as an Aviation Routine
Weather Report, is the standard format for current weather observations.
METARs are updated hourly and are considered current. METARs typically
contain information about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation,
cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also
contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the METAR
key. Touch an airport symbol for more METAR detail.
Product Age
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
METAR Detail
Charts
METAR Flags
Wpt Info
Touch Airport For
METAR Detail
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 12-29 METARs
Weather
2. Touch the METAR key in the Menu again to turn it off.
METAR Symbol
Nearest
Description
VFR (ceiling greater than 3000 ft. AGL and
visibility greater than five miles)
Marginal VFR (ceiling 1000–3000 ft. AGL
and/or visibility three to five miles)
IFR (ceiling 500 to below 1000 ft. AGL and/or
visibility one mile to less than three miles)
Low IFR (ceiling below 500 ft. AGL or visibility
less than one mile)
Unknown
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Table 12-2 METAR Symbols
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-21
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
12.1.13 Cyclone
The current location of the cyclone is shown along with its projected path
with the date and time.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Cyclone
key.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Projected Path With Date
And Time
Charts
Current Position Of Cyclone
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 12-30 Cyclone
Traffic
2. Touch the Cyclone key again to turn it off.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 12-31 Cyclone Legend
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-22
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.1.14 Lightning
Foreword
Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning
strikes. A yellow cross icon represents a strike that has occurred within a
2 kilometer (approx. 1 NM) region. The exact location of the lightning is not
displayed.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the
Lightning key.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Product Age
Direct-To
Lightning Strikes
Proc
Present Position
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 12-32 Lightning
Terrain
2. Touch the Lightning key again to turn it off.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 12-33 Lightning Legend
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-23
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
12.1.15 City Forecast
City Forecast shows current and future weather conditions for various cities.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the City
Forecast key.
2. Touch the Forecast Period key and select the desired time
increment.
3. Touch any City Forecast symbol for weather details.
FPL
City Forecast Symbol
Direct-To
Proc
City Forecast Detail
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 12-34 City Forecast
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 12-35 City Forecast Legend
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-24
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.1.16 Surface Analysis
Foreword
NOTE: In software v6.21 and earlier, Surface Analysis and City Forecast
are combined features of the Weather Forecast product.
The Surface Analysis map shows regional weather forecasts for a selected
time period. The map shows high and low pressure centers and their associated
frontal movement.
1. While viewing the SiriusXM Weather menu, touch the Surface
Analysis key.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 12-36 Surface Analysis and Fronts Legend
2. Touch the Forecast Period key and select the desired time
increment.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 12-37 Select Forecast Time Period
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-25
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
12.1.17 Winds Aloft
Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface
and at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be selected in 3,000 foot increments from
the surface up to 45,000 feet.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Winds
Aloft key.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wind Symbols
Charts
Wpt Info
Selected Wind Altitude
Map
Touch To Select
Wind Altitude
Traffic
Figure 12-38 Winds Aloft
2. Touch the WX Aloft ALT – or + keys to increase or
decrease the reporting altitude of the winds aloft in
3,000 foot increments. The selected altitude is shown in a
window above the altitude keys.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
3. Touch the Winds Aloft key again to turn it off.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 12-39 Winds Aloft Legend
Appendix
Index
12-26
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.1.18 Icing
The Icing product shows a graphic view of the current icing environment
in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
type). The Icing product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current
conditions at the time of the analysis. Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing
conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large, super cooled
water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat
areas are depicted as black and red blocks over the Icing colors. Icing and SLD
data are shown between 1,000 feet and 30,000 feet in 3,000 foot increments.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Icing
key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
SLD Threat
Charts
Icing Potential Shading
Wpt Info
Present Position
Map
Traffic
Selected Icing Altitude
Terrain
Touch To Select
Icing Altitude
Weather
Figure 12-40 Icing and SLD
2. Touch the WX Aloft ALT – or + keys to increase or decrease
the reporting altitude of icing in 3,000 foot increments. The
selected altitude is shown in a window above the altitude keys.
3. Touch the Icing key again to turn it off.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 12-41 Icing Legend
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-27
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
12.1.19 Turbulence
Turbulence data identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude
air mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe
or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000 and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is
intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
1. While viewing the Weather Data Link menu, touch the
Turbulence key.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Turbulence Shading
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Selected Turbulence Altitude
Traffic
Figure 12-42 Turbulence
Terrain
2. Touch the WX Aloft ALT – or + keys to increase or decrease
the reporting altitude for turbulence in 3,000 foot increments.
The selected altitude is shown in a window above the altitude
keys.
Weather
Nearest
3. Touch the Turbulence key again to turn it off.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 12-43 Turbulence Legend
Appendix
Index
12-28
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.1.20 AIREP/PIREP
Foreword
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for
a particular route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported
or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs.
A PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as
low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are
issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the AIREP/
PREP key.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Urgent PIREP
Symbol (Yellow).
Touch For Details.
AIREP Symbol
(Green). Touch For
Details.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Routine PIREP
Symbol (Blue).
Touch For Details.
Map
Traffic
Figure 12-44 Weather Display With AIREP/PIREP Information Active
2. Touch a weather information symbol to view details for that
item.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
AIREP Details
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch An
AIREP/PIREP
Symbol For Detail
Messages
Figure 12-45 AIREP/PIREP Information Detail
3. Touch the Back key to remove the detailed information.
4. Touch the AIREP/PREP key again to turn it off.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
System
Symbols
Appendix
12-29
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
12.2
StormScope® Weather
12.2.1
StormScope® (Optional)
NOTE: Refer to the WX-500 Pilot’s Guide for a detailed description of the
WX-500 StormScope.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
The WX-500 StormScope Weather Mapping Sensor is a passive weather
avoidance system that detects electrical discharges associated with thunderstorms
within a 200 NM radius of the aircraft. The StormScope measures relative
bearing and distance of thunderstorm-related electrical activity and reports
the information to the display. Interfaces are currently only available for the
WX-500 StormScope System.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
View
Terrain
Cell
Strike
Figure 12-46 StormScope Functional Diagram
Nearest
Utilities
Arc
Mode
Weather
Services/
Music
360
For lightning display interpretation, study the examples in the WX-500
Pilot's Guide that are designed to help you relate the cell or strike patterns
shown on the display to the size and location of thunderstorms that may be near
your aircraft.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-30
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Symbol
Description
Foreword
6
Getting
Started
60
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
120
Com/Nav
180
FPL
Table 12-3 StormScope Symbols
1. From the Home page, touch the Weather key (and then the
StormScope key if present) to reach the StormScope function.
Orientation
Annunciation.
HDG N/A - Heading Is
Not Available.
Touch
To Clear
Lightning
Strikes
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Range Ring
Map
Lightning Strikes
Traffic
Lightning
Display Mode
(Cell or Strike)
Terrain
Weather
Lightning
Strike Rate
Figure 12-47 StormScope Display (360º Display View Shown)
Nearest
2. Touch the Menu key to setup the StormScope display.
Services/
Music
Utilities
Lightning
Display Mode
(Strike Selected)
Arc View
Selected
System
Messages
Figure 12-48 StormScope Menu
3. Touch the 360° or Arc to select the display view.
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-31
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
12.2.2
Routinely clearing the StormScope Page of all discharge points is a good
way to determine if a storm is building or dissipating. In a building storm
discharge points reappear faster and in larger numbers. In a dissipating storm
discharge points appear slower and in smaller numbers.
1. While viewing the Weather StormScope page, touch the Clear
Strikes key to clear lightning strikes.
Com/Nav
FPL
2. Lightning strikes will be cleared from the display and the Rate
value will be reset.
Direct-To
NOTE: The GTN displays StormScope data with or without a heading source.
If no heading source is available, the "HDG N/A" annunciation appears in
the upper right corner of the page. When flying without a heading source,
the pilot must clear all strikes following each heading change.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Clearing the StormScope® Page
12.2.3
Changing the StormScope® Display View
The Lightning Page displays either a 360° or a 120° viewing angle.
1. While viewing the Weather StormScope page, touch MENU.
Traffic
2. Touch the 360° or Arc to select the display view.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 12-49 StormScope 360º and Arc Display Views
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-32
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.2.4
Changing the StormScope® Data Mode
Foreword
Cell display mode uses a clustering program to locate storm cells instead of
individual discharge points. This mode is most useful during periods of heavy
storm activity. Strike display mode is used during periods of light electrical
activity. It is useful in plotting initial lightning discharges associated with a
building thunderstorm.
1. While viewing the Weather StormScope page, touch MENU.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
2. Touch Cell or Strike to select the display mode.
Direct-To
Proc
12.2.5
Changing the StormScope® Data Display
Range
Charts
StormScope data can be displayed on the Map page 2,000 NM zoom scale,
but the data only goes out as far as the StormScope can report (200 NM). The
500 NM zoom scale will display all lightning data. Scales greater than 500 NM
do not display any additional StormScope data.
While viewing the StormScope page touch the In and Out
keys to display a larger or smaller area.
12.2.6
Displaying StormScope® Data on the Map
Page
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
The Map Page displays cell or strike information using yellow lightning
strike symbology overlaid on a moving map. This added capability improves
situational awareness, which in turn makes it much easier for the pilot to relate
storm activity to airports, NAVAIDs, obstacles and other ground references. For
details about viewing Stormscope data on the Map page, refer to
section 9.1.1.7.
NOTE: The selected lightning display type, cell or strike, will be shown the
same on both the StormScope and the Map pages.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-33
Index
Foreword
12.3
Weather Radar
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
The GTN 7XX can display weather radar from a Garmin GWX system or from
selected 3rd party radars. Only one weather radar system may be interfaced to
the system. For detailed information on the operation of 3rd party radars, refer
to their specific documentation.
Com/Nav
12.3.1
Getting
Started
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Garmin GWX Radar Description
The Garmin GWX 68 and GWX 70 Airborne Color Weather Radars combine
excellent range and adjustable scanning profiles with a high-definition target
display.
To focus radar scanning on specific areas, Sector Scanning offers
pilot-adjustable horizontal scan angles of 20º, 40º, 60º, or 90º (up to 120º
with the GWX 70). A vertical scanning function helps to analyze storm tops,
gradients, and cell buildup activity at various altitudes.
See the documentation of each radar for specific features.
12.3.1.1
Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar
The term RADAR is an acronym for RAdio Detecting and Ranging. Pulsed
radar locates targets by transmitting a microwave pulse beam that, upon
encountering a target, is then reflected back to the radar receiver as a return
“echo.” The microwave pulses are focused and radiated by the antenna, with
the most intense energy in the center of the beam and decreasing intensity near
the edge. The same antenna is used for both transmitting and receiving. The
returned signal is then processed and displayed on the GTN 7XX.
Radar detection is a two-way process that requires 12.36 micro-seconds for
the transmitted microwave pulses to travel out and back for each nautical mile
of target range. It takes 123.6 micro-seconds for a transmitted pulse to make the
round trip if a target is 10 NM away.
The GWX weather radar should be used to avoid severe weather, not for
penetrating severe weather. The decision to fly into an area of radar targets
depends on target intensity, spacing between the targets, aircraft capabilities and
pilot experience. Pulse type weather radar detects only precipitation, not clouds
or turbulence. The display may indicate clear areas between intense returns, but
this does not necessarily mean it is safe to fly between them. Only Doppler radar
can detect turbulence.
12-34
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Airborne weather radar has other capabilities beyond weather detection. It
also has the ability to detect and provide distance to objects on the ground, such
as, cities, mountains, coastlines, rivers, lakes, and oceans.
12.3.1.2
Antenna Beam Illumination
It is important to understand the concept of the antenna beam illumination.
The radar beam is much like the beam of a spotlight. The farther the beam
travels, the wider it gets. The radar is only capable of “seeing” what is inside the
boundaries of the beam.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 12-50 Radar Beam from 12 inch Antenna
Map
The vertical dimensions of the radar beam are shown in the figure above and
the same holds true for the horizontal dimensions. In other words, the beam will
be as wide as it is tall. Note that it is possible not to see areas of precipitation on
the radar display because of the antenna tilt setting. With the antenna tilt set to
zero in this illustration, the beam overshoots the precipitation at 15 NM. The
curvature of the earth can also be a factor, especially at range settings of 150 NM
or more.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
320 nm
System
Messages
Figure 12-51 Radar Beam in Relation to the Curvature of the Earth
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-35
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
12.3.1.3
Radar Signal Attenuation
The phenomena of weather attenuation needs to be kept in mind whenever
operating the weather radar. When the radar signal is transmitted, it is
progressively absorbed and scattered, making the signal weaker. This weakening,
or attenuation, is caused by two primary sources, distance and precipitation.
Attenuation because of distance is due to the fact that the amount of radar
energy at a distance from the antenna is inversely proportional to the square of
the distance. The reflected radar energy from a target 40 miles away that fills
the radar beam will be one fourth the energy reflected from an equivalent target
20 miles away. This would appear to the operator that the storm is gaining
intensity as the aircraft gets closer. Internal circuitry within the GWX system
compensates for much of this distance attenuation.
Attenuation due to precipitation is not as predictable as distance attenuation.
It is also more intense. As the radar signal passes through moisture, a portion
of the radar energy is reflected back to the antenna. However, much of the
energy is absorbed. If precipitation is very heavy, or covers a large area, the
signal may not reach completely through the area of precipitation. The weather
radar system cannot distinguish between an attenuated signal and area of no
precipitation. If the signal has been fully attenuated, the radar will display a
“radar shadow.” This appears as an end to the precipitation when, in fact, the
heavy rain may extend much further. A cell containing heavy precipitation may
block another cell located behind the first, preventing it from being displayed
on the radar. Never fly into these shadowed areas and never assume that all of
the heavy precipitation is being displayed unless another cell or a ground target
can be seen beyond the heavy cell. The WATCH™ feature of the GWX Weather
Radar system can help in identifying these shadowed areas. Areas in question
will appear as “shadowed” or gray area on the radar display. Proper use of the
antenna tilt control can also help detect radar shadows.
Attenuation can also be due to poor maintenance or degradation of the
radome. Even the smallest amount of wear and tear, pitting, and pinholes on the
radome surface can cause damage and system inefficiency.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-36
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.3.2
Radar Signal Reflectivity
12.3.2.1
Precipitation
Foreword
Precipitation or objects more dense than water, such as earth or solid
structures, will be detected by the weather radar. The weather radar will not
detect clouds, thunderstorms or turbulence directly. It detects precipitation
associated with clouds, thunderstorms, and turbulence. The best radar signal
reflectors are raindrops, wet snow or wet hail. The larger the raindrop the
better it reflects. The size of the precipitation droplet is the most important
factor in radar reflectivity. Because large drops in a small concentrated area are
characteristic of a severe thunderstorm, the radar displays the storm as a strong
return. Ice, dry snow, and dry hail have low reflective levels and often will not be
displayed by the radar. A cloud that contains only small raindrops, such as fog
or drizzle, will not reflect enough radar energy to produce a measurable target
return.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 12-52 Precipitation Type and Reflectivity
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-37
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
12.3.2.2
The intensity of ground target returns depends upon the angle at which the
radar beam strikes the ground target (Angle of Incidence) and the reflective
properties of that target. The gain can be adjusted so shorelines, rivers, lakes,
and cities are well defined. Increasing gain too much causes the display to fill in
between targets, thus obscuring some landmarks.
Cities normally provide a strong return signal. While large buildings and
structures provide good returns, small buildings can be shadowed from the
radar beam by the taller buildings. As the aircraft approaches, and shorter ranges
are selected, details become more noticeable as the highly reflective regular lines
and edges of the city become more defined.
Bodies of water such as lakes, rivers, and oceans are not good reflectors,
and normally do not provide good returns. The energy is reflected in a forward
scatter angle with inadequate energy being returned. They can appear as dark
areas on the display. However, rough or choppy water is a better reflector and
will provide stronger returns from the downwind sides of the waves.
Mountains also provide strong return signals to the antenna, but also block
the areas behind. However, over mountainous terrain, the radar beam can be
reflected back and forth in the mountain passes or off canyon walls using up all
or most of the radar energy. In this case, no return signal is received from
this area causing the display to show a dark spot which could indicate a
pass where no pass exists.
12.3.2.3
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Ground Returns
Angle of Incidence
The angle at which the radar beam strikes the target is called the Angle of
Incidence. Incident angle (“A”) is illustrated below. This directly affects the
detectable range, the area of illumination, and the intensity of the displayed
target returns. A large incident angle gives the radar system a smaller detectable
range and lower display intensity due to minimized reflection of the radar energy.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-38
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 12-53 Angle of Incidence
A smaller incident angle gives the radar a larger detectable range of operation
and the target display will show a higher intensity. Since more radar energy is
reflected back to the antenna with a low incident angle, the resulting detectable
range is increased for mountainous terrain.
12.3.3
Operating Distance
Wpt Info
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level (MPEL) (GWX 68)
The zone in which the radiation level exceeds the US Government standard
of 1 mW/cm2, is the semicircular area of at least 11 feet from the 12 inch antenna
as indicated in the illustration below. All personnel must remain outside of this
zone. With a scanning or rotating beam, the averaged power density at the MPEL
boundary is significantly reduced.
12.3.3.2
Charts
Map
The following information establishes a minimum safe distance from the
antenna for personnel near an operating airborne weather radar. The minimum
safe distance is based upon the FCC’s exposure limit at 9.3 to 9.5 GHz for general
population/uncontrolled environments which is 1 mW/cm2. See Advisory
Circular 20-68B for more information on safe distance determination.
12.3.3.1
Proc
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level (MPEL)
(Other Radars)
Messages
See the appropriate documentation for MPEL.
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-39
Index
Foreword
MPEL
Boundary
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
11’ for 12” antenna
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 12-54 MPEL Boundary
12.3.4
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup
The following discussion is a simple method for setting up the weather radar
antenna tilt for most situations. It is not to be considered an all encompassing
setup that will work in all situations, but this method does provide good overall
parameters for the monitoring of threats. Ultimately, it is desired to have the
antenna tilted so that the bottom of the radar beam is four degrees below parallel
with the ground. The following discussion explains one way of achieving this.
With the aircraft flying level, adjust the antenna tilt so ground returns are
displayed at a distance that equals the aircraft’s current altitude (AGL) divided
by 1,000. For example, if the aircraft is at 14,000 feet, adjust the tilt so the front
edge of ground returns are displayed at 14 NM. Note this antenna tilt angle
setting. Now, raise the antenna tilt 6º above this setting. The bottom of the radar
beam is now angled down 4º from parallel with the ground.
Practical Application Using the Basic Tilt Setup
At this point, when flying at altitudes between 2,000 and 30,000 feet AGL,
any displayed target return should scrutinized. If the displayed target advances
on the screen to 5 NM of the aircraft, avoid it. This may be either weather or
ground returns that are 2,000 feet or less below the aircraft. Raising the antenna
tilt 4º can help separate ground returns from weather returns in relatively flat
terrain. This will place the bottom of the radar beam level with the ground.
Return the antenna tilt to the previous setting after a few sweeps.
12-40
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
If the aircraft is above 29,000 feet, be cautious of any target return that gets
to 30 NM or closer. This is likely a thunderstorm that has a top high enough that
the aircraft cannot fly over it safely.
If the aircraft altitude is 15,000 feet or lower, set the displayed range to
60 NM. Closely monitor anything that enters the display.
4000
Change in Antenna Tilt
+4°
+3°
+2°
+1°
0°
-1°
-2°
-3°
-4°
3000
2000
1000
0
1000
2000
3000
10 nm
4000
Vertical Change of Radar Beam (feet)
Also, after setting up the antenna tilt angle as described previously, ground
returns can be monitored for possible threats. The relationship between antenna
tilt angle, altitude, and distance is one degree of tilt equals 100 feet of altitude
for every one nautical mile.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 12-55 Vertical Change in Radar Beam per Nautical Mile
Therefore, with the antenna tilt set so that the bottom of the beam is four
degrees below parallel with the ground, a target return at 10 NM is approximately
4,000 feet below the aircraft; at 20 NM, 8,000 feet; at 50 NM, 20,000 feet. In
other words, at this tilt setting, a ground return (such as a mountain peak)
being displayed at 10 NM would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of
4,000 feet. If that ground target return moves to 5 NM, maximum distance
below the aircraft will be 2,000 feet.
This setup will provide a good starting point for practical use of the GWX
radar. There are many other factors to consider in order to become proficient at
using weather radar in all situations.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-41
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
12.3.5
Weather Mapping and Interpretation
12.3.5.1
Weather display Interpretation
When evaluating various target returns on the weather radar display, the
colors denote approximate rainfall intensity and rates as shown in the table
below.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
GWX 68 Radars
Weather
Mode
Color
Wpt Info
Map
Approximate
Rainfall Rate
(in/hr)
Approximate
Intensity
BLACK
< 23 dBZ
< .01
< 23 dBZ
0
GREEN
23 dBZ to < 33 dBZ
.01 - 0.1
23 dBZ to < 33 dBZ
1
YELLOW
33 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
0.1 - 0.5
33 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
2
RED
41 dBZ to < 50 dBZ
0.5 - 2
> 41 dBZ
3
MAGENTA
50 dBZ and greater
>2
Turbulence Detection
4
Table 12-4 Precipitation Intensity Levels
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
3rd Party
Radars
Radar Return
Level (see
radar documentation
for details)
Approximate
Intensity
Proc
Charts
GWX 70 Radars
12.3.5.2 Thunderstorms
Updrafts and downdrafts in thunderstorms carry water through the cloud.
The more severe the drafts, the greater the number and size of the precipitation
droplets. With this in mind, the following interpretations can be made from what
is displayed on the weather radar. Avoid these areas by an extra wide margin.
• In areas where the displayed target intensity is red or magenta (indicating
large amounts of precipitation), the turbulence is considered severe.
• Areas that show steep color gradients (intense color changes) over thin bands
or short distances suggest irregular rainfall rate and strong turbulence.
• Areas that show red or magenta are associated with hail or turbulence, as
well as heavy precipitation. Vertical scanning and antenna tilt management
may be necessary to identify areas of maximum intensity.
Along squall lines (multiple cells or clusters of cells in a line), individual cells
may be in different stages of development. Areas between closely spaced, intense
targets may contain developing clouds not having enough moisture to produce a
12-42
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
return. However, these areas could have strong updrafts or downdrafts. Targets
showing wide areas of green are generally precipitation without severe turbulence.
Irregularities in the target return may also indicate turbulence, appearing as
“hooks,” “fingers,” or “scalloped” edges. These irregularities may be present in
green areas with no yellow, red, or magenta areas and should be treated as highly
dangerous areas. Avoid these areas as if they were red or magenta areas.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Squall Line
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Steep Gradient
Hook or Finger
Scalloped Edge
Wpt Info
Figure 12-56 Cell Irregularities
Thunderstorm development is rapid. A course may become blocked within
a short time. When displaying shorter ranges, periodically select a longer range
to see if problems are developing further out. That can help prevent getting
trapped in a “blind alley” or an area that is closed at one end by convective
weather.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 12-57 The “Blind Alley” Overhead View
In areas of multiple heavy cells, use the Vertical Scan feature along with
antenna tilt management to examine the areas. Remember to avoid shadowed
areas behind targets.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-43
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 12-58 The “Blind Alley” Vertical Scan
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
12.3.5.3 Tornadoes
There is no conclusive radar target return characteristics which will identify
a tornado, however, tornadoes may be present if the following characteristics
are observed:
• A narrow, finger-like portion, as shown on the previous page, extends and,
in a short time, curls into a hook and closes on itself.
• A “hook” which may be in the general shape of the numeral “6,” especially
if bright and projecting from the southwest quadrant (northeast quadrant in
the southern hemisphere) of a major thunderstorm.
• V- shaped notches.
• Doughnut shapes.
These shapes do not always indicate tornadoes, nor are tornado returns
limited to these characteristics. Confirmed radar observations of tornadoes most
often have not shown shapes different from those of a normal thunderstorm
display.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-44
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.3.5.4 Hail
Hail results from updrafts carrying water high enough to freeze. Therefore,
the higher the top of a thunderstorm, the greater the probability that it contains
hail. Vertically scanning the target return can give the radar top of a thunderstorm
that contains hail. Radar top is the top of a storm cell as detected by radar. It is
not the actual top, or true top of the storm. The actual top of a storm cell is seen
with the eyes in clear air and may be much higher than the radar top. The actual
top does not indicate the top of the hazardous area.
Hail can fall below the minimum reflectivity threshold for radar detection.
It can have a film of water on its surface, making its reflective characteristics
similar to a very large water droplet. Because of this film of water, and because
hail stones usually are larger than water droplets, thunderstorms with large
amounts of wet hail return stronger signals than those with rain. Some hail
shafts are extremely narrow (100 yards or less) and make poor radar targets. In
the upper regions of a cell where ice particles are “dry” (no liquid coating), target
returns are less intense.
Hail shafts are associated with the same radar target return characteristics
as tornados. U-shaped cloud edges 3 to 7 miles across can also indicate hail.
These target returns appear quite suddenly along any edge of the cell outline.
They also change in intensity and shape in a matter of seconds, making vigilant
monitoring essential.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-45
Index
Foreword
12.4
WARNING: Begin transmitting only when it is safe to do so. When
transmitting while the aircraft is on the ground, no personnel or objects
should be within 11 feet of the antenna.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
CAUTION: In Standby mode, the antenna is parked at the center line. It
is always a good idea to put the radar in Standby mode before taxiing the
aircraft to prevent the antenna from bouncing on the bottom stop and
possibly causing damage to the radar assembly.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
GWX Radar Operation in Weather Mode
When the weather radar system is in the Weather or Ground Map mode, the
system automatically switches to Standby mode on landing.
Charts
Wpt Info
Tilt
Show Bearing
Map
Bearing
Traffic
Turbulence
Detection (GWX 70)
GCS (GWX 70)
ACT (GWX 70)
Watch Shading
Weather Alert
Stabilize
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Mode
Off
Weather
Ground
Test
Scan
Horizontal
Vertical
Sector Scan
20
Services/
Music
Standby
40
60
90 (GWX 70)
Full
Gain
Figure 12-59 Weather Radar Functional Diagram
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-46
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.4.1
Viewing Weather on the Weather Radar Page
1. From the Home page, touch the Weather key on the Home
page and then touch the Radar key (if necessary).
Antenna
Stabilization
Orientation
Bearing Line
Scan Line
Range Scale
Precipitation
Scale
Bearing Line
Display
Bearing Line
Adjustment
Tilt
Adjustment
Gain Calibration
Setting
Operating Mode
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Scan
Direction
Sector Scan
Selection
Map
Figure 12-60 Weather Radar Page (Horizontal Scan)
Traffic
2. Touch the MODE key and then touch the function desired.
3. The color-coded precipitation scale is shown on the left side
of the display. A table describing the precipitation intensity
levels is in section 12.3.5.1.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Precipitation
Color Values
Utilities
System
GWX 68
GWX 70
Messages
Figure 12-61 Weather Radar Precipitation Scale
4. Touch the IN and OUT keys to select the desired range. Touch
the desired keys to set any required values as described below.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-47
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
12.4.2
Configuring Weather Radar Page
To configure the WX Radar page, the Radar Mode must be in Ground,
Weather, or Test mode. When one of these modes is selected, a warm-up
period is initiated (countdown is displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is
complete, the selected mode will be available.
1. While on the ground, touch MODE.
2. In the Weather Radar Mode window, touch STANDBY.
FPL
Direct-To
Touch the Desired Mode
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 12-62 Weather Radar Mode Selection
Traffic
3.
Terrain
Touch MODE and select Weather, Ground, or Test. A caution
window is displayed.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 12-63 Caution for Radar Activation Confirmation
4. Touch OK to acknowledge the selected mode will be activated.
System
Messages
If Weather or Ground is selected, a warm-up period is initiated
(countdown is displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is
complete, the radar begins transmitting.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-48
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.4.3
Vertically Scanning a Storm Cell
Foreword
When vertically scanning with stabilization ON, the actual physical area
that the radar is sweeping may not match the vertical scan display. This occurs
whenever the aircraft pitch is not at 0 degrees. To compensate for this, the vertical
display will “erase” the portion of the vertical display that is no longer being
scanned. It will appear that the vertical sweep “wraps around” when reaching
the end of the GTN vertical display. The radar is simply “erasing” the portion of
the vertical display that is not currently being scanned.
NOTE: Vertical scanning of a storm cell should be done with the aircraft
wings level to avoid constant adjustment of the Bearing Line.
Antenna
Stabilization
Scan Line
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Tilt Line
Precipitation
Scale
Wpt Info
Map
Range Scale
Tilt
Adjustment
Gain Calibration
Setting
Operating Mode
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Scan
Direction
Show Tilt
Selection
Nearest
Figure 12-64 Weather Radar Page (Vertical Scan)
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-49
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
12.4.4
Adjusting the Antenna Tilt Angle
In order to make an accurate interpretation of a storm cell, the radar beam
should be pointed at the wet part of the weather cell to record the proper rainfall
intensity (color level). The ideal aiming point is just below the freezing level of
the storm. The best way to find this point is to use the Vertical Scan feature. The
antenna tilt angle can be centered on the strongest return area in the vertical
scan to get a more accurate view of the coverage and intensity of the target in
the horizontal scan.
1. While viewing the WX Radar page touch the TILT key. An
adjustment window will be displayed.
Proc
Charts
Numeric Adjusted
Tilt Angle
Wpt Info
Touch To Adjust Tilt Angle
Map
Traffic
Figure 12-65 Adjusting Tilt
Terrain
2. Touch the Up and Down Arrow keys to adjust the Tilt. The
range is DN 15° to UP 15°.
Weather
3. Touch Back to save the values and return to the Radar
display.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-50
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.4.5
Adjusting the Bearing Line
1. Touch the SHOW BRG key. This displays the Bearing Line in
Horizontal Scanning mode.
2. To adjust the Bearing Line, touch the BEARING key. An
adjustment window will be displayed.
Touch To Adjust Bearing
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Numeric Adjusted Bearing
Value And Direction
Proc
Figure 12-66 Bearing Line Adjustment
Charts
3. Touch the Gain Adjustment arrow keys to change the gain.
4. Touch Back to save the values and return to the Radar
display.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-51
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
12.4.6
Adjusting Gain
Gain is used to adjust the sensitivity of the radar receiver. It can be used to
adjust the characteristics of the returns from the surface.
WARNING: Changing the gain in weather mode will cause precipitation
intensity to be displayed as a color not representative of the true intensity.
Remember to return the gain setting to : “Calibrated” for viewing the
actual intensity of precipitation.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
1. While viewing the WX Radar page touch the GAIN key. The
Gain Adjustment Bar will be displayed.
FPL
Direct-To
Numeric Adjusted
Gain Value
Proc
Relative Adjusted
Gain Value
Touch to Return
to Calibrated Gain
Charts
Wpt Info
Touch To Adjust Gain
Map
Figure 12-67 Gain Adjustment
2. Touch the Gain Adjustment arrow keys to change the gain.
Traffic
Terrain
3. Touch Back to save the values and return to the Radar display.
Weather
Nearest
Restore Calibrated Gain
Services/
Music
1. While viewing the WX Radar page touch GAIN to display the
Gain adjustment window.
Utilities
2. Touch the SET TO CALIBRATED key. This will restore the
calibrated gain.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-52
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.4.7
Sector Scan
Foreword
Adjusting the Sector Scan reduces the scan angle from Full in increments of
±20°, ±40°, and ±60° in horizontal or vertical scanning.
1. While viewing the WX Radar page, touch Sector Scan to
display the Sector Scan Mode window.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch the
Desired Sector
Size
Proc
GWX 68
GWX 70
Charts
Figure 12-68 Sector Scan Mode
Wpt Info
2. Touch the desired mode. After selection, you are returned to
the Weather Radar Menu screen.
3. Touch Back again to return to the Weather Radar screen.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Selected Sector
Scan Range
Weather
Nearest
Scan Line
Services/
Music
Utilities
Sector Scan
Selection Key
System
Messages
Figure 12-69 Selected Sector Scan Range
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-53
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
12.4.8
Weather Radar Menu
Touch Menu to view the Weather Radar Menu.
Touch To Enable
Ground Clutter
Suppression
Touch To
Enable Altitude
Compensated Tilt
Touch To Enable
Turbulence
Detection
GWX 70
FPL
Touch To Enable
WATCH Shading
Direct-To
Touch To Enable
Weather Alerts
Touch To
Enable Antenna
Stabilization
Proc
GWX 68
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 12-70 Weather Radar Menu Selections
NOTE: Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) and Turbulence Detection is
only supported for 12” or larger RADAR antennas. Turbulence Detection is
only supported out to a range of 40 NM and is disabled at display ranges
greater than 160 NM.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
12.4.8.1 Weather Attenuated Color Highlight (WATCH™)
While in horizontal scan mode, this feature can be used as a tool to determine
areas of possible inaccuracies in displayed intensity due to weakening of the
radar energy. This weakening is known as “attenuation.” The radar energy
weakens as it passes through areas of intense precipitation, large areas of lesser
precipitation, and distance. Issues with the radome will also attenuate the radar
energy. All these factors have an effect on the return intensity. The more energy
that dissipates, the lesser the displayed intensity of the return. Accuracy of the
displayed intensity of returns located in the shaded areas are suspect. Make
maneuvering decisions with this information in mind. Proper antenna tilt
management should still be employed to determine the extent of attenuation in
a shaded area.
1. While viewing the Weather Radar Menu, touch WATCH
Shading to toggle WATCH Shading.
Appendix
Index
12-54
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2. To deactivate Watch Mode, repeat sequence.
Foreword
Watch Shaded
Area
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 12-71 Horizontal Scan with WATCH
Proc
12.4.8.2 Weather Alert
The Weather Alert feature may be used to indicate the presence of heavy
precipitation beyond the currently displayed range and 80 to 320 NM from the
aircraft’s present position. Weather Alert targets appear as red bands along the
outer range ring at the approximate azimuth of the detected returns.
If a Weather Alert is detected within ±10° of the aircraft heading, a message
will be displayed in the Messages page. Touch the MSG key to view messages.
Weather Alerts
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 12-72 Weather Alert Display
If the antenna tilt is adjusted too low, a weather alert can be generated by
ground returns. To avoid this issue, set the display range to less than 80 NM in
the terminal area. Weather alerts can also be deactivated in the terminal area.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-55
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
1. While viewing the Weather Radar Menu, touch Weather Alert
to toggle Weather Alerts.
Getting
Started
2. To deactivate Weather Alerts, repeat sequence.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
12.4.8.3
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Antenna Stabilization
1. While viewing the Weather Radar Menu, touch Stabilize to
toggle Antenna Stabilization.
2. To deactivate Antenna Stabilization, repeat sequence. The
current stabilization condition is shown in the top right of the
weather radar display.
12.4.8.4 Altitude Compensated Tilt (GWX 70 Only)
Altitude Compensated Tilt (ACT) automatically adjusts the tilt to compensate
for altitude changes as you climb or descend.
1. While viewing the Weather Radar Menu, touch ACT to toggle
ACT.
2. To deactivate ACT, repeat sequence.
12.4.8.5 Turbulence Detection (GWX 70 Only)
Turbulence Detection activates a feature that detects and displays severe
turbulence. Turbulence Detection is inactive at ranges greater that 160 NM. If
Turbulence Detection is enabled and available, Turbulence Detection will be
reported as Inactive in any of the following conditions:
• Scan orientation is not Horizontal
• Scan range is greater than 160 NM
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
• Radar mode is not Weather
1. While viewing the Weather Radar Menu, touch Turbulence
Detection to toggle Turbulence Detection.
2. To deactivate Turbulence Detection, repeat sequence.
12.4.8.6 Ground Clutter Suppression (GWX 70 Only)
Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) reduces the amount of returns as a result
of highly reflective objects on the ground, such as buildings or cities, while
maintaining the intensity and size of weather returns.
1. While viewing the Weather Radar Menu, touch GCS to toggle
Ground Clutter Suppression.
2. To deactivate Ground Clutter Suppression, repeat sequence.
12-56
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.5
Connext Weather
Connext Weather is an optional feature available with the Iridium® satellite
system that is interfaced through the optional Garmin GSR 56. Connext Weather
may be viewed in the Weather and Map functions. The Weather pages may
be oriented to either Track Up, Heading, or North Up. Both Connext and XM
Weather may be installed and selected individually. Connext Weather coverage
is available throughout most of Europe, Canada and the U.S. Additional radar
coverage areas are being added continuously.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
PRECIP
Lightning
IR Satellite
METAR
PIREP
Winds Aloft
Surface
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
3000 ft ... 45,000 ft
Terrain
SIGMET/AIRMET
Connext Settings
Coverage Region
Present Position
Destination
Flight Plan
Distance
Waypoint
Waypoint Ident
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Data Request
Request Data
Auto Request
Cov Diameter
Datalink Status
Utilities
System
Messages
Orientation
Legend
Symbols
Figure 12-73 Connext Weather Functional Diagram
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
12-57
Index
Foreword
For more information about Connext weather products and coverage, visit
www.flyGarmin.com.
Getting
Started
NOTE: A system can be configured for multiple weather products, but only
one may be selected for viewing in the Weather or map pages at a given
time.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
12.5.1
Using Connext Satellite Weather Products
When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the
Navigation Map Page, the age of the data is displayed on the screen. The age of
the product is based on the time difference between when the data was assembled
on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are refreshed at
selectable intervals.
Weather products expire at intervals based on each product. When the data
expires, it is removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data is
consistent with what is currently being broadcast by Connext Satellite Radio
services. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the
data is received, the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-58
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.5.2
Connext Weather Menu
Foreword
The Connext Weather page is customized by selecting options from the
Connext Weather and the Connext Settings Menus. The Connext Weather Menu
options include choices for Weather Setup and displaying selected weather
products. The Connext Settings Menu makes settings for the Coverage Region
and Data Request frequency.
1. While viewing the Connext Weather page, touch the MENU
key to display the Connext Weather Menu. Touch the desired
keys to toggle the weather product.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 12-74 Connext Weather Menu
2. Touch the Connext Settings key to make detailed settings
for the Connext Weather display.
12.5.3
Connext Settings
Touch To
Manually
Request Data
Auto Request
Setting
Time To Next
Data Request
Coverage Region
Settings
Datalink
Status
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 12-75 Connext Settings Menu
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-59
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
12.5.3.1
Connext Data Request
It is necessary to request the downloading of weather products. Requests can
be sent manually or set to automatically update at a selected rate. The Connext
weather data may be updated at any time regardless of the automatic update
timing by selecting a Manual Request. When multiple requests are made, some
products are merged with the old data (SIGMETs/AIRMETs, TAFs, TFRs, and
METARs), but the old data of other products is discarded.
FPL
1. While viewing the Connext Settings Menu, touch the Request
Data key to manually request data.
Direct-To
2. Touch the Auto Request key to set the Auto Request Period.
Proc
NOTE: The Auto Request function is only enabled if the GTN is connected
directly to the GSR 56 (software v6.30 and later).
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Touch To Select
Request Period
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 12-76 Select Auto Request Period
Services/
Music
3. Touch the Cancel Request key to cancel a request in progress.
Utilities
System
Touch To Select
Request Period
Touch To
Cancel Request
Messages
Time Remaining
Until Next Request
Symbols
Figure 12-77 Cancelling A Request
Appendix
Index
12-60
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.5.3.2
Connext Data Request Coverage Region
Foreword
Present Position Data Request
Touch the Present Position key to request that weather
information will be shown around your present position.
Destination Connext Data Request
Touch the Destination key to request that weather information
will be shown around the destination waypoint in the flight
plan.
Flight Plan Data Request
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch the Flight Plan key to request that weather information
will be shown around the active flight plan.
Flight Plan Distance Data Request
Proc
Charts
Touch the Distance key to request that weather information
will be shown for the selected distance along the active flight
plan.
Wpt Info
Map
Waypoint Connext Data Request
1.
Touch the Waypoint key to request that weather information
will be shown around the selected waypoint.
2. Select the waypoint and then press ENT.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Diameter/Route Width Connext Data Request
12.5.3.3
After selecting a coverage option in the previous section, select
the desired Diameter and then press ENT.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Connext Weather Map Orientation
1. While viewing the Connext Weather Menu, touch the
Orientation key.
2. Touch the orientation choices of North Up, Track Up, and
Heading Up and to accept the displayed value and return to
the Connext Weather Menu.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-61
Index
Foreword
Touch To Select
Map Orientation
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 12-78 Connext Weather Map Orientation
12.5.4
Register with Connext
It is necessary to register the GTN with Connext to utilize the weather
products.
1. Call Garmin Customer Service to create a Connext account.
Provide the GTN System ID and airframe info (model, tail
number, etc).
2. Customer Service will issue an access code to enter on the
Connext Registration page.
3. While viewing Connext Settings Menu, touch the Datalink
Status key.
Terrain
Weather
Iridium
Signal Level
Current
Registration Info
Nearest
Services/
Music
Phone and
Datalink Status
Utilities
Touch To
Register
System
Messages
Figure 12-79 GSR 56 Status
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-62
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4. Touch the Connext Registration key to display the Connext
Registration display.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch To
Register
Touch To Enter
Access Code
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Current
Registration Info
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 12-80 Connext Registration Page
5. Touch the Access Code key to enter the appropriate code and
then touch the Enter key.
6. Touch the Register key to complete the process. The GTN will
contact the Connext servers using the GSR 56 transceiver. If
the access code and system ID are correct, it will download
and display the airframe info.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Deactivate Unit Registration With Connext
Registration of the GTN unit with Connext can be deactivated so that the unit
can no longer make requests to Connext. This does not cancel the subscription.
1. While viewing the Connext Registration display, touch
the Access Code field and enter an invalid access code to
deactivate the Connext registration.
2. Any weather requests will now fail and the system will no
longer be linked to the Connext account.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-63
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
12.5.5
Connext Weather Product Age
The weather product expiration time and the refresh rate are shown in the
following table. The refresh rate represents the interval at which Connext Satellites
broadcast new signals that may or may not contain new weather data. It does not
represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by
the Data Link Receiver. Weather data is refreshed at intervals that are defined and
controlled by Connext and its data vendors.
Weather Product
FPL
PRECIP
Lightning
IR Satellite
SIGMETs / AIRMETs
METARs
Winds Aloft
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
(Blue - Regular, Yellow - Urgent)
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
30
30
60
60
90
90
90
60
Table 12-5 Connext Weather Products and Aging Times
Terrain
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-64
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.5.6
TFRs
Foreword
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) provide detailed information for local
short term restrictions.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Figure 12-81 Connext TFR Legend
Com/Nav
1. Touch a TFR symbol on the Weather page to view details.
FPL
Direct-To
TFR Detail
Proc
Touch TFR Symbol
To View Details
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 12-82 Connext TFR Detail
Terrain
2. Touch the Back key to return to the Weather display.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-65
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
12.5.7
Precipitation (PRECIP) Data
Graphical data is overlaid on the map indicating the rainfall detected by
ground based radar for a specific area. The colors indicating increasing levels
of rainfall progresses from light green for light rainfall to red for heavy rainfall.
Review the Limitations section in the front of this guide for the limitations that
apply to the Connext data. Rainfall data is color coded as follows:
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 12-83 Connext PRECIP Weather Map Display and Legend
The "No Coverage" color indicates that no data is available for that area, and
rainfall in that area is unknown.
When weather data is received, the airborne system will display that data for
20 minutes. If no new data has been received for a given area, the rainfall will
be removed after 20 minutes and the area will revert back to the "No Coverage"
color.
The Connext Weather Function is based on a ground-to-air data link and
requires that the appropriate ground systems are broadcasting weather data and
the aircraft is within reception range of the Ground Broadcast Transceiver (GBT).
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-66
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.5.7.1
Animating Precipitation Data
Foreword
NOTE: Animated Precipitation functionality is available in software v6.00
and later.
When Precipitation Data is enabled for display and more than two
Precipitation images have been received by the GTN, the Precipitation display
can be animated on the Connext Weather page. As new Precipitation images are
received, the GTN will automatically store them for future animation. The GTN
can animate up to six Precipitation images from oldest to newest, showing each
for one second and the newest for two seconds.
1. While viewing the Connext Weather page with Precipitation
enabled for display, press the Play PRCP key to start the
Precipitation animation.
2. Touch the Stop PRCP key to stop the Precipitation animation.
The animation will also stop when leaving the page or turning
off Precipitation on the Connext weather page.
12.5.8
Lightning
Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning
strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two kilometer
(1.08 NM) region. The exact location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
Only cloud to ground strikes are reported in the US and extreme southern
Canada (cloud to cloud strikes are not reported).
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Lightning
Legend
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Lightning
Symbol
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 12-84 Connext Data Link Lightning and Legend
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-67
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
12.5.9
Infrared Satellite Data
Infrared Satellite data is available over North America and Europe and depicts
cloud top temperatures from satellite imagery. Brighter cloud top colors indicate
cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes. Information is updated every
half hour.
IR Satellite
Product Age
IR Satellite
Legend
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
IR Satellite
Coverage
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 12-85 Connext Infrared Satellite Data Map Display and Legend
Map
Traffic
12.5.10 METARs
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure reported for METARs is given in hectopascals
(hPa), except in the United States, where it is reported in inches of mercury
(in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
Terrain
Weather
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation
database service area.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report), known as an Aviation Routine
Weather Report, is the standard format for current weather observations.
METARs are generally updated hourly, but some site are more frequent. Special
updates are done as conditions warrant. METARs typically contain information
about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud
heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also contain information
on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data. METARs are shown
as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-68
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
METAR Symbol
Description
Foreword
VFR (ceiling greater than 3000 ft. AGL and
visibility greater than five miles)
Marginal VFR (ceiling 1000–3000 ft. AGL
and/or visibility three to five miles)
IFR (ceiling 500 to below 1000 ft. AGL and/or
visibility one mile to less than three miles)
Low IFR (ceiling below 500 ft. AGL or visibility
less than one mile)
Unknown
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Table 12-6 METAR Symbols
Metar
Legend
Proc
Product Age
Charts
Wpt Info
METAR Detail
Map
Selected METAR (VFR)
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 12-86 Connext Weather - Graphic METARs and Legend
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-69
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
12.5.11 PIREPs
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for
a particular route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported
or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs.
A PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as low
in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are
issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
PIREP
Legend
FPL
Product Age
Direct-To
PIREP Detail
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Selected PIREP
Map
Traffic
Figure 12-87 Connext Weather - PIREPs
Terrain
Weather
Figure 12-88 Connext Weather - PIREPs Legend
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-70
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.5.12 Winds Aloft
Foreword
Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface
and at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be selected in 3000 foot increments from
the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL. Pressing the WX Aloft ALT + or – soft keys
steps down or up in 3,000 foot increments.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Product Age
Winds Aloft
Legend
Getting
Started
FPL
Direct-To
Winds Aloft
Symbol
Proc
Charts
Winds Aloft
Altitude Selection
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 12-89 Connext Weather - Winds Aloft
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 12-90 Connext Weather - Winds Aloft Legend
Nearest
Winds Aloft Altitude
The Winds Aloft Altitude option allows you to select the altitude for the
Winds Aloft weather product. Altitude can be selected in 3,000 foot increments
from the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL.
Pressing the WX Aloft ALT + or – soft keys steps down or up in 3,000 foot
increments. In the figure shown above, 6,000 feet is selected and Winds Aloft
data is shown for winds reported at an altitude of 6,000 feet.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-71
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
12.5.13 SIGMETs and AIRMETs
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s
METeorological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather
considered of importance to aircraft. A Convective SIGMET is issued for
hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather
condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
Com/Nav
FPL
Product Age
SIGMET/AIRMET
Legend
Direct-To
SIGMET Line
Proc
Selected SIGMET
Line
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 12-91 Connext Weather Page - AIRMETs/SIGMETs
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
When enabled, SIGMET/AIRMETs advise the pilot of potentially hazardous
weather. SIGMETs are directed to all aircraft. AIRMETs are intended for light
aircraft. SIGMET/AIRMET data covers icing, turbulence, dust, and volcanic ash
as issued by the National Weather Service. The update rate is selected in the
Connext Settings Menu.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 12-92 Connext Weather - AIRMETs/SIGMETs Detail and Legend
System
Messages
Symbols
When enabled, the following AIRMETs are available for display:
• Icing
• Turbulence
• IFR conditions
• Mountain obscuration
Appendix
Index
• Surface winds
12-72
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.6
FIS-B Weather
Foreword
NOTE: FIS-B information is to be used for pilot planning decisions
and pilot near-term decisions focused on avoiding areas of inclement
weather that are beyond visual range or where poor visibility precludes
visual acquisition of inclement weather. FIS-B weather and NAS status
information may be used as follows:
(a) To promote pilot awareness of own ship location with respect to
reported weather, including hazardous meteorological conditions, NAS
status indicators, and enhance pilot planning decisions and pilot
near-term decision-making.
(b) To cue the pilot to communicate with the Air Traffic Control
controller, Flight Service Station specialist, operator dispatch, or airline
operations control center for general and mission critical meteorological
information, NAS status conditions, or both.
FIS-B information, including, weather information, NOTAMs, and TFR
areas, are intended for the sole purpose of assisting in long- and
near-term planning decision making. The system lacks sufficient
resolution and updating capability necessary for aerial maneuvering
associated with immediate decisions.
The Flight Information Services (FIS-B) function is capable of displaying text
and graphic weather information with GDL 88 and GTX 345 installations. No
subscription for FIS-B services is required.
The FIS-B Function is a graphic weather display capable of displaying
graphical weather information on UAT equipped installations. Graphical data
overlaid on the map indicates the rainfall detected by ground based radar for a
specific area. Color transitions from light green (light rainfall) to magenta (heavy
rainfall) represent an increase in precipitation. Review the Limitations section in
the front of this guide for the limitations that apply to the FIS-B data.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-73
Index
Foreword
Rainfall data is color coded as follows:
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 12-93 FIS-B Weather Precipitation Legend
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Gray shaded areas indicate that data is not available or that no data has been
received for a requested area. Gray shades may also indicate that the rainfall rate
for a given area is undetermined.
The FIS-B Function is based on a ground-to-air data link and requires that
the appropriate ground systems are broadcasting weather data and the aircraft is
within reception range of the Ground Broadcast Transceiver (GBT).
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
NEXRAD
Nearest
Off
Services/
Music
Regional
Combined
METAR
PIREP
Wind/Temp Aloft
Utilities
1,000 ft ... 45,000 ft
System
SIGMET/AIRMET
Orientation
Messages
Track Up
Symbols
Heading Up
North Up
Legend
Appendix
Index
CONUS
Figure 12-94 FIS-B Weather Functional Diagram
12-74
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Weather Product
Expiration
Time
(Minutes)
Transmission
Interval
(Minutes)
Update Interval (Minutes)
CONUS NEXRAD
Regional NEXRAD
AIRMETs
60
30
60
15
2.5
5
SIGMETs
60
5
15
5
As Available
(Typically 20 minutes)
As Available
(Typically 20 minutes), then
at 15 minute intervals for
1 hour
1 minute (where available),
As Available otherwise
(Typically ≤ 20 minutes)
12 hours
METARs
Winds and
Temperatures Aloft
Pilot Weather
Report (PIREP)
(Blue - Regular,
Yellow - Urgent)
TAFs
TFRs
NOTAMs
90
90 or at the
end of the
valid period
90
5
10
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
10
As available
|(Typically 20 minutes)
Traffic
Terrain
60
60
60
10
10
10
8 hours
20
As available
(Typically 20 minutes)
Table 12-7 FIS-B Weather Products and Aging
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-75
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
12.6.1
FIS-B Operation
Weather data reception time is shown in the upper right corner of the screen.
An indicated time shows if the aircraft is currently within reception coverage
of a ground station with weather broadcast capabilities. The ground system
determines the weather coverage area and extent of data that is transmitted by
each ground station.
1. From the Home page, touch the Weather key on the Home
page and then touch the FIS-B Weather key (if necessary).
FPL
Direct-To
Age Of Selected
Weather Products
Proc
Charts
Weather
Product
Legends
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
NEXRAD
Selection
Figure 12-95 FIS-B Weather Page (NEXRAD Key Shown)
Terrain
2. While viewing the FIS-B weather page, touch the Menu key
to configure the Data Link Weather page.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch + or - To
Select Map Range
Touch NEXRAD
Key To Select Off,
CONUS, Regional,
or Combined
NEXRAD
NOTAM On/Off
Display Key
Touch Keys To
Select Weather
Product. Green Bar
Indicates Selected
Product.
Touch Legend Key
To Display Legend
System
Weather Overlay
Map Orientation
Messages
Figure 12-96 FIS-B Weather Data Link Menu
Symbols
3. Once you selected what items you want to display, touch BACK
to return to the FIS-B Weather page.
Appendix
Index
12-76
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.6.2
FIS-B NEXRAD
Foreword
WSR-88D weather surveillance radar or NEXRAD (NEXt generation RADar) is
a Doppler radar system that has greatly improved the detection of meteorological
events such as thunderstorms, tornadoes, and hurricanes. An extensive network
of NEXRAD stations provides almost complete radar coverage of the continental
United States, Alaska, and Hawaii. The unobstructed range of each NEXRAD is
124 nautical miles.
12.6.2.1
NEXRAD Abnormalities
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
There are possible abnormalities regarding displayed NEXRAD images. Some,
but not all, causes of abnormal displayed information include:
• Ground Clutter
Direct-To
Proc
• Strobes and spurious radar data
Charts
• Sun strobes, when the radar antenna points directly at the sun
• Military aircraft deploy metallic dust which can cause alterations in radar
scans
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Scheduled maintenance may put a radar off-line
12.6.2.2
Getting
Started
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
NEXRAD Limitations
Terrain
Certain limitations exist regarding the NEXRAD radar displays. Some, but
not all, are listed for the user’s awareness:
• The Regional NEXRAD “pixels” are 1.5 minutes (1.5 nautical miles
= 2.78 km) wide by 1 minute (1 nautical miles = 1.852 km) tall.
The CONUS NEXRAD “pixels” are 7.5 minutes (7.5 nautical miles
= 13.89 km) wide by 5 minutes (5 nautical miles = 9.26 km) wide. Above
60 degrees of latitude the Regional NEXRAD “pixels” are
3 minutes/nautical miles. CONUS NEXRAD is not available above
60 degrees of latitude. The intensity level reflected by the pixel will be the
highest level sampled within the area covered by each pixel.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-77
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
12.6.2.3
NEXRAD Intensity
Colors are used to identify the different NEXRAD echo intensities (reflectivity)
measured in dBZ (decibels of Z). “Reflectivity” is the amount of transmitted power
returned to the radar receiver. Reflectivity (designated by the letter Z) covers a
wide range of signals (from very weak to very strong). So, a more convenient
number for calculations and comparison, a decibel (or logarithmic) scale (dBZ),
is used. The dBZ values increase as the strength of the signal returned to the
radar increases.
12.6.2.4 NEXRAD
When enabled, NEXRAD weather information is shown. Composite data
from all of the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is
composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The
display of the information is color-coded to indicate the weather level severity.
Refer to the legend for a description of the color code.
The NEXRAD option has selections of Regional, CONUS, or Combined
NEXRAD. CONUS NEXRAD includes a composite of available NEXRAD radar
imagery across the 48 states. Regional NEXRAD is a composite of available
NEXRAD radar imagery in a local area, showing a more detailed image
than CONUS NEXRAD. FIS-B weather data reception requires line-of-site
communication between the receiver and the ADS-B ground station. Incomplete
Regional and/or CONUS NEXRAD imagery displayed on the MAP and FIS-B
Weather Pages of the affected products is an indicator of poor FIS-B reception.
Affected Areas
Any area in the continental United States (CONUS) or Alaska where the
distance from ADS-B ground stations, or the combined effect of distance and
low altitude, is sufficiently great may cause poor reception. To find the latest
ground station coverage, visit www.faa.gov.
Reception will improve in some affected areas as the FAA completes the
NextGen ADS-B ground station infrastructure. However, due to line-of-sight
broadcast characteristics, operators with properly installed and functioning
equipment may still receive incomplete FIS-B data when signal reception is
limited by the distance from ground stations combined with a low altitude.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-78
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
The example below displays an area where FIS-B data is degraded due to
poor reception:
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 12-97 Example of Areas Where FIS-B Reception Is Unavailable
Map
Continental US NEXRAD (CONUS)
The Display CONUS NEXRAD selection shows NEXRAD radar information
for the entire continental United States. CONUS NEXRAD data is updated every
15 minutes.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Out Of CONUS
NEXRAD Coverage
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
CONUS NEXRAD
Coverage Shown
System
Messages
CONUS Selected
On NEXRAD Key
Symbols
Figure 12-98 Weather Page With CONUS Displayed
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-79
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Regional NEXRAD
The Regional NEXRAD selection shows regional NEXRAD radar information
within 500 NM of the aircraft location.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Out Of Regional
NEXRAD Coverage
Com/Nav
FPL
Regional NEXRAD
Coverage Shown
Direct-To
Within Regional
NEXRAD Area But
Coverage Not Available
Proc
Charts
Regional Selected
On NEXRAD Key
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 12-99 Weather Page With Regional NEXRAD Displayed
Combined NEXRAD
Regional NEXRAD data and CONUS NEXRAD data are shown together. The
two types of NEXRAD are separated by a white stippled border. This boundary
is updated whenever new Regional or CONUS NEXRAD data is received. The
radius of the boundary is fixed at 150 NM.
Weather
Out Of Regional
NEXRAD Coverage
Nearest
Services/
Music
Regional NEXRAD
Boundary Shown
Utilities
NEXRAD Weather Shown
NEXRAD Weather Shown
System
Messages
CONUS & Regional
Selected On NEXRAD Key
Symbols
Figure 12-100 Weather Page With Combined NEXRAD Displayed
Appendix
Index
12-80
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Selecting NEXRAD in the FIS-B Weather Menu
1. While viewing the FIS-B weather page, touch the Menu key
to select the NEXRAD choice.
2. Touch the NEXRAD key to select Off, Regional, CONUS, or
Combined NEXRAD.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch the Desired
NEXRAD Source
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 12-101 NEXRAD Source Selection
3. Touch the Back key to return to the FIS-B Weather Menu.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Animating NEXRAD FIS-B
NOTE: Animated NEXRAD functionality is available in software v6.00 and
later.
When Regional or CONUS NEXRAD is enabled for display and more than
two NEXRAD images have been received by the GTN, the NEXRAD display can
be animated on the FIS-B Weather page. As new NEXRAD images are received,
the GTN will automatically store them for future animation. The GTN can
animate up to six NEXRAD images from oldest to newest, showing each for one
second and the newest for two seconds.
NOTE: CONUS/Regional Combined NEXRAD cannot be animated. CONUS
and Regional NEXRAD can only be animated when displayed individually.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-81
Index
1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather page with NEXRAD enabled
for display, press the Play NXRD key to start the NEXRAD
animation.
Foreword
Getting
Started
2. Touch the Stop NXRD key to stop the NEXRAD animation.
The animation will also stop when leaving the page or turning
off NEXRAD on the FIS-B weather page.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
12.6.3
FIS-B TFRs
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) provide detailed information for local
short term restrictions. The update rate is approximately every 20 minutes.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 12-102 FIS-B TFR Legend
Wpt Info
1. Touch a TFR symbol on the Weather page to view details.
Map
Traffic
TFR Detail
Terrain
Weather
Touch TFR Symbol
To View Details
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch TFR Symbol
To View Details
Utilities
System
Figure 12-103 FIS-B TFR Detail
2. Touch the Back key to return to the Weather display.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-82
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.6.4
FIS-B METARs
When enabled, graphic METARs (METeorological Aviation Reports) are
shown as colored flags at airports that provide METAR reports. Press the
METARs key to enable or disable METARs. Refer to the Legend for a description
of the color code. The update rate is every five minutes.
METAR Symbol
Description
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
VFR (ceiling greater than 3000 ft. AGL and
visibility greater than five miles)
Marginal VFR (ceiling 1000–3000 ft. AGL
and/or visibility three to five miles)
IFR (ceiling 500 to below 1000 ft. AGL and/or
visibility one mile to less than three miles)
Low IFR (ceiling below 500 ft. AGL or visibility
less than one mile)
Unknown
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Table 12-8 METAR Symbols
1. While viewing the FIS-B weather page, touch the Menu key
to select the METAR choice. Touch an airport symbol for more
METAR detail.
Map
Traffic
Product Age
Terrain
METAR Detail
Weather
Nearest
METAR Flags
Services/
Music
Touch Airport For
METAR Detail
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 12-104 METARS
2. Touch the METAR key to toggle METARS on or off.
Symbols
3. Touch the Back key to return to the FIS-B Weather page.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-83
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
12.6.5
FIS-B PIREPs
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information. When
significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC)
facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain non-forecast
adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions,
wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent
(UUA). The update rate is approximately every 20 minutes.
1. While viewing the FIS-B weather page, touch the Menu key
to select the PIREP choice.
2. Touch the PIREP key to toggle PIREPs on or off.
Proc
Urgent PIREP
Symbol (Yellow).
Touch For Details.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Routine PIREP
Symbol (Blue).
Touch For Details.
Terrain
Figure 12-105 Weather Display With PIREP Information Active
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-84
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Touch a weather information symbol to view details for that
item.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
PIREP Details
Com/Nav
FPL
Selected PIREP
For Detail
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 12-106 PIREP Information Detail
4. Touch the Back key to remove the detailed information.
Wpt Info
Map
5. Touch the PIREP key again to turn it off.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-85
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
12.6.6
FIS-B Winds and Temperatures Aloft
Winds and Temperatures Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed, direction,
and Temperature at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be selected in increments
from the 1,000 feet up to 53,000 feet. The update rate is every 12 hours.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the
Wind/Temp Aloft key.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wind Symbols
Charts
Wpt Info
Selected Wind Altitude
Map
Touch To Select
Wind Altitude
Traffic
Figure 12-107 Winds Aloft
2. Touch the WX Aloft ALT – or + keys to increase or decrease
the reporting altitude of the winds aloft in increments. The
selected altitude is shown in a window above the altitude keys.
Terrain
Weather
3. Touch the Wind/Temp Aloft key again to turn it off.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 12-108 FIS-B Winds Aloft Legend
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-86
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
12.6.7
FIS-B SIGMETs and AIRMETs
Foreword
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METerological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s
METerological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather
considered of importance to aircraft. The update rate is approximately every
20 minutes.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 12-109 FIS-B SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather menu, touch the
SIGMET/AIRMET key.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Surface Winds
Weather
Present Position
Nearest
IFR Line
Turbulence Line
Services/
Music
Utilities
Mountain Obscured
System
Messages
Figure 12-110 FIS-B SIGMETs and AIRMETs
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
12-87
Index
2. Touch a SIGMET/AIRMET line to view details. Touch the Back
key to return to the Weather display.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 12-111 SIGMET and AIRMET Details
Wpt Info
3. Touch the SIGMET/AIRMET key again to turn it off.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-88
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
13
NEAREST
Foreword
The Nearest function provides detailed information for the 25 nearest
airports, VORs, VRPs, NDBs, Intersections, and User waypoints within 200 NM
of your current position. In addition, the Nearest pages include the five nearest
Flight Service Station (FSS) and center (ARTCC/FIR) points of communication
and alert you to any Special Use (SUA) or Controlled Airspace you may be in
or near.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Nearest Waypoint Types
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 13-1 Nearest Page
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
List
List
List
Wpt Info
List
List
List
Wpt Info
Wpt Info
Frequency
Services/
Music
Utilities
List
Wpt Info
Airspace
Info
System
Messages
List
List
List
Nearest
Wpt Info
Frequency
Wpt Info
Frequency
Wpt Info
Frequency
Symbols
Figure 13-2 Nearest Page Functional Map
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
13-1
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
13.1
Select a Nearest Page
The available waypoint types are shown on the Nearest page. Touch the key
to display the nearest 25 waypoint types (FSS and ARTCC will display up to
five items). Not all 25 nearest waypoints can be displayed on the corresponding
Nearest page at one time. The Nearest page displays detailed information for five
nearest items.
1. On the Home page, touch the Nearest key.
FPL
2. Touch the desired waypoint type (Airport, VOR, etc.) and then
touch the Up and Down keys on the lower right of the display
to navigate through the list of available items. You can also
touch an item on the list and drag your finger to scroll the
list.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
3. Touch the highlighted item to view more detailed
information.
Wpt Info
Traffic
4. To navigate Direct-To the waypoint you're viewing, press the
Direct-To key. The waypoint will be loaded into the Waypoint
window of the Direct-To function.
Terrain
5. Touch the Activate key to navigate directly to that
waypoint.
Map
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
13.2
Nearest Airport
The Nearest Airport Page displays the identifier, symbol, bearing and distance,
and the length of the longest runway for the 25 nearest airports (within 200 NM
of your present position).
The Nearest Airport Page can be configured to exclude shorter runways or
undesirable runway surface types, so that the corresponding airports do not
appear on the list. You may wish to use this feature to exclude seaplane bases,
heliports, or runway lengths which would be difficult or impossible to land upon.
See System - Setup - Nearest Airport Criteria for information about configuring the
Nearest Airport display criteria.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
13-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the Airport key. A
list of the nearest 25 airports within 200 NM will be listed.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Airport
Identifier
Scroll Bar Indicate
More Items On The List
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Airport Information
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 13-3 Nearest Airport
Wpt Info
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list.
Map
3. Touch the Airport Identifier key to show the Waypoint Info
page for the selected airport.
Distance & Bearing
Information
Referenced To
Current Position
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Airport
Information
Page
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch To View Charts
When Available
System
Messages
Figure 13-4 Nearest Airport Waypoint Info
4. Touch one of the tabs (Map, Procedures, Runways, etc.) on the
sides of the display for more information about the selected
airport.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
13-3
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
13.3
Nearest Intersection (INT)
The Nearest Intersection Page displays the identifier, symbol, bearing and
distance to the 25 nearest intersections (within 200 NM of your present position).
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the INT key. A list
of the nearest 25 Intersections within 200 NM will be listed.
Com/Nav
Slider Indicates
More Items On
The List
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Intersection
Identifier
Intersection
Information
Charts
Wpt Info
Arrow Indicates
More Items On
The List
Map
Figure 13-5 Nearest Intersection List
Traffic
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Slider Indicates
More Items On
The List
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Arrows Indicate
More Items On
The List
Messages
Symbols
Figure 13-6 Scrolling Down the Nearest Intersection List
Appendix
Index
13-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the Intersection Identifier key to show the Waypoint
Info page for the selected Intersection.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Distance & Bearing
Information Referenced
To Current Position
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Intersection
Map Detail
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Map Range Keys
Charts
Figure 13-7 Nearest Intersection Waypoint Detail
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
13-5
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
13.4
The Nearest VOR Page displays the identifier, symbol, bearing and distance
to the 25 nearest VORs (within 200 NM of your present position). For each VOR
listed, the Nearest VOR Page also indicates the frequency and may be used to
quickly tune the Nav radio to the nearby VOR (GTN 750 only).
Touch the VOR Frequency key to place the frequency in the standby field of the
Nav window. Touch the Nav Active window to flip/flop the Nav frequencies.
FPL
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the VOR key. A list
of the nearest 25 VORs within 200 NM will be listed.
Direct-To
Proc
Nearest VOR
Nearest VOR
Frequency
Nearest VOR
Identifier
Charts
Wpt Info
Bearing
from Current
Position to VOR
Distance
from Current
Position to VOR
Map
Traffic
Arrows Indicate
More Items On
The List
Terrain
Weather
Figure 13-8 Nearest VOR List and Information
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
13-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the VOR Identifier key to show the Waypoint Info
page for the selected VOR.
Foreword
Getting
Started
VOR Information
Referenced To Current
Position
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Additional VOR Information
Com/Nav
VOR Map Detail
FPL
VOR Location
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 13-9 Nearest VOR Waypoint Information
Wpt Info
4. Touch the Frequency key on this page or from the Nearest
VOR List page to place the selected frequency into the Nav
Standby window.
Map
Traffic
Touch to Flip/Flop
Terrain
VOR Frequency Inserted
Into Standby Window.
Weather
Nearest
VOR Frequency
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 13-10 Nearest VOR Frequency Entry
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
13-7
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
13.5
Nearest VRP
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.20 or later.
The Nearest VRP Page displays the identifier, symbol, bearing, and distance
to the 25 nearest VRPs (within 200 NM of your present position).
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the VRP key.
Com/Nav
Bearing from Current
Position to VRP
FPL
Direct-To
Nearest VRP
Identifier
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Distance from Current
Position to VRP
Terrain
Figure 13-11 Nearest VRPs
Weather
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list.
Nearest
3. Touch the VRP Identifier key to show the Waypoint Info page
for the selected VRP.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
13-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
VRP Information
Referenced to
Current Position
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Additional
VRP
Information
Com/Nav
VRP Map
Detail
FPL
VRP
Location
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 13-12 Waypoint Info - Visual Reporting Point
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
13-9
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
13.6
Nearest NDB
The Nearest NDB Page displays the identifier, symbol, bearing, distance and
frequency to the 25 nearest NDBs (within 200 NM of your present position).
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the NDB key. A list
of the nearest 25 NDBs within 200 NM will be listed.
Com/Nav
Scroll Bar Indicates
More Items On The
List. Touch And Drag
Finger To Scroll.
FPL
Direct-To
NDB
Identifier
NDB
Information
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Arrows Indicate More
Items On The List
Map
Figure 13-13 Nearest NDB
Traffic
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list.
Terrain
3. Touch the NDB Identifier key to show the Waypoint Info
page for the selected NDB.
Weather
Nearest
Distance and Bearing
Referenced To Current
Position
Services/
Music
Utilities
NDB Map Detail
System
Messages
Symbols
Map Range Keys
Appendix
Index
Figure 13-14 Nearest NDB Waypoint Information
13-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
13.7
Nearest User Waypoint
The Nearest User Waypoint Page displays the name, bearing and distance to
the 25 nearest user waypoints (within 200 NM of your present position).
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the User Waypoint
key. A list of the nearest 25 User waypoints within 200 NM
will be listed.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 13-15 Nearest User Waypoint
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list.
Traffic
Terrain
3. Touch the User Identifier key to show the Waypoint Info
page for the selected User waypoint.
User Wpt Distance &
Bearing Referenced To
Current Position
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
User Wpt Map Detail
System
Messages
Symbols
Map Range Keys
Appendix
Figure 13-16 Nearest User Waypoint Information
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
13-11
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
13.8
The Nearest Airspace Page, alerts you to as many as 25 controlled or special
use airspaces near or in your flight path. Alerts are provided according to the
following conditions:
•
If your projected course will take you inside an airspace within the
next ten minutes, the alert message “AIRSPACE ALERT - Airspace entry
in less than 10 minutes” appears. The Nearest Airspace Page shows the
airspace as “Airspace Ahead.”
•
If you are within two nautical miles of an airspace and your current
course will take you inside, the message “AIRSPACE ALERT - Within
2nm of airspace” appears. The Nearest Airspace Page shows the airspace as “Airspace Within 2 NM.”
•
If you are within two nautical miles of an airspace and your current
course will take you inside in less than 10 minutes, the message
“AIRSPACE ALERT - Airspace within 2nm and entry in less than
10 minutes” appears. The Nearest Airspace Page shows the airspace as
“Ahead < 2 NM.”
•
If you have entered an airspace, the message
“AIRSPACE ALERT - Inside Airspace” appears. The Nearest Airspace
Page shows “Inside of airspace.”
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Nearest Airspace
Note that the airspace alerts are based on three-dimensional data (latitude,
longitude and altitude) to avoid nuisance alerts. The alert boundaries for
controlled airspace are also sectorized to provide complete information on
any nearby airspace. Once one of the described conditions exists, the message
annunciator flashes, alerting you of an airspace message (if airspace alert messages
are enabled). See System-Alerts to set the Arrival Alert Proximity, Airspace Type,
and Altitude Buffer values.
NOTE: The Airspace Alert setting does not alter the depiction of airspace,
or change the Smart Airspace setting for the main map page.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
13-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Airspace
Boundary
Foreword
Selected
Airspace
Sector
Runway
Extension
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Map Pointer
Current Position
Com/Nav
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Airspace
Sector
Name
FPL
Map Pointer
Location
Information
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 13-17 Airspace Sectors
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the Airspace key.
A list of the nearest 25 Airspaces within 200 NM along the
aircraft flight path will be listed, depending on the airspace
types and values set by the user.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Airspace
Information
Airspace
Name
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 13-18 Nearest Airspace List
System
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list.
Messages
3. Touch the Airspace Identifier key to show the Waypoint
Info page for the selected Airspace.
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
13-13
Index
Touch To
View Airspace
Frequency List
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Proximity
To Airspace
Airspace
Name
Airspace Contact
Name
Airspace
Altitude
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 13-19 Nearest Airspace Waypoint Information
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Once you have been provided an airspace alert message, detailed information
concerning the specific airspace is provided on the Nearest Airspace Page.
The Nearest Airspace Page displays the airspace name, status (“AIRSPACE
ALERT - inside Airspace,” “AIRSPACE ALERT - Airspace entry in less than
10 minutes,” etc.), and a time to entry (if applicable). By selecting any airspace
name listed on the Nearest Airspace Page, additional details are provided —
including controlling agency, communication frequencies and floor/ceiling
limits.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
13-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
13.9
Nearest ARTCC
Foreword
The Nearest ARTCC page displays the facility name, bearing to, distance, and
frequency to the five nearest Air Route Traffic Control Center (ARTCC) points
of communication (within 200 NM of your present position). For each ARTCC
listed, the Nearest ARTCC page also indicates the frequency(s) and may be used
to quickly tune the COM transceiver to the center’s frequency.
Touch the ARTCC Frequency key to place the frequency in the standby
field of the COM window. Touch the COM Active window to flip/flop the Com
frequencies (GTN 750 only).
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the ARTCC key. A
list of the nearest five ARTCCs within 200 NM will be listed.
ARTCC
Frequency Key
With Multiple
Frequencies
Available
ARTCC
Name and
Information
ARTCC Frequency
Key
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 13-20 Nearest ARTCC
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list as
needed.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
13-15
Index
3. The Frequency category will show "Multiple" keys if multiple
frequencies are available. Touch the Multiple FREQ key to
display the frequencies.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
ARTCC
Multiple
Frequency
Key
FPL
Direct-To
Selected ARTCC
Frequency Key
Proc
ARTCC Multiple
Frequency List
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 13-21 Nearest ARTCC Multiple Frequency List
4. Touch the key for the desired frequency to place the selected
frequency into the Com Standby window.
Traffic
Terrain
Touch To Flip/Flop Active
And Standby Frequencies
Weather
Selected ARTCC
Frequency Inserted
Into Standby Window
Nearest
Services/
Music
Selected ARTCC Multiple
Frequency List Key
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 13-22 Selected ARTCC Frequency From List
13-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
13.10
Nearest Flight Service Station (FSS)
Foreword
The Nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) Page displays the facility name, bearing
to, distance, and frequency to the five nearest FSS points of communication
(within 200 NM of your present position). For each FSS listed, the Nearest FSS
Page also indicates the frequency(s) and may be used to quickly tune the COM
transceiver to the FSS’s frequency.
Touch the FSS Frequency key to place the frequency in the standby field of the
COM window. Touch the COM Active window to flip/flop the Com frequencies
(GTN 750 only). Receive-only frequencies are noted with a white "RX."
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the FSS key. A list
of the nearest five FSSs within 200 NM will be listed.
FSS Name
and
Information
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
FSS Frequency
Key With
Multiple
Frequencies
Available
FSS Frequency
Key
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 13-23 Nearest FSS
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list, if
necessary.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
13-17
Index
3. The Frequency key will show "Multiple FREQ" if multiple
frequencies are available. Touch the Multiple FREQ key to
display the frequencies.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Slider Indicates More
Frequencies. Touch
And Drag Finger To
View More.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
FSS Multiple
Frequency List
Charts
Touch The Up And
Down Keys To View
More Frequencies
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 13-24 Nearest FSS Multiple Frequency List
Traffic
4. Touch the key for the desired frequency to place the selected
frequency into the Com Standby window.
Terrain
Weather
Selected FSS
Frequency Inserted
Into Standby Window
Nearest
Services/
Music
FSS
Multiple
Frequency
Key
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 13-25 Selected FSS Frequency From List
13-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
13.11
Nearest Weather Frequency (WX Freq)
Foreword
The Nearest WX FREQ function displays facility name, bearing to, distance,
and frequency for the nearest 25 Automatic Terminal Information Service
(ATIS), Automated Service Observing System (ASOS), and Automated Weather
Observing Station (AWOS) weather reporting stations within 200 NM.
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the WX FREQ key.
A list of the nearest 25 Weather stations within 200 NM will
be listed.
Reporting
Weather
Waypoint
Information
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
AWOS Frequency
Proc
Charts
Reporting
Weather
Waypoint
Identifier
ATIS Frequency
ASOS Frequency
Arrows Indicate
More Items On
The List
Figure 13-26 Nearest Weather Station
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list, as
needed.
Weather
3. Touch the key for the desired frequency to place the selected
frequency into the Com Standby window.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
13-19
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Selected Weather
Frequency Inserted
Into Standby Window
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Selected
Weather
Frequency
Key
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 13-27 Nearest Weather Station Selected Frequency
Wpt Info
4. Touch the Weather Station Identifier key to show the
Waypoint Info page for the selected Weather station.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Dis and Brg
Information
Referenced To
Current Position
Wpt
Identifier,
Type, and
Name
Weather
Weather Tab
Selected
Nearest
Services/
Music
Wpt
Information
Detail
Utilities
System
Figure 13-28 Nearest Weather Station Waypoint Information
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
13-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
14
SERVICES/MUSIC
Foreword
The Services function is available when certain optional features are installed
and enabled. The key will be labeled as Music when only the Music feature
is enabled. Music is provided through SiriusXM Satellite Radio. The GSR 56
is an Iridium® satellite transceiver that supports voice telephone calls, aircraft
position reporting, and world wide weather products.
While viewing the Home page, touch the Services key to view
the Services page.
Touch To Use
Text Messaging
Touch To Use
Phone Services
Touch To Access
SiriusXM Music
Touch To
Setup Position
Reporting
Touch To Access
Your Contact List
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 14-1 Services Page
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Status
Phone Number
Call/End Call
Inbox
Drafts
Outbox
Volume
Status
Add
Automatic Reporting
Time Period
Name
Phone Number
Email Address
Save Contact
Existing Contact
Volume
Suppression
Call
Message
Edit
Delete
Off
On
On During
APR/MAPR/
TERM
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 14-2 Services Functional Diagram
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Services/
Music
14-1
Index
Foreword
14.1
NOTE: Refer to the Weather section for information about SiriusXM
Weather products.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Music
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A
Data Link Receiver is available for the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The
GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services at any
altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is not available
on the GDL 69 Data Link Receiver.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances
without having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites,
coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. SiriusXM Satellite Radio services
are subscription-based. For more information on XM service packages, visit
www.flyGarmin.com.
Audio entertainment is available through the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
when activated in the optional installation of the GDL 69A. The GTN unit serves
as the display and control head for your remotely mounted GDL 69A. When
enabled, the SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is accessible in the
Music function.
The information on the SiriusXM Satellite Radio display is composed of
four areas: the Active Channel, Available Channels, Category of the highlighted
channel, and the Volume setting. The Active Channel window shows the
Channel Name and Number, Artist, Song Title, and Category.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Channel
System
Prev/Next
Channel
Select with
keypad
Messages
Browse
Channel
Category
Volume
Presets
Up/Down
Mute
XM 1
XM 2
XM 3
Status
GDL 69A
Status
Figure 14-3 Music Functional Diagram
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
14.2
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either
one or two coded IDs, depending on the equipment. Either the Audio Radio
ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription. Activation instructions are
included with the GDL 69A, P/N 190-00355-04. They are also available at
www.flyGarmin.com.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service
subscriptions with the GDL 69A. Either or both services can be activated.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an activation
signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment
programming.
These IDs are located:
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
Wpt Info
• On the Music Menu
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be
located.
NOTE: Refer to the GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation
Instructions (P/N 190-00355-04) for further information.
1. Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio through the e-mail
address listed on their website (www.siriusxm.com) or by
the customer service phone number listed on the website
(1-800-985-9200).
2. Follow the instructions provided.
If SiriusXM weather services have not been activated, all the weather product
boxes are cleared on the XM Information Page and a yellow Activation Required
message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data Link Page (Map Page
Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available
for subscription.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
14-3
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
14.3
Music Operation
The GTN 7XX provides control for enjoying SiriusXM Satellite Radio
audio entertainment in the aircraft. The Music function allows selecting music
categories and specific channels, as well as saving category and channel selections
as presets for quick recall. The music volume level may also be managed.
Current
Category
Com/Nav
Signal
Level
FPL
Direct-To
Current Channel.
Touch to Select a
Channel.
Proc
Current Channel
Charts
Touch Step To
Previous Or Next
Channel
Touch To Select
Category
Current
Volume. Touch
to Change
Volume.
Wpt Info
Touch To Select
Preset
Current Preset
Bank. Touch To
Step Through
Preset Banks.
Map
GDL Data Link
Status
Traffic
Figure 14-4 Main Music Display
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
14.3.1
Browsing Channels and Categories
The Category window displays the currently selected category of audio.
Categories of channels, such as Jazz, Rock, or News, can be selected to list the
available channels for a type of music or other contents.
1. While viewing the Music page, touch the Browse key and
then touch the desired channel to select it.
Touch to
Change
Categories
Current
Channel
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Active
Channel
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 14-5 Music Channels
2. Touch the Category key to activate Category selection and
then touch the desired Category to select it.
Current
Category
Terrain
Weather
Selected
Category
Nearest
Services/
Music
Categories.
Touch to Select
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 14-6 Music Categories
3. The current category will be shown at the top of the display.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
14-5
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
14.3.2
Selecting an SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel
by Number
Channels may be selected directly in the selected category using the numeric
keypad.
1. While viewing the main Music page, touch the Channel key.
The Channel Number selection page will appear.
FPL
Touch Channel Key
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 14-7 Selecting Music Channels
2. Use the numeric keys to enter the number for the desired
channel and then touch the Enter key.
Terrain
Weather
Touch to
Clear Channel
Number
Window
Channel
Number
Window
Nearest
Services/
Music
Numeric Keypad
for in Channel
Number
Selection
Utilities
System
Touch to Select
Channel Shown
in Channel
Number
Window
Messages
Symbols
Figure 14-8 Selecting Music Channels with the Numeric Keypad
Appendix
Index
14-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
14.3.3
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Volume
Foreword
The Volume control allows you to set the audio volume level, as well as mute
the audio.
1. While viewing the Music page, touch the Volume key.
Bar Graph Showing Volume Level
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch To Raise
The Volume
Touch To Lower
The Volume
FPL
Direct-To
Touch To Toggle Mute
Proc
Figure 14-9 Music Volume Control
2. Touch the Up or Down Volume keys to adjust the radio
volume.
3. Touch MUTE to toggle muting of the radio volume.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
4. Touch MUTE again or the Volume key to unmute the radio
volume.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
14-7
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
14.3.4
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel Presets
The Music Menu allows you to store the Active Channel into a selected preset
position for easy later recall. A delay of several seconds can occur when setting
or recalling a preset.
Com/Nav
Selected Preset
Channel
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch To Recall
Selected Preset
Charts
Wpt Info
Touch To Select Bank of Presets (XM 1, XM 2, or XM 3)
Map
Figure 14-10 Music Presets
Traffic
14.3.4.1
Saving a Preset
1. While viewing the desired channel, select the preset bank
for saving the preset (XM 1, XM 2, or XM 3) by touching the
Presets key until the desire bank is shown.
2. Touch the desired Preset key and hold it for three seconds.
14.3.4.2
Recalling a Preset
1. Touch the Presets key to select the preset bank (XM 1, XM
2, or XM 3).
2. Touch the desired Preset key.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
14.3.5
GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver
Troubleshooting
Foreword
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the
possible cause of a failure.
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is
installed has subscribed to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
• Ensure the SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription has been activated
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied
to the Data Link Receiver
For troubleshooting purposes, check the Menu on the Music Page or the
GDL 69 Box on the System - External LRUs Page for Data Link Receiver
(GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number.
It may take several minutes for all subscribed data to become available after
power-up.
1. Touch the Status key on the Music page to display the
GDL 69/69A Status.
Data Radio ID &
Signal Level
Audio Radio ID
& Signal Level
Subscription
Level
GDL 69A SW
Version and
Serial Number
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Weather
Product List
Nearest
Weather
Product Legend
Services/
Music
Music Menu
Utilities
Figure 14-11 GDL 69 Status Page
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
14-9
Index
2. The GDL status information is provided on this page.
Foreword
3. Touch the Menu key to display the GDL Status Menu.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Figure 14-12 GDL Status Menu
Direct-To
4. Touch the Lock Activation key if this is for the initial
subscription or a change in the subscription. Touch the OK
key to continue the operation.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 14-13 Lock Activation
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
14.4
Iridium Phone Operation (Optional)
Optional satellite telephone operation is available through the Iridium®
satellite system that is interfaced through the Garmin GSR 56.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Phone Status
Touch To Select
Phone Number
To Call
Touch To Start
Phone Call
Touch To End
Phone Call
Touch To Select
Suppression
Option
Touch To Adjust
Phone Volume
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 14-14 Services Phone Page
14.4.1
Wpt Info
Status
The Status section shows the Call Time, Phone Status, and Call Suppression
selected. The Call Time value shows the length of the call time for the current
call using the Iridium phone. Phone Status shows the current operating status
of the Iridium phone.
Status
Description
Idle
The Iridium phone is not using the GSR 56 for communicating
at this time.
Initializing
The GSR 56 and its driver are currently initializing.
Connected
The GSR 56 is connected to the called number.
Connecting Call The GSR 56 is in the process of connecting to the called
number.
Changing Volume The volume level on the GSR 56 is changing.
Busy
The phone is in use by another service and the call may not be
made.
Dialing
The GSR 56 is dialing the called number.
Incoming Call A call is being made to the GSR 56.
Hanging Up
The GSR 56 is disconnecting from the current call.
Unavailable
The GSR 56 is currently not usable by the Iridium phone system.
Table 14-1 Iridium Phone Status
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
14-11
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
14.4.2
1. While viewing the Iridium Phone page, touch Phone, select
a phone number, or select one from Contacts.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Making a Phone Call
Entered Phone Number
Touch To Select
Number From
Existing Contacts
Touch To
Delete Previous
Character
Touch To Move
Cursor
FPL
Touch To
Select Phone
Number
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 14-15 Making a Phone Call
Map
2. Touch Enter to accept the selected number.
Traffic
3. Touch the Call key.
Terrain
Weather
Phone Status
Touch To Select
Phone Number
To Call
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch To Start
Phone Call
Touch To End
Phone Call
Touch To Select
Suppression
Option
Touch To Adjust
Phone Volume
System
Messages
Figure 14-16 Phone Call In Progress
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4. To make a direct call with a keypad, touch the Touchtone
Entry key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 14-17 Touchtone Entry Pad
Wpt Info
5. After completing the call, touch the End Call key.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
14-13
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
14.4.3
Answering a Phone Call
An incoming phone call will generate a pop-up announcing the call. When
a call is accepted, the pop-up will show that the call is connected and the
cumulative call time will be shown.
1. When an incoming call is available, touch the Enter key or the
ANSWER key to answer the call. Or, press the Ignore key to
not answer the call and hang up.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Touch To
Answer Phone
Call
Touch To Ignore
Phone Call
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 14-18 Incoming Call Pop-Up
Terrain
2. After a called is accepted and connected, the connection
time will be shown on the pop-up. Touch the ATT soft key
to attenuate the call volume; touching it again will return to
normal volume. Touch the HANG UP soft key to end the call.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
14.4.4
Suppress Visuals
Foreword
Call Suppression controls calling when use of the Iridium phone system is
allowed.
NOTE: The “Suppress Visuals” setting only affects the visual indication
of an incoming call/text. It does not inhibit the phone ringer or incoming
SMS chime. Garmin recommends that you inhibit the audio from the
GSR 56 unless a phone call is active.
Status
Off
Description
Call Suppression is turned off. Calls may be transmitted and
received through the Iridium phone.
On
Call Suppression is turned on. The incoming call pop-up will not
be shown. The call may still be answered on the phone page.
Outgoing calls are not affected.
On During APR/ Call Suppression is turned on during Approach, Missed Approach,
MAPR/TERM and Terminal operations. The incoming call pop-up will not
be shown. The call may still be answered on the phone page.
Outgoing calls are not affected.
Table 14-2 Call Suppression
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
1. While viewing the Iridium Phone page, touch the Suppression
key.
2. Touch the desired Call Suppression type.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch To Select The
Desired Suppression
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 14-19 Select Call/SMS Suppression
3. Or, press Back to return to the Phone page without making
a selection.
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
14-15
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
14.4.5
Phone Volume
Use the Phone Volume controls to adjust the loudness of the phone calls
you hear. Volume controls will only be available when the Idle, Connected, or
Changing Volume states are displayed.
Adjusting the Phone Volume with the Soft Keys
1. While viewing the Iridium Phone page, touch the VOL keys to
adjust the phone volume.
Com/Nav
FPL
Proc
Phone Volume
Level Bar Graph
Charts
Figure 14-20 Select Soft Keys for Phone Volume Adjustment
2. The phone volume level is shown as a bar graph.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch To
Increase Volume
Touch To
Reduce Volume
Direct-To
14.4.6
SMS Text Operation
Send and receive text messages through the GSR 56 phone connection.
1. While viewing the Services page, touch the SMS Text key.
Terrain
Weather
Touch To Compose
New Message
Nearest
Touch To Received
Messages
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch To View
Draft Messages
Touch To View
Sent Messages
System
Messages
Figure 14-21 SMS Text Page
Symbols
2. Select Compose, Inbox, Drafts, or Outbox.
Appendix
Index
Touch To View
SMS Text Menu
Touch To Return
To Previous Page
14-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
14.4.6.1
SMS Text Messaging Menu
The SMS Text Messaging Menu allows you to sort, mark, or delete messages
and select call suppression.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 14-22 SMS Text Messaging Menu
1. Touch the Time key to sort messages by Time or the Address
key to sort by Address.
Proc
Charts
2. Touch the Suppression key and then touch the call
suppression choice. The current choice will be shown on the
Suppression key.
14.4.6.2
Wpt Info
Map
3. While viewing the Inbox, Drafts, or Outbox, touch the Mark
All As Read to tag the messages as having been read.
Traffic
4. Touch the Delete All Messages to delete the messages in
the viewed category.
Terrain
Composing a SMS Text Message
1. While viewing the SMS Text page, touch the Compose key.
Weather
Nearest
Touch To Select
Recipient
Services/
Music
Touch To Compose
New Message
Utilities
Touch To Send
Message
System
Figure 14-23 Compose a New SMS Text Message
Messages
2. Touch the To window to select the recipient. Select either a
Phone Number or E-mail Address.
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
14-17
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch To Select
Phone Number
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Select
Email Address
Figure 14-24 Select Destination for the SMS Text Message
Com/Nav
3. Use either the keypad or select from the Contacts.
FPL
4. Touch the Message window to enter the text for the message.
Use the keypad to create the message.
Direct-To
5. Touch Send to send the message. Touch Save to save the
message as a draft. Touch Delete to delete this message.
Proc
Charts
14.4.6.3
Wpt Info
Map
A Failed SMS Text Message
1. While viewing the Services page, touch the SMS Text key
and touch the Outbox tab. A failed message is noted with an
“x.”
Message With
Failed Mark
Traffic
Terrain
Outbox Group With
Failed Notation
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 14-25 SMS Text Message List Showing a Failed Message
2. Touch the failed message. Touch the Send Again key to resend
the message. Touch the Delete key to delete the message.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Failed Message
Foreword
Message Body
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch Resend
Message
Touch To Delete
Message
Com/Nav
Figure 14-26 Resend a Failed SMS Text Message
14.4.7
FPL
Position Reporting
Position Reporting is a system which collects system variables and transmits
them over the Iridium® satellite at a given interval through the GSR 56.
1. While viewing the Services page, touch the Position Reports
key.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Report Status
Traffic
Touch To Manually
Send A Report
Touch To Enable
Automatic
Reporting
Touch To Set
Automatic
Reporting Period
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 14-27 Services Position Reporting
2. Touch the Automatic Reporting key to enable Automatic
Reporting.
Utilities
3. After Automatic Reporting is enabled, touch the Report
Period key to set the Reporting Period.
System
4. Select the Report Period with the keypad and press Enter.
Messages
5. When Automatic Reporting is disabled, touch the Send Report
key to manually send a report.
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
14-19
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
14.4.7.1
The Status window shows the time until the next data transmission and the
status of the reporting system.
NOTE: The GSR 56 does not report its serial number until 90 seconds after
power up of the GTN. As a result, for that period, the product info for the
GSR 56 will show “Waiting.”
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Status
14.4.7.2
Position Reporting Status
The Time Until Transmit field is a countdown timer that shows the time until
the next data transmission. This field is blank when the aircraft is on the ground.
Position Reporting will be enabled when the aircraft is in the air.
Proc
Status
Idle
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Initializing
Transferring
Unavailable
Traffic
Description
The reporting system is not using the GSR 56 for reporting at
this time.
The GSR 56 and its driver are currently initializing.
A position report is currently being transmitted.
The GSR 56 is currently not usable by the reporting system.
Table 14-3 Position Reporting Status
Terrain
Countdown Time Until Transmit
Reporting Status
Number Of Reports In The Queue
Weather
Figure 14-28 Position Reporting Status
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
14.4.8
Contacts
Foreword
The Phone Book may hold up to 128 entries. A phone number may be
entered and dialed without saving it to the Phone Book. Note that it is necessary
to dial a “1,” the area code, and then the number.
14.4.8.1
Creating a Contact
1. While viewing the Services page, touch the Contacts key.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch To Add
Contact
Touch To Search
Contact List
Direct-To
Proc
Existing
Contacts
Touch To Edit
Contact
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 14-29 Contact List
Terrain
2. Touch the Add key to add a new contact.
Weather
Touch To Add
Contact Name
Nearest
Touch To Add Contact
Phone Number
Services/
Music
Touch To Add Contact
Email Address
Utilities
Touch To Save Contact
System
Figure 14-30 Add a New Contact
3. Use the keypad to enter the information for each item and
then touch the Save Contact key.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
14-21
Index
Foreword
14.4.8.2
Using a Contact
1. While viewing the Contacts page, touch an existing contact.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Send A
Message To The
Contact Phone Number
Touch To Call The
Contact Phone Number
Com/Nav
Touch To Delete
The Contact
Touch To Edit The
Contact
FPL
Figure 14-31 Using the Contact List
Direct-To
2. Touch the desired function for the selected Contact.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-22
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
15
UTILITIES
Foreword
The Utilities page provides a group of features that will support your flight
planning to make them easier and more efficient. The Vertical Calculator
(VCALC) calculates the time to begin descent and vertical speed required
to reach a desired altitude at the chosen location. The Flight Timers feature
provides a number of timer types to assist in monitoring your time in flight.
RAIM Prediction predicts if GPS coverage is available for your current location
or at a specified waypoint at any time and date. RAIM performs checks to ensure
that the GTN unit has adequate satellite geometry during your flight. The Trip
Planning feature allows the pilot to view desired track (DTK), distance (DIS),
estimated time en route (ETE), en route safe altitude (ESA) and estimated
time of arrival (ETA) information for a direct-to, point-to-point between two
specified waypoints or for any programmed flight plan. The Fuel Planning
feature will display fuel conditions along the active direct-to or flight plan
when equipped with fuel flow (FF) and/or fuel on board (FOB) sensors. The
DALT/TAS/Winds feature performs calculations about Altitude, Airspeed,
and Winds. The Scheduled Messages function allows you to create scheduled
messages by Message, Type, and setting a Timer. The Checklists function provides
a built-in method of reviewing your aircraft checklist. The Clean Screen function
will lock the touchscreen so the display can be cleaned without activating any
functions.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 15-1 Utilities Home Page
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-1
Index
Messages
Symbols
Index
Utilities
System
Services/
Music
Appendix
15-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Display Messages
Restore Defaults
Target Waypoint
Before/After
Power On
In Air
Reset Time
Power On
In Air
Departure Time
Criteria
Reset Timer
Criteria
Weather
Reset Timer
Traffic
Trip Timer
Charts
Offset
Proc
FPL
Leg
Fuel on Board
Fuel Flow
Ground Speed
FPL
Leg
Depart Time
Depart Date
Ground Speed
Point to Point
P.POS
From
To
Flight Plan
Indicated ALT
BARO
CAS
TAT
TRK
HDG
Ground Speed
Direct-To
Compute RAIM
Map
Point to Point
P.POS
From
To
Flight Plan
Wpt Info
Mode
FPL
Start/Stop
Terrain
Mode
Message
Type
Timer
Com/Nav
VS Profile
Nearest
Waypoint
Arrival Date
Arrival Time
RAIM Status
Menu
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Direction
Up
Down
Generic Timer
Group
Checklist
Clear Current
Checklist
Clear All
Checklists
Getting
Started
Altitude Type
MSL
Above Wpt
Target Altitude
Foreword
Figure 15-2 Utilities Functional Diagram
190-01007-03 Rev. P
15.1
Vertical Calculator (VCALC)
The Vertical Calculator (VCALC) function allows you to create a
three-dimensional profile which guides you from your present position and
altitude to a final (target) altitude at a specified location. This is helpful when
you would like to descend to a certain altitude near an airport. Once the profile
is defined, message alerts and additional data can be configured on the Map Page
to keep you informed of your progress.
Cruise Altitude
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Target
Waypoint
Target Altitude
Target Offset (Before)
Figure 15-3 VCALC Target
Proc
Charts
VCALC is inhibited in the following conditions:
Wpt Info
• Groundspeed is less than 35 knots
Map
• No active flight plan or direct-to destination
• SUSP mode
Traffic
• Vectors-to-Final mode
Terrain
• VLOC mode
• After the FAF on an approach
Weather
• OBS mode
Nearest
WARNING: Do not use VCALC messages as the only means of either avoiding
terrain/obstacles or following ATC guidance. VCALC provides advisory
information only and must be used in concert with all other available navigation
data sources.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-3
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Target Altitude
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Altitude Type
MSL
Above Wpt
Com/Nav
VS Profile
FPL
Target Offset
Before/After
Direct-To
Target Waypoint
Proc
Figure 15-4 VCALC Page Functional Diagram
Charts
1. From the Utilities page, touch VCALC.
Wpt Info
Before/After
Target
Altitude Type
Traffic
Desired Target
Altitude
Desired
Vertical Speed
Terrain
Desired Distance
From Target Offset
Weather
VCALC Status
Message
Restore Factory
Defaults
Map
Nearest
Services/
Music
Target Waypoint
Vertical Speed
Required For
Target ALT At
Offset
Display Status
Messages
Figure 15-5 VCALC Page
Utilities
2. Select the VCALC items as necessary to set up parameters for
the next waypoint. Touch the Back key when finished.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
15.1.1
Target Altitude
Foreword
This sets the desired ending altitude for the VCALC setup.
Getting
Started
1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch Target ALT.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Backspace
Key
Selected
Altitude
Com/Nav
FPL
Numeric
Keypad
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 15-6 Select VCALC Target Altitude
15.1.2
Map
2. Use the numeric keypad to select the desired Target Altitude
and then touch the Enter key.
Traffic
Altitude Type
Terrain
This value selects the altitude reference that will be used for VCALC
calculations.
1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch Altitude Type.
2. Touching the Altitude Type key will toggle between MSL and
Above WPT. "Above WPT" is only available for waypoints that
are airports.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-5
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
15.1.3
Vertical Speed (VS) Profile
This value sets the desired vertical speed.
1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch VS Profile.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Selected
Vertical
Speed
Com/Nav
Backspace
Key
FPL
Numeric
Keypad
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 15-7 Select VCALC Vertical Speed
Map
2. Use the numeric keypad to select the desired Vertical Speed
and then touch the Enter key.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
15.1.4
Target Offset
Foreword
The Target Offset is a pilot-selected distance value that represents the
geographical location where you wish to arrive at the target altitude. This
distance is measured from the Target Waypoint and, in a separate data field on
the VCALC page, designated as either before or after the Target Waypoint.
1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch the Offset key.
Selected
Target
Offset
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Backspace
Key
Direct-To
Proc
Numeric
Keypad
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 15-8 Select VCALC Target Offset
15.1.5
Terrain
2. Use the numeric keypad to select the desired Target Offset and
then touch the Enter key.
Weather
Before/After Target Waypoint
Nearest
This setting designates whether the offset distance defines a point before you
reach the target reference waypoint or after you reach the waypoint. The “After”
selection is not available for the last waypoint in a flight plan.
1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch the Before/After
key.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
2. Touching the Before/After key will toggle between Before
and After the Target Waypoint.
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-7
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
15.1.6
Target Waypoint
Select the waypoint in the flight plan that will be used for planning a descent.
When using a flight plan, the target waypoint is a reference that can be specified
from the waypoints contained in the flight plan. By default, the last waypoint in
the flight plan is selected.
1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch Target Waypoint.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 15-9 Select VCALC Target Waypoint List
Traffic
2. A list of the remaining waypoints in the flight plan will be
shown. Touch the desired waypoint to select it as the Target
Waypoint.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
15.1.7
Display VCALC Messages
Foreword
Selecting Display Messages will allow the display of messages about the
VCALC function when they occur. With Display Messages not selected,
VCALC messages will not be displayed.
1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch Display Messages
to toggle the display of VCALC messages in the Message
function.
VCALC
Message
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Touch To Toggle
Messages
Traffic
Figure 15-10 VCALC Approaching Target Altitude Message
2. Touch the MSG key to toggle the display of available messages.
Terrain
Weather
15.1.8
Restore VCALC Defaults
Nearest
While viewing the VCALC page menu, touching the Restore Defaults
key will reset all of the VCALC values back to their default values. The Target
Waypoint will not be changed.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-9
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
15.2
Flight Timers
The Flight Timers function provides count up/down timers, plus automatic
recording of departure time, and total trip time. Departure and total trip time
recording can be configured to run either any time unit power is on, or only
when your ground speed exceeds the in-air threshold set by the installer (for
example, 30 knots). A flexible Generic Timer is available for general timing
needs.
FPL
NOTE: When a count up timer is used, the preset value has no function.
Direct-To
1. While viewing the Utilities page, touch the Flight Timers
key.
Proc
Start/Stop Generic Timer
Reset or Preset Timer
Charts
Wpt Info
Selected
Counter
Direction
Map
Select Preset
Time
Traffic
Reset Timer
Terrain
Elapsed
Time
Select
Criteria For
Timer Start
Departure Time
(Local Time)
Set Departure Time
To Current Local
Time Of Timer Start
Weather
Nearest
Figure 15-11 Utility Flight Timers Page
Services/
Music
2. If the Generic Timer Direction counter is set to "Up," the Reset
Timer key will be shown and when touched will return the
timer to 00:00:00. If the Direction counter is set to "Down,"
the Preset Timer key will be shown and the key will return the
timer to the Preset time value.
Utilities
System
Messages
3. Touch each key as desired to set up timer operation.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
15.3
RAIM Prediction
Foreword
RAIM Prediction predicts if GPS coverage is available for your current location
or at a specified waypoint at any time and date. RAIM performs checks to
ensure that the GTN unit has adequate satellite geometry during your flight.
RAIM availability is near 100% in Oceanic, En Route and Terminal phases
of flight. Because the FAA’s TSO requirements for non-precision approaches
specify significantly better satellite coverage than other flight phases,
RAIM may not be available when flying some approaches. The GTN unit
automatically monitors RAIM during approach operations and warns you if
RAIM is not available. In such cases, use a non-GPS based approach. RAIM
prediction helps you plan for a pending flight to confirm GPS operation during
an approach.
RAIM prediction only predicts the availability of Fault Detection (FD)
integrity in the absence of SBAS corrections. It cannot predict the availability
of LPV or L/VNAV approaches. The FAA provides a NOTAM service for LPV
approach availability.
1. While viewing the Utilities page, touch the RAIM Prediction
key.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch To Select
Local Arrival Time
Touch To Select
Local Arrival Date
Touch To Select
Destination
Waypoint
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 15-12 Utility RAIM Prediction Page
2. Touch the Waypoint key and select the waypoint for RAIM
Prediction.
3. Touch the Arrival Date key and select the date of arrival at
the selected waypoint.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-11
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4. Touch the Arrival Time key and select the local time of
expected arrival at the selected waypoint.
Foreword
5. When the Waypoint, Arrival Date, and Arrival Time values have
been entered, touch the Compute RAIM key to determine if
RAIM is available.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
RAIM Prediction
Result
Touch To
Compute RAIM
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 15-13 RAIM Prediction Completed
15.4
Trip Planning
The GTN 7XX allows the pilot to view desired track (DTK), distance (DIS),
estimated time en route (ETE), en route safe altitude (ESA) and estimated time of
arrival (ETA) information for a direct-to, point-to-point between two specified
waypoints or for any programmed flight plan. This item also displays the
sunrise/sunset times for your destination waypoint (for the selected departure
date). All times are based on the time set in System-Setup. For trip planning
inputs: departure time and date are manually entered, while ground speed can
be provided by sensor data, if selected.
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending
waypoints and the trip planning inputs.
In Flight Plan mode with a stored flight plan selected, and the entire flight
plan (CUM) selected, the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the
selected flight plan.
In Flight Plan mode with a stored flight plan selected, and a specific leg
selected, the waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
Appendix
Index
15-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
In Point-To-Point mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an
active flight plan, these default to the endpoints of the active leg).
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the
active flight plan has already been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track
between the selected waypoints. It is dashed unless only a single leg is
selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and
in whole units up to 9999.
• Estimated time en route (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less
than an hour, then it is shown as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is
the local time at the destination.
- If in Point-To-Point mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the
departure time.
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the
ETA by adding to the departure time all of the ETEs of the legs up
to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was
selected.
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position
of the aircraft and the current leg being flown. The ETA is calculated
by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to and
including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the
ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
• En Route safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT.
• Destination sunrise and sunset times - These times are shown as
hours:minutes and are the local time at the destination.
NOTE: The capability of using Sensor Data for the trip planning functions
is available in software v2.00, v4.10, and later.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-13
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
15.4.1
Point-To-Point Mode
The Trip Planning Point-to-Point mode shows trip calculations between two
selected points: either two waypoints from the database or from your present
position to a selected waypoint.
1. While viewing the Utilities page, touch the Trip Planning
key.
2. Touch the Mode key to toggle to Point-to-Point.
FPL
3. Touch the P.POS key to toggle between using your present
position as the From waypoint when selected or a waypoint
selected from the database when P.POS is deselected. If P.POS
is selected, the Lat/Lon of the present position will be shown
in the From position.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch To Use
Present Position
As Departure
Point
Touch To Toggle
Sensor Data Use
Touch To Select
Departure Time
Lat/Lon Of Present
Position
Touch To Select
Arrival Waypoint
Touch To Select
P-to-P or Flight
Plan Mode
Touch To Select
Departure Date
Trip Statistics
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 15-14 Utility Trip Planning Page (Point-To-Point Mode) - Sensor Data Used
4. If P.POS is not selected for the From point, touch the From
key and then use the keypad to select a waypoint from the
database and touch Enter.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Touch For
Waypoint Search
Foreword
Getting
Started
Selected From Waypoint
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Select From Waypoint
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 15-15 Selecting a From Waypoint
5. Touch the To key and then use the keypad to select a waypoint
from the database for the destination waypoint and touch
Enter.
6. Touch the Depart Time key and then use the keypad to select
the departure time (local time at From waypoint) and touch
Enter.
Selected Departure Time
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch To Select Departure Time
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 15-16 Selecting Departure Time
Messages
7. Touch the Depart Date key and then the Departure Date
page to select the departure year, month, and day and then
touch Enter.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-15
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Select
Departure Year
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Touch To Select
Departure Month
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Touch To Select
Departure Day
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 15-17 Selecting Departure Date
15-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
8. Touch the Ground Speed key and then the keypad to select
the average ground speed for the trip and touch Enter.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Selected Ground Speed
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Select Ground Speed
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 15-18 Selecting Expected Average Ground Speed
9. After completing the Trip Planning selections, the trip statistics
will be shown in the lower half of the display.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Trip Statistics For
Selected Route
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 15-19 Utility Trip Planning Page With Computed Data (Point-To-Point Mode)
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-17
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Use Sensor
Data Selected
Ground Speed
Set By Sensor
Data
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Trip Statistics For
Selected Route
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 15-20 Utility Trip Planning Page With Computed Data (Point-To-Point Mode) - Use
Sensor Data Selected
Wpt Info
NOTE: When Local Time is selected in the Setup-Date/Time feature,
Sunrise/Sunset calculations in the Trip Planning feature are based on the
From waypoint time zone. For instance, a flight plan originating in the
Pacific time zone and ending in the Central time zone would show Sunset/
Sunrise times at the destination in Pacific time. This potential offset does
not occur when UTC time is used.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
15.4.2
Flight Plan Mode
The Trip Planning Flight Plan mode shows trip calculations between two legs
of the flight plan or the cumulative flight plan.
1. Touch the Mode key to select Flight Plan mode, if required.
Touch To Select
Flight Plan Leg
Touch To Select
Flight Plan From
Catalog
Touch To Select
Expected Average
Ground Speed
Touch To Select
Departure Time
Touch To Select
Departure Date
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch To Select
P-to-P or Flight
Plan Mode
Select To Toggle
Sensor Data Use
Foreword
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Trip Statistics
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 15-21 Utility Trip Planning Page (Flight Plan Mode)
2. Touch the Flight Plan key to select the flight plan.
Terrain
Weather
Touch To Select
Flight Plan (Active
FPL Shown)
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Touch To Scroll List
Symbols
Figure 15-22 Select Flight Plan
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-19
Index
3. Touch the Leg key to select the flight plan leg. If the
“Cumulative” selection is chosen, statistics will relate to the
entire flight plan.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Select Flight
Plan Leg (Cumulative
FPL Shown)
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 15-23 Select Flight Plan Leg
Wpt Info
4. Touch the Depart Time key and then use the keypad to select
the departure time (local time at From waypoint) and touch
Enter.
Map
Traffic
5. Touch the Depart Date key and then the Departure Date
page to select the departure year, month, and day and then
touch Enter.
Terrain
Weather
6. Touch the Ground Speed key and then the keypad to select
the average ground speed for the trip and touch Enter.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
7. Statistics for the current flight plan leg are displayed in the
lower half of the display.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch To View
Statistics For
Next FPL Leg
Touch To View
Statistics For
Previous FPL Leg
Trip Statistics
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 15-24 Utility Trip Planning Page Computed Data View (Flight Plan Mode)
Wpt Info
Map
Use Sensor
Data Selected
Ground Speed
Set By Sensor
Data
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Trip Statistics For
Selected Route
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 15-25 Utility Trip Planning Page Computed Data View (Flight Plan Mode) Use Sensor Data Selected
8. Touch the Next key to view statistics for the next leg in the
flight plan.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-21
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
15.5
Fuel Planning — This item displays fuel conditions along the active
direct-to or flight plan. You may manually enter fuel flow, ground speed
(GS) and fuel on board figures for planning purposes. Fuel planning figures
can be displayed not only for the currently active flight plan or direct-to,
but also point-to-point between two specified waypoints and for any
programmed flight plan.
Fuel on board and fuel flow may be manually entered in the unit start-up
sequence and used to recalculate fuel on board as it is consumed. When fuel
flow or fuel on board is manually entered, the figures are retained the next time
you view the page (with fuel on board continuously recalculated).
Proc
NOTE: The capability of using Sensor Data for the trip planning functions
is available in software v2.00, v4.10, and later.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Fuel Planning
Use Sensor Data
Selected
Selected
Distance
Measured
Traffic
Terrain
Fuel Required For
the Flight Plan
Weather
Range With
Existing Fuel
Flight Time
Available With
Remaining Fuel
At Destination
Flight Time
Available With
Existing Fuel
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Fuel Usage Rate
Remaining Fuel
At Destination
Figure 15-26 Utility Fuel Planning Page (Flight Plan Mode) - Use Sensor Data Selected
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-22
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
15.5.1
Point-To-Point Mode
The Fuel Planning Point-to-Point mode shows fuel calculations between two
selected points: either two waypoints from the database or from your present
position to a selected waypoint.
1. While viewing the Utilities page, touch the Fuel Planning
key.
2. Touch the Mode key to toggle to Point-to-Point.
3. Touch the P.POS key to toggle between using your present
position as the From waypoint when selected or a waypoint
selected from the database when P.POS is deselected. If P.POS
is selected, the Lat/Lon of the present position will be shown
in the From position.
Touch To Use
Present Position
As Departure
Point
Use Sensor Data
Selected
Lat/Lon Of Present
Position
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Touch To Select
Arrival Waypoint
Wpt Info
Touch To Select
P-to-P or Flight
Plan Mode
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Fuel Statistics
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 15-27 Utility Trip Planning Page (Point-To-Point Mode) - Use Sensor Data Selected
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-23
Index
4. If P.POS is not selected for the From point, touch the From
key and then use the keypad to select a waypoint from the
database and touch Enter.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch For Waypoint Search
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Selected From Waypoint
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch To Select From Waypoint
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 15-28 Selecting the From Waypoint
Wpt Info
5. Touch the To key and then use the keypad to select a waypoint
from the database for the destination waypoint and touch
Enter.
Map
Traffic
6. Touch the Fuel on Board key and then use the keypad to
select the current amount of fuel on board and touch Enter.
Terrain
Selected Fuel On
Board Value
Weather
Nearest
Touch To Select Fuel On
Board Value
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 15-29 Selecting Current Fuel On Board
Appendix
Index
15-24
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
7. Touch the Fuel Flow key and then use the keypad to select
the average fuel flow and touch Enter.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Selected Fuel
Flow Value
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Select Fuel Value
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 15-30 Selecting Fuel Flow
8. Touch the Ground Speed key and then the keypad to select
the average ground speed for the trip and touch Enter.
Selected Ground
Speed Value
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch To Select
Ground Speed Value
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 15-31 Selecting Ground Speed
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-25
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
15.5.2
1. Touch the Mode key to select Flight Plan mode, if required.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Flight Plan Mode
The Fuel Planning Flight Plan mode shows fuel calculations between two legs
of the flight plan or the cumulative flight plan.
Touch To Select
Flight Plan Leg
Touch To Select
Flight Plan From
Catalog
Use Sensor Data
Selected
Touch To Select
P-to-P or Flight
Plan Mode
Proc
Touch To Select
Next FPL Leg
Charts
Wpt Info
Touch To Select
Previous FPL Leg
Fuel Statistics
Map
Figure 15-32 Utility Fuel Planning Page (Flight Plan Mode)
Traffic
2. Touch the Flight Plan key to select the flight plan.
Terrain
Weather
Touch To Select
Flight Plan (Active
FPL Shown)
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Touch To Scroll List
Messages
Figure 15-33 Select Flight Plan
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-26
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the Leg key to select the flight plan leg. If the
“Cumulative” selection is chosen, statistics will relate to the
entire flight plan.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Select Flight
Plan Leg (Cumulative
FPL Shown)
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 15-34 Select Flight Plan Leg
Wpt Info
4. If desired, touch the Fuel on Board key and then use the
keypad to select the Fuel on Board value and touch Enter.
Map
5. If desired, touch the Fuel Flow key and then use the keypad
to select the Fuel Flow value and touch Enter.
Traffic
6. Touch the Ground Speed key and then the keypad to select
the average ground speed for the trip and touch Enter.
Terrain
7. Statistics for the current flight plan leg are displayed in
the lower half of the display. The Cumulative flight plan is
shown.
Weather
8. Touch the Previous and Next keys to view statistics for the
previous and next legs in the flight plan.
Services/
Music
Nearest
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-27
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
15.6
DALT/TAS/Winds
Density Alt / TAS / Winds — indicates the theoretical altitude at which
your aircraft performs depending upon several variables, including indicated
altitude (Indicated ALT), barometric pressure (BARO) and total air
temperature (TAT; the temperature, including the heating effect of speed,
read on a standard outside temperature gauge). This item computes true
airspeed (TAS) and density altitude, based upon the factors above. Also,
this feature determines winds aloft — the wind direction and speed — and
a head wind/tail wind component, based on true airspeed, aircraft heading
(HDG) and ground speed. When a FADC provides pressure altitude and the
Use Sensor Data option is selected, the Baro key will not be present in the
edit mode and the Baro indication will not be shown in computed results.
Touch To Select Baro Pressure
Proc
Charts
Touch To Select
Indicated Altitude
Touch To Select
Calibrated Air
Speed
Touch To Select
Total Air Temp
Touch To Toggle
Sensor Data Use
Wpt Info
TRK, HDG, &
GS Statistics
Map
DALT, TAS, and
Winds Statistics
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 15-35 Utility DALT/TAS/Winds Page Using Indicated Altitude and Not Using Sensor Data
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch To Toggle
Sensor Data Use
TRK, HDG, &
GS Statistics
Utilities
System
DALT, TAS, and
Winds Statistics
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 15-36 Utility DALT/TAS/Winds Page Using Sensor Data and Pressure Altitude
15-28
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
NOTE: The capability of using Sensor Data for the trip planning functions
is available in software v2.00, v4.10, and later.
Getting
Started
Touch To Select Baro Pressure
Touch To Select
Indicated Altitude
Touch To Toggle
Sensor Data Use
Touch To Select
Track Value
Touch To Select
Heading Value
Foreword
Touch To Select
Calibrated Air
Speed
Touch To Select
Total Air Temp
Touch To Select
Ground Speed
DALT, TAS, and
Winds Statistics
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 15-37 Utility DALT/TAS/Winds Page Using Manually Entered Data
1. Touch the Indicated ALT key and then the keypad to select
the Indicated Altitude and then touch Enter.
Map
Traffic
Selected
Indicated
Altitude Value
Touch To Clear
Values
Touch To Select
Indicated
Altitude Value
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Touch To
Select Above
Or Below Sea
Level
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 15-38 Select Indicated Altitude Value
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-29
Index
2. Touch the BARO key and then the keypad to select the
Barometric Pressure and then touch Enter.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Selected Barometric
Pressure Value
Touch To Clear
Values
Touch To Select
Barometric Pressure
Value
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch To Cancel
Selection
Charts
Figure 15-39 Select Barometric Pressure Value
Wpt Info
3. Touch the CAS key and then the keypad to select the Calibrated
Air Speed and then touch Enter.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Selected Calculated
Air Speed Value
Touch To Clear
Values
Touch To Select
Calculated Air
Speed Value
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch To Cancel
Selection
System
Figure 15-40 Select Calculated Air Speed Value
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-30
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
4. Touch the TAT key and then the keypad to select the Total Air
Temperature and touch Enter.
Selected Total
Air Temperature
Value
Touch To Clear
Values
Touch To
Select Total Air
Temperature
Value
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch To
Select Above
Or Below 0
Degrees
Touch To Cancel
Selection
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 15-41 Select Total Air Temperature Value
5. Touch the TRK key and then the keypad to select the Track
Angle and then touch Enter.
Selected Track
Angle Value
Touch To Clear
Values
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch To Select
Track Angle
Value
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch To Cancel
Selection
Utilities
System
Figure 15-42 Select Track Angle Value
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-31
Index
6. Touch the HDG key and then the keypad to select the Heading
value and then touch Enter.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Selected
Heading Value
Touch To Clear
Values
Touch To Select
Heading Value
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Touch To Cancel
Selection
Figure 15-43 Select Heading Value
Wpt Info
7. Touch the Ground Speed key and then the keypad to select
the average ground speed for the trip and then touch Enter.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-32
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
15.7
Clean Screen Mode
Foreword
The Clean Screen mode makes the touchscreen inactive so the display can
be manually cleaned. The front bezel, keypad, and display can be cleaned with
a microfiber cloth or with a soft cotton cloth dampened with clean water. DO
NOT use any chemical cleaning agents. Care should be taken to avoid scratching
the surface of the display.
1. While viewing the Utilities page group, touch the Clean
Screen key to start Screen Cleaning Mode.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Touch To Clean Screen
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 15-44 Utilities Page
Weather
2. Touch the HOME key to exit Screen Cleaning Mode.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 15-45 Screen Cleaning Mode
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-33
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
15.8
Scheduled Messages
The Scheduled Messages utility displays reminder messages (such as “Change
oil,” “Switch fuel tanks,” “Overhaul,” etc.). One-time, periodic, and event-based
messages are allowed. One-time messages appear once the timer expires and
reappear each time the GTN-series unit is powered on, until the message is
deleted. Periodic messages automatically reset to the original timer value, once
the message is displayed. Event-based messages do not use a timer, but rather a
specific date and time.
NOTE: This feature is available in software v5.00, and later.
Direct-To
1. While viewing the Utilities page group, touch the Scheduled
Messages key to start the Scheduled Messages function.
Proc
Charts
Touch To Add A
Scheduled Message
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 15-46 Scheduled Messages Page
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-34
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2. Touch the Message selection and enter the desired message to
be displayed. Touch the Type selection to choose the message
type. Touch the Timer selection to set the countdown time for
the message to be displayed.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Enter
Message Text
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch To Select
Message Type
Direct-To
Touch To
Enter Message
Countdown Timer
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 15-47 Create a Scheduled Message
2. After completing the selections, touch the Enter key.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 15-48 Sample Scheduled Message
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-35
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
15.9
The Checklists function provides a built-in method of reviewing your aircraft
checklist. Checklists are created using the Garmin Checklist Editor software
(available online) and stored on the datacard as “chklist.ace.” As each Checklist
is completed, you can advance to the next one in order. In the Checklist Menu,
you can access any Checklist, or group of Checklists, and clear the current or
all Checklists.
NOTE: This feature is available in software v5.10 and later. In software
v6.00 and later, the installer may configure the title of this feature to be
Task Lists or Checklists.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Checklists
15.9.1
Checklists Menu
Charts
1. While viewing the Utilities page group, touch the Checklists
key to start the Checklists function.
Wpt Info
2. Touch the Menu key to select an option from the Checklist
Menu.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch To Select A
Checklist Group
Nearest
Touch To Select
A Checklist
Services/
Music
Touch To Clear
Current Checklist
Touch To Clear
All Checklists
Figure 15-49 Utility Checklist Menu
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-36
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Touch To Select
A Checklist
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 15-50 Select a Checklist from the Checklist Menu
15.9.2
Proc
Viewing Checklists
1. While viewing the Utilities function, touch the Checklist key.
Use the existing Checklists in the order provided or touch the
Menu key to select another checklist.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Completed
Checklist Item
Terrain
Weather
Checklist
Status
Touch To Advance
To Next Checklist
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 15-51 Checklist Completion
2. After completing the Checklist, touch Go to Next Checklist,
Menu, or Back to exit the Checklist function.
System
Messages
NOTE: All checklists are cleared after a power cycle.
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
15-37
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
This page intentionally left blank
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-38
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
16
SYSTEM
Foreword
The System function allows you to change unit settings, customize operation
to your preferences, and check on the operation of your unit. The System pages
cover System Status, Database Info and transfer, GPS Status, External LRUs,
Setup, Alerts, Units, Audio, Backlight control function, and Connext Setup.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
1. From the Home page, touch the System key.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 16-1 System Home Page
Traffic
2. Touch the desired key to reach that function. To return to the
System page, touch the Back key.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-1
Index
Serial No. & Sys ID
SW/HW Version Info
Database Info
Foreword
Getting
Started
SBAS
WAAS
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
CDI
Date/Time
Com/Nav
Nearest Airport
Crossfill
FPL
Direct-To
Arrival
Destination Proximity
Class B/TMA
Class C/TCA
Class D
Restricted
MOA (Military)
Other
Airspace Altitude Buffer
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
User Fields *
Traffic
Nav Angle
Mag Var
Temp
Fuel
Position Format
Terrain
Weather
Volume
TAWS Alert Voice
Nearest
Services/
Music
Manual Offset
Utilities
Connext Setup **
System
Voice Commands **
Command History **
Messages
* - Available When Space Allows On Top Row
** - Optional
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 16-2 System Function Summary
16-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
16.1
System Status
Foreword
The System status page of the System function provides information about
the GTN unit and the equipment attached to it. This information is useful if it
is necessary to contact Customer Service. The System Status page shows the
System ID and serial number for the GTN unit, hardware and software versions,
as well as a list of the installed databases.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Serial # & System ID
Software Versions
Direct-To
Database Info
Proc
Current
Standby
Conflicts
Charts
Figure 16-3 System Status Functional Diagram
Wpt Info
Serial No. And System ID
Map
Traffic
Internal SW Versions
Terrain
Active Database Information
Database Not Active and On
Standby
Database Conflicts
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch To Scroll List
Utilities
Figure 16-4 System Function System Status Page Description
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-3
Index
1. While viewing the System page, touch System Status.
Foreword
2. Use the Up and Down arrow keys as needed to view the
Database Information.
Getting
Started
3. Touch the Back key to return to the System page.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
16.1.1
Serial Number and System ID
The System Status section shows the unit Serial Number and the System ID.
16.1.2
Version Information
The software versions of the GTN unit are displayed. This information is
useful when contacting Customer Support.
16.1.3
Database Information
The Database Information section lists the name of the database, its version,
and expiration date for the currently used databases, and also contains the
Database SYNC function. Standby databases are listed for databases not currently
used, but available on the datacard. Database conflicts will be shown in the
Conflicts section. For more information on GTN databases and how to update
them see section 19.2.
Terrain
16.2
GPS Status
Weather
16.2.1
GPS Status Page
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
The GPS Status Page provides a visual reference of GPS receiver functions,
including current satellite coverage, GPS receiver status, position accuracy, and
displays your present position (in latitude and longitude) and altitude. The GPS
Status Page also displays the current UTC time at the top right of the page.
The Satellite Status Page is helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal
levels due to poor satellite coverage or installation problems. You may wish to
refer to this page occasionally to monitor GPS receiver performance and establish
a normal pattern for system operation. Should problems occur at a later date, you
may find it helpful to have an established baseline from which to compare.
Symbols
1. While viewing the System page, touch GPS Status.
Appendix
Index
16-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GPS Receiver Status
Lat/Lon Position
Sky View
of satellite
positions
Foreword
Current UTC Time
GPS Altitude
Ground Speed
Phase of Flight
Vertical Figure
of Merit
Horizontal
Figure of Merit
Estimated Position
Uncertainty
Horizontal Dilution
of Precision
Signal Strength
Bars
Satellite Numbers
SBAS Selection
Satellite
acquired
and used for Satellite acquired,
position fix used for position fix,
and has differential
corrections
Tracked
Satellite, not
used
Acquiring
Satellite, not
ready for use
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 16-5 GPS Status Page
2. If desired, touch the SBAS key to select an SBAS provider. The
SBAS list is based on the Aviation database.
Traffic
3. Touch the key for the desired SBAS provider.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 16-6 SBAS Provider List
4. Touch the Back key to return to the System Status page.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-5
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar appears for each
satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite number (01-32, SBAS satellites will
have higher numbers) underneath each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition
is shown in the following stages:
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Graph Symbol
No signal strength bars
Description
The receiver is looking for the satellites indicated.
The receiver has found the satellite(s) and is collecting
data.
The receiver has collected the necessary data but the
Yellow signal strength bars satellite is not being used in the position solution as it
has been excluded.
Cross-hatch cyan signal
The receiver has found the satellite(s) but it has been
strength bars
excluded by the FDE program as a faulty satellite.
Solid cyan signal strength The receiver has collected the necessary data, but is
bars
not using the satellite in the position solution.
Solid green signal strength The receiver has collected the necessary data and the
bars
satellite is being used in the position solution.
The “D” character inside the bars indicates differential
D
corrections (e.g., WAAS) are being used for that
satellite.
Gray signal strength bars
Table 16-1 Signal Strength Bar Graph Description
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
The Time and other data may not be displayed until the unit has acquired
enough satellites for a fix.
The sky view display at the left of the page shows the satellites currently in view
as well as their respective positions. The outer circle of the sky view represents
the horizon (with north at the top of the circle); the inner circle represents 45°
above the horizon and the center point shows the position directly overhead.
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected
(hollow signal strength bar) before the satellite may be used for navigation (solid
signal strength bar). Once the GPS receiver has determined your position, the
GTN unit indicates your position, altitude, track and ground speed. The GPS
receiver status field also displays the following messages under the appropriate
conditions:
Appendix
Index
16-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GPS Signal Message
Acquiring
3D Nav
3D Diff Nav
LOI
Description
Foreword
The GPS receiver is acquiring satellites for navigation.
In this mode, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last
known position to determine the satellites that should
be in view.
The GPS receiver is in 3D navigation mode and
computes altitude using satellite data.
The GPS receiver is in 3D navigation mode and
differential corrections are being used.
The “LOI” (Loss Of Integrity) annunciator (bottom left
corner of the screen) indicates that satellite coverage
is insufficient to pass built-in integrity monitoring
tests.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Table 16-2 GPS Signal Messages
The GPS Status Page also indicates the accuracy of the position fix, using
Horizontal Figure of Merit (HFOM), Vertical Figure of Merit (VFOM), and
Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU). HFOM and VFOM represent the 95%
confidence levels in horizontal and vertical accuracy. The lowest numbers are
the best accuracy and the highest numbers are worse. EPU is the horizontal
position error estimated by the Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) algorithm,
in feet or meters.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-7
Index
NOTE: Operating outside of an SBAS service area with SBAS enabled
may cause elevated EPU values to be displayed on the satellite status
page. Regardless of the EPU value displayed, the LOI annunciation is the
controlling indication for determining the integrity of the GPS navigation
solution.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
NOTE: The FDE Prediction program is used to predict FDE availability.
This program must be used prior to all oceanic or remote area flights for
all operators using the GTN as a primary means of navigation under FAR
parts 91, 121, 125, and 135. The FDE program is part of the GTN trainer,
available for download from the GTN product information page on Garmin’s
website, www.flyGarmin.com.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
If the GTN has not been operated for a period of six months or more,
acquiring satellite data to establish almanac and satellite orbit information can
take 5 to 10 minutes.
The Time and other data may not be displayed until the unit has acquired
enough satellites for a fix.
16.2.2
Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS)
SBAS is a system that supports wide area, or regional, augmentation through
the use of additional satellite broadcast messages. WAAS, EGNOS, MSAS, and
GAGAN are known SBAS providers.
At the time of printing, SBAS providers support the following areas:
Weather
Nearest
• WAAS provides SBAS service for Alaska, Canada, the 48 contiguous
states, and most of Central America.
Services/
Music
• EGNOS provides SBAS service for most of Europe and parts of North
Africa.
• MSAS provides SBAS service for Japan only.
Utilities
• GAGAN provides SBAS service for India. Available with GPS software
v5.2 and later.
System
1. While viewing the System page, touch GPS Status.
Messages
2. If desired, touch the SBAS key to select an SBAS provider. The
SBAS list is based on the Aviation database.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the key for the desired SBAS provider.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 16-7 SBAS Selection Page
Charts
4. Touch the Back key to return to the System Status page.
Wpt Info
16.2.3
Circle of Uncertainty
The Circle of Uncertainty depicts an area where the ownship location is
guaranteed to be when the aircraft location cannot be accurately determined.
The area of the Circle of Uncertainty becomes larger as GPS horizontal accuracy
degrades and smaller as it improves. The Circle of Uncertainty is shown only
when the aircraft is on the ground. The Circle of Uncertainty area is transparent
so that features within it may still be seen.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Area Within The
Circle Of Uncertainty
Utilities
Ownship Symbol
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 16-8 Circle of Uncertainty
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-9
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
16.2.4
GPS Faults
The GTN communicates various fault conditions that can affect the accuracy
of the GPS. These include loss of integrity, loss of navigation, and a loss of
position.
Loss of Integrity
A loss of integrity is when the integrity of the GPS position does not meet the
requirements for the current phase of flight. This only occurs before the final
approach fix (if an approach is active).
The GTN indicates a loss of integrity by displaying the amber "LOI"
annunciation at the bottom of the screen.
Loss of Navigation
A loss of navigation can be caused by any of the following conditions:
• Aircraft is after the final approach fix and GPS integrity does not meet the
active approach requirements
Map
• Insufficient number of satellites supporting aircraft position (i.e., more
than 5 seconds pass without adequate satellites to compute a position)
Traffic
• GPS sensor detects an excessive position error or failure that cannot be
excluded within the time to alert
Terrain
• On-board hardware failure
Weather
The GTN indicates a loss of navigation by invalidating the active course
guidance, and issuing a system message describing the cause.
Nearest
Loss of Position
Services/
Music
Utilities
If the GTN cannot determine a GPS position solution, the ownship icon
disappears and the amber "No GPS Position" annunciation appears across the
map pages. For information about managing limited navigation features, refer
to section 1.10.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
16.3
External LRUs
Foreword
The External LRU page displays the external equipment connected to the
GTN and their connection status.
1. While viewing the System page, touch the External LRUs
key.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
LRU Available And
Communicating
FPL
Direct-To
Touch For More
Information
Proc
Charts
LRU Not Available
Or Communicating
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 16-9 External LRU Page
Traffic
2. When more information is available about the listed units,
touch the More Info key to view the information.
16.3.1
GDL 69 (and GDL 69A) Status
Terrain
Weather
The GDL 69 Status page displays the serial numbers for the Data Radio for the
GDL 69/69A and the Audio Radio for the GDL 69A. Subscription status displays
the level of service available for your particular subscription. The Weather
Products section lists the products available for your particular subscription.
1. While viewing the External LRUs page, touch More Info for
the GDL 69 LRU.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-11
Index
Foreword
Data Radio ID &
Signal Level
Audio Radio ID
& Signal Level
Getting
Started
Subscription
Level
SW Version and
Serial Number
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Weather
Product List
Com/Nav
Weather
Product Legend
FPL
Direct-To
Touch To View
GDL Status Menu
Proc
Figure 16-10 GDL 69/69A Status Page
Charts
2. Touch the Menu key to display the GDL 69 Status Menu.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 16-11 GDL Status Menu
3. Touch the Lock Activation key if this is for the initial
subscription or a change in the subscription. Touch the OK
key to continue the operation.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 16-12 Lock Activation
Messages
4. Touch the Back key to return to the System page.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
16.3.2
GDL 88 or GTX 345 Status
Foreword
The GDL 88 or GTX 345 Status page displays information about the status of
the GDL 88 or GTX 345.
Status
On
Available to Run
Unavailable – Fault
Unavailable to Run
Description
Application is on/running. Required ownship input data is
available and meets the performance criteria.
Application is configured. Required input data is available
and meets the performance criteria. This state represents
that the ASA Application is manually or automatically
selected off.
Required Input data is not available due to a failure or the
ASA Application process is failed.
Required Input data is available but does not meet the
performance criteria or is not available due to NonComputed Data (NCD) conditions.
Table 16-3 Traffic Application Status
Internal or External GPS Source
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Traffic
Terrain
GDL 88 SW Version
and Serial Number
FIS-B
Weather
Products
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Map
1. While viewing the External LRUs page, touch More Info for
the GDL 88 or GTX 345 LRU.
Time In
Minutes From
Last Ground
Uplink
Getting
Started
Weather
Nearest
Weather Product
Legend
Touch To
Enable/Disable
FIS-B Weather
Services/
Music
Traffic Status
System
Utilities
Messages
Figure 16-13 GDL 88 Status
2. Touch the Enabled key to toggle whether FIS-B Weather is
enabled/disabled for use.
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-13
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
16.3.3
GSR 56 Status
The GSR 56 Status page displays information about the status of the GSR 56.
1. While viewing the External LRUs page, touch More Info for
the GSR 56 LRU.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Iridium
Signal Level
Current
Registration Info
Phone and
Datalink Status
Touch To
Register
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 16-14 GSR 56 Status
2. Touch the Connext Registration key to display the Connext
Registration display.
Traffic
Terrain
Touch To
Register
Touch To Enter
Access Code
Weather
Nearest
Current
Registration Info
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 16-15 Connext Registration Page
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
16.4
Setup
Foreword
System Setup allows setting the time convention, Com channel spacing,
crossfilling to a second GTN or GNS unit, and Nearest Airport search filtering.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
CDI
FPL
CDI Scale
ILS CDI Capture
Direct-To
Date/Time
Local Offset
Time Format
Proc
Nearest Airport
Runway Surface
Min Rwy Length
Charts
Wpt Info
Com/Nav
Map
Com Channel Spacing
25.0 kHz
8.33 kHz
Reverse Frequency Lookup
Traffic
Terrain
Crossfill
Weather
Figure 16-16 System Setup Functions
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-15
Index
1. While viewing the System page, touch the Setup key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch Key to
Select CDI Scale
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch Key to
Set ILS CDI
Capture
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Traffic
Touch Key to Set Com
Channel spacing
Touch Key to Activate
Rev Freq Lookup
Touch Key to
Set Time Format
Touch Key to Enable
Crossfill With Dual GTN
Units
Figure 16-17 System Setup Page
2. After making the desired selections, touch the Back key to
return to the Setup page.
Charts
Map
Touch Key to Set
Min Runway Length
Touch Key to
Set Time Offset
Proc
Wpt Info
Touch Key to Set
Runway Surface Type
16.4.1
Date/Time
The Date/Time setting provides selection of time format (local or UTC;
12- or 24-hour). UTC (also called “GMT” or “Zulu”) date and time are calculated
directly from the GPS satellites’ signals and cannot be changed.
Terrain
Current Selected
Date and Time
Weather
Touch To Select
Local Time Offset
Nearest
Touch To Select
Time Format
Services/
Music
Figure 16-18 System Date and Time Setup
Utilities
1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch Local Offset to
set the time offset for local time.
System
2. Use the keypad to select the desired local offset and then
touch Enter.
3. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the Time Format
key to select local 12 hour, local 24 hour, or UTC time.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Touch Key to Select
Time Format
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 16-19 Select System Time Format
4. Touch the key for the desired time format.
16.4.2
FPL
Com Channel Spacing
Com transceiver channel spacing may be selected between 8.33 kHz and
25.0 kHz.
While viewing the System Setup page, touch Channel Spacing
to toggle between 8.33 kHz and 25.0 kHz channel spacing.
Direct-To
16.4.3
Wpt Info
Reverse Frequency Look-Up
The identifier and frequency type will be shown for the selected Com and
Nav frequencies for the nearest stations that are in the database when the unit is
receiving a valid position input. Station Identifiers with a “+” sign will have more
stations associated with this frequency than just the type displayed.
1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the Reverse
Frequency Lookup key to toggle the function.
Proc
Charts
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Airport
Identifier and
Type Shown
For Freqs In
Database.
Identifier and
Type Shown
For Freqs In
Database
The “+” Sign
Indicates
More Stations
Associated
With This
Frequency
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Reverse Frequency
Lookup Selected
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 16-20 Reverse Frequency Lookup Selected
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-17
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
16.4.4
Nearest Airport Criteria
Nearest Airport Criteria defines the surface type and minimum runway
length used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the Nearest
Airport Page. A minimum runway length and/or surface type may be entered to
prevent airports with small runways, or runways that do not have an appropriate
surface, from being displayed. The default settings are “0 feet (or meters)” for
runway length and “any” for runway surface type.
FPL
Touch To Select
Runway Surface Type
Direct-To
Touch To Select Minimum
Runway Length
Proc
Figure 16-21 Select Nearest Airport Criteria
Charts
1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch Runway Surface
to display the options. Touch the desired surface type.
Wpt Info
Map
Touch to Select Any
Runway Surface
Traffic
Touch to Select Hard
Runway Surfaces Only
Touch to Select Hard or
Soft Runway Surfaces
Terrain
Weather
Touch to Select Water
Surfaces Only
Nearest
Figure 16-22 Nearest Airport Runway Surface Type
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2. Touch Minimum Runway Length to display the keypad
for selecting the minimum runway length. Select the desired
minimum runway length with the numeric keypad. A selection
of "0" will allow any length.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch Key to
Delete Values
Com/Nav
Touch Keys to
Set Values
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 16-23 Nearest Airport Runway Length
Wpt Info
3. After selecting the runway length, touch the Enter key to
save the entered values or touch the Back key to return to
the System Setup page without saving a value.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-19
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
16.4.5
NOTE: Upon crossfill being activated, the GTNs may take up to 10 seconds
to crossfill the flight plans. The pilot must verify the flight plan in each unit
prior to use. The GTN and GNS units must have databases with the same cycle.
Charts
Wpt Info
NOTE: When GPS navigation is lost in either unit, crossfilling may not be
available until GPS is restored in both units. Crossfilling will resume once the
flightplan is changed on one of the units or crossfill is re-enabled.
Map
Traffic
NOTE: If two GTN 7XX units are crossfilled, then the same type (ChartView
or FlightCharts) and version (cycle number and effective dates) for the chart
database must be installed on both units in order for the correct chart to
be overlaid on the main map page.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Crossfill
Dual units may be interfaced to crossfill information between the two units.
This option will not be available unless dual units are configured.
When Crossfill is turned on with one GTN, it is automatically turned on in the
other GTN. Some items are always crossfilled regardless of the crossfill setting;
others are dependent on the crossfill setting.
The GTN can be can also be interfaced with the GNS 400W/500W units. The
GTN can automatically send the Active Flight Plan and active Direct-To course to
the GNS unit. The GTN User Waypoints can be manually sent to the GNS unit. The
GNS unit can manually send its User Waypoints to the GTN unit.
Waypoint names longer than six characters, or duplicates, sent from the GTN
unit to the GNS unit will replace some characters with a "+" sign, while leaving
significant characters to aid in identification (such as, USR003 becomes US+003).
16.4.5.1 GTN-to-GTN Crossfilling
This data is always crossfilled:
• User waypoints
• Flight plan catalog
• Alerts (traffic pop-up acknowledgement, missed approach waypoint popup acknowledgement, altitude leg pop-up acknowledgement)
• External sensors (transponder status and commands, synchro heading)
• System setup:
- User-defined NAV frequencies to store favorites
- Date/Time convention
- Nearest airport criteria
- Units (Nav angle, Fuel, and Temperature)
16-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
- User-defined COM frequencies to store favorites
- CDI Scale setting
- ILS CDI Capture setting
Foreword
Getting
Started
NOTE: There is an installer option to turn on a system message that will
be provided anytime crossfill is turned off to alert the pilot that flight plans
are not being crossfilled.
This data is crossfilled only if crossfill is turned on by the pilot:
• Active navigation (flight plan)
1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the Crossfill key
to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Crossfill.
or
2. When Crossfill is about to be enabled, you will be prompted
to note that data will be overwritten in the other unit. Touch
OK to enable Crossfill or touch Cancel to return to the System
Setup page without enabling Crossfill.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Touch OK to Enable
Crossfill With Dual Units
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 16-24 Confirming Crossfill Selection
16.4.5.2 GTN-GNS Crossfilling
• GTN to GNS – Active flight plans, active direct-to, User waypoints
• GNS to GTN – User waypoints
1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the GNS Crossfill
Settings key to reach the GNS Crossfill settings.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch OK to Enable Auto
Crossfill With Dual Units
System
Messages
Touch OK to Manually
Transfer User Waypoints
Symbols
Figure 16-25 GTN-GNS Crossfill Selection
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
16-21
Index
NOTE: When the active flight plan on the GTN contains legs or features
that are not supported by the GNS, those legs will not be crossfilled and
will not be present in the active flight plan on the GNS.
Foreword
Getting
Started
2. Touch Auto GNS Crossfill to enable Crossfill and send the
Active Flight Plans and the active Direct-To course to the GNS
unit.
3. Touch the Transfer User Waypoints key to transfer the User
Waypoints from the GTN unit to the connected GNS unit.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Transfer Of User
Waypoints In Progress
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 16-26 GTN-GNS Crossfill
16.4.6
CDI Scale Selection
The CDI source and ILS CDI Capture type may be selected manually or
automatically. The selected CDI Scale will be reflected in the annunciation bar at
the bottom of the display.
CDI Scale Selection allows you to define the scale for the course deviation
indicator (both on the GTN unit's on-screen CDI and the external CDI). The
scale values represent full scale deflection for the CDI to either side. The default
setting is “Auto.” At this setting, the CDI scale is set to 2.0 NM during the
“en route” phase of flight. Within 31 NM (terminal area) of your destination
airport, the CDI scale linearly ramps down to 1.0 NM over a distance of 1 NM.
Likewise, when leaving your departure airport the CDI scale is set to 1.0 NM
and gradually ramps up to 2 NM beyond 30 NM (from the departure airport).
During GPS approach operations the CDI scale gradually transitions down to an
angular CDI scale. At 2.0 NM before the final approach fix (FAF), CDI scaling is
tightened from 1.0 NM to the angular full scale deflection (typically the angular
full-scale deflection is 2.0°, but will be as defined for the approach).
If a lower CDI scale setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3 NM), the higher scale
settings are not selected during ANY phase of flight. For example, if 1.0 NM is
selected, the GTN unit uses this for en route and terminal phases and ramps down
further during an approach. Note that the Horizontal Alarm (HAL) protection
16-22
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
limits listed below follow the selected CDI scale, unless corresponding flight
phases call for lower HAL. For example, if the 1.0 NM CDI setting is selected,
full-scale deflection during approach will still follow the approach CDI scale
settings.
CDI Scale
Auto (oceanic)
±2.0 NM or Auto (en route)
±1.0 NM or Auto (terminal)
±0.3 NM or Auto (approach)
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Horizontal Alarm Limit
2.0 NM
2.0 NM
1.0 NM
0.3 NM
Com/Nav
FPL
Table 16-4 CDI Scale and Horizontal Alarm Limits
Direct-To
An “auto” ILS CDI selection allows the GTN unit to automatically switch the
external CDI from the GPS receiver to the VLOC receiver, when intercepting
the final approach course. Or, select “manual” to manually switch the external
CDI connection, as needed (using the CDI key). If the unit is installed with a
KAP140/KFC225 autopilot, automatic switching will not take place.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Touch To Select CDI Scale
Traffic
Touch To Select ILS CDI
Capture Type
Terrain
Figure 16-27 CDI Selection
1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the CDI Scale key
to allow automatic selection or to choose a CDI Scale manually.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch To Select 1 NM CDI
Scaling
Utilities
Touch To Select Automatic
CDI Scaling
System
Messages
Figure 16-28 CDI Scale Selection
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-23
Index
2. Touch the ILS CDI Capture key to select automatic or manual.
This feature enables the unit to automatically switch from GPS
to VLOC on an ILS approach. See Procedures-ILS Approaches for
more detail on ILS approaches.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
NOTE: The ILS CDI Capture key may be disabled in certain GTN installations.
16.5
Alerts Settings
The Alerts Setup page controls two functions: Arrival Alerts and Airspace
Alerts. Arrival Alerts, when active, will generate a message when the aircraft
is within the selected proximity of the destination. Airspace Alerts generate a
message and filtering of the Nearest Airspace list. The altitude component of
Airspace Alerts are dependent on both aircraft and airspace altitude and the
values set for the Altitude Buffer.
Charts
Touch to Select
Distance Values
Wpt Info
Map
Arrival
Traffic
Terrain
Selected Airspace
Type (green bar)
Weather
Airspace
Altitude Buffer
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 16-29 Alerts Setup Page
Utilities
1. While viewing the System page, touch the Alerts key.
System
2. Touch the Arrival key to toggle activation. A green bar will
appear when it is active.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-24
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the Proximity key to set the Proximity distance values.
A numeric keypad will appear. Select the desired values and
then touch Enter.
Selected Proximity Value
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch To Cancel
Charts
Figure 16-30 Airspace Alert Proximity Selection
4. Touch the Altitude Buffer key to set the buffer altitude value.
A numeric keypad will appear. Select the desired value and
then touch Enter.
Selected Altitude
Buffer Value
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch To Cancel
Utilities
Figure 16-31 Airspace Alert Altitude Buffer Selection
5. Touch the Airspace type keys to toggle activation. A green bar
will appear when it is active.
System
Messages
NOTE: The Airspace Alert setting does not alter the depiction of airspace,
or change the Smart Airspace setting for the main map page.
Symbols
NOTE: Airspace alerts for Prohibited airspace cannot be disabled.
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-25
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
16.6
Units Settings
The Units Setup page allows you to select the conventions for the various
units that are displayed.
Units Type
Altitude/Vertical Speed Feet(FT/FPM), Meters (M/MPS)
Distance/Speed
FPL
Fuel1
Direct-To
Nav Angle1
Proc
Magnetic Variation
Charts
Position Format
Pressure
Wpt Info
Temperature1
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Units Values
Nautical Miles (NM/KT), Kilometers (KM/KPH), Statue Miles
(SM/MPH)
Gallons (GAL), Imperial Gallons (IG), Kilograms (KG), Liters
(LT), or Pounds (LB)
Magnetic (°), True (°T), User (°u)
Enter numeric value, E or W
LAT/LON, MGRS, UTM
Inches of Mercury (IN), Hectopascals (HPA), Millibars (MB)
Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F)
Table 16-5 System Units Setup
Note 1: Only these unit types will be crossfilled in dual GTN installations.
16.6.1
Setup Units
Use these settings to set the units for values displayed in the unit operation.
1. While viewing the System page, touch the Units key.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch Key to
Set Units
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 16-32 System Units Page
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-26
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
2. Touch the key for the desired units. A window with a list of
unit values will appear. Touch the desired value on the list.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 16-33 Setup Units Selection Windows
16.6.2
3. After making the desired selections, touch the Back key to
return to the Setup page.
FPL
Setting a User-Configured (Manual) Nav Angle
Direct-To
There are three variation (heading) options: Magnetic, True, and User. If
“Magnetic” is selected, all track, course and heading information is corrected
to the magnetic variation computed by the GPS receiver. The “True” setting
references all information to true north. The “User” selection allows the pilot
to enter values between 0º and 179º E or W. When configured by the installer,
there may also be a fourth option: External. If “External” is selected, the GTN
Nav Angle will be synchronized with the on-side MFD.
NOTE: When changing the Nav angle, the DTK on the Flight Plan page
for an approach does not change until that approach is reloaded.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
1. While viewing the System page, touch Units key.
2. Touch the Nav Angle key and then the User key.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch to select User
(manual) mag var
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 16-34 Nav Angle Selections
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-27
Index
3. After User is selected, touch the Magnetic Variation key to
set the value.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to set
manual mag var
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 16-35 Magnetic Variation is Available for Editing
4. Touch the keys on the numeric keypad to set the Magnetic
Variation and then touch Enter.
Wpt Info
Map
Current User
Mag Var Value
Traffic
Terrain
Touch Key to
Delete Values
Touch Key to
Toggle Hemisphere
Weather
Use the Numeric
Keypad to Select User
(manual) Magnetic
Variation
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Cancel Selection
And Return To
Previous Page
Figure 16-36 Numeric Keypad for Setting Manual Magnetic Variation
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-28
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
5. The User Nav Angle value will be used for all angular values.
Remember to change the value when traveling to an area
requiring another value.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Selected User (manual)
Magnetic Variation
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 16-37 User (Manual) Magnetic Variation
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-29
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
16.6.3
Position Format Selection
There are three Position Formats available: Lat/Lon, the Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS), and the Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)
grid system. The format selected will be shown in all locations where position
information is shown.
NOTE: The Position Format Selection function is available in software
v4.10 and later.
Com/Nav
FPL
MGRS Position Format
Direct-To
Figure 16-38 MGRS Position Format Shown On Waypoint Info Page
Proc
Grid
Designator
Charts
100 km Square
Identifier
Easting Numeric
Location
Wpt Info
Map
Northing Numeric Location
Figure 16-39 MGRS Position Format Detail
Traffic
Grid Zone
Terrain
Latitude Band
Easting Value
Weather
Nearest
Northing Value
Services/
Music
Figure 16-40 UTM Position Format Detail
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-30
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
1. While viewing the System page, touch Units key.
Foreword
2. Touch the Position Format key.
Getting
Started
Touch to select
Position Format
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 16-41 Position Format Selection
3. Touch the desired Position format.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-31
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
16.7
The User Fields selection allows you to configure the data field type shown at
the top of the display in the center fields when they are not occupied by controls
for an audio panel or transponder. The data shown in each field may be selected
from a list after touching the desired field.
NOTE: Data Field Types that use the term "Destination" refer to the final
destination in the flight plan.
Com/Nav
FPL
NOTE: ETE to Destination is not available when a procedure is loaded and
there are waypoints in the Enroute section of the flight plan.
Direct-To
1. While viewing the System page, touch the User Fields key,
then touch an available field in the top of the display.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
User Fields
Terrain Page Assigned
To Field
Touch To Select Field
Touch To Select Category
(Data, Function, or
Page). Data selected in
this case.
List of
Data Types
Available
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 16-42 User Fields Selection
Utilities
2. Touch the Data, Function, or Page tab to display a list
of available selections. A list of information types will be
displayed.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-32
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the Up or Down keys or touch the display and drag
your finger to scroll through the list. Touch the desired item
to select it or touch the Back key to cancel selection.
Field Type List. Touch To
Select Data Field
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Slider Indicates More
Selections Available. Press
Finger and Slide To View
More Selections.
FPL
Direct-To
Selected Field Type
Proc
Charts
Figure 16-43 Map Data Field Type Selections
The options available are shown in the following tables. Selections available
vary depending on installed equipment.
Wpt Info
Map
Data Field Type
ACTV WPT - Active Waypoint
B/D APT - BRG/DIS from Dest APT 1
BRG - Bearing to Current Waypoint
DIS - Distance to Current Waypoint
DIS to Dest - Distance to Destination 2
DTK - Desired Track
ESA - Enroute Safe Altitude
ETA - Estimated Time of Arrival
ETA at Dest - ETA at Destination
ETE - Estimated Time Enroute
ETE to Dest - ETE to Destination
Fuel Flow - Total Fuel Flow
GS - GPS Ground Speed
GSL - GPS Altitude
Generic Timer - Timer Display
MSA - Minimum Safe Altitude
OAT (static) - Static Air Temperature
OAT (total) - Total Air Temperature
RAD ALT - Radar Altimeter
Time - Current Time
Time to TOD - Time to Top of Descent
TKE - Track Angle Error
TRK - Track
Trip Timer - Timer Display
VOR/LOC - Tuned VOR/LOC Info
VSR - Vertical Speed Required
Wind - Wind Speed and Direction
XTK - Cross Track Error
OFF - Do Not Display Data Field
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Table 16-6 Data User Field Selections
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Traffic
16-33
Index
Foreword
Note 1:
B/D APT is the straight line distance.
Note 2:
Dist to DEST is the distance along the flight plan.
Getting
Started
Function Field Type
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
CDI - Course Deviation Indicator
Com/Nav
Flap Override - Flap Override1
GPWS Inhibit - GPWS Inhibit1
G/S Inhibit - G/S Inhibit1
HTAWS RP Mode - HTAWS RP Mode2
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
OBS/Suspend/Unsuspend Button
On Scene - "On Scene" Mode Toggle
Charts
Table 16-7 Function User Field Selections
Wpt Info
Map
Note 1:
With TAWS-A enabled.
Note 2:
With HTAWS enabled.
Map Page Field Type
Blackout Mode
Charts - Charts Page
Flight Plan - Flight Plan Page
Map - Map Page
Nearest - Nearest Page
NEAR APT - Nearest Airport Page
PROC - Procedures Page
Approach - Approach Page
Arrival - Arrival Page
Departure - Departure Page
Backlight - Backlight Page
Services - Services Page
Traffic - Traffic Page
Terrain - Terrain Page
Utilities - Utilities Page
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
MIC PA Mode - Passenger Address
Toggle
Playback - Play Last Recording
TAWS Inhibit - TAWS Inhibit
Gen Timer - Generic Timer Control
WX RDR Controls - Weather Radar
Controls
OFF - Do Not Display Data Field
Checklist - Checklist Page
Fuel PLAN - Fuel Planning Page
SCHED MSG - Scheduled Messages
Trip PLAN - Trip Planning Page
VCALC - VCALC Page
User FREQ - User Frequencies
WPT INFO - Waypoint Information
Weather - Weather Page
CNXT WX - Connext WX Page
FIS-B WX - FIS-B Weather Page
Stormscope - Stormscope Page
WX Radar - Weather Radar Page
SiriusXM WX - Sirius XM WX Page
OFF - Do Not Display Page Field
Table 16-8 Page User Field Selections
16-34
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
16.8
Audio
Foreword
The Audio Settings allows the adjustment of the volume the click sound
when controls are touched.
1. While viewing the System page, touch Audio key.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch The Arrow
Keys To Adjust
Click Volume
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch To Select
Voice Call Outs
(Optional)
Touch To Select
Voice
(TAWS Only)
Proc
Charts
Figure 16-44 System Audio Selection
Wpt Info
2. Touch the Arrow keys to adjust the Key Click Volume.
Map
3. Touch the Male or Female key to select the audio voice type.
4. When HTAWS is installed, a Voice Call Outs option may be
available. Touch the Voice Callouts key to select the Max
Voice Call Out value.
NOTE: VCOs are available down to 100 feet above terrain when HTAWS is
installed and use GSL above terrain to generate callouts (no radar altimeter
required). If a radar altimeter is interfaced to the GTN, alerts are available
down to 50 feet and the height above terrain from the radar altimeter is
used to generate the callouts.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-35
Index
5. Touch the MAX Voice Callout key to select the value.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Select
Max Voice Callout
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch To Select Voice
Call Out Value
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 16-45 Select Voice Call Out Value
Map
6. Touch Back when complete.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-36
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
16.9
Backlight Settings
Foreword
The backlighting of the display and bezel keys can be adjusted automatically
or manually. The default setting (automatic backlighting adjustment) uses
photocell technology to automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions.
Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured to optimize display appearance
through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. A manual offset creates
a deviation form the normal curve. Manual adjustments may be made from
+100% to -10%. The negative adjustment is limited to prevent the backlight
from being accidently decreasing the backlight to the point where the display of
information could not be seen.
The backlight offset function is not available when a dimmer input is active.
The GTN is capable of accepting lighting inputs from the built-in photocell,
aircraft dimmer bus, or both. If the lighting is not satisfactory, contact the
installer to adjust the curves.
Manual backlighting adjustment can be accomplished using the existing
instrument panel dimmer bus or the following procedures.
1. While viewing the System page, touch the Backlight key.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
2. Touch the Arrow keys to adjust the Backlight level.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Touch The Arrow Keys
For Manual Offset
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 16-46 Backlight Level Selection
Symbols
3. After making the desired selections, touch the Back key to
return to the System page.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-37
Appendix
Index
Foreword
16.10
Getting
Started
This page provides information about the GSR 56 and the Connext
Registration page. See section 16.3.3 for more details.
1. While viewing the System page, touch Connext Setup to
access the GSR 56 LRU Status page.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
2. Touch Connext Registration to set up the Connext account.
Follow the information provided in section 16.3.3.
FPL
Direct-To
16.11
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Connext Setup - Flight Stream 210 and 510
NOTE: Refer to the Flight Stream product page on the Garmin website
for portable device compatibility.
Proc
Charts
Connext Setup - GSR 56
The GTN interfaces with the Flight Stream 210 Bluetooth transceiver and
Flight Stream 510 wireless datacard. Using a Flight Stream and the GTN, flight
plans are sent and received over Bluetooth. In addition, GPS position is provided
from the GTN and attitude is forwarded from a connected GDU. The GTN can
also configure the Flight Stream's Bluetooth.
The Flight Stream 510 also includes a Wi-Fi transceiver for updating
databases. For more information on updating databases with a Flight Stream
510 refer to section 19.2. The GTN can configure the Flight Stream 510's Wi-Fi.
Weather
Nearest
Touch To Set
The Bluetooth
Name
Touch to Control
Flight Stream
Features
Services/
Music
Touch to Set
Wi-Fi SSID (Flight
Stream 510 only)
Touch to Set
Wi-Fi Password
(Flight Stream
510 only)
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 16-47 Connext Setup for Flight Stream 510
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-38
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
NOTE: Turning Flight Plan imports off will remove the ability of the GTN
to receive flight plans from the Flight Stream. This could be used if there
are repeated erroneous attempts by a portable device application to send
flight plans to the GTN.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
16.11.1 Operation
Data output from the GTN and Flight Stream occurs automatically and
requires no pilot action (such as, flight plan, GPS position, and attitude).
Additionally, ADS-B traffic and weather can be output from the Flight Stream
when connected to a GDL 88 or GTX 345 and XM WX and SiriusXM satellite
radio information can output when connected a GDL 69. The Flight Stream
210 and 510 also support sending and receiving GSR 56 SMS messages and
controlling the GSR 56 Iridium phone when used with a compatible portable
application.
From the Connext Setup page, the pilot can enable or disable Flight Stream
features (flight plan importing, phone/SMS, and database transfers), setup Flight
Stream Bluetooth and Wi-Fi, and manage paired Bluetooth devices.
On the GTN's Paired Devices page, the device status indicates if the portable
device is connected and communicating with the Flight Stream. The “AutoReconnect” setting determines if the Flight Stream will automatically connect
to up to four devices when in range. When this setting is disabled, the pilot
must initiate the connection from the device. For devices that always reconnect
automatically, this setting will not be shown. Removing a device from this
page by pressing “Remove” will require the device to be paired again before
transferring data.
NOTE: If the pairing is removed from either device (portable device or
GTN) it must be removed on the other device before a new pairing to that
same device is established again. Essentially, pairing must be removed on
both devices before repairing.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-39
Index
Touch To Automatically
Connect To The Device
When In Range
Foreword
Touch To Remove
The Device
Getting
Started
Device Is
Connected And
Communicating
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Device Is Not
Connected Or
Communicating
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 16-48 Managing Paired Devices
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
16.11.2 Pairing a Device
New devices can only be paired with the Flight Stream when it is in “Pairing
Mode.” The Flight Stream will be in pairing mode when the GTN is navigated
to the Connext Setup page and/or the Manage Paired Devices page. The pairing
must be initiated by the portable device. Pop-ups displayed on the portable
device and GTN will be displayed to confirm the pairing.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 16-49 Confirm Pairing With A New Device
System
Selecting “Manage Paired Devices” opens a page that lists all of devices paired
to the Flight Stream.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-40
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
16.12
Connext Setup – Other Bluetooth Devices
Foreword
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.00 or later.
The GTN can also configure the Bluetooth transceiver in other units, such as
the GMA 35c and GTX 345.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch To Enable
Bluetooth
FPL
Direct-To
Touch To Set
Bluetooth Name
Touch To Manage
Paired Devices
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Figure 16-50 Connext Setup for GMA 35c
From the Connext Setup page, the pilot can enable/disable Bluetooth, change
the Bluetooth name, and manage paired devices. On the Paired Devices page,
the device status indicates if the portable device is paired and connected. To
connect a different device when the maximum number are already connected,
the existing connection must be ended by removing the portable device pairing
or by disconnecting or disabling Bluetooth on the portable device. Removing a
device from this page by pressing “Remove” will require the device to be paired
again before reconnecting.
NOTE: Only one portable device can be connected to the GMA 35c at a
time.
NOTE: If the pairing is removed from either device (portable device or
installed avionics) it must be removed on the other device before a new
pairing to that same device is established again. Essentially, pairing must
be removed on both devices before re-pairing.
New devices can only be paired while the unit is in “Pairing Mode.” Pairing
mode is active while on the Connext Setup page or the Manage Paired Devices
page. The pairing must be initiated by the portable device. A pop-up will be
displayed on the portable device to confirm the pairing.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
16-41
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
16.13
Voice Command
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.00 or later.
The Voice Command page allows controlling the voice command function
and viewing the voice command status and recent commands. Voice Commands
are only available when connected to a compatible Garmin audio panel and
when enabled by the installer.
FPL
Direct-To
Installed Voice
Command
Grammar
Version
Touch To
Activate Voice
Commands
Proc
Charts
Voice Command
Tone Status
Touch To View
Recently Spoken
Commands
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 16-51 Voice Command Setup
1. While viewing the System page, touch the Voice Commands
key.
Traffic
Terrain
2. Touch the Voice Commands key to toggle activation. A green
bar will appear when Voice commands are active.
Weather
3. Touch the Command History key to open a list of recently
spoken commands.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Command Name
Command Status
Crew Member
Who Issued
Command
Appendix
Index
Time Command
Was Issued
Figure 16-52 Voice Command History
16-42
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
17
MESSAGES
Foreword
When a Message has been issued by the unit, the Message (MSG) key/
annunciator in the lower left of the display will blink. Touch the MSG key to
view the messages. After viewing the messages, touch the Back key to return
to the previously viewed page. The Messages provide an aid to troubleshooting
system operation.
System messages are not crossfilled between GTN units. Each GTN will display
messages based on data received by that unit. This may result in duplication of
messages between units, however the pilot should view messages on both GTN
units when more than one is installed to ensure all messages are received.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Message List
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Message Key Touch To Toggle
Message Display
Weather
Figure 17-1 Message Display
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
17-1
Index
Message
Description
Action
ABORT
APPROACH GPS approach no
longer available.
This message is
triggered outside
the MAP if the GTN
system can no longer
provide approach
level of service.
Vertical guidance
will be removed from
the external CDI/HSI
display.
The aircraft is predicted
to enter an airspace
type, within 10 minutes,
for which alerts are
configured.
The aircraft is within 2
nm and predicted to
enter an airspace type,
within 10 minutes,
for which alerts are
configured.
The aircraft inside an
airspace type for which
alerts are configured.
The aircraft is within
2nm of an airspace
type for which alerts
are configured.
Approach has been
downgraded from
LPV or LNAV/VNAV,
to an LNAV approach.
Vertical guidance
will be removed from
the external CDI/HSI
display.
Initiate a climb to the MSA or
other published safe altitude, abort
the approach, and execute a nonGPS based approach.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
AIRSPACE ALERT Airspace entry
in less than 10
minutes.
AIRSPACE ALERT Airspace within
2 nm and entry
in less than 10
minutes.
AIRSPACE ALERT Inside airspace.
AIRSPACE ALERT Within 2 nm of
airspace.
APPROACH
DOWNGRADE Approach
downgraded. Use
LNAV minima.
Symbols
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Continue to fly the approach using
published LNAV minimums.
Appendix
Index
17-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Message
Description
Action
Foreword
APPROACH NOT
ACTIVE Do not continue
GPS approach.
GPS approach could
not transition to active
(e.g., the GTN is on
an approach and did
not have the required
HPL/VPL to get into at
least LNAV, so is still in
TERM).
The GTN is configured
for KAP140/KFC225
autopilot, and approach
guidance is now
available.
Abort the approach, and execute a
non-GPS based approach.
Getting
Started
APR GUIDANCE
AVAILABLE Press “Enable APR
Output” before
selecting APR on
autopilot.
AUDIO PANEL Audio panel is
inoperative or
connection to GTN
is lost.
The GTN is configured
for Garmin audio panel
control (GMA 35)
and the GTN cannot
communicate with the
GMA 35. No control
of the GMA 35 will be
possible.
AUDIO PANEL - The GMA 35 is
Audio panel needs reporting to the GTN
that it needs service.
service.
The audio panel may
continue to function.
CDI/HSI FLAG - The Main Lateral
Superflag or Main
Main lateral/
Vertical Superflag
vertical flag
output has been turned
on CDI/HSI is
off due to an overinoperative.
current condition.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Press the “Enable APR Output”
key on the GTN, this will cause
the autopilot to go into ROL
mode. Engage the autopilot into
approach mode. See section 6.15
for additional information.
Remove power from the GMA 35
audio panel by pulling the circuit
breaker labeled “Audio.” The pilot
will be able to communicate with
the Com 2 radio. Contact dealer
for service.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Contact dealer for service.
Weather
Nearest
Verify course guidance is valid
and correct by crosschecking with
the GTN on-screen CDI and other
navigational equipment. Contact
dealer for service.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
17-3
Index
Message
Description
CDI SOURCE Select appropriate
CDI source for
approach.
Aircraft is on a GPS
approach but CDI is set
to VLOC, or aircraft is
on VLOC approach and
CDI is set to GPS and
aircraft is less than 2
nm from the FAF.
Com radio is locked to
121.5 MHz.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
COM RADIO Com locked to
121.5 MHz. Hold
remote com
transfer key to exit.
COM RADIO Com overtemp
or undervoltage.
Reducing
transmitter power.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
COM RADIO Com radio may be
inoperative.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
COM RADIO Com radio needs
service.
Messages
Action
Select the appropriate CDI source
for approach.
The external com remote transfer
(COM RMT XFR) switch has been
held and the com radio is tuned to
121.5. To exit this mode, hold the
com remote transfer (COM RMT
XFR) switch for two seconds.
Com radio is
Decrease length of com
in overtemp or
transmissions, decrease cabin
undervoltage mode
temperature and increase cabin
and transmitting power airflow (especially near the GTN).
has been reduced to
Check aircraft voltage and reduce
prevent damage to the electrical load as necessary.
com radio. Radio range Contact dealer for service if this
will be reduced.
message persists.
The com radio is not
Press and hold the volume knob or
communicating properly the external com remote transfer
with the system.
(COM RMT XFR) switch, if installed
– this will force the com radio to
121.5 MHz. Contact dealer for
service.
The com radio is
Cycle the power to the COM radio.
reporting that it needs Contact dealer for service.
service. The com radio
may continue to
function.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
17-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Message
Description
CONFIGURATION
- Terrain/TAWS
configuration is
invalid. GTN needs
service.
TAWS is inoperative
due to a configuration
problem with the GTN.
This message will be
accompanied by a TER
FAIL annunciation.
CONFIGURATION The GTN cannot
communicate with its
MODULE GTN configuration configuration module.
The GTN may still have
module needs
a valid configuration.
service.
Backlight brightness
COOLING has been reduced
GTN overtemp.
Reducing backlight due to high display
temperatures. The
brightness.
backlight level will
remain high enough to
be visible in daylight
conditions.
COOLING FAN - The GTN cooling fan is
The cooling fan has powered, but it is not
turning at the desired
failed.
RPM.
CROSSFILL
ERROR Crossfill is
inoperative. See
CRG for crossfilled
items.
CROSSFILL
ERROR - GTN
Navigation DB
mismatch. See
CRG for crossfilled
items.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Crossfill is not
working due to loss
of communication
with other GTN or due
to one GTN needing
service.
The navigation
databases do not
match between GTNs
resulting in a loss
of communication
between two units.
Action
Foreword
Contact dealer for service.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Contact dealer for service.
FPL
Direct-To
Decrease cabin temperature and
increase cabin airflow (especially
near the GTN). Contact dealer for
service if this message persists.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Decrease cabin temperature and
increase cabin airflow (especially
near the GTN) to prevent damage
to the unit. Contact dealer for
service.
See section 16.4.5.1 for a list of
crossfilled items that will no longer
be crossfilled. Contact dealer for
service.
Check the specified database
version of both GTNs and ensure it
is up-to-date. Update the specified
database if needed.
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
17-5
Index
Message
Description
Action
CROSSFILL
ERROR GTN software
mismatch. See
CRG for crossfilled
items.
CROSSFILL
STATUS - Crossfill
is turned off.
DATABASE A procedure has
been modified in
a cataloged flight
plan.
Crossfill is configured
“on” but is not working
due to software
mismatch.
See section 16.4.5.1 for a list of
crossfilled items that will no longer
be crossfilled. Contact dealer to
have software versions updated.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
DATABASE Chart database
valid until [DATE].
DATABASE Chart function
unavailable.
DATABASE Terrain database
is not installed,
is corrupt, or is
not valid for this
system.
Crossfill is turned off.
A new database update
caused a procedure to
be truncated because
the flight plan now has
too many waypoints or
removed a procedure
because it no longer
exists in the database.
The GTN is configured
for ChartView or
FliteCharts and the
chart database has or is
about to expire.
The GTN is configured
for ChartView or
FliteCharts and chart
verification has failed.
The terrain database is
not available. Terrain
information and alerts
do not display.
No action.
Verify stored cataloged flight plans
and procedures. Modify stored
flight plans and procedures as
necessary to include the current
procedures by re-loading those
procedures to the stored flight plan
routes.
Verify chart database expiration
date on the System – System
Status page. Update chart
database if necessary for
operations.
Contact dealer for service.
Re-load the database on the
external datacard.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
17-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Message
Description
DATABASE Terrain display
unavailable for
current location.
The aircraft is outside
the terrain database
coverage area.
DATABASE Terrain or Obstacle
database not
available.
DATABASE Verify airways in
stored flight plans
are correct.
The terrain or obstacle
database is missing or
corrupt.
DATABASE Verify usermodified
procedures in
stored flight plans
are correct.
DATACARD
ERROR SD card is invalid
or failed.
DATACARD
REMOVED Reinsert SD card.
DATALINK ADS-B In fault: UAT
receiver.
DATALINK ADS-B In fault:
1090 receiver.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
A stored flight plan
contains an airway that
is no longer consistent
with the current
navigation database.
A stored flight plan
contains procedures
that have been
manually updated, and
a navigation database
update has occurred.
Action
Foreword
Terrain and TAWS functions will
be unavailable. If terrain coverage
is desired in the area, load
appropriate coverage area on the
external datacard.
Re-load these databases on the
external datacard.
Verify that the airways in stored
flight plans are correct. Modify
stored flight plans as necessary to
include the current airways by reloading those airways to the stored
flight plan routes.
Verify that the user-modified
procedures in stored flight plans
are correct.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
External datacard has
an error and the unit
is not able to read the
databases.
ChartView, FlightCharts, and
Terrain databases will not be
accessible by the unit. Contact
dealer for service.
External datacard was
removed.
Reinsert datacard.
The ADS-B In source
has detected a UAT
receiver fault.
Contact dealer for service.
The ADS-B In source
has detected a 1090
receiver fault.
Contact dealer for service.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Symbols
Appendix
17-7
Index
Message
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Description
DATALINK - FIS-B The FIS-B receiver is
weather has failed. reporting that it has
failed. The display of
FIS-B products may be
unavailable.
The GTN is configured
DATALINK for a Garmin datalink
GDL 69 is
(GDL 69 or 69A)
inoperative or
connection to GTN and the GTN cannot
communicate with the
is lost.
datalink. Data from
the datalink will not be
available.
GDL 88 is not able
DATALINK to transmit an ADS-B
GDL 88 ADS-B
failure. Unable to message due to a
failure with the GDL 88
transmit ADS-B
system or antenna(s).
messages.
The GDL 88 has
DATALINK detected a fault with
GDL 88 ADS-B
one of the GDL 88
fault.
UAT/1090 antennas.
The GDL 88 has lost
DATALINK communication with
GDL 88 ADS-B
the pressure altitude
fault. Pressure
source.
altitude input is
invalid.
The GDL 88 has
DATALINK GDL 88 ADS-B is detected a position
input fault.
not transmitting
position. Check
GPS devices.
Action
Contact dealer for service.
Contact dealer for service.
Contact dealer for service.
Contact dealer for service.
Contact dealer for service.
Contact dealer for service.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
17-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Message
DATALINK GDL 88
configuration
module needs
service.
DATALINK GDL 88 control
input fault. Check
transponder is in
correct mode.
DATALINK GDL 88 is
inoperative or
connection to GTN
is lost.
DATALINK GDL 88 needs
service.
DATALINK GSR 56 data
services
inoperative;
registration
required.
DATALINK GSR 56 is
inoperative or
connection to GTN
is lost.
Description
Action
The GDL 88
has detected a
configuration module
fault.
Contact dealer for service.
The GDL 88 has lost
communication with
the transponder.
Contact dealer for service.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
The GTN is configured
for a Garmin datalink
(GDL 88) and the GTN
cannot communicate
with the datalink. Data
from the datalink will
not be available.
GDL 88 has detected
an internal fault.
Contact dealer for service.
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Contact dealer for service.
Traffic
Terrain
The GSR 56 is not
registered. GSR
Weather, Position
Reporting, and Phone
Services will be
unavailable.
Contact dealer for service.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
The GTN is configured Close the GSR 56 circuit breaker
for a Garmin GSR 56
and ensure the GSR 56 is receiving
and the GTN cannot
power. Contact dealer for service.
communicate with the
GSR 56. GSR Weather,
Position Reporting, and
Phone Services will be
unavailable.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
17-9
Index
Message
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
DATA LOST Pilot stored data
was lost. Recheck
settings.
User settings such as
map detail level, nav
range ring on/off, traffic
overlay on/off, and alert
settings have been lost.
DATA SOURCE - The GTN is configured
to receive heading
Heading source
information but is not
inoperative or
connection to GTN receiving it from any
source.
lost.
DATA SOURCE - The GTN is configured
to receive pressure
Pressure altitude
source inoperative altitude but is not
receiving it from any
or connection to
source.
GTN lost.
DATA SOURCE Radar Altimeter
source inoperative
or connection to
GTN lost.
DEMO MODE Demo mode is
active. Do not use
for navigation.
FLIGHT PLAN
IMPORT - Flight
plan import failed.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Description
FLIGHT PLAN
IMPORT - Flight
plan import failed.
Catalog is full.
17-10
Action
Recheck settings.
Heading up map displays will not
be available. Contact dealer for
service.
If the GTN is being used to forward
pressure altitude to a transponder,
the transponder will not be
receiving pressure altitude from the
GTN while that message is present.
Contact dealer for service.
The GTN is configured 50 foot aural annunciation
to receive radio altitude is unavailable for HTAWS
information but is not installations. Contact dealer for
receiving it from any
service.
source.
The GTN is in Demo
Mode and must not
be used for actual
navigation.
Do not use for navigation. Power
cycle the GTN to exit demo mode.
Also ensure that the Direct-To key
is not stuck.
The requested flight
plan could not be
imported because the
GTN was unable to
decode the contents of
the flight plan.
The flight plan
catalog is full and the
requested flight plan
could not be imported.
Check for proper operation of
the needed components. If the
problem persists. Contact dealer
for service.
Edit the flight plan catalog to
remove unneeded flight plans.
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Message
FLIGHT PLAN
IMPORT - New
imported flight
plan(s) available
for preview.
FPL WAYPOINT
LOCKED Stored flight plan
waypoint is not in
current navigation
database.
FPL WPT MOVED Stored flight plan
waypoint has
changed location.
Description
Foreword
The GTN has received a No action is necessary; message is
new flight plan that is informational only.
available for preview by
the pilot.
A stored flight plan
waypoint is no longer in
the current navigation
database.
Verify stored cataloged flight plans
and procedures. Modify stored
flight plans as necessary to include
waypoints that are in the current
navigation database.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
A stored flight plan
waypoint has moved
by more than 0.33 arc
minutes from where
previously positioned.
The glideslope board
GLIDESLOPE Glideslope receiver is not communicating
property with the
has failed.
system.
The glideslope board is
GLIDESLOPE Glideslope receiver indicating that it needs
service. The glideslope
needs service.
board may continue to
function.
GNS CROSSFILL Catalog full; not all
GNS waypoint(s)
transferred.
Action
A user waypoint from
the GNS could not be
created because the
user waypoint catalog
is full.
Verify stored cataloged flight plans
and procedures. Modify stored
flight plans as necessary to include
waypoints that are in the current
navigation database.
Fly an approach that does not use
the glideslope receiver (VOR, LOC,
GPS). Contact dealer for service.
Verify glideslope deviation
indications with another source
and crosscheck final approach
fix crossing altitude. If another
glideslope source is not available
for verification, fly a GPS based
approach. Contact dealer for
service.
Remove some of the waypoints
from the catalog to make room for
the waypoints from the GNS.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
17-11
Index
Message
Description
GNS CROSSFILL GTN user
waypoint(s)
replaced with GNS
user waypoints.
GNS CROSSFILL Waypoint transfer
failed.
GPS
NAVIGATION
LOST Erroneous
position. Use other
navigation source.
GPS
NAVIGATION
LOST Insufficient
satellites. Use other
navigation source.
GPS RECEIVER GPS receiver has
failed. Check GPS
coax for electrical
short.
GPS RECEIVER GPS receiver needs
service.
A user waypoint from
the GNS replaced
one or more existing
waypoints on the GTN.
Ensure that the waypoints on the
GNS have unique names before
transferring to the GTN to avoid
overwriting existing waypoints.
Waypoint transfer
failed/incomplete.
The data transfer should be
reattempted.
GPS position has been
lost due to erroneous
position.
Use a different GPS receiver
or a non-GPS based source of
navigation. Contact dealer for
service.
GPS position has been
lost due to lack of
satellites.
Wait for GPS satellite geometry
to improve. Ensure the aircraft
has a clear view of the sky. Use a
different GPS receiver or a nonGPS based source of navigation.
Contact dealer for service.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Action
Internal communication Use a different GPS receiver
to the SBAS board is
or a non-GPS based source of
inoperative.
navigation. Contact dealer for
service.
The GPS module
is reporting that it
needs service. The GPS
module may continue
to function.
Use a different GPS receiver
or a non-GPS based source of
navigation. Contact dealer for
service.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
17-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Message
GPS RECEIVER Low internal clock
battery.
Description
The GPS module
indicates that its clock
battery is low. Almanac
data may have been
lost. The unit will
function normally, but
may take a longer
than normal period to
acquire a GPS position.
GPS SEARCHING The GPS module is
acquiring position and
SKY may take longer than
Ensure GPS
normal. This message
antenna has an
unobstructed view normally occurs after
initial installation or if
of the sky.
the unit has not been
powered for several
weeks.
The GTN has lost
GTN GTN needs service. calibration data that
was set by Garmin
during manufacturing.
HOLD EXPIRED - The selected Expect
Holding EFC time Further Clearance (EFC)
time for a user-defined
has expired.
hold has passed.
The terrain database is
HTAWS of insufficient resolution
Invalid Terrain
for use with HTAWS.
Database.
GAD 42 indicates a
INTERFACE
configuration error.
ADAPTER GAD 42
configuration
needs service.
Action
Foreword
Contact dealer for service.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Contact dealer for service.
Traffic
Terrain
No action is necessary; message is
information only.
Weather
Nearest
Load HTAWS specific terrain
database on the external SD card.
Verify all input/output data from/
to the GAD 42 Interface Adapter.
Contact dealer for service.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
17-13
Index
Message
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
INTERFACE
ADAPTER GAD 42 needs
service.
INTERNAL SD
CARD ERROR GTN needs service.
INTERNAL SD
CARD REMOVED GTN needs service.
Description
GAD 42 indicates it
Verify all input/output data from/
needs service. The GAD to the GAD 42 Interface Adapter.
42 may continue to
Contact dealer for service.
function.
Internal SD card has an Contact dealer for service.
error. This card is not
accessible by the user.
Internal SD card was
removed or failed. This
card is not accessible by
the user.
The Direct-To key
KEY STUCK has been in pressed
Direct-To key is
position for at least 30
stuck.
seconds. This key will
now be ignored.
The HOME key has
KEY STUCK HOME key is stuck. been in pressed
position for at least 30
seconds. This key will
now be ignored.
KNOB STUCK Dual concentric
inner knob is stuck
in the pressed
position.
KNOB STUCK Volume knob
is stuck in the
pressed position.
Messages
Action
The dual concentric
inner knob has been in
pressed position for at
least 30 seconds. This
knob press will now be
ignored.
The Volume knob
has been in pressed
position for at least
30 seconds. This knob
press will now be
ignored.
Contact dealer for service.
Verify the Direct-To key is not
pressed. Contact dealer for service
if this message persists.
Verify the HOME key is not
pressed. Press the Home key again
to cycle its operation. Contact
dealer for service if this message
persists.
Verify the dual concentric knob
is not pressed. Contact dealer for
service if this message persists.
Verify the volume knob is not
pressed. Contact dealer for service
if this message persists.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
17-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Message
LOCKED FLIGHT
PLAN
Cannot activate
a flight plan
containing a locked
waypoint.
LOSS OF
INTEGRITY (LOI)Verify GPS
position with
other navigation
equipment.
MAGNETIC
NORTH
APPROACH Verify NAV angles
are referenced
to magnetic
north (magnetic
variation).
MAGNETIC
VARIATION Aircraft in area
with large mag var.
Verify all course
angles.
MARK ON
TARGET Waypoint creation
has failed. MOT
requires GPS
position.
Description
The user is trying to
activate a flight plan
that contains a locked
waypoint.
Action
Foreword
Unlock the flight plan by modifying
stored flight plans as necessary
to include waypoints, procedures,
and airways that are in the current
navigation database.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Antenna may be
shaded from satellites.
The GPS module has
reported a loss of
integrity.
Make sure the aircraft is clear of
hangars, buildings, trees, etc. Use
a different GPS receiver or a nonGPS based source of navigation.
Contact dealer for service if this
message persists.
The NAV angle is not
set to Magnetic and a
magnetic approach is
loaded.
Change NAV angle setting to
Magnetic.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
MagVar is flagged
as unreliable in the
MagVar database.
This normally occurs
when operating at high
latitudes that do not
support a Nav Angle of
Magnetic.
Mark on target
waypoint creation
has failed because of
missing GPS position.
Verify that the geographical region
supports navigation based on
magnetic variation.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Wait for GPS satellite geometry to
improve. Ensure the aircraft has a
clear view of the sky. Reattempt
waypoint creation. Contact dealer
for service.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
17-15
Index
Message
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
NAV ANGLE NAV Angles are
referenced to a
User set value (U).
NAV ANGLE NAV Angles are
referenced to True
North (T).
NON-WGS84
WAYPOINT See CRG. Location
may be different
than where
surveyed for [WPT].
OBS OBS is not
available due to
dead reckoning or
no active waypoint.
PARALLEL TRACK Parallel track not
supported for leg
type.
PARALLEL TRACK Parallel track not
supported for turns
greater than 120
degrees.
PARALLEL TRACK Parallel track not
supported past IAF.
Description
Action
Nav angle is set to User. No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Nav angle is set to True. No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
The active waypoint is not No action is necessary; message is
referenced to the WGS84 informational only.
datum.
See Note 1 at the end of
the table.
OBS requires an active
waypoint and is not
supported in dead
reckoning mode.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Parallel track is not
supported on current
leg type.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Parallel track is not
supported for turns
greater than 120
degrees due to the
acute angle.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Parallel track is
not supported on
approaches.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
17-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Message
Description
REMOTE KEY
STUCK Alert Acknowledge
key is stuck.
The remote TAWS
alert acknowledge
(ALRT ACK) key/switch
has been in pressed
position for at least 30
seconds. This input will
now be ignored. This
input is not available in
all installations.
The Push To Talk key/
switch has been in
pressed position for
at least 30 seconds.
This input will now be
ignored and the com
radio will no longer
transmit.
The remote com
frequency decrement
(COM CHAN DN) key/
switch has been in
pressed position for
at least 30 seconds.
This input will now
be ignored. This input
is not available in all
installations.
The remote com
frequency increment
(COM CHAN UP) key/
switch has been in
pressed position for
at least 30 seconds.
This input will now
be ignored. This input
is not available in all
installations.
REMOTE KEY
STUCK Com push-to-talk
key is stuck.
REMOTE KEY
STUCK Com remote
frequency
decrement key is
stuck.
REMOTE KEY
STUCK Com remote
frequency
increment key is
stuck.
Action
Foreword
Verify the ALRT ACK key/switch
is not stuck. Contact dealer for
service if this message persists.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Verify the Push To Talk key/switch
is not stuck. Contact dealer for
service if this message persists.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Verify the COM CHAN DN key/
switch is not stuck. Contact dealer
for service if this message persists.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Verify the COM CHAN UP key/
switch is not stuck. Contact dealer
for service if this message persists.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
17-17
Index
Message
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
REMOTE KEY
STUCK Com remote
transfer key is
stuck.
Description
The remote com
transfer (COM RMT
XFR) key/switch has
been in pressed
position for at least 30
seconds. This input will
now be ignored. This
input is not available in
all installations.
The remote nav transfer
REMOTE KEY
(NAV RMT XFR) key/
STUCK switch has been in
Nav remote
pressed position for
transfer key is
at least 30 seconds.
stuck.
This input will now
be ignored. This input
is not available in all
installations.
The remote push-toREMOTE KEY
command key/switch
STUCK Pilot/Co-Pilot voice has been in pressed
position for at least 30
command pushto-command key is seconds. This input will
now be ignored. This
stuck.
input is not available in
all installations.
The remote CDI (CDI
REMOTE KEY
SRC SEL) key/switch
STUCK Remote CDI key is has been in pressed
position for at least 30
stuck.
seconds. This input will
now be ignored. This
input is not available in
all installations.
Action
Verify the COM RMT XFR key/
switch is not stuck. Contact dealer
for service if this message persists.
Verify the NAV RMT XFR key/
switch is not stuck. Contact dealer
for service if this message persists.
Verify the push-to-command key/
switch is not stuck. Contact dealer
for service if this message persists.
Verify the CDI SRC SEL key/switch
is not stuck. Contact dealer for
service if this message persists.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
17-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Message
REMOTE KEY
STUCK Remote go around
key is stuck.
Description
The remote go around
(RMT GO ARND) key/
switch has been in
pressed position for
at least 30 seconds.
This input will now
be ignored. This input
is not available in all
installations.
The remote OBS (OBS
REMOTE KEY
MODE SEL) key/switch
STUCK Remote OBS key is has been in pressed
position for at least 30
stuck.
seconds. This input will
now be ignored. This
input is not available in
all installations.
The remote RP MODE
REMOTE KEY
key/switch has been
STUCK in pressed position for
RP Mode key is
at least 30 seconds.
stuck.
This input will now
be ignored. This input
is not available in all
installations.
The TAWS INHIBIT
REMOTE KEY
discrete input has been
STUCK TAWS inhibit key is in pressed position for
at least 30 seconds.
stuck.
This input will now
be ignored. This input
is not available in all
installations.
Action
Foreword
Verify the RMT GO ARND key/
switch is not stuck. Contact dealer
for service if this message persists.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Verify the OBS MODE SEL key/
switch is not stuck. Contact dealer
for service if this message persists.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Verify the RP MODE key/switch
is not stuck. Contact dealer for
service if this message persists.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Verify the TAWS INHIBIT key/switch
is not stuck. Contact dealer for
service if this message persists.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
17-19
Index
Message
Description
SELECT
FREQUENCY Select appropriate
NAV frequency for
approach.
SET COURSE Set course on CDI/
HSI to [current
DTK].
STEEP TURN Aircraft may
overshoot course
during turn.
Correct NAV frequency
is not set in the active
NAV frequency for the
approach procedure.
Insert the correct frequency into
the active navigation frequency
window.
The selected course
on the CDI/HSI does
not match the current
desired track.
Set the CDI/HSI selected course to
the current desired track.
Flight plan contains an
acute course change
ahead which will
require a bank in excess
of normal to follow the
guidance. If coupled
to the autopilot, the
autopilot may not be
able to execute the
steep turn needed
to follow the course
guidance.
The WX-500
StormScope reports
that it has an invalid
heading source.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only. If desired, slow
the aircraft to shallow the turn.
The GTN is configured
for a WX-500
StormScope but is not
receiving data from it.
Close the Stormscope circuit
breaker and ensure Stormscope is
receiving power. Contact dealer for
service.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
STORMSCOPE Invalid heading
received from
StormScope.
STORMSCOPE StormScope is
inoperative or
connection to GTN
is lost.
Action
GTN StormScope data is correct
and may be used. Contact dealer
for service.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
17-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Message
TAWS AUDIO
INHIBITED TAWS audio inhibit
input is stuck.
Description
Action
Foreword
The TAWS Audio
Contact dealer for service.
Inhibit discrete input
has been active for
at least 30 seconds.
This input is active in
all installations. TAWS
audio may be heard at
the same time as other
audio alerts.
A user-configured timer No action is necessary; message is
has expired.
informational only.
TIMER Timer has expired.
The ADS-B traffic
TRAFFIC system is reporting
ADS-B In traffic
alerting has failed. to the GTN that the
CSA application has
failed. Traffic alerting
on ADS-B traffic is
unavailable.
The ADS-B traffic
TRAFFIC ADS-B In traffic has system may have
lost GPS position or
failed.
detected an internal
fault.
The GDL 88 is reporting
TRAFFIC that the external traffic
TCAD has a low
system has a low
battery.
battery.
The TCAD system
TRAFFIC has indicated that its
Traffic device
battery low. Traffic battery is low.
device user config
settings not saved.
Ensure the aircraft has a clear view
of the sky. If the problem persists.
Contact dealer for service.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Contact dealer for service.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Contact dealer for service.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Contact dealer for service.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
17-21
Index
Message
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
TRAFFIC Traffic device has
been in standby
for more than 60
seconds.
TRAFFIC Traffic device is
inoperative or
connection to GTN
is lost.
Description
Action
The GTN is airborne
Set the traffic device to “operate”
and the traffic device
on the traffic page if traffic alerts
has been in standby for are desired.
more than 60 seconds.
The GTN is configured
for a traffic device but
is not receiving data
from it. Traffic will not
be displayed on the
GTN.
TRANSPONDER - The GTN is configured
for two transponders
Transponder 1
and their Mode S
and 2 Mode S
addresses do not addresses do not
match. This message
match.
is intended to assist
installers and will not
occur in a properly
configured system.
TRANSPONDER The transponder has
insufficient data to
1 OR 2 support ADS-B.
ADS-B is not
transmitting
position.
TRANSPONDER The transponder has
lost communication
1 OR 2 ADS-B Out system with the pressure
altitude source.
fault. Pressure
altitude source
inoperative or
connection lost.
Contact dealer for service.
Contact dealer for service.
Ensure the aircraft has a clear
view of the sky. Contact dealer for
service.
Contact dealer for service.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
17-22
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Message
Description
TRANSPONDER
1 OR 2 Transponder 1 or
2 is inoperative or
connection to GTN
is lost.
TRANSPONDER
1 OR 2 Transponder 1 or 2
needs service.
The GTN is configured
for transponder 1 or
2 but is not able to
communicate with the
transponder.
TRANSPONDER
1 OR 2 Transponder has
failed.
Action
Foreword
Verify squawk code and altitude
with ATC. Contact dealer for
service.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
The transponder is
reporting to the GTN
that it needs service.
The transponder may
continue to function.
The transponder has
detected an internal
fault and transponder
functionality may be
unavailable.
Verify squawk code and altitude
with ATC. Contact dealer for
service.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Contact dealer for service.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
TRANSPONDER
1 OR 2 Transponder is in
ground test mode.
TRANSPONDER
1 OR 2 Transponder
overtemp.
TRANSPONDER
1 OR 2 Transponder
undertemp.
Traffic
The transponder is
operating in a mode
intended for ground
testing.
Cycle the power to the
transponder.
The transponder is
reporting that its
internal temperature
has exceeded upper
operating limits.
The transponder is
reporting that its
internal temperature
has exceeded lower
operating limits.
Decrease temperature and increase
airflow near the transponder, if
possible. Monitor aircraft electrical
indications. Contact dealer for
service if this message persists.
Contact dealer for service if this
message persists.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
17-23
Index
Message
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
TRUE NORTH
APPROACH Verify NAV Angles
are referenced to
True North (T).
Description
A procedure is loaded
that is referenced
to true north and
the active leg has a
published true north
reference.
USER WAYPOINT All user waypoints
IMPORT - User
were imported
waypoints
successfully.
were imported
successfully.
USER WAYPOINT User Waypoint import
failed due to improper
IMPORT - User
file format.
waypoint import
failed.
USER WAYPOINT User Waypoint catalog
is full and the requested
IMPORT - User
user waypoints could
waypoint import
not be imported.
failed. User
waypoint database
is full.
USER WAYPOINT User waypoints
imported and existing
IMPORT - User
waypoints are used
waypoints
instead of creating
imported
duplicate waypoints.
successfully existing waypoints
reused.
User has configured
VCALC Approaching top of a vertical descent
calculation, and the
descent.
aircraft is within
60 seconds of the
calculated top of
descent.
17-24
Action
Verify the Nav Angle is set to True
North.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Ensure the media has the correct
file format. If the problem persists.
Contact dealer for service.
Edit the User Waypoint catalog to
remove unneeded user waypoints.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Message
Description
Action
Foreword
User has configured
a vertical descent
calculation, and the
aircraft is approaching
the target altitude.
Visual approach could
VISUAL
APPROACH NOT not transition to
active. Guidance is not
ACTIVE Approach guidance available.
not available when
requesting
Direct-To runway.
VLOC RECEIVER - The nav radio is not
Navigation receiver communicating properly
with the system.
has failed.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Getting
Started
VLOC RECEIVER - The nav radio is
Navigation receiver reporting to the GTN
that it needs service.
needs service.
The nav radio may
continue to function.
User has configured
WAYPOINT the arrival alarm and
Arriving at [wpt
is within the specified
name].
distance.
The weather radar
WX ALERT system is indicating
Possible severe
the presence of severe
weather ahead.
weather ahead.
WX RADAR FAIL - The GTN is configured
for a weather radar but
Weather radar is
is not receiving data
inoperative.
from it. Weather Radar
will not be displayed on
the GTN.
Use GPS based navigation. Contact
dealer for service.
VCALC Arriving at VCALC
target altitude.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Reactivate the approach or cancel
the Direct-To course.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Use GPS based navigation. Contact
dealer for service.
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Check weather radar. See
section 12.4.8.2 for more
information.
Services/
Music
Utilities
Contact dealer for service.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
17-25
Index
Message
Description
WX RADAR
SERVICE Weather radar
needs service.
Return unit for
repair.
Weather radar is
reporting a system
fault.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Action
Contact dealer for service.
Table 17-1 Messages
FPL
Note 1:
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
There are several reference datums that waypoints can be surveyed against.
TSO-C146 normally requires that all waypoints be referenced to the WGS84
datum, but allows for navigation to waypoints that are not referenced to the
WGS84 datum so long as the pilot is notified. Certain waypoints in the navigation
database are not referenced to the WGS84 datum, or their reference datum is
unknown. If this is the case, this message is displayed. Garmin cannot determine
exactly how close the non-WGS84 referenced waypoint will be to the WGS84
datum that the GTN uses. Typically, the distance is within two nautical miles.
The majority of non-WGS84 waypoints are located outside of the United States.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
17-26
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
18
SYMBOLS
Foreword
The following tables describe the symbols that are found on the Map display.
18.1
Map Page Symbols
Symbol
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Description
Airport with hard surface runway(s); Serviced, Primary
runway shown
Airport with hard surface runway(s); Non-Serviced,
Primary runway shown
Airport with soft surface runway(s) only, Serviced
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Airport with soft surface runway(s) only, Non-Serviced
Charts
Unknown Airport
Wpt Info
Restricted (Private) Airfield
Map
Intersection
VOR
Traffic
VORTAC
Terrain
VOR/DME
Weather
TACAN
Nearest
DME
NDB
Services/
Music
Locator Outer Marker
Utilities
Heliport
System
User Waypoint
Messages
VRP
Symbols
Table 18-1 Map Page Symbols
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
18-1
Index
Foreword
18.2
SafeTaxi™ Symbols
Symbol
Getting
Started
Description
Helipad
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Airport Beacon
Com/Nav
Under Construction Zones
FPL
Direct-To
Unpaved Parking Areas
Proc
Hot Spot
Charts
Table 18-2 SafeTaxi Symbols
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
18-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
18.3
Traffic Symbols
TIS Symbol
Foreword
Getting
Started
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Com/Nav
FPL
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 18-3 TIS Symbols
TAS Symbol
Direct-To
Description
Proc
Non-Threat Traffic
(intruder is beyond 5 NM and greater than 1200 ft vertical
separation)
Proximity Advisory (PA)
(intruder is within 5 NM and less than 1200 ft vertical separation)
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic Advisory (TA)
(closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria)
Traffic
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Terrain
Table 18-4 TAS Symbols
Symbol
Imminent Traffic
Non-Imminent
Traffic
(Traffic within ±500 feet
AND 1.0 NM; OR no altitude
AND within 1.0 NM)
Weather
Description
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Traffic Closing Vertically
System
Traffic Diverging Vertically
Messages
Traffic not Closing or Diverging
Vertically
Symbols
Table 18-5 9900B TCAD Symbols
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
18-3
Index
Symbol
Foreword
Description
Traffic Advisory
Getting
Started
Proximity Advisory
(color may be configured as cyan)
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Other Traffic
(color may be configured as cyan)
FPL
Out-of-Range Traffic Advisory
Table 18-6 9900BX (TCAS) Symbols
Direct-To
Symbol
Proc
Charts
Description
Basic Non-Directional Traffic
Basic Directional Traffic
Wpt Info
Basic Off-scale Selected Traffic
Map
Proximate Non-Directional Traffic
Traffic
Proximate Directional Traffic
Terrain
Proximate Off-scale Selected Traffic
Weather
Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Nearest
Off-Scale Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Services/
Music
Directional Alerted Traffic
Utilities
Off-Scale Directional Alerted Traffic
System
Non-Directional Surface Vehicle
Directional Surface Vehicle
Messages
Table 18-7 ADS-B Traffic Symbols
Symbols
NOTE: Color of basic and proximate traffic is dependent on configuration
(cyan or white) and airborne/on-ground status of target (target is brown when
on the ground, see the surface vehicles).
Appendix
Index
18-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
18.4
Terrain Obstacle Symbols
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is less than
1000 ft AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is less
than 1000 ft AGL)
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is greater
than 1000 ft AGL)
Foreword
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than
1000 ft AGL)
Windmill
Windmill in Group
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Table 18-8 Obstacle Altitude/Color Correlation
Tower
Getting
Started
Power Line
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Table 18-9 Obstacle Icon Types
Charts
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Threat Location
Unlighted Obstacle
Terrain above or
within 100 ft
below the aircraft
altitude (Red)
Wpt Info
Map
1000 ft
Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Traffic
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black)
Terrain
Figure 18-1 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation
18.5
Weather
HTAWS Obstacle Symbols
Nearest
Obstacle is at or above the aircraft altitude (Red)
Services/
Music
250 ft
Obstacle is between 250 ft and 0 ft
below the aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Utilities
Obstacle is 250 ft, or more,
below the aircraft altitude (White)
System
Figure 18-2 HTAWS Obstacle Altitude Correlation
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
18-5
Index
Terrain is more than 250 ft above
the aircraft altitude (Red)
Foreword
Getting
Started
Terrain is between
0 ft and 250 ft above
the aircraft altitude
(Orange)
250 ft
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
250 ft
Terrain is between 0 ft and 250 ft below the aircraft altitude (Yellow)
500 ft
Com/Nav
Terrain is between 250 ft and 500 ft below the aircraft altitude (Green)
FPL
Terrain more than 500 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black)
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 18-3 HTAWS Altitude/Color Correlation
18.6
Basemap Symbols
Symbol
Charts
Description
Interstate Highway
Wpt Info
State Highway
Map
Traffic
US Highway
Terrain
National Highway - 2-digit drawn inside
Weather
Small City or Town
Nearest
Medium City
Services/
Music
Large City
Utilities
Table 18-10 Basemap Symbols
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
18-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
18.7
Map Tool Bar Symbols
Symbol
Foreword
Description
Terrain Proximity Enabled and Available Indicator
Getting
Started
Terrain Proximity Enabled and Not Available Indicator
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Point Obstacle Enabled and Available Indicator
(Software v5.12 and later)
Point Obstacle Enabled and Not Available Indicator
(Software v5.12 and later)
Wire Obstacles Enabled and Available Indicator
(Software v5.12 and later)
Wire Obstacles Enabled and Not Available Indicator
(Software v5.12 and later)
StormScope
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Ownship is receiving TIS-B and ADS-R services
(Software v5.11 or earlier)
Possible incomplete traffic picture – ownship is not receiving one (or
both) of the TIS-B or ADS-R services (Software v5.11 or earlier)
Traffic Enabled and Available Indicator
Terrain
Traffic Enabled and Not Available Indicator
Weather
Table 18-11 Map Tool Bar Symbols
Map
Traffic
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
18-7
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
18.8
Miscellaneous Symbols
Symbol
Description
Low-Wing Prop (Default Ownship)
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
High-Wing Prop
Com/Nav
Kit Plane
FPL
Turboprop
Direct-To
Twin-Engine Prop
Proc
Single-Engine Jet
Charts
Business Jet
Wpt Info
2-Blade Rotorcraft
Map
3-Blade Rotorcraft
Traffic
4-Blade Rotorcraft
Terrain
High Visibility Arrow
Weather
Basic Aircraft
Nearest
Non-directional ownship is shown if there is no heading or ground
track. This typically only occurs during start-up. In helicopters without
a heading source, the non-directional ownship symbol will also appear
below 15 kts.
Parallel Track Waypoint
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Restricted/Prohibited/Warning/Alert
Messages
TFR (Temporary Flight Restrictions)
Symbols
MOA
Appendix
Index
18-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Symbol
Description
Foreword
Class B Airspace
Class C Airspace
Getting
Started
Class D Airspace
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
User Waypoint
Com/Nav
Table 18-12 Miscellaneous Symbols
NOTE: Ownship icons are configured by the installer and can be colored
magenta for enhanced visibility (Software v5.12 or later).
18.9
Direct-To
Stormscope Symbols
Symbol
FPL
Proc
Description
6
Charts
Wpt Info
60
Map
120
Traffic
180
Terrain
Table 18-13 Stormscope Symbols
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
18-9
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
This page intentionally left blank
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
18-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
19
APPENDIX
19.1 Glossary
Foreword
Getting
Started
ACT, ACTV
ACT
ADC
ADF
ADI
AFM
AFMS
AGL
AIM
AIRMET
ALT
AP
APR
APT
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
AS
ASOS
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
AUX
AWOS
active, activate
Altitude Compensated Tilt
Air Data Computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Airplane Flight Manual
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
Above Ground Level
Airman’s Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
altitude
autopilot
approach
airport, aerodrome
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
airspeed
Automated Surface Observing System
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
auxiliary
Automated Weather Observing System
BARO
BC
Bearing
barometric setting
backcourse
The compass direction from the present position to a
destination waypoint
bearing
BRG
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
C
ºC
CDI
CHNL
190-01007-03 Rev. P
center runway
degrees Celsius
Course Deviation Indicator
channel
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Symbols
Appendix
19-1
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
CLD
CLR
CNXT
CONFIG
Course
Crosstrack Error
CRS
CRSR
CTA
CTAF
CTRL
CUM
cloud
clear
Connext
configuration
The line between two points to be followed by the
aircraft
The distance the aircraft is off a desired course in either
direction, left or right
course
cursor
Control Area
Common Traffic Advisory Frequency
control
The total of all legs in a flight plan
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
DALT
DB, DBASE
DCLTR, DECLTR
deg
DEP
Desired Track (DTK)
DEST
DFLT
DIS
Distance
DME
DP
DPRT
DSBL
DTK
density altitude
database
declutter
degree
departure
The desired course between the active “from” and
“to” waypoints
destination
default
distance
The “great circle” distance from the present position
to a destination waypoint
Distance Measuring Equipment
Departure Procedure
departure
disabled
Desired Track
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
EDR
EGNOS
ELEV
EMI
ENR
19-2
Excessive Descent Rate
Provides SBAS service for most of Europe and parts of
North Africa
elevation
Electromagnetic Interference
en route
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
En Route Safe Altitude
ERR
ESA
ETA
ETE
The recommended minimum altitude within ten miles
left or right of the desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to
error
En route Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time En Route
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
ºF
FAA
FCC
FCST
FD
FIR
FIS-B
FISDL
FLTA
FPL
FREQ
FRZ
FSS
ft
degrees Fahrenheit
Federal Aviation Administration
Federal Communication Commission
forecast
flight director
Flight Information Region
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
flight plan
frequency
freezing
Flight Service Station
foot/feet
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
GAGAN
GCS
GDC
GDL
GEO
GLS
GMA
GMT
GMU
GPS
GPSS
Ground Speed
Ground Track
GRS
GS
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Provides SBAS service for India
Ground Clutter Suppression
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Satellite Data Link
geographic
Global Navigation Satellite Landing System
Garmin Audio Panel System
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
Global Positioning System
GPS Roll Steering
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling relative to a
ground position
see Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground Speed
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
19-3
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
G/S, GS
GTX
glideslope
Garmin Transponder
HDG
Heading
HFOM
Hg
hPa
HPL
HSDB
HSI
HTAWS
Hz
heading
The direction an aircraft is pointed, based upon
indications from a magnetic compass or a properly set
directional gyro
Horizontal Figure of Merit
mercury
hectopascal
Horizontal Protection Level
High-Speed Data Bus
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Helicopter Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Hertz
IAF
ICAO
IFR
IGRF
ILI
ILS
IMC
IOI
INFO
in HG
INT
INTEG
ITI
Initial Approach Fix
International Civil Aviation Organization
Instrument Flight Rules
International Geomagnetic Reference Field
Imminent Line Impact
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
Imminent Obstacle Impact
information
inches of mercury
intersection(s)
integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Imminent Terrain Impact
L
LAT
LCD
LCL
LED
Leg
LIFR
LNAV
left, left runway
latitude
Liquid Crystal Display
local
Light Emitting Diode
The portion of a flight plan between two waypoints
Low Instrument Flight Rules
Lateral Navigation
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
19-4
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
LOC
LOI
LON
LPV
LRU
LT
LTNG
localizer
loss of integrity (GPS)
longitude
Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance
Line Replacement Unit
left
lightning
MAG
MAG VAR
MapMX
Magnetic
Magnetic Variation
A proprietary data format used to forward navigation
information between Garmin units
maximum
maximum speed (overspeed)
barometric minimum descent altitude
Aviation Routine Weather Report
MIlitary Grid Reference System
minimum
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within
ten miles of the aircraft present position
marker beacon
Military Operations Area
Mark On Target
movement
meters per minute
Minimum Safe Altitude
Provides SBAS service for Japan only
message
Mean Sea Level
meter
millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
MAX
MAXSPD
MDA
METAR
MGRS
MIN
Minimum Safe Altitude
MKR
MOA
MOT
MOV
mpm
MSA
MSAS
MSG
MSL
MT
mV
MVFR
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
NAV
NAVAID
NCR
NDB
NEXRAD
190-01007-03 Rev. P
navigation
NAVigation AID
Negative Climb Rate
Non-Directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
19-5
Index
Foreword
OAT
OBS
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
PA
PC
PDA
P. POS
PTK
Proximity Advisory
personal computer
Premature Descent Alert
Present Position
parallel track
QTY
quantity
R
RA
RAIM
RAM
REF
REQ
REV
RLC
RMI
RNG
RNWY
ROC
RT
RTC
right, right runway
Resolution Advisory
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
random access memory
reference
required
reverse, revision, revise
Reduce Required Line Clearance
Radio Magnetic Indicator
range
runway
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
right
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
SAR
SBAS
SCIT
SD
SFC
SIAP
SID
SIGMET
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SPD
Search and Rescue
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
surface
Standard Instrument Approach Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
Significant Meteorological Information
slip/skid
symbol
speed
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
19-6
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
SRVC, SVC
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
SUA
SUSP
SW
SYS
service
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
statistics
standby
standard
Special Use Airspace
suspend
software
system
T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAS
TAT
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEMP
TERM
TFR
T HDG
TIS
TMA
Topo
Track
true
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed
Traffic Advisory System
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
temperature
terminal
Temporary Flight Restriction
True Heading
Traffic Information System
Terminal Maneuvering Area
topographic
Direction of aircraft movement relative to a ground
position; also ‘Ground Track’
track
Terminal Radar Service Area
TRK
TRSA
UNAVAIL
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
unavailable
user
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal Polar
Stereographic Grid
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
19-7
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
V, Vspeed
VAR
VFR
VHF
VLOC
VMC
VNAV, VNV
VOR
VORTAC
VRP
VS
VSI
velocity (airspeed)
variation
Visual Flight Rules
Very High Frequency
VOR/Localizer Receiver
Visual Meteorological Conditions
vertical navigation
VHF Omni-directional Range
very high frequency omnidirectional range station and
tactical air navigation
Visual Reporting Point
Vertical speed
Vertical Speed Indicator
WAAS
WGS-84
WPT
WX
Wide Area Augmentation System
World Geodetic System - 1984
waypoint(s)
weather
XPDR
XTK
transponder
cross-track
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
19-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
19.2 Datacard Information and Updates
Foreword
The GTN uses several databases to provide up-to-date aviation
information. GTN databases can be updated by the pilot using an SD card or
Flight Stream 510 wireless database card. The GTN can also synchronize
databases in the cockpit with other displays using Database SYNC and Chart
Streaming.
Information about the installed and standby databases can be viewed on the
System Status page. Database SYNC and Chart Streaming can be configured in
the menu on the System Status page.
The database card should not be removed except to update the databases
stored on the card. For basic flight operations a database card is required for
database storage. The database cards cannot be shared between units.
19.2.1
GTN Databases
• Basemap - The basemap database contains land and water data, such as
roads, boundaries, rivers, and lakes.
• SafeTaxi - The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams
for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following ground control
instructions by displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to
taxiways, ramps, runways, terminals, and services.
• Obstacles - The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as
towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft. Obstacles 200 feet and
higher are included in the fixed-wing obstacle database. The rotorcraft
database includes all reported obstacles regardless of height. It is important
to note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not
be contained in the obstacle database. Several obstacle database options
are available. Obstacle databases created for GTN software v5.10 or later
include all power lines or only Hazardous Obstacle Transmission (HOT)
lines depending on the type of obstacle database installed. HOT lines are
those power lines that are co-located with other FAA-identified obstacles.
The obstacle database is required for the TAWS and HTAWS functions.
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
• Navigation - The navigation database contains information for waypoints
and airports, such as procedures, runways, airways, airspaces, frequencies,
and visual reporting points. For helicopter applications, a navigation
database that includes additional heliports is available.
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Getting
Started
19-9
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
• Terrain - The terrain database contains terrain mapping data. The terrain
database is required for the TAWS and HTAWS functions. Systems using
HTAWS require a 2.5 arc-second database while non-HTAWS applications
can use a 9 arc-second database.
• FliteCharts - FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services
(formerly named National Aeronautical Charting Office) terminal
procedure charts. The charts are displayed with high-resolution and in
color for applicable charts. The GTN depiction shows the aircraft position
on the moving map in the plan view of the approach charts and on airport
diagrams.
• ChartView - ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal
procedure charts. The charts are displayed in full color with high-resolution.
The GTN depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the
plan view of approach charts and on airport diagrams.
Database
Name
Where Stored
Update Cycle
Provider
Notes
Navigation
Internal memory
28 days
www.flyGarmin.com
Basemap
Internal memory
As required
www.flyGarmin.com
SafeTaxi
Internal memory
56 days
www.flyGarmin.com
Obstacle
Internal memory
56 days
www.flyGarmin.com
Terrain
Database card
As required
www.flyGarmin.com
FliteCharts
Database card
28 days
www.flyGarmin.com
Disables 180 days after
expiration date.
Chartview
Database card
14 days
Contact Jeppesen
Disables 70 days after
expiration date.
Table 19-1 Database List
Services/
Music
NOTE: Garmin requests that the flight crew report any observed
discrepancies related to database information. These discrepancies could
come in the form of an incorrect procedure, incorrectly identified terrain,
obstacles and fixes, or any other displayed item used for navigation or
communication in the air or on the ground. To report an aviation database
error, visit www.flyGarmin.com.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
19-10
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
19.2.2
Updating Databases with an SD Card
Foreword
To update the GTN database use an SD card. Instructions on
updating the GTN database and the required equipment is found at
www.flyGarmin.com.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
The ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen. Contact Jeppesen
(www.jeppesen.com) for ChartView subscription and update information. An
enablement card that is purchased from Garmin is separate from the Jeppesen
database and is required to enable ChartView.
Com/Nav
1. Download the database updates to the Garmin Database Card
from the appropriate website.
Direct-To
2. Insert the database card into the slot of the GTN.
FPL
Proc
3. Apply power to the GTN.
Charts
4. The database update page will be displayed, listing all effective
database updates on the database card. Database cycles that
are not effective or already installed will be kept on the Garmin
Database Card as standby databases until they become effective.
Hold down the dual-concentric knob while applying power to the
GTN to force the update of these databases.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 19-4 Updated Databases
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
19-11
Index
5. Select the desired database updates and touch the Update
key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
NOTE: Do not remove power to the GTN while updating databases.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
6. The GTN will begin the update process and then verify the integrity
of the installed databases.
Com/Nav
7. Check that all databases are current and there are no errors. If a
database is highlighted in yellow, it is either expired or missing.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 19-5 Currently Installed Software/Databases
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
19-12
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
19.2.3
Updating Databases with a Flight Stream 510
GTN databases can also be updated using the Flight Stream 510 wireless
database card with a portable device and the Garmin Pilot application.
1. Follow the instructions within the app to purchase and
download the database updates.
2. Ensure the Flight Stream 510 is inserted into the database
card slot and apply power to the GTN.
3. When prompted on the database verification screen, connect
the portable device to the Flight Stream 510 Wi-Fi network.
The network name and password can be displayed by pressing
the Show WiFi Info key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
4. Once Connected, open Garmin Pilot on the portable device.
Map
Traffic
5. The Flight Stream 510 checks for database updates on the
portable device and displays the database update page or
notifies the pilot that no database updates are available.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
19-13
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
6. Select the desired database updates. All selected databases
will be transferred to the GTN, but the GTN may choose to not
install all databases. Database cycles that are not yet effective
will be preloaded and kept as standby databases until they
become effective. Databases that are not supported by this
GTN may be transferred and then SYNC'd to other Garmin
displays.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
7. Touch the Update key.
Services/
Music
Utilities
NOTE: Do not remove power to the GTN while updating databases.
System
8. The GTN will begin the transfer, update, and verification process.
The terrain and charts databases can take up to 5 minutes
each to transfer over Wi-Fi to the Flight Stream 510.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
19-14
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
9. Check that all databases are current and there are no errors.
If a database is highlighted in yellow, it is either expired or
missing.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
19-15
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
19.2.4
Database SYNC
Database SYNC allows the GTN to synchronize databases from a single unit
to other Garmin avionics. The pilot only needs to update a single database card
(SD card or Flight Stream 510) and the new databases are automatically SYNC'd
through the units connected in the cockpit and configured for Database SYNC.
Databases must be purchased for all avionics in the cockpit.
Database SYNC is supported by these database types:
• Navigation
• Basemap
• SafeTaxi
Proc
Charts
• Obstacle
• FliteCharts
• Airport Directory
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
The database SYNC process may take several minutes, depending on how
many databases have been updated. The status of the database transfers to a unit
can be viewed on the System Status page under the "Standby" tab. The GTN
will display the source of the received databases (for example: "Database SYNC
- GTN #2"). If a database SYNC is pending, completed, or not authorized, the
status will also be indicated.
When the SYNC is complete, if the aircraft is stopped and has yet to takeoff,
the pilot will be prompted with the option to restart and update to the newly
transferred database.
NOTE: Restarting the GTN must only be performed when the aircraft is
on the ground as navigation and communication from the restarted unit
will be lost for a period of time.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
19-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
19.2.4.1
Resolving Database SYNC Conflicts
Foreword
Database conflicts must be resolved for synchronization to occur. Conflicts
exist when multiple LRUs have a database of the same cycle, but with different
regions or types (e.g., fixed wing vs. rotorcraft navigation database, different
regions of the navigation database, or different obstacle database types).
The GTN attempts to resolve these by automatically synchronizing the most
recently installed database across all other LRUs (software v6.30 and later). Pilot
intervention is required when conflicts cannot be resolved automatically. Conflicts
occurring with earlier software versions also require manual intervention.
To manually resolve database conflicts, touch the Resolve Conflicts key on
the display containing the desired database version. This key is located on the
Conflicts tab of the System Information page.
19.2.5
Chart Streaming
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
While the Chart database is SYNCing in the background, the GTN will
stream individual charts to other compatible displays. This enables all Garmin
displays to use the latest chart database information even though the database
is currently installed only on a single unit. Chart Streaming will begin after the
chart database has begun SYNCing.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
19-17
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
19.2.6
Database Troubleshooting Tips
Problem
Unable to download
databases to the SD card
• Ensure you have a high capacity SD card programmer
• Ensure that your card programmer is plugged directly into your computer
and not into a USB hub, computer screen, or keyboard
• Ensure the sliding lock tab is in the unlocked position (up, when viewing
the card label-side up)
Com/Nav
FPL
Action
Database update fails
• Restart the GTN and retry the update
• Download the databases to the database card again
Direct-To
Proc
• Ensure that the databases were purchased for the system ID of the GTN
that the database card is being used to update
Database SYNC fails
Charts
Wpt Info
• Ensure that the databases were purchased for all the GTNs and GDUs in
the cockpit
• Ensure that all conflicts have been resolved (section 19.2.4.1)
Database cannot be
selected for update
• Restart the GTN while pressing the dual-concentric knob until the Garmin
logo is fully illuminated to veiw all database updates on the database
card, regardless of effectivity
Map
• Download the databases to the database card again
Traffic
• Ensure that the databases were purchased for the system ID of the GTN
that the database card is being used to update
Terrain
Database cannot be
transferred to
Flight Stream 510
• Ensure that the databases were purchased for the system ID of the GTN
that the database card is being used to update
Weather
• Ensure that the database transfers are enabled for the
Flight Stream 510 (section 19.2.3)
Nearest
• Ensure that all database updates have been downloaded to the Garmin
Pilot application
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
• Press the Show All DBs key on the database verification page to veiw all
database updates on the portable device, regardless of effectivity
Database is transferred
to Flight Stream 510 but
cannot be selected for
update
Messages
• Ensure that the databases were purchased for the system ID of the GTN
that the database card is being used to update
• Ensure that the transferred database is currently effective
• Restart the GTN while pressing the dual-concentric knob until the Garmin
logo is fully illuminated to view all database updates on the Flight Stream
510, regardless of effectivity
Table 19-2 Database Troubleshooting Tips
Symbols
Appendix
Index
19-18
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
19.3 Demo Mode
Foreword
The GTN product contains a “Demo” mode that allows simulation of all
operations of the product to allow practice and familiarization while staying on
the ground.
WARNING: Do not use the GTN to navigate while Demo mode is active.
Do not use or enter Demo mode while airborne.
1. Press in and hold the Direct-To key and then apply power to
the unit.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch To Continue
Nearest
Figure 19-6 Demo Mode Start Up Display
2. Touch the Continue key and Fuel keys as normally needed to
start operations.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
19-19
Index
3. Touch the Demo key in the lower part of the display to reach
the Demo Setup functions.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch To Select
Airspeed
Touch To Select
Waypoint
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch To Select
Track Mode
Touch To Select
Lat/Lon Coordinates
Touch To Select
Altitude
Touch For Advanced
GPS Settings
Touch For
Advanced
Date And Time
Settings
Touch For Advanced
NAV Settings
Charts
Figure 19-7 Demo Mode Setup
Wpt Info
4. Touch the GPS key to reach the Demo GPS Settings page.
The Position Error values (Horizontal Protection Level Fault
Detection [HPL FD], HPL SBAS, and Vertical Protection Level
[VPL] SBAS) may be adjusted to reflect errors induced by
naturally occurring conditions, but are normally not adjusted
for most Demo mode operations.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Touch To Select GPS
Solution
Touch To Select
Current Position
From A Wpt In
The Database
Touch To Select Lat/
Lon Coordinates For
Current Position
Touch To Select
HPL FD Values, If
Desired
Touch For VPL
SBAS Settings
Touch For HPL
SBAS Settings
Messages
Figure 19-8 Demo Mode GPS Settings
Symbols
Appendix
Index
19-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
5. Touch the Nav key to reach the Demo Navigation Settings
page.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch To Select
Vertical Speed
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Select
Altitude
Touch To Select
Airspeed
Touch To Select
Track Mode
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch To Select
Time Scale
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Figure 19-9 Demo Mode Navigation Settings
6. Touch the Date/Time key to reach the Demo Date/Time
Settings page.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch To Set Date
Weather
Touch To Set Time
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 19-10 Demo Mode Date/Time Settings
7. After completing the settings for Demo mode, touch the HOME
key or Back key to get started with operating the GTN.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
19-21
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
19.4 Glove Qualification Procedure
This procedure is used to qualify a specific glove for use with the GTN system
by guiding the user through a variety of tasks that use the touchscreen. Due to
differences in finger size, glove size, and touchscreens between the 6XX or 7XX
unit, the qualification granted by this procedure is specific to the pilot/glove and
6XX or 7XX combination. GTN 7XX and 6XX units must be evaluated separately.
The GTN touchscreen uses capacitive touch technology to sense the
proximity of skin to the display. A glove increases the distance between skin
and the display glass and may reduce the ability of the GTN to detect touches.
Therefore, when selecting a glove for use with the GTN, thinner gloves tend to
work better than thicker gloves. Leather gloves and gloves designed to work
specifically with capacitive touchscreen devices are often found to be acceptable.
Additionally, altering your touch technique to use the pad of your finger to
touch the unit rather than the tip will increase the touchscreen sensitivity while
using gloves.
This qualification must be completed on the ground. Performing this
procedure in flight is not authorized. Table 19-3 contains tasks that are required
to qualify a glove. Table 19-4 contains tasks that are not required to qualify a
glove, but may limit the manner in which some functions are accessed while a
glove is worn.
1. Sit in the pilot’s seat.
2. Start the GTN in Demo mode by pressing and holding the Direct To key during
power up.
3. Perform the tasks listed in Table 19-3 and Table 19-4 with an non-gloved hand.
You do not need to record any results for this step.
4. Perform the tasks listed in Table 19-3 and Table 19-4 with a gloved hand. For each
task, determine whether the operation is the same or worse as it was without the
glove. Record the results in Table 19-3 and Table 19-4 Items that may cause the
operation to be worse include, but are not limited to:
a. Multiple attempts to select a key
b. Unintentional selection of adjacent keys
c. Excessive force on the touchscreen to select a key
5. If all applicable tasks in Table 19-3 respond in the same way with and without a
glove then the glove used to complete these tasks may be used by the pilot who
performed this evaluation on the unit (6XX or 7XX) that was used during this
procedure.
19-22
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Pilot:
Foreword
Glove Description:
Getting
Started
GTN (circle one): 6XX or 7XX
Task
Operation With Glove
(circle one)
Navigate to the Home Screen.
Touch the Demo key.
Touch the GPS key.
Touch the Waypoint key.
Type “KSLE” using the touchscreen, then touch Enter.
Navigate to the Home Screen (Press HOME).
Touch the Flight Plan key.
Enter the following waypoints using the Add
Waypoint key at the bottom of the list of flight plan
waypoints:
KSLE
KMMV
KONP
BTG
Select BTG, then touch the Load Airway key to load
the following airway: V23 ALFOR.
While viewing the flight plan page, touch the Up/
Down arrow keys to scroll up and down to view the
flight plan waypoints.
Touch the Back key to return to the Home screen.
Touch the COM standby frequency to activate the
com frequency entry keypad (Task applicable to
635/650/750 only).
Enter a valid com frequency and touch the Enter key
(635/650/750 only).
Touch the active com frequency to flip/flop the com
frequencies. (635/650/750 only).
Com/Nav
NA
Same
Same
Same
Same
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Worse
Worse
Worse
Worse
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
NA
Same
Same
Worse
Worse
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Same
Worse
Same
Worse
Same
Same
Worse
Worse
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Same
Worse
Messages
Same
Worse
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
19-23
Index
Task
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Operation With Glove
(circle one)
Touch the active nav frequency to flip/flop the nav
frequencies (750 only).
Touch the Menu key (650 only).
FPL
Task
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Same
Worse
Operation With Glove
(circle one)
Direct-To
Charts
Worse
Table 19-3 Tests Required for Glove Qualification
Com/Nav
Proc
Same
Navigate to the flight plan page.
While viewing the flight plan page, touch the list and
drag up/down to view the flight plan waypoints.
While viewing the flight plan page, touch and flick the
list to view the flight plan waypoints.
Navigate to the map page.
Touch the Map to enter Pan mode, then touch the
Graphically Edit FPL key.
Remove KONP from the flight plan graphically by
touching KONP and dragging it to an area without
any waypoints (Pan and zoom in/out as necessary to
accomplish the task).
Insert KSPB between KMMV and BTG by dragging the
leg between KMMV and BTG to KSPB.
NA
Same
Worse
Same
Worse
NA
Same
Worse
Same
Worse
Same
Worse
Table 19-4 Tests Not Required for Glove Qualification
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
19-24
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
19.5 Telligence Voice Command Qualification
Procedure
Foreword
In order to enable voice command functionality crew members must
successfully perform and complete 17/20 (85%) voice commands in the
Telligence aircraft qualification procedure. Crew members must be comfortable
speaking into an aviation headset and proficient in English.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Voice Command Guidelines
Getting
Started
Com/Nav
FPL
NOTE: If a voice command is uninterpretable, verify the system is
performing the intended action or displaying the desired data. If the system
does not recognize a command, use the touchscreen to execute the function.
The GTN Voice Command History details all commands performed.
• Position the headset MIC approximately 1/8-inch from mouth, align with
bottom lip to avoid breath sounds in the microphone.
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
• Speak conversationally.
• Enunciate.
Map
• Speak in a normal tone and volume.
Traffic
• Speak at a normal cadence (not too quickly or slowly).
• Pause briefly between activation of the PTC switch and when speaking the
voice command.
• Review the commands prior to performing the qualification.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
19-25
Index
Foreword
Voice Command Instructions
1. Press and hold the Push to Command (PTC) switch.
Getting
Started
2. Speak the entire command into the headset MIC.
3. Release the "PTC" switch.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
• A positive tone (low-to-high) indicates the command has been
recognized and executed. (i.e., page changed, radio tuned, MIC
selected, etc.)
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
• A negative tone (high-to-low) indicates the command is either
unrecognizable or invalid.
Successful Command Example
“Show approaches page” is spoken, the approach selection page displays
immediately, and a positive tone sounds.
Unsuccessful Command Examples
“Show map page” is spoken and the traffic page displays.
"Show map page" is spoken and a negative tone sounds.
Qualification Procedure
Speak the unbold phrase if the voice command in this procedure is not
applicable to the aircraft’s configuration. If the total number of successful
commands is less than 17, the voice commands must be disabled. For instructions
on how to activate and deactivate voice commands, refer to section 16.13.
Example: If the requirement states a COM radio is required, but your GTN
does not a have a COM radio, use the unbold command.
1. Start the GTN and acquire a GPS position.
2. Conduct the voice commands in sequential order while wearing
an aviation headset. If necessary, a command can be attempted
twice.
3. When the command is successful check the box next to the
command.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
19-26
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
SHOW Flight Plan PAGE
*** Manually enter a flight plan with a towered airport as the destination ***
Foreword
Getting
Started
SHOW Trip Planning PAGE
* TUNE Nearest Ground or SHOW Nearest Airport PAGE
* TUNE Nearest ATIS or SHOW Nearest Weather Frequency PAGE
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
† TOGGLE COM 2 or SAY Distance
SHOW Map PAGE
FPL
ZOOM OUT
Direct-To
SAY Distance to Destination
SHOW Flight Timers PAGE
Proc
† SELECT COM 2 or SAY ETA at Destination
Charts
SAY Active Waypoint
Wpt Info
CREATE Waypoint Here
* TUNE Destination Tower or SHOW Destination Runways PAGE
Map
‡ SHOW Traffic PAGE or SHOW Nearest PAGE
Traffic
SHOW Procedures PAGE
SHOW V-CALC PAGE
Terrain
SHOW Current Time
Weather
SAY Desired Track
BACK
Nearest
SHOW Voice Command History Page
Services/
Music
* A GTN COM radio is required.
Utilities
† Two COM radios connected to the GMA are required.
‡ Traffic capability is required on the GTN.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
190-01007-03 Rev. P
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
19-27
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
This page intentionally left blank
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
19-28
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
INDEX
Symbols
3D Audio 2-12
3D navigation 16-7
A
Abbreviations 8-16
About this guide xxvii
Above Ground Level 11-11
Acquiring satellites 16-5, 16-7
ACT 12-56
Activate flight plan 4-33
Activate leg 4-6
Activating XM 14-3
Active flight plan page 4-4
Active leg 4-6, 6-15, 6-17, 6-26
Add User frequency 3-11
ADF 19-1
ADIZ 9-38
ADS-B 2-5, 10-17
Age 12-7, 12-64
Aircraft symbol 9-1
AIREP 12-29
AIRMETs 12-8, 12-18, 12-64, 12-72,
12-75, 12-87
Airport beacon 18-2
Airport diagram 7-16
Airport frequencies 8-8
Airports 12-83
Airspace 13-12
Airspace altitude buffer 16-25
Airways 4-12, 9-6, 9-38
Alerts 1-13, 10-9, 11-5, 11-15, 11-16,
11-18, 11-22, 11-51, 16-24
ALT 15-28
Altimeter ii, 11-10
Altitude 6-15, 11-5, 16-4, 16-6
Altitude buffer 16-24
Altitude Display Mode 10-6, 10-15
Altitude mode 10-26
Altitude reporting 2-3
Altitude type 15-5
Angle of incidence 12-38
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Annunciations 1-6, 1-21, 6-2, 10-10,
10-11, 10-16, 11-9, 11-15, 11-22,
11-62
Anonymous mode 2-5
Answering a phone call 14-14
Antenna 12-77
Antenna stabilization 12-56
Antenna tilt 12-35, 12-36, 12-40, 12-50,
12-54, 12-55
Approach
Channel 6-12
Approaches 7-2, 7-16, 11-19, 11-52,
19-1
Select 1-20
Approach operations 6-2
Approach shield 10-32
Approach with hold 6-15
Arc 11-7, 11-13, 11-14
Arrivals 7-16
ARTCC 13-1, 13-15
ASOS 13-19
ATCRBS 10-7
ATIS 13-19
Attitude 19-1
Audio panel 2-9
Audio split mode 2-16
Aural message 11-11, 11-15, 11-17,
11-20, 11-22, 11-58
Automatic CDI switching 6-27
Autopilot 6-14, 6-19, 6-26, 6-27, 6-29
Auto-pilot output 6-29
Auto squelch 2-21
Auto zoom 9-17
AUX - System Status Page 16-3
Aviation map data 9-25
AWOS 13-19
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
B
Backcourse 6-27
Backlighting 16-37
Baro-corrected altitude 6-1, 11-10
Barometric pressure 15-28
Basemap symbols 18-6
Basic approach operation 6-2
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Foreword
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index-1
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Beacon 18-2
Blind Alley 12-43
C
Calibrated gain 12-52
Call suppression 14-15
Catalog 4-2
Category 14-5
Cautions iii, 9-38, 11-11, 11-16, 11-42,
11-43, 12-46, 12-47, 12-48
CDI 9-48
Ceiling 13-14
Cell movement 12-8, 12-17
Channel 14-2, 14-5, 14-8
Channel spacing 1-12
Chart airport info 7-9
Chart airport selection 7-4
Chart Color Scheme 9-25
Chart detail
Approaches 7-6
Arrivals 7-8
Departures 7-7
Information 7-5
Chart full-split screen 7-10
Chart info 4-1, 6-1, 7-5
Chart invert colors 7-14
Chart layers 7-12
All 7-12
Header 7-12
Minimums 7-13
Plan 7-12
Profile 7-13
Charts 7-1, 7-16, 9-9
ChartView , 7-1
ChartView database
ChartView subscription 7-15
Checklists 15-36
Circle of uncertainty 16-9
City 9-38, 12-38
City forecast 12-24
Class B airspace 9-38, 18-9
Class C airspace 9-38, 18-9
Class D airspace 9-38, 18-9
Clean screen 15-33
Clearance recorder 2-17
Index-2
Cloud tops 12-8, 12-16
Com 1-17, 3-1
Channel spacing 1-12, 16-17
Frequency monitoring 3-15
Tuning 3-3
Window 3-3
Combined NEXRAD 12-80
Connext 4-41, 16-38
Connext weather 12-57
Contacts 14-21
Continental US NEXRAD 12-79
Controlled airspace 9-50, 13-12
Controls 1-4
CONUS 12-79
Conventions xxviii, 1-2
Copy flight plan 4-35
Corrective Resolution Advisory 10-43,
10-44
County warnings 12-8, 12-19
Creating a flight plan 1-19, 4-2
Creating user waypoints 8-19, 9-42
Crossfill 1-12, 1-15, 16-20
CTAF 8-8
Customer service i, 12-62, 14-3
Customizing maps 9-14
Cycle number 1-6, 7-16, 7-19
Cyclone 12-8, 12-22
D
Database 1-4, 1-6, 3-5, 3-18, 7-16, 7-19,
11-1, 11-5, 11-22, 12-68, 16-3,
16-4, 19-9, 19-11, 19-16, 19-17,
19-18
Database SYNC 16-4
Database update with Flight Stream 510
19-13
Database verification 1-7
Data link 10-3, 12-64
Data Link Receiver troubleshooting 14-9
Data request 12-60
Data user field 16-33
Date 7-15, 7-16, 7-19, 15-11, 15-12,
16-16
Date/Time 19-21
Dead reckoning 1-21
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Declutter 9-31
Delete flight plan 4-36, 4-37
Demo mode 19-19
Density altitude 15-28
Departures 6-3, 7-16, 11-19, 11-52
Departure time 15-10
Destination proximity 16-25
Direct-To 1-5, 1-16, 5-1
Direct-To Fpl Wpt 5-3
Direct-To Nrst Airport 5-5
Distance 9-17
DME Arc 6-16
Don't sink 11-17, 11-20, 11-58
DP 7-16
Dual installation 1-15
E
Echo tops 12-8, 12-15
Edit flight plan 4-34, 9-43
Edit FPL data fields 4-30
EGNOS 16-8
Emergency frequency 3-13
Enablement card 7-2, 7-15
ENR 6-3
EPU 16-5, 16-7
European airways 9-29
Excessive Closure Rate 11-54
Excessive descent rate alert 11-17, 11-18,
11-51
Expiration time 12-64
Exposure level 12-39
Extended squitter 2-7
External LRU 16-11
F
Facility name 13-15, 13-17, 13-19
Failed text message 14-18
FastFind 1-22
FDE 16-7
Field elevation 10-28
Find Com frequency 3-5
FIR 13-1
FIS-B 12-73
Five-hundred aural alert 11-17
Flap Override 11-57
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Flight ID 2-5
Flight Into Terrain 11-56
Flight phase 11-19, 11-52
Flight plan 1-19, 4-1, 9-17, 15-19, 15-26
Flight plan frequency 3-9
Flight plan import 4-45, 16-39
Flight plan menu 4-25
Flight Stream 4-41
Flight Stream 510
Using to update database 19-13
Flight timers 15-10
FliteCharts 7-16
FliteCharts database 7-16
Fog 12-37
Forward looking terrain avoidance 11-18,
11-33, 11-52
Freezing level 12-8, 12-20, 12-25, 12-50
Frequency
Flight plan 3-9
Monitoring 3-15
Nearest 3-6
New user 3-11
Recent 3-6
Frequency finding 3-5, 3-18
FSS 13-1, 13-17
Fuel planning 15-22
Fuel settings 1-7, 16-26
Function user field 16-34
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
G
GAGAN 16-8
GBT 12-66, 12-74
GDC 74A ii
GDL 69/69A 14-2, 14-3, 14-9, 16-11
GDL 69/69A status 16-11
GDL 69 troubleshooting 14-9
GDL 88 2-5, 16-13
Geo-reference 7-14
Getting started 1-1
Glideslope 3-16
Glossary 19-1
Glove qualification procedure 19-22
GMT 16-16
GPS 19-20
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Index-3
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
GPS altitude ii, 11-5, 11-10
GPS status 16-4
Graphically editing flight plan 4-41, 5-9,
9-43
Graphical Weather 12-73
Ground 2-3
Ground Clutter Suppression 12-56
Ground return 12-38, 12-40, 12-55
Ground speed 11-22, 11-62
GSL 11-5, 11-10
GSR 56 12-57, 14-1, 14-11, 14-20, 16-14
GTN 725 1-1
GTN 750 1-2
GTX 2-1, 2-3, 2-7, 9-8, 10-3, 10-24,
10-25, 12-73, 16-13, 16-39,
16-41
GWX Radar 12-46
H
Hail 12-11, 12-12, 12-37, 12-42, 12-45
HDOP 16-5
Heading 10-5, 10-14, 11-13
Helipad 8-10, 8-11
HFOM 16-5, 16-7
Hold 6-15
Home page 1-5
Horizontal scan 12-34, 12-53, 12-54
Hot spots 7-17, 7-18
HSI 9-48
HSI annunciation 6-19
HTAWS 11-23, 18-5, 18-6
Hurricanes 12-77
I
Icing 12-27, 12-72
Ident 2-2, 3-16
IFR 1-20, 12-21, 12-69, 12-72, 12-83
ILS Approach 2-14, 6-18
ILS CDI Selection 6-27
Imminent Line Impact 11-18, 11-52
Imminent obstacle impact 11-18, 11-47,
11-48, 11-52
Imminent terrain impact 11-18, 11-52
Import user waypoints 8-24
Infra-Red 12-68
Index-4
Insert after 4-9
Insert before 4-7
Intercom 2-18
Intersection 8-12, 9-25, 9-38, 13-4
Invert colors 7-14
Invert flight plan 4-26, 4-33
Iridium 12-57, 14-1, 14-11, 14-19
J
Jeppesen 19-9
Jeppesen database 19-9
K
King autopilot 6-29
Knobs 1-2, 1-5
L
Land data 9-5, 9-27
Legend 12-5, 12-71
Level 11-16, 11-19, 11-52, 12-42
Lighting 16-37
Lightning 9-38, 12-8, 12-23, 12-67,
12-68
Limitations 10-7, 11-9, 12-12, 12-77
LNAV 6-3, 6-19
LNAV+V 6-3, 6-19
LNAV/VNAV Approach 6-3
Load procedures in FPL 4-10
Localizer 3-16, 6-27
Local offset 16-16
Lock activation 16-12
Locking screw 1-3
Low alt 6-3
LP approach 6-3, 6-19
LP +V 6-3, 6-19, 6-21
LPV Approach 6-3, 6-19
L/VNAV 6-19
M
Magnetic variation 16-26, 16-27
Making a phone call 14-12
Manual mag var 16-27
Map 9-1
Symbols 9-50
Map controls 9-42
Map Detail 9-37
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
Map menu 9-3
Map orientation 9-16, 12-61
Map overlay 9-4
Map panning 9-39
MAPR 6-3
Map range 7-17, 9-16, 10-15, 11-13
Map setup 9-13
Map symbols 18-1, 18-6
Map toolbar symbols 18-7
Marker beacon 2-14
Marker Hi Sense 2-15
Mark on target 8-20
Mean Sea Level 11-5
Message 11-17, 11-22, 17-1
METARs 12-8, 12-21, 12-64, 12-68,
12-75, 12-83
MGRS 16-30
Mic selection 2-11
Military grid reference system 16-30
Minimum runway length 1-12
Miscellaneous symbols 18-8
Missed Approach 6-14
MOA 9-38, 18-8
Model descriptions 1-1
Monitor 2-12
Monitoring frequency 3-15
Morse code 3-17
Motion vector 10-19, 10-20, 10-26
Mountains 12-77
Moving map 1-3
MPEL 12-39
MSAS 16-8
MSL 11-10
Music 2-23, 14-1, 14-4
Mute 14-7
N
NACO 7-16
National Weather Service 12-9, 12-72
Nav angle 16-26, 16-27
Navigation map 7-17
Navigation source iii
Nav Radio 1-17
Nav range ring 9-20
190-01007-03 Rev. P
NDB 8-15, 9-25, 9-38, 13-10
Nearest airport 1-12, 1-16, 13-2, 16-18
Nearest airspace 13-12
Nearest ARTCC 13-15
Nearest frequency 3-6
Nearest FSS 13-17
Nearest intersection 13-4
Nearest NDB 13-10
Nearest User Wpt 13-11
Nearest VOR 13-6
Nearest waypoint 13-1
Nearest weather 13-19
Negative climb rate 11-17, 11-20, 11-58
NEXRAD 9-8, 12-8, 12-9, 12-78
Limitations 12-12
NEXRAD Canada 12-13
Next airspace 9-40
Non-directional ownship 18-8
North up 9-16, 12-1
NOTAM 8-10
O
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
OBS 9-49, 19-6
Obstacle data 11-5, 11-10, 11-22
Obstacles 9-5, 9-22, 9-27, 10-9, 11-1,
11-5, 11-8, 11-9, 11-10, 11-11,
18-5
Obstructions 11-8, 11-9
OCN 6-3
On scene mode 10-24
Operating distance 12-39
Overview 1-3
Ownship 18-8
P
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Page menus 9-14, 9-25, 9-31, 9-32
Page user field 16-34
Pairing 16-39, 16-40
Panning 9-39
Parallel track 4-27, 18-8
Parking area 18-2
Passenger address 2-12
Phone call 14-12
Phone volume 14-16
Photocell 16-37
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Foreword
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index-5
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Pilot controls 1-4
PIREP 12-29, 12-70, 12-84
Point obstacle 9-22
Point-to-Point 15-14, 15-23
Position format 16-30
Position reporting 14-19
Position reporting status 14-20
Power 12-78
Power line 9-24
Power-up 7-15, 7-16, 7-19, 10-10, 11-1,
11-11, 11-22, 11-62
Precipitation 12-12, 12-34, 12-36, 12-37,
12-47, 12-49, 12-54, 12-55,
12-66, 12-68
Precipitation intensity levels 12-42, 12-52
Premature descent alerting 11-19, 11-52
Preset 14-8
Preventive Resolution Advisory 10-43,
10-44
Preview flight plan 4-34, 4-39
Procedures 1-20, 6-1
Procedure turn 6-14
Product age 12-7, 12-64
Product description 1-3
Product Support vii
Proximity advisory 10-5
R
Radar 9-12, 10-7, 10-9, 12-9, 12-12,
12-34, 12-46, 12-66, 12-73,
12-77, 12-78
Radar gain 12-52
RAIM 15-11
Rain 12-66
Range ring 9-20, 10-5, 10-15, 10-17,
10-21, 10-26, 10-30, 10-34,
11-13, 12-55
Recent frequency 3-6
Record of Revisions vii
Reduced protection 11-28
Reduced required obstacle clearance
11-18, 11-52
Reduced required terrain clearance 11-18,
11-52
Index-6
Reflectivity 12-9, 12-11, 12-12, 12-37,
12-45, 12-78
Regional NEXRAD 12-80
Register with GFDS 12-62
Registration vii
Remote frequency control 1-18, 3-14
Remove FPL waypoint 4-9
Resolution advisory 10-39, 10-43
Reverse frequency look-up 3-14, 16-17
Revisions vii
RLC 11-18, 11-52
RNAV 6-19
ROC 11-47, 11-48
Roll steering 6-14, 6-26
Rotorcraft traffic page orientation 10-24
Route options 4-32
Runway 16-18
Runway extension 9-25
Runway length 1-12, 16-19
Runways 8-7
Runway surface 1-12, 16-18
Ryan TCAD 10-25
S
SafeTaxi 7-17, 7-19, 9-17, 9-25, 18-2
SafeTaxi symbols 18-2
Satellite telephone 14-11
SBAS 16-8
Scale 9-21, 10-13, 18-3
Scheduled messages 15-34
Search and Rescue (SAR) 4-5, 4-18
Sector scan 12-34, 12-53
Secure Digital (SD) card 1-4
Select approach 6-10
Select arrival 6-7
Select departure 6-4
Selected Altitude 12-71
Self-test 1-7
Sensor data 15-14, 15-22
Serial numbers 14-9, 16-4
Service Class 14-3
Services 12-73, 14-1
Setup 16-15
Shield setup 10-32
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
SIDs 1-20
SIGMET 12-8, 12-18, 12-64, 12-72,
12-75, 12-87
Smart Airspace 9-28
SMS 14-16
Snow 12-12, 12-37
Software version 14-9, 16-3
Sort alpha 4-13
Special Use Airspace 13-1
Speed 11-19, 11-52
Squawk code 2-4
Squelch 1-4, 2-21, 3-2
Standby 2-2
Standby database 16-4
STAR 6-7, 7-16
STARs 1-20
Start-up 1-6
Status 14-20, 16-4, 16-11
Store flight plan 4-26
Storm cell 12-49
Stormscope 9-11, 12-30, 18-9
Stuck microphone 3-14
Sunrise/Sunset 15-12
Support vii
Suppress Visuals 14-15
Surface winds 12-72
Symbols 9-50, 10-4, 10-13, 11-16, 11-42,
18-1, 18-3
System ID 16-4
System power 1-6
System setup values 1-11, 1-12
System status 10-10, 10-16, 11-22,
11-62, 16-3
T
TAF 12-68
Target altitude 15-5
Target offset 15-7
Target waypoint 15-7, 15-8
TAS 10-3, 10-12, 10-13, 15-28
TAWS-A 11-1, 11-40
TAWS-A alerts 11-42, 11-46
TAWS-B 11-1, 11-9, 11-40
TAWS-B alerts 11-10, 11-16
190-01007-03 Rev. P
TAWS failure alert 11-22
TAWS system test 11-11, 11-22, 11-62
TCAD 10-25
TCAD 9900B 10-30
TCAD 9900BX 10-25, 10-34
TCAS 10-4
TCAS II 10-38, 10-40, 10-46
TCAS II alerts 10-41
TCAS II system test 10-45
Telephone 2-24
Telligence 2-26
Telligence Voice Command Qualification
Procedure 19-25
Temperature 16-26
Temporary 8-20
TERM 6-3
Terrain , 9-5, 9-27, 10-9, 11-1, 11-9,
12-38, 11-47, 11-48, 11-49,
12-37, 18-5
Terrain alerts 11-1, 11-20, 11-58
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
11-40
Terrain data 9-7, 11-8, 11-9
Terrain limitations 11-8
Terrain obstacle symbols 11-12, 11-43,
18-5
Terrain proximity ii, 11-5, 18-7
Text 12-73
Text messaging 14-17
TFR 9-25, 12-82, 18-8
Thunderstorm 12-77
Thunderstorms 12-37, 12-41, 12-42,
12-44
Time 12-8, 12-64, 12-75, 16-6, 16-8,
16-16
Time format 1-12
Time until transmit 14-20
TIS 10-3, 10-4, 10-7, 10-9
Topo data 9-5
Topo scale 9-21
Tornadoes 12-44
Tornados 12-77
Touchscreen 1-2, 1-6
Track vector 10-8
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
Index-7
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Charts
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Traffic 9-12, 10-1
Traffic advisory 9-31, 10-3, 10-4, 10-39
Traffic audio 10-28, 10-31
Traffic Pop-Up 10-1
Traffic symbols 10-4, 10-13, 10-18, 18-3
Traffic test 10-2
Transponder 2-1, 10-3, 10-7, 10-9, 10-10,
10-13
Trip planning 15-12
Trip planning - point-to-point 15-12,
15-13, 15-14, 15-17
Troubleshooting 17-1
Turbulence 12-28, 12-34, 12-37, 12-42,
12-72
Turbulence Detection 12-56
U
Under construction 18-2
Units 1-13, 16-26
Universal Transverse Mercator 16-30
User-defined hold 4-16, 5-9
User fields 9-33, 16-32
User frequency 3-11
User waypoint 8-16, 8-19, 9-42, 13-11
UTC 1-12, 16-16
Utilities 15-1
UTM 16-30
V
VCALC 15-3, 15-4
Vector Duration 10-23
Vector motion 10-20
Vector-To-Final 6-17
Version 1-6, 11-1, 11-11
Vertical Calculator 15-3
Vertical scan 12-34, 12-42, 12-43, 12-49
Vertical speed 15-6
VFOM 16-5, 16-7
VFR 2-3, 12-21, 12-69, 12-83
View catalog 4-32
VNV 19-8
Voice alert 10-9
Voice call out 11-17, 11-22, 11-34,
11-35, 11-42, 11-49, 11-61,
16-35
Index-8
Voice command 2-26, 16-42
Voice recognition 2-26
Volume 1-4, 3-2, 14-2, 14-7
VOR 3-16, 8-13, 9-25, 9-38, 11-13, 13-6
VOR-based approach 6-27
VRP 8-14
W
WAAS 16-8
Warnings ii
Warranty i
WATCH 12-36, 12-54
Waypoint information 4-11, 8-1
Waypoint options 4-5
Weather 8-9, 9-32, 12-1, 12-57
Weather alert 12-55
Weather legend 12-5
Weather mapping 12-42
Weather product 12-64, 14-3
Weather radar 9-12, 12-46
Wind 9-1, 12-8, 12-64, 12-68, 12-71,
12-72, 12-75
Winds 15-28
Winds aloft 12-8, 12-26, 12-64, 12-71,
12-75, 12-86
Winds aloft altitude 12-71
Wire obstacle 9-24
WX-500 9-11, 12-30
X
XM 14-2
XM channel categories 14-5
XM radio activation 14-3
XM radio channel presets 14-8
XM radio channels 14-6
XM radio volume 14-7
XM Satellite Radio 14-2
XM troubleshooting 14-9
XM weather 12-2
Z
Zulu 16-16
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide
190-01007-03 Rev. P
© 2011-2017 Garmin Corporation
www.flyGarmin.com
Part Number 190-01007-03 Rev. P
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising